Allowed Publications
Slot System
Featured Buckets
Featured Buckets Admin

Omega-3 fatty acids: Do ‘fish oils’ have a therapeutic role in psychiatry?

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:11
Display Headline
Omega-3 fatty acids: Do ‘fish oils’ have a therapeutic role in psychiatry?

Fourteen clinical trials in the past 3 years have examined the potential of omega-3 fatty acids in treating psychiatric disorders. Preliminary findings in at least 700 patients suggest that:

  • omega-3 fatty acids used as adjuncts or monotherapy appear well-tolerated and safe in psychiatric disorders
  • efficacy data vary by disorder
  • the two marine omega-3 fatty acids may differ in efficacy.

Although we cannot offer specific guidance for using omega-3 fatty acids at this time, we can update you on recent trials of these “fish oils” in depression, bipolar disorder, schizophrenia, and other psychiatric disorders.

Treating depression

Prevalence rates of major depression1,2 and suicidal ideation3 decrease in populations as fish consumption increases. Some studies4,5 have shown omega-3 fatty acid deficiency in erythrocyte membranes and serum of depressed patients. This putative deficiency has been hypothesized to lead to:

  • alterations in membrane fluidity, which affect monoamine (particularly serotonin) neurotransmission6,7
  • an imbalance between omega-6 and omega-3 fatty acids, which affects the inflammatory response system (Box).5-12
  • Nemets et al. 13 Twenty patients with recurrent major depression taking maintenance antidepressants were randomly assigned to adjunctive ethyl-EPA, 2 grams/d, or placebo for 4 weeks. Patients given ethyl-EPA showed significantly greater improvement than the placebo group in depressive symptoms, as measured by the Hamilton Rating Scale for Depression (HRSD).13
  • Peet and Horrobin. 14 Seventy depressed patients taking antidepressants were randomly assigned to adjunctive ethyl-EPA (1, 2, or 4 grams/d) or placebo for 12 weeks. Only the group taking ethyl-EPA, 1 gram/d, showed significantly greater improvement than the placebo group.
  • Su et al. 15 Twenty-eight patients taking antidepressants for major depression were randomly assigned to adjunctive omega-3 fatty acids (4.4 grams/d of EPA plus 2.2 grams/d of DHA) or placebo. After 8 weeks, depressive symptoms improved significantly more in the adjunctive treatment group.
  • Marangell et al. 16 Thirty-six patients with mild to moderate depression (defined as a score of 17 on the 28-item HRSD) were randomly assigned to monotherapy with DHA, 2 grams/d, or placebo. Response rates after 6 weeks were comparable (27.8% with DHA versus 23.5% with placebo).

Box

What are the omega-3 fatty acids?

Polyunsaturated fatty acids contain a hydrocarbon chain with two or more double bonds. They are divided into families based on the location of their first double bond relative to the methyl end carbon—the “omega” carbon. Polyunsaturated fatty acids of interest in psychiatry include:

  • omega-6 fatty acids—arachidonic acid (AA) and linoleic acid (LA)
  • omega-3 fatty acids—eicosapentaenoic acid (EPA), docosahexaenoic acid (DHA), and alpha-linolenic acid (ALA).

Omega-3 and omega-6 fatty acids are called “essential” because they must be obtained from dietary sources. EPA and DHA are derived largely from wild—not farm-raised—fish, including sea bass, mackerel, pike, sardines, salmon, trout, herring, and cod liver oil.8 ALA, a precursor to both EPA and DHA, is derived from plant sources such as flaxseed oil, canola oil, walnuts, and soybean oil.

Polyunsaturated fatty acids, particularly AA and DHA, are important components of the phospholipid bilayer of neuronal cell membranes.They increase the ability of phospholipids to move “fluidly” within the membrane and modulate neurotransmission6,7 and signal transduction pathways9,10 thought to be important in psychiatric disorders. They also are precursors for eicosanoid molecules (such as prostaglandins and leukotrienes) and cytokines. Thus, an imbalance favoring omega-6 fatty acids over omega-3 fatty acids may lead to overproduction of pro-inflammatory cytokines.11

Omega-3 fatty acids are thought to be beneficial in numerous inflammatory and cardiovascular diseases. The American Heart Association’s dietary guidelines include dietary sources of omega-3 fatty acids as part of a healthy diet.12 Unfortunately, typical Western culture diets disproportionately favor foods rich in cholesterol and omega-6 fatty acids instead.

Table 1

Controlled trials of omega-3 fatty acids in treating major depression

Author, year of publicationDuration and dosagesNumber of patientsResults
Adjunctive therapy
Nemets et al, 2002 134 weeks, 2 grams/d of ethyl-EPA in recurrent depression20Significantly greater reduction in mean HRSD scores in ethyl-EPA group(-12.4) compared with placebo group (-1.6)
6 of 10 patients in ethyl-EPA group achieved 50% reduction in HRSD scores, compared with 1 in 10 patients in placebo group
Peet and Horrobin, 2002 1412 weeks, 1, 2, or 4 grams/d of ethyl-EPA70Patients receiving 1 gram/d of ethyl-EPA showed significantly greater reduction in:
  • mean HRSD scores (-9.9) compared with placebo group (-6.1)
  • secondary outcome measures (MADRS and BDI)
Su et al, 2003 158 weeks, 4.4 grams/d of EPA and 2.2 grams/d of DHA28Treatment group showed significantly greater reduction in HRSD scores from baseline at weeks 4, 6, and 8 than placebo group
Monotherapy
Marangell et al, 2003 166 weeks, 2 grams/d of DHA36Little difference between response rates in DHA group (27.8%) and placebo group (23.5%)
BDI: Beck Depression Inventory
DHA: docosahexaenoic acid
EPA: eicosapentaenoic acid
HRSD: Hamilton Rating Scale for Depression
MADRS: Montgomery-Åsberg Depression Rating Scale
 

 

Analysis. For patients with unipolar depression who were treated with omega-3 fatty acids:

  • the most promisingresults have been seen with adjunctive EPA
  • safety and tolerability have been good across studies.

No positive monotherapy studies have been published. Studies are needed to confirm EPA’s efficacy in unipolar depression and to determine the most effective dosage.

Treating bipolar disorder

EPA and DHA have been studied in bipolar disorder (Table 2) because their actions in modulating signal transduction pathways resemble those of lithium and valproate.10,17 Biochemical studies also have shown decreased AA and DHA in erythrocyte membranes of manic patients compared with controls.18

  • Stoll et al. 19 Thirty patients receiving usual treatment for bipolar disorder were randomly assigned to adjunctive omega-3 fatty acids (6.2 grams/d of EPA plus 3.4 grams/d of DHA) or placebo for 4 months. Results were promising; patients receiving the omega-3 fatty acids remained in remission significantly longer than the placebo group.
  • Keck et al. 20,21 On the other hand, two more-recent studies were disappointing. Both were 4-month, randomized, controlled trials in which patients received adjunctive EPA, 6 grams/d, or placebo. One study enrolled 59 patients with acute bipolar depression;20 the other enrolled 62 patients with rapid-cycling bipolar disorder.21 EPA was well-tolerated, but both studies found little difference in effectiveness between EPA and placebo.

Table 2

Controlled trials of adjunctive omega-3 fatty acids in treating bipolar disorder

Author, year of publicationDuration and dosagesNumber of patientsResults
Stoll et al, 1999 194 months, maintenance therapy (6.2 grams/d of EPA and 3.4 grams/d of DHA) in patients with bipolar I or II disorder30Significantly longer remission in omega-3 fatty acid group compared with placebo group
Keck et al, 2003 204 months, 6 grams/d of EPA in patients with acute bipolar depression59No significant difference in mean change from baseline to endpoint between EPA and placebo groups
Keck et al, 2003 214 months, 6 grams/d of EPA in patients with rapid-cycling bipolar disorder62Little difference in mean change from baseline to endpoint between EPA and placebo groups
DHA: docosahexaenoic acid
EPA: eicosapentaenoic acid

Analysis. Further studies are needed to determine omega-3 fatty acids’ usefulness in treating bipolar illness.

Treating schizophrenia

Essential fatty acid deficiency and resulting lipid membrane abnormalities have been hypothesized to play a role in schizophrenia onset.22 Moreover, epidemiologic data suggest an association between high fish consumption and positive outcomes in patients with schizophrenia.23

Open-label trials, adjunctive therapy

  • Mellor et al. 24 Twenty patients receiving antipsychotics for schizophrenia were treated for 6 weeks with 10 grams/d of a fish oil formulation containing 1.7 grams of EPA and 1.1 grams of DHA (Table 3). Psychotic symptoms improved significantly and were correlated with increased omega-3 fatty acid levels in erythrocyte membranes. Tardive dyskinesia also improved significantly, as measured by Abnormal Involuntary Movement Scale (AIMS) scores.
  • Arvindakshan et al. 25 Thirty-three patients receiving antipsychotics for schizophrenia were given omega-3 fatty acids (360 mg/d of EPA and 240 mg/d of DHA) plus antioxidants (800 IU vitamin E and 1,000 IU vitamin C) for 4 months. Symptom and quality-of-life measures improved significantly, and clinical improvement was retained after 4 months of supplement washout.

Table 3

Clinical trials of omega-3 fatty acids in treating schizophrenia

Authors, year of publicationDuration and dosagesNumber of patientsResults
Open-label trials, adjunctive therapy
Mellor et al, 1995 246 weeks, 10 grams/d of fish oil (1.7 grams EPA and 1.1 grams DHA)20Significant improvement on PANSS and AIMS scores from baseline to endpoint
Arvindakshan et al, 2003 254 months, 360 mg/d of EPA and 240 mg/d of DHA, plus antioxidants (1,000 IU of vitamin C and 800 IU of vitamin E)33Significant improvements on total BPRS, PANSS, and Henrich’s Quality of Life Scale scores; improvements sustained after 4 months of supplementation washout
Controlled trials, adjunctive therapy
Peet et al, 2001 263 months, 2 grams/d of EPA or DHA45Greater improvement in total PANSS scores with EPA compared with DHA and placebo; EPA more effective than DHA in treating positive symptoms
Fenton et al, 2001 2716 weeks, 3 grams/d of ethyl-EPA in patients with schizophrenia or schizoaffective disorder87No difference between ethyl-EPA and placebo groups in positive or negative symptoms, cognition, mood, or EPS
Peet et al, 2002 2812 weeks, 1, 2, or 4 grams/d of ethyl-EPA with typical and atypical antipsychotics, including clozapine115Significantly greater improvement in mean total PANSS scores in clozapine-treated patients taking ethyl-EPA, 2 grams/d, compared with placebo; no difference between ethyl-EPAand placebo in patients taking typical or atypical antipsychotics
Emsley et al, 2002 2912 weeks, 3 grams/d of ethyl-EPA40Significantly greater reduction in total PANSS and EPS Rating Scale dyskinesia scores in ethyl-EPA group compared with placebo
Controlled trial, monotherapy
Peet et al, 2001 263 months, 2 grams/d of EPA26EPA-treated patients had significantly lower PANSS scores at endpoint, compared with placebo; significantly more patients on placebo required antipsychotics (12 of 12) than did those on EPA (8 of 14)
AIMS: Abnormal Involuntary Movement Scale
BPRS: Brief Psychiatric Rating Scale
DHA: docosahexaenoic acid
EPA: eicosapentaenoic acid
EPS: extrapyramidal symptoms
PANSS: Positive and Negative Syndrome Scale
 

 

Controlled trials, adjunctive therapy

  • Peet et al. 26 In a 3-month study, 45 patients with schizophrenia were randomly assigned to adjunctive EPA or DHA (2 grams/d) or placebo. Those receiving EPA showed significantly greater improvement as measured by the Positive and Negative Syndrome Scale (PANSS), compared with DHA or placebo.
  • Fenton et al. 27 In a 16-week study, 87 patients with schizophrenia or schizoaffective disorder were randomly assigned to adjunctive ethyl-EPA, 3 grams/d, or placebo. Little difference was noted in outcome measures of psychotic symptoms, mood, cognition, or extrapyramidal symptoms.
  • Peet et al. 28 In a 12-week study. 115 patients with schizophrenia receiving typical antipsychotics, clozapine, or other atypical antipsychotics were randomly assigned to adjunctive ethyl-EPA (1, 2, or 4 grams/d) or placebo. Those taking clozapine improved significantly more with 2 grams/d of ethyl-EPA compared with patients receiving placebo. Little difference was noted between ethyl-EPA and placebo among patients taking typical or atypical antipsychotics.
  • Emsley et al. 29 Forty patients with schizophrenia were randomly assigned to adjunctive ethyl-EPA, 3 grams/d, or placebo across 12 weeks. The ethyl-EPA group showed greater improvement in total PANSS scores and reduced dyskinesia, compared with placebo. Further analysis suggested, however, that the reduced dyskinesia scores at least partially accounted for the PANSS changes.

Controlled trial, monotherapy

  • Peet et al. 26 Twenty-six patients with schizophrenia were randomly assigned to EPA, 2 grams/d, or placebo. After 3 months, those receiving EPA had significantly lower PANSS scores, and fewer (8 of 14) required antipsychotics than did those receiving placebo (12 of 12).

Analysis. Adjunctive ethyl-EPA (and perhaps combinations of EPA and DHA) may help patients with schizophrenia who are taking typical or atypical antipsychotics. EPA monotherapy also may be useful. Data are limited, however, and studies are needed before such use could be recommended.

Treating other disorders

Postpartum depression. The developing fetus and neonate require DHA from maternal stores for neurologic development. Maternal DHA depletion30 has been hypothesized to put mothers at risk for postpartum depression.31 An ecological study with data from 23 countries found that higher concentrations of DHA in maternal breast milk and greater seafood consumption predicted lower postpartum depression rates.32

In a randomized, controlled trial, giving DHA, 200 mg/d, to breastfeeding women during the first 4 months postpartum increased maternal plasma phospholipid content by 8%, compared with a 31% decrease in women given placebo.33

Data from randomized, controlled trials are needed to assess whether omega-3 fatty acid supplementation during pregnancy and the postpartum protects against postpartum depression.

Borderline personality disorder. In an 8-week controlled trial, Zanarini and Frankenburg34 randomly assigned 20 subjects with borderline personality disorder to monotherapy with ethyl-EPA, 1 gram/d, or placebo. Depressive symptoms improved and aggression decreased significantly in the ethyl-EPA group, suggesting the need for further research.

ADHD. Low DHA levels have been found in serum35 and erythrocytes36 of hyperactive children when compared with controls. Limited data in boys ages 6 to 12 also suggest an inverse relationship between plasma omega-3 fatty acids and behavior problems, as measured by the Connors’ Rating Scale.37

More research is needed into omega-3 fatty acids’ potential role in treating attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), even though results of one controlled trial of adjunctive DHA in ADHD were disappointing.38

Dementia. Some large, prospective, epidemiologic studies39-41—but not others42—found an inverse relationship between dietary intake of omega-3 fatty acids and risk of cognitive decline or dementia.

Related resources

  • USDA Nutrient Data Laboratory. http://www.nalusda.gov/fnic/foodcomp (accessed Dec. 1, 2003)
  • Stoll AL. The omega-3 connection: the groundbreaking omega-3 antidepression diet and brain program. New York: Simon and Schuster, 2001.

Drug brand names

  • Clozapine • Clozaril

Disclosure

The authors report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References

1. Hibbeln JR. Fish consumption and major depression. Lancet 1998;351(9110):1213.-

2. Tanskanen A, Hibbeln JR, Tuomilehto J, et al. Fish consumption and depressive symptoms in the general population in Finland. Psychiatr Serv 2001;52(4):529-31.

3. Tanskanen A, Hibelln JR, Hintikka J, et al. Fish consumption, depression, and suicidality in a general population. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2001;58(5):512-3.

4. Edwards R, Peet M, Shay J, Horrobin D. Omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acid levels in the diet and in red blood cell membranes of depressed patients. J Affect Disord 1998;48(2-3):149-55.

5. Maes M, Christophe A, Delanghe J, et al. Lowered omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids in serum phospholipids and cholesterol esters of depressed patients. Psychiatry Res 1999;85(3):275-91.

6. Lundbaek JA, Andersen OS. Lysophospholipids modulate channel function by altering the mechanical properties of lipid bilayers. J Gen Physiol 1994;104(4):645-73.

7. Delion S, Chalon S, Guilloteau D, et al. Alpha-linolenic acid dietary deficiency alters age-related changes of dopaminergic and serotonergic neurotransmission in the rat frontal cortex. J Neurochem 1996;66(4):1582-91.

8. Passi S, Cataudella S, Di Marco P, et al. Fatty acid composition and antioxidant levels in muscle tissue of different Mediterranean marine species of fish and shellfish. J Agric Food Chem 2002;50(25):7314-22.

9. Hudson CJ, Young LT, Li PP, Warsh JJ. CNS signal transduction in the pathophysiology and pharmacology of affective disorders and schizophrenia. Synapse 1993;13(3):278-93.

10. Sperling RI, Benincaso AI, Knoell CT, et al. Dietary omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids inhibit phosphoinositide formation and chemotaxis in neutrophils. J Clin Invest 1993;91(2):651-60.

11. Endres S. Messengers and mediators: interactions among lipids, eicosanoids and cytokines. Am J Clin Nutr 1993;57(5 suppl):798S-800S.

12. Kris-Etherton PM, Harris WS, Appel LJ. Fish consumption, fish oil, omega-3 fatty acids, and cardiovascular disease. Arterioscler Thromb Vasc Biol 2003;23(2):e20-e30.

13. Nemets B, Stahl Z, Belmaker RH. Addition of omega-3 fatty acid to maintenance medication treatment for recurrent unipolar depressive disorder. Am J Psychiatry 2002;159(3):477-9.

14. Peet M, Horrobin DF. A dose-ranging study of the effects of ethyl-eicosapentaenoate in patients with ongoing depression despite apparently adequate treatment with standard drugs. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2002;59(10):913-9.

15. Su K-P, Huang S-Y, Chiu C-C, Shen WW. Omega-3 fatty acids in major depressive disorder: a preliminary double-blind, placebo-con-trolled trial. Eur Neuropsychopharmacol 2003;13(4):267-71.

16. Marangell LB, Martinez JM, Zboyan HA, et al. A double-blind, placebo-controlled study of the omega-3 fatty acid docosahexaenoic acid in the treatment of major depression. Am J Psychiatry 2003;160(5):996-8.

17. Stoll AL, Severus WE. Mood stabilizers: shared mechanisms of action at postsynaptic signal transduction and kindling processes. Harv Rev Psychiatry 1996;4(2):77-89.

18. Chiu CC, Huang SY, Su KP, et al. Polyunsaturated fatty acid deficit in patients with bipolar disorder. Eur Neuropsychopharmacol 2003;13(2):99-103.

19. Stoll AL, Severus WE, Freeman MP, et al. Omega-3 fatty acids in bipolar disorder: a preliminary double-blind, placebo-controlled trial. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1999;56(5):407-12.

20. Keck PE, Jr, McElroy SL, Freeman MP, et al. Randomized, placebo-controlled trial of eicosapentaenoic acid in bipolar depression. Bipolar Disord 2003;5(suppl 1):58.-

21. Keck PE, Jr, McElroy SL, Freeman MP, et al. Randomized, placebo-controlled trial of eicosapentaenoic acid in rapid cycling bipolar disorder. Bipolar Disord 2003;5(suppl 1):58.-

22. Horrobin DF. The membrane phospholipid hypothesis as a biochemical basis for the neurodevelopmental concept of schizophrenia. Schizophr Res 1998;30(3):193-208.

23. Christensen O, Christensen E. Fat consumption and schizophrenia. Acta Psychiatr Scand 1988;78(5):587-591

24. Mellor JE, Laugharne JD, Peet M. Schizophrenic symptoms and dietary intake of n-3 fatty acids. Schizophr Res 1995;18(1):85-6.

25. Arvindakshan M, Ghate M, Ranjekar PK, et al. Supplementation with a combination of omega-3 fatty acids and antioxidants (vitamins E and C) improves the outcome of schizophrenia. Schizophr Res 2003;62(3):195-204.

26. Peet M, Brind J, Ramchand CN, et al. Two double-blind placebo-controlled pilot studies of eicosapentaenoic acid in the treatment of schizophrenia. Schizophr Res 2001;49(3):243-51.

27. Fenton WS, Dickerson F, Boronow J, et al. A placebo-controlled trial of omega-3 fatty acid (ethyl eicosapentaenoic acid) supplementation for residual symptoms and cognitive impairment in schizophrenia. Am J Psychiatry 2001;158(12):2071-4.

28. Peet M, Horrobin DF. E-E Multicentre Study Group. A dose-ranging exploratory study of the effects of ethyl-eicosapentaenoate in patients with persistent schizophrenic symptoms. J Psychiatr Res 2002;36(1):7-18.

29. Emsley R, Myburgh C, Oosthuizen P, Van Rensburg SJ. Randomized, placebo-controlled study of ethyl-eicosapentaenoic acid as supplemental treatment in schizophrenia. Am J Psychiatry 2002;159(9):1596-8.

30. Al MD, van Houwelingen AC, Kester AD, et al. Maternal essential fatty acid patterns during normal pregnancy and their relationship to neonatal essential fatty acid status. Br J Nutr 1995;74(1):55-68.

31. Hibbeln JR, Salem N, Jr. Dietary polyunsaturated fatty acids and depression: when cholesterol does not satisfy. Am J Clin Nutr 1995;62(1):1-9.

32. Hibbeln JR. Seafood consumption, the DHA content of mothers’ milk and prevalence rates of postpartum depression: a cross-national, ecological analysis. J Affect Disord 2002;69(1-3):15-29.

33. Llorente AM, Jensen CL, Voigt RG, et al. Effect of maternal docosahexaenoic acid supplementation on postpartum depression and information processing. Am J Obstet Gynecol 2003;188(5):1348-53.

34. Zanarini MC, Frankenburg FR. Omega-3 fatty acid treatment of women with borderline personality disorder: a double-blind, placebo-controlled pilot study. Am J Psychiatry 2003;160(1):167-9.

35. Mitchell EA, Aman MG, Turbott SH, Manku M. Clinical characteristics and serum essential fatty acid levels in hyperactive children. Clin Pediatr 1987;26(8):406-11.

36. Stevens LJ, Zentall SS, Deck JL, et al. Essential fatty acid metabolism in boys with attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. Am J Clin Nutr 1995;62(4):761-8.

37. Stevens LJ, Zentall SS, Abate ML, et al. Omega-3 fatty acids in boys with behavior, learning, and health problems. Physiol Behav 1996;59(4-5):915-20.

38. Voigt RG, Llorente AM, Jensen CL, et al. A randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial of docosahexaenoic acid supplementation in children with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder. J Pediatr 2001;139(2):189-96.

39. Kalmijn S, Launer LJ, Ott A, et al. Dietary fat intake and the risk of incident dementia in the Rotterdam Study. Ann Neurol 1997;42(5):776-82.

40. Barberger-Gateau P, Letenneur L, Deschamps V, et al. Fish, meat, and risk of dementia: cohort study. BMJ 2002;325(7370):932-3.

41. Morris MC, Evans DA, Bienias JL, et al. Consumption of fish and n-3 fatty acids and risk of incident Alzheimer disease. Arch Neurol 2003;60(7):940-6.

42. Engelhart MJ, Geerlings MI, Ruitenberg A, et al. Diet and risk of dementia: does fat matter? The Rotterdam Study. Neurology 2002;59(12):1915-21.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

James M. Martinez, MD
Assistant professor of psychiatry Associate director, Mood Disorders Program

Lauren B. Marangell, MD
Brown Foundation Professor of the Psychopharmacology of Mood Disorders

Department of psychiatry Baylor College of Medicine, Houston, TX South Central MIRECC, Department of Veterans Affairs

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 03(01)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
25-52
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

James M. Martinez, MD
Assistant professor of psychiatry Associate director, Mood Disorders Program

Lauren B. Marangell, MD
Brown Foundation Professor of the Psychopharmacology of Mood Disorders

Department of psychiatry Baylor College of Medicine, Houston, TX South Central MIRECC, Department of Veterans Affairs

Author and Disclosure Information

James M. Martinez, MD
Assistant professor of psychiatry Associate director, Mood Disorders Program

Lauren B. Marangell, MD
Brown Foundation Professor of the Psychopharmacology of Mood Disorders

Department of psychiatry Baylor College of Medicine, Houston, TX South Central MIRECC, Department of Veterans Affairs

Article PDF
Article PDF

Fourteen clinical trials in the past 3 years have examined the potential of omega-3 fatty acids in treating psychiatric disorders. Preliminary findings in at least 700 patients suggest that:

  • omega-3 fatty acids used as adjuncts or monotherapy appear well-tolerated and safe in psychiatric disorders
  • efficacy data vary by disorder
  • the two marine omega-3 fatty acids may differ in efficacy.

Although we cannot offer specific guidance for using omega-3 fatty acids at this time, we can update you on recent trials of these “fish oils” in depression, bipolar disorder, schizophrenia, and other psychiatric disorders.

Treating depression

Prevalence rates of major depression1,2 and suicidal ideation3 decrease in populations as fish consumption increases. Some studies4,5 have shown omega-3 fatty acid deficiency in erythrocyte membranes and serum of depressed patients. This putative deficiency has been hypothesized to lead to:

  • alterations in membrane fluidity, which affect monoamine (particularly serotonin) neurotransmission6,7
  • an imbalance between omega-6 and omega-3 fatty acids, which affects the inflammatory response system (Box).5-12
  • Nemets et al. 13 Twenty patients with recurrent major depression taking maintenance antidepressants were randomly assigned to adjunctive ethyl-EPA, 2 grams/d, or placebo for 4 weeks. Patients given ethyl-EPA showed significantly greater improvement than the placebo group in depressive symptoms, as measured by the Hamilton Rating Scale for Depression (HRSD).13
  • Peet and Horrobin. 14 Seventy depressed patients taking antidepressants were randomly assigned to adjunctive ethyl-EPA (1, 2, or 4 grams/d) or placebo for 12 weeks. Only the group taking ethyl-EPA, 1 gram/d, showed significantly greater improvement than the placebo group.
  • Su et al. 15 Twenty-eight patients taking antidepressants for major depression were randomly assigned to adjunctive omega-3 fatty acids (4.4 grams/d of EPA plus 2.2 grams/d of DHA) or placebo. After 8 weeks, depressive symptoms improved significantly more in the adjunctive treatment group.
  • Marangell et al. 16 Thirty-six patients with mild to moderate depression (defined as a score of 17 on the 28-item HRSD) were randomly assigned to monotherapy with DHA, 2 grams/d, or placebo. Response rates after 6 weeks were comparable (27.8% with DHA versus 23.5% with placebo).

Box

What are the omega-3 fatty acids?

Polyunsaturated fatty acids contain a hydrocarbon chain with two or more double bonds. They are divided into families based on the location of their first double bond relative to the methyl end carbon—the “omega” carbon. Polyunsaturated fatty acids of interest in psychiatry include:

  • omega-6 fatty acids—arachidonic acid (AA) and linoleic acid (LA)
  • omega-3 fatty acids—eicosapentaenoic acid (EPA), docosahexaenoic acid (DHA), and alpha-linolenic acid (ALA).

Omega-3 and omega-6 fatty acids are called “essential” because they must be obtained from dietary sources. EPA and DHA are derived largely from wild—not farm-raised—fish, including sea bass, mackerel, pike, sardines, salmon, trout, herring, and cod liver oil.8 ALA, a precursor to both EPA and DHA, is derived from plant sources such as flaxseed oil, canola oil, walnuts, and soybean oil.

Polyunsaturated fatty acids, particularly AA and DHA, are important components of the phospholipid bilayer of neuronal cell membranes.They increase the ability of phospholipids to move “fluidly” within the membrane and modulate neurotransmission6,7 and signal transduction pathways9,10 thought to be important in psychiatric disorders. They also are precursors for eicosanoid molecules (such as prostaglandins and leukotrienes) and cytokines. Thus, an imbalance favoring omega-6 fatty acids over omega-3 fatty acids may lead to overproduction of pro-inflammatory cytokines.11

Omega-3 fatty acids are thought to be beneficial in numerous inflammatory and cardiovascular diseases. The American Heart Association’s dietary guidelines include dietary sources of omega-3 fatty acids as part of a healthy diet.12 Unfortunately, typical Western culture diets disproportionately favor foods rich in cholesterol and omega-6 fatty acids instead.

Table 1

Controlled trials of omega-3 fatty acids in treating major depression

Author, year of publicationDuration and dosagesNumber of patientsResults
Adjunctive therapy
Nemets et al, 2002 134 weeks, 2 grams/d of ethyl-EPA in recurrent depression20Significantly greater reduction in mean HRSD scores in ethyl-EPA group(-12.4) compared with placebo group (-1.6)
6 of 10 patients in ethyl-EPA group achieved 50% reduction in HRSD scores, compared with 1 in 10 patients in placebo group
Peet and Horrobin, 2002 1412 weeks, 1, 2, or 4 grams/d of ethyl-EPA70Patients receiving 1 gram/d of ethyl-EPA showed significantly greater reduction in:
  • mean HRSD scores (-9.9) compared with placebo group (-6.1)
  • secondary outcome measures (MADRS and BDI)
Su et al, 2003 158 weeks, 4.4 grams/d of EPA and 2.2 grams/d of DHA28Treatment group showed significantly greater reduction in HRSD scores from baseline at weeks 4, 6, and 8 than placebo group
Monotherapy
Marangell et al, 2003 166 weeks, 2 grams/d of DHA36Little difference between response rates in DHA group (27.8%) and placebo group (23.5%)
BDI: Beck Depression Inventory
DHA: docosahexaenoic acid
EPA: eicosapentaenoic acid
HRSD: Hamilton Rating Scale for Depression
MADRS: Montgomery-Åsberg Depression Rating Scale
 

 

Analysis. For patients with unipolar depression who were treated with omega-3 fatty acids:

  • the most promisingresults have been seen with adjunctive EPA
  • safety and tolerability have been good across studies.

No positive monotherapy studies have been published. Studies are needed to confirm EPA’s efficacy in unipolar depression and to determine the most effective dosage.

Treating bipolar disorder

EPA and DHA have been studied in bipolar disorder (Table 2) because their actions in modulating signal transduction pathways resemble those of lithium and valproate.10,17 Biochemical studies also have shown decreased AA and DHA in erythrocyte membranes of manic patients compared with controls.18

  • Stoll et al. 19 Thirty patients receiving usual treatment for bipolar disorder were randomly assigned to adjunctive omega-3 fatty acids (6.2 grams/d of EPA plus 3.4 grams/d of DHA) or placebo for 4 months. Results were promising; patients receiving the omega-3 fatty acids remained in remission significantly longer than the placebo group.
  • Keck et al. 20,21 On the other hand, two more-recent studies were disappointing. Both were 4-month, randomized, controlled trials in which patients received adjunctive EPA, 6 grams/d, or placebo. One study enrolled 59 patients with acute bipolar depression;20 the other enrolled 62 patients with rapid-cycling bipolar disorder.21 EPA was well-tolerated, but both studies found little difference in effectiveness between EPA and placebo.

Table 2

Controlled trials of adjunctive omega-3 fatty acids in treating bipolar disorder

Author, year of publicationDuration and dosagesNumber of patientsResults
Stoll et al, 1999 194 months, maintenance therapy (6.2 grams/d of EPA and 3.4 grams/d of DHA) in patients with bipolar I or II disorder30Significantly longer remission in omega-3 fatty acid group compared with placebo group
Keck et al, 2003 204 months, 6 grams/d of EPA in patients with acute bipolar depression59No significant difference in mean change from baseline to endpoint between EPA and placebo groups
Keck et al, 2003 214 months, 6 grams/d of EPA in patients with rapid-cycling bipolar disorder62Little difference in mean change from baseline to endpoint between EPA and placebo groups
DHA: docosahexaenoic acid
EPA: eicosapentaenoic acid

Analysis. Further studies are needed to determine omega-3 fatty acids’ usefulness in treating bipolar illness.

Treating schizophrenia

Essential fatty acid deficiency and resulting lipid membrane abnormalities have been hypothesized to play a role in schizophrenia onset.22 Moreover, epidemiologic data suggest an association between high fish consumption and positive outcomes in patients with schizophrenia.23

Open-label trials, adjunctive therapy

  • Mellor et al. 24 Twenty patients receiving antipsychotics for schizophrenia were treated for 6 weeks with 10 grams/d of a fish oil formulation containing 1.7 grams of EPA and 1.1 grams of DHA (Table 3). Psychotic symptoms improved significantly and were correlated with increased omega-3 fatty acid levels in erythrocyte membranes. Tardive dyskinesia also improved significantly, as measured by Abnormal Involuntary Movement Scale (AIMS) scores.
  • Arvindakshan et al. 25 Thirty-three patients receiving antipsychotics for schizophrenia were given omega-3 fatty acids (360 mg/d of EPA and 240 mg/d of DHA) plus antioxidants (800 IU vitamin E and 1,000 IU vitamin C) for 4 months. Symptom and quality-of-life measures improved significantly, and clinical improvement was retained after 4 months of supplement washout.

Table 3

Clinical trials of omega-3 fatty acids in treating schizophrenia

Authors, year of publicationDuration and dosagesNumber of patientsResults
Open-label trials, adjunctive therapy
Mellor et al, 1995 246 weeks, 10 grams/d of fish oil (1.7 grams EPA and 1.1 grams DHA)20Significant improvement on PANSS and AIMS scores from baseline to endpoint
Arvindakshan et al, 2003 254 months, 360 mg/d of EPA and 240 mg/d of DHA, plus antioxidants (1,000 IU of vitamin C and 800 IU of vitamin E)33Significant improvements on total BPRS, PANSS, and Henrich’s Quality of Life Scale scores; improvements sustained after 4 months of supplementation washout
Controlled trials, adjunctive therapy
Peet et al, 2001 263 months, 2 grams/d of EPA or DHA45Greater improvement in total PANSS scores with EPA compared with DHA and placebo; EPA more effective than DHA in treating positive symptoms
Fenton et al, 2001 2716 weeks, 3 grams/d of ethyl-EPA in patients with schizophrenia or schizoaffective disorder87No difference between ethyl-EPA and placebo groups in positive or negative symptoms, cognition, mood, or EPS
Peet et al, 2002 2812 weeks, 1, 2, or 4 grams/d of ethyl-EPA with typical and atypical antipsychotics, including clozapine115Significantly greater improvement in mean total PANSS scores in clozapine-treated patients taking ethyl-EPA, 2 grams/d, compared with placebo; no difference between ethyl-EPAand placebo in patients taking typical or atypical antipsychotics
Emsley et al, 2002 2912 weeks, 3 grams/d of ethyl-EPA40Significantly greater reduction in total PANSS and EPS Rating Scale dyskinesia scores in ethyl-EPA group compared with placebo
Controlled trial, monotherapy
Peet et al, 2001 263 months, 2 grams/d of EPA26EPA-treated patients had significantly lower PANSS scores at endpoint, compared with placebo; significantly more patients on placebo required antipsychotics (12 of 12) than did those on EPA (8 of 14)
AIMS: Abnormal Involuntary Movement Scale
BPRS: Brief Psychiatric Rating Scale
DHA: docosahexaenoic acid
EPA: eicosapentaenoic acid
EPS: extrapyramidal symptoms
PANSS: Positive and Negative Syndrome Scale
 

 

Controlled trials, adjunctive therapy

  • Peet et al. 26 In a 3-month study, 45 patients with schizophrenia were randomly assigned to adjunctive EPA or DHA (2 grams/d) or placebo. Those receiving EPA showed significantly greater improvement as measured by the Positive and Negative Syndrome Scale (PANSS), compared with DHA or placebo.
  • Fenton et al. 27 In a 16-week study, 87 patients with schizophrenia or schizoaffective disorder were randomly assigned to adjunctive ethyl-EPA, 3 grams/d, or placebo. Little difference was noted in outcome measures of psychotic symptoms, mood, cognition, or extrapyramidal symptoms.
  • Peet et al. 28 In a 12-week study. 115 patients with schizophrenia receiving typical antipsychotics, clozapine, or other atypical antipsychotics were randomly assigned to adjunctive ethyl-EPA (1, 2, or 4 grams/d) or placebo. Those taking clozapine improved significantly more with 2 grams/d of ethyl-EPA compared with patients receiving placebo. Little difference was noted between ethyl-EPA and placebo among patients taking typical or atypical antipsychotics.
  • Emsley et al. 29 Forty patients with schizophrenia were randomly assigned to adjunctive ethyl-EPA, 3 grams/d, or placebo across 12 weeks. The ethyl-EPA group showed greater improvement in total PANSS scores and reduced dyskinesia, compared with placebo. Further analysis suggested, however, that the reduced dyskinesia scores at least partially accounted for the PANSS changes.

Controlled trial, monotherapy

  • Peet et al. 26 Twenty-six patients with schizophrenia were randomly assigned to EPA, 2 grams/d, or placebo. After 3 months, those receiving EPA had significantly lower PANSS scores, and fewer (8 of 14) required antipsychotics than did those receiving placebo (12 of 12).

Analysis. Adjunctive ethyl-EPA (and perhaps combinations of EPA and DHA) may help patients with schizophrenia who are taking typical or atypical antipsychotics. EPA monotherapy also may be useful. Data are limited, however, and studies are needed before such use could be recommended.

Treating other disorders

Postpartum depression. The developing fetus and neonate require DHA from maternal stores for neurologic development. Maternal DHA depletion30 has been hypothesized to put mothers at risk for postpartum depression.31 An ecological study with data from 23 countries found that higher concentrations of DHA in maternal breast milk and greater seafood consumption predicted lower postpartum depression rates.32

In a randomized, controlled trial, giving DHA, 200 mg/d, to breastfeeding women during the first 4 months postpartum increased maternal plasma phospholipid content by 8%, compared with a 31% decrease in women given placebo.33

Data from randomized, controlled trials are needed to assess whether omega-3 fatty acid supplementation during pregnancy and the postpartum protects against postpartum depression.

Borderline personality disorder. In an 8-week controlled trial, Zanarini and Frankenburg34 randomly assigned 20 subjects with borderline personality disorder to monotherapy with ethyl-EPA, 1 gram/d, or placebo. Depressive symptoms improved and aggression decreased significantly in the ethyl-EPA group, suggesting the need for further research.

ADHD. Low DHA levels have been found in serum35 and erythrocytes36 of hyperactive children when compared with controls. Limited data in boys ages 6 to 12 also suggest an inverse relationship between plasma omega-3 fatty acids and behavior problems, as measured by the Connors’ Rating Scale.37

More research is needed into omega-3 fatty acids’ potential role in treating attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), even though results of one controlled trial of adjunctive DHA in ADHD were disappointing.38

Dementia. Some large, prospective, epidemiologic studies39-41—but not others42—found an inverse relationship between dietary intake of omega-3 fatty acids and risk of cognitive decline or dementia.

Related resources

  • USDA Nutrient Data Laboratory. http://www.nalusda.gov/fnic/foodcomp (accessed Dec. 1, 2003)
  • Stoll AL. The omega-3 connection: the groundbreaking omega-3 antidepression diet and brain program. New York: Simon and Schuster, 2001.

Drug brand names

  • Clozapine • Clozaril

Disclosure

The authors report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Fourteen clinical trials in the past 3 years have examined the potential of omega-3 fatty acids in treating psychiatric disorders. Preliminary findings in at least 700 patients suggest that:

  • omega-3 fatty acids used as adjuncts or monotherapy appear well-tolerated and safe in psychiatric disorders
  • efficacy data vary by disorder
  • the two marine omega-3 fatty acids may differ in efficacy.

Although we cannot offer specific guidance for using omega-3 fatty acids at this time, we can update you on recent trials of these “fish oils” in depression, bipolar disorder, schizophrenia, and other psychiatric disorders.

Treating depression

Prevalence rates of major depression1,2 and suicidal ideation3 decrease in populations as fish consumption increases. Some studies4,5 have shown omega-3 fatty acid deficiency in erythrocyte membranes and serum of depressed patients. This putative deficiency has been hypothesized to lead to:

  • alterations in membrane fluidity, which affect monoamine (particularly serotonin) neurotransmission6,7
  • an imbalance between omega-6 and omega-3 fatty acids, which affects the inflammatory response system (Box).5-12
  • Nemets et al. 13 Twenty patients with recurrent major depression taking maintenance antidepressants were randomly assigned to adjunctive ethyl-EPA, 2 grams/d, or placebo for 4 weeks. Patients given ethyl-EPA showed significantly greater improvement than the placebo group in depressive symptoms, as measured by the Hamilton Rating Scale for Depression (HRSD).13
  • Peet and Horrobin. 14 Seventy depressed patients taking antidepressants were randomly assigned to adjunctive ethyl-EPA (1, 2, or 4 grams/d) or placebo for 12 weeks. Only the group taking ethyl-EPA, 1 gram/d, showed significantly greater improvement than the placebo group.
  • Su et al. 15 Twenty-eight patients taking antidepressants for major depression were randomly assigned to adjunctive omega-3 fatty acids (4.4 grams/d of EPA plus 2.2 grams/d of DHA) or placebo. After 8 weeks, depressive symptoms improved significantly more in the adjunctive treatment group.
  • Marangell et al. 16 Thirty-six patients with mild to moderate depression (defined as a score of 17 on the 28-item HRSD) were randomly assigned to monotherapy with DHA, 2 grams/d, or placebo. Response rates after 6 weeks were comparable (27.8% with DHA versus 23.5% with placebo).

Box

What are the omega-3 fatty acids?

Polyunsaturated fatty acids contain a hydrocarbon chain with two or more double bonds. They are divided into families based on the location of their first double bond relative to the methyl end carbon—the “omega” carbon. Polyunsaturated fatty acids of interest in psychiatry include:

  • omega-6 fatty acids—arachidonic acid (AA) and linoleic acid (LA)
  • omega-3 fatty acids—eicosapentaenoic acid (EPA), docosahexaenoic acid (DHA), and alpha-linolenic acid (ALA).

Omega-3 and omega-6 fatty acids are called “essential” because they must be obtained from dietary sources. EPA and DHA are derived largely from wild—not farm-raised—fish, including sea bass, mackerel, pike, sardines, salmon, trout, herring, and cod liver oil.8 ALA, a precursor to both EPA and DHA, is derived from plant sources such as flaxseed oil, canola oil, walnuts, and soybean oil.

Polyunsaturated fatty acids, particularly AA and DHA, are important components of the phospholipid bilayer of neuronal cell membranes.They increase the ability of phospholipids to move “fluidly” within the membrane and modulate neurotransmission6,7 and signal transduction pathways9,10 thought to be important in psychiatric disorders. They also are precursors for eicosanoid molecules (such as prostaglandins and leukotrienes) and cytokines. Thus, an imbalance favoring omega-6 fatty acids over omega-3 fatty acids may lead to overproduction of pro-inflammatory cytokines.11

Omega-3 fatty acids are thought to be beneficial in numerous inflammatory and cardiovascular diseases. The American Heart Association’s dietary guidelines include dietary sources of omega-3 fatty acids as part of a healthy diet.12 Unfortunately, typical Western culture diets disproportionately favor foods rich in cholesterol and omega-6 fatty acids instead.

Table 1

Controlled trials of omega-3 fatty acids in treating major depression

Author, year of publicationDuration and dosagesNumber of patientsResults
Adjunctive therapy
Nemets et al, 2002 134 weeks, 2 grams/d of ethyl-EPA in recurrent depression20Significantly greater reduction in mean HRSD scores in ethyl-EPA group(-12.4) compared with placebo group (-1.6)
6 of 10 patients in ethyl-EPA group achieved 50% reduction in HRSD scores, compared with 1 in 10 patients in placebo group
Peet and Horrobin, 2002 1412 weeks, 1, 2, or 4 grams/d of ethyl-EPA70Patients receiving 1 gram/d of ethyl-EPA showed significantly greater reduction in:
  • mean HRSD scores (-9.9) compared with placebo group (-6.1)
  • secondary outcome measures (MADRS and BDI)
Su et al, 2003 158 weeks, 4.4 grams/d of EPA and 2.2 grams/d of DHA28Treatment group showed significantly greater reduction in HRSD scores from baseline at weeks 4, 6, and 8 than placebo group
Monotherapy
Marangell et al, 2003 166 weeks, 2 grams/d of DHA36Little difference between response rates in DHA group (27.8%) and placebo group (23.5%)
BDI: Beck Depression Inventory
DHA: docosahexaenoic acid
EPA: eicosapentaenoic acid
HRSD: Hamilton Rating Scale for Depression
MADRS: Montgomery-Åsberg Depression Rating Scale
 

 

Analysis. For patients with unipolar depression who were treated with omega-3 fatty acids:

  • the most promisingresults have been seen with adjunctive EPA
  • safety and tolerability have been good across studies.

No positive monotherapy studies have been published. Studies are needed to confirm EPA’s efficacy in unipolar depression and to determine the most effective dosage.

Treating bipolar disorder

EPA and DHA have been studied in bipolar disorder (Table 2) because their actions in modulating signal transduction pathways resemble those of lithium and valproate.10,17 Biochemical studies also have shown decreased AA and DHA in erythrocyte membranes of manic patients compared with controls.18

  • Stoll et al. 19 Thirty patients receiving usual treatment for bipolar disorder were randomly assigned to adjunctive omega-3 fatty acids (6.2 grams/d of EPA plus 3.4 grams/d of DHA) or placebo for 4 months. Results were promising; patients receiving the omega-3 fatty acids remained in remission significantly longer than the placebo group.
  • Keck et al. 20,21 On the other hand, two more-recent studies were disappointing. Both were 4-month, randomized, controlled trials in which patients received adjunctive EPA, 6 grams/d, or placebo. One study enrolled 59 patients with acute bipolar depression;20 the other enrolled 62 patients with rapid-cycling bipolar disorder.21 EPA was well-tolerated, but both studies found little difference in effectiveness between EPA and placebo.

Table 2

Controlled trials of adjunctive omega-3 fatty acids in treating bipolar disorder

Author, year of publicationDuration and dosagesNumber of patientsResults
Stoll et al, 1999 194 months, maintenance therapy (6.2 grams/d of EPA and 3.4 grams/d of DHA) in patients with bipolar I or II disorder30Significantly longer remission in omega-3 fatty acid group compared with placebo group
Keck et al, 2003 204 months, 6 grams/d of EPA in patients with acute bipolar depression59No significant difference in mean change from baseline to endpoint between EPA and placebo groups
Keck et al, 2003 214 months, 6 grams/d of EPA in patients with rapid-cycling bipolar disorder62Little difference in mean change from baseline to endpoint between EPA and placebo groups
DHA: docosahexaenoic acid
EPA: eicosapentaenoic acid

Analysis. Further studies are needed to determine omega-3 fatty acids’ usefulness in treating bipolar illness.

Treating schizophrenia

Essential fatty acid deficiency and resulting lipid membrane abnormalities have been hypothesized to play a role in schizophrenia onset.22 Moreover, epidemiologic data suggest an association between high fish consumption and positive outcomes in patients with schizophrenia.23

Open-label trials, adjunctive therapy

  • Mellor et al. 24 Twenty patients receiving antipsychotics for schizophrenia were treated for 6 weeks with 10 grams/d of a fish oil formulation containing 1.7 grams of EPA and 1.1 grams of DHA (Table 3). Psychotic symptoms improved significantly and were correlated with increased omega-3 fatty acid levels in erythrocyte membranes. Tardive dyskinesia also improved significantly, as measured by Abnormal Involuntary Movement Scale (AIMS) scores.
  • Arvindakshan et al. 25 Thirty-three patients receiving antipsychotics for schizophrenia were given omega-3 fatty acids (360 mg/d of EPA and 240 mg/d of DHA) plus antioxidants (800 IU vitamin E and 1,000 IU vitamin C) for 4 months. Symptom and quality-of-life measures improved significantly, and clinical improvement was retained after 4 months of supplement washout.

Table 3

Clinical trials of omega-3 fatty acids in treating schizophrenia

Authors, year of publicationDuration and dosagesNumber of patientsResults
Open-label trials, adjunctive therapy
Mellor et al, 1995 246 weeks, 10 grams/d of fish oil (1.7 grams EPA and 1.1 grams DHA)20Significant improvement on PANSS and AIMS scores from baseline to endpoint
Arvindakshan et al, 2003 254 months, 360 mg/d of EPA and 240 mg/d of DHA, plus antioxidants (1,000 IU of vitamin C and 800 IU of vitamin E)33Significant improvements on total BPRS, PANSS, and Henrich’s Quality of Life Scale scores; improvements sustained after 4 months of supplementation washout
Controlled trials, adjunctive therapy
Peet et al, 2001 263 months, 2 grams/d of EPA or DHA45Greater improvement in total PANSS scores with EPA compared with DHA and placebo; EPA more effective than DHA in treating positive symptoms
Fenton et al, 2001 2716 weeks, 3 grams/d of ethyl-EPA in patients with schizophrenia or schizoaffective disorder87No difference between ethyl-EPA and placebo groups in positive or negative symptoms, cognition, mood, or EPS
Peet et al, 2002 2812 weeks, 1, 2, or 4 grams/d of ethyl-EPA with typical and atypical antipsychotics, including clozapine115Significantly greater improvement in mean total PANSS scores in clozapine-treated patients taking ethyl-EPA, 2 grams/d, compared with placebo; no difference between ethyl-EPAand placebo in patients taking typical or atypical antipsychotics
Emsley et al, 2002 2912 weeks, 3 grams/d of ethyl-EPA40Significantly greater reduction in total PANSS and EPS Rating Scale dyskinesia scores in ethyl-EPA group compared with placebo
Controlled trial, monotherapy
Peet et al, 2001 263 months, 2 grams/d of EPA26EPA-treated patients had significantly lower PANSS scores at endpoint, compared with placebo; significantly more patients on placebo required antipsychotics (12 of 12) than did those on EPA (8 of 14)
AIMS: Abnormal Involuntary Movement Scale
BPRS: Brief Psychiatric Rating Scale
DHA: docosahexaenoic acid
EPA: eicosapentaenoic acid
EPS: extrapyramidal symptoms
PANSS: Positive and Negative Syndrome Scale
 

 

Controlled trials, adjunctive therapy

  • Peet et al. 26 In a 3-month study, 45 patients with schizophrenia were randomly assigned to adjunctive EPA or DHA (2 grams/d) or placebo. Those receiving EPA showed significantly greater improvement as measured by the Positive and Negative Syndrome Scale (PANSS), compared with DHA or placebo.
  • Fenton et al. 27 In a 16-week study, 87 patients with schizophrenia or schizoaffective disorder were randomly assigned to adjunctive ethyl-EPA, 3 grams/d, or placebo. Little difference was noted in outcome measures of psychotic symptoms, mood, cognition, or extrapyramidal symptoms.
  • Peet et al. 28 In a 12-week study. 115 patients with schizophrenia receiving typical antipsychotics, clozapine, or other atypical antipsychotics were randomly assigned to adjunctive ethyl-EPA (1, 2, or 4 grams/d) or placebo. Those taking clozapine improved significantly more with 2 grams/d of ethyl-EPA compared with patients receiving placebo. Little difference was noted between ethyl-EPA and placebo among patients taking typical or atypical antipsychotics.
  • Emsley et al. 29 Forty patients with schizophrenia were randomly assigned to adjunctive ethyl-EPA, 3 grams/d, or placebo across 12 weeks. The ethyl-EPA group showed greater improvement in total PANSS scores and reduced dyskinesia, compared with placebo. Further analysis suggested, however, that the reduced dyskinesia scores at least partially accounted for the PANSS changes.

Controlled trial, monotherapy

  • Peet et al. 26 Twenty-six patients with schizophrenia were randomly assigned to EPA, 2 grams/d, or placebo. After 3 months, those receiving EPA had significantly lower PANSS scores, and fewer (8 of 14) required antipsychotics than did those receiving placebo (12 of 12).

Analysis. Adjunctive ethyl-EPA (and perhaps combinations of EPA and DHA) may help patients with schizophrenia who are taking typical or atypical antipsychotics. EPA monotherapy also may be useful. Data are limited, however, and studies are needed before such use could be recommended.

Treating other disorders

Postpartum depression. The developing fetus and neonate require DHA from maternal stores for neurologic development. Maternal DHA depletion30 has been hypothesized to put mothers at risk for postpartum depression.31 An ecological study with data from 23 countries found that higher concentrations of DHA in maternal breast milk and greater seafood consumption predicted lower postpartum depression rates.32

In a randomized, controlled trial, giving DHA, 200 mg/d, to breastfeeding women during the first 4 months postpartum increased maternal plasma phospholipid content by 8%, compared with a 31% decrease in women given placebo.33

Data from randomized, controlled trials are needed to assess whether omega-3 fatty acid supplementation during pregnancy and the postpartum protects against postpartum depression.

Borderline personality disorder. In an 8-week controlled trial, Zanarini and Frankenburg34 randomly assigned 20 subjects with borderline personality disorder to monotherapy with ethyl-EPA, 1 gram/d, or placebo. Depressive symptoms improved and aggression decreased significantly in the ethyl-EPA group, suggesting the need for further research.

ADHD. Low DHA levels have been found in serum35 and erythrocytes36 of hyperactive children when compared with controls. Limited data in boys ages 6 to 12 also suggest an inverse relationship between plasma omega-3 fatty acids and behavior problems, as measured by the Connors’ Rating Scale.37

More research is needed into omega-3 fatty acids’ potential role in treating attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), even though results of one controlled trial of adjunctive DHA in ADHD were disappointing.38

Dementia. Some large, prospective, epidemiologic studies39-41—but not others42—found an inverse relationship between dietary intake of omega-3 fatty acids and risk of cognitive decline or dementia.

Related resources

  • USDA Nutrient Data Laboratory. http://www.nalusda.gov/fnic/foodcomp (accessed Dec. 1, 2003)
  • Stoll AL. The omega-3 connection: the groundbreaking omega-3 antidepression diet and brain program. New York: Simon and Schuster, 2001.

Drug brand names

  • Clozapine • Clozaril

Disclosure

The authors report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References

1. Hibbeln JR. Fish consumption and major depression. Lancet 1998;351(9110):1213.-

2. Tanskanen A, Hibbeln JR, Tuomilehto J, et al. Fish consumption and depressive symptoms in the general population in Finland. Psychiatr Serv 2001;52(4):529-31.

3. Tanskanen A, Hibelln JR, Hintikka J, et al. Fish consumption, depression, and suicidality in a general population. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2001;58(5):512-3.

4. Edwards R, Peet M, Shay J, Horrobin D. Omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acid levels in the diet and in red blood cell membranes of depressed patients. J Affect Disord 1998;48(2-3):149-55.

5. Maes M, Christophe A, Delanghe J, et al. Lowered omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids in serum phospholipids and cholesterol esters of depressed patients. Psychiatry Res 1999;85(3):275-91.

6. Lundbaek JA, Andersen OS. Lysophospholipids modulate channel function by altering the mechanical properties of lipid bilayers. J Gen Physiol 1994;104(4):645-73.

7. Delion S, Chalon S, Guilloteau D, et al. Alpha-linolenic acid dietary deficiency alters age-related changes of dopaminergic and serotonergic neurotransmission in the rat frontal cortex. J Neurochem 1996;66(4):1582-91.

8. Passi S, Cataudella S, Di Marco P, et al. Fatty acid composition and antioxidant levels in muscle tissue of different Mediterranean marine species of fish and shellfish. J Agric Food Chem 2002;50(25):7314-22.

9. Hudson CJ, Young LT, Li PP, Warsh JJ. CNS signal transduction in the pathophysiology and pharmacology of affective disorders and schizophrenia. Synapse 1993;13(3):278-93.

10. Sperling RI, Benincaso AI, Knoell CT, et al. Dietary omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids inhibit phosphoinositide formation and chemotaxis in neutrophils. J Clin Invest 1993;91(2):651-60.

11. Endres S. Messengers and mediators: interactions among lipids, eicosanoids and cytokines. Am J Clin Nutr 1993;57(5 suppl):798S-800S.

12. Kris-Etherton PM, Harris WS, Appel LJ. Fish consumption, fish oil, omega-3 fatty acids, and cardiovascular disease. Arterioscler Thromb Vasc Biol 2003;23(2):e20-e30.

13. Nemets B, Stahl Z, Belmaker RH. Addition of omega-3 fatty acid to maintenance medication treatment for recurrent unipolar depressive disorder. Am J Psychiatry 2002;159(3):477-9.

14. Peet M, Horrobin DF. A dose-ranging study of the effects of ethyl-eicosapentaenoate in patients with ongoing depression despite apparently adequate treatment with standard drugs. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2002;59(10):913-9.

15. Su K-P, Huang S-Y, Chiu C-C, Shen WW. Omega-3 fatty acids in major depressive disorder: a preliminary double-blind, placebo-con-trolled trial. Eur Neuropsychopharmacol 2003;13(4):267-71.

16. Marangell LB, Martinez JM, Zboyan HA, et al. A double-blind, placebo-controlled study of the omega-3 fatty acid docosahexaenoic acid in the treatment of major depression. Am J Psychiatry 2003;160(5):996-8.

17. Stoll AL, Severus WE. Mood stabilizers: shared mechanisms of action at postsynaptic signal transduction and kindling processes. Harv Rev Psychiatry 1996;4(2):77-89.

18. Chiu CC, Huang SY, Su KP, et al. Polyunsaturated fatty acid deficit in patients with bipolar disorder. Eur Neuropsychopharmacol 2003;13(2):99-103.

19. Stoll AL, Severus WE, Freeman MP, et al. Omega-3 fatty acids in bipolar disorder: a preliminary double-blind, placebo-controlled trial. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1999;56(5):407-12.

20. Keck PE, Jr, McElroy SL, Freeman MP, et al. Randomized, placebo-controlled trial of eicosapentaenoic acid in bipolar depression. Bipolar Disord 2003;5(suppl 1):58.-

21. Keck PE, Jr, McElroy SL, Freeman MP, et al. Randomized, placebo-controlled trial of eicosapentaenoic acid in rapid cycling bipolar disorder. Bipolar Disord 2003;5(suppl 1):58.-

22. Horrobin DF. The membrane phospholipid hypothesis as a biochemical basis for the neurodevelopmental concept of schizophrenia. Schizophr Res 1998;30(3):193-208.

23. Christensen O, Christensen E. Fat consumption and schizophrenia. Acta Psychiatr Scand 1988;78(5):587-591

24. Mellor JE, Laugharne JD, Peet M. Schizophrenic symptoms and dietary intake of n-3 fatty acids. Schizophr Res 1995;18(1):85-6.

25. Arvindakshan M, Ghate M, Ranjekar PK, et al. Supplementation with a combination of omega-3 fatty acids and antioxidants (vitamins E and C) improves the outcome of schizophrenia. Schizophr Res 2003;62(3):195-204.

26. Peet M, Brind J, Ramchand CN, et al. Two double-blind placebo-controlled pilot studies of eicosapentaenoic acid in the treatment of schizophrenia. Schizophr Res 2001;49(3):243-51.

27. Fenton WS, Dickerson F, Boronow J, et al. A placebo-controlled trial of omega-3 fatty acid (ethyl eicosapentaenoic acid) supplementation for residual symptoms and cognitive impairment in schizophrenia. Am J Psychiatry 2001;158(12):2071-4.

28. Peet M, Horrobin DF. E-E Multicentre Study Group. A dose-ranging exploratory study of the effects of ethyl-eicosapentaenoate in patients with persistent schizophrenic symptoms. J Psychiatr Res 2002;36(1):7-18.

29. Emsley R, Myburgh C, Oosthuizen P, Van Rensburg SJ. Randomized, placebo-controlled study of ethyl-eicosapentaenoic acid as supplemental treatment in schizophrenia. Am J Psychiatry 2002;159(9):1596-8.

30. Al MD, van Houwelingen AC, Kester AD, et al. Maternal essential fatty acid patterns during normal pregnancy and their relationship to neonatal essential fatty acid status. Br J Nutr 1995;74(1):55-68.

31. Hibbeln JR, Salem N, Jr. Dietary polyunsaturated fatty acids and depression: when cholesterol does not satisfy. Am J Clin Nutr 1995;62(1):1-9.

32. Hibbeln JR. Seafood consumption, the DHA content of mothers’ milk and prevalence rates of postpartum depression: a cross-national, ecological analysis. J Affect Disord 2002;69(1-3):15-29.

33. Llorente AM, Jensen CL, Voigt RG, et al. Effect of maternal docosahexaenoic acid supplementation on postpartum depression and information processing. Am J Obstet Gynecol 2003;188(5):1348-53.

34. Zanarini MC, Frankenburg FR. Omega-3 fatty acid treatment of women with borderline personality disorder: a double-blind, placebo-controlled pilot study. Am J Psychiatry 2003;160(1):167-9.

35. Mitchell EA, Aman MG, Turbott SH, Manku M. Clinical characteristics and serum essential fatty acid levels in hyperactive children. Clin Pediatr 1987;26(8):406-11.

36. Stevens LJ, Zentall SS, Deck JL, et al. Essential fatty acid metabolism in boys with attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. Am J Clin Nutr 1995;62(4):761-8.

37. Stevens LJ, Zentall SS, Abate ML, et al. Omega-3 fatty acids in boys with behavior, learning, and health problems. Physiol Behav 1996;59(4-5):915-20.

38. Voigt RG, Llorente AM, Jensen CL, et al. A randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial of docosahexaenoic acid supplementation in children with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder. J Pediatr 2001;139(2):189-96.

39. Kalmijn S, Launer LJ, Ott A, et al. Dietary fat intake and the risk of incident dementia in the Rotterdam Study. Ann Neurol 1997;42(5):776-82.

40. Barberger-Gateau P, Letenneur L, Deschamps V, et al. Fish, meat, and risk of dementia: cohort study. BMJ 2002;325(7370):932-3.

41. Morris MC, Evans DA, Bienias JL, et al. Consumption of fish and n-3 fatty acids and risk of incident Alzheimer disease. Arch Neurol 2003;60(7):940-6.

42. Engelhart MJ, Geerlings MI, Ruitenberg A, et al. Diet and risk of dementia: does fat matter? The Rotterdam Study. Neurology 2002;59(12):1915-21.

References

1. Hibbeln JR. Fish consumption and major depression. Lancet 1998;351(9110):1213.-

2. Tanskanen A, Hibbeln JR, Tuomilehto J, et al. Fish consumption and depressive symptoms in the general population in Finland. Psychiatr Serv 2001;52(4):529-31.

3. Tanskanen A, Hibelln JR, Hintikka J, et al. Fish consumption, depression, and suicidality in a general population. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2001;58(5):512-3.

4. Edwards R, Peet M, Shay J, Horrobin D. Omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acid levels in the diet and in red blood cell membranes of depressed patients. J Affect Disord 1998;48(2-3):149-55.

5. Maes M, Christophe A, Delanghe J, et al. Lowered omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids in serum phospholipids and cholesterol esters of depressed patients. Psychiatry Res 1999;85(3):275-91.

6. Lundbaek JA, Andersen OS. Lysophospholipids modulate channel function by altering the mechanical properties of lipid bilayers. J Gen Physiol 1994;104(4):645-73.

7. Delion S, Chalon S, Guilloteau D, et al. Alpha-linolenic acid dietary deficiency alters age-related changes of dopaminergic and serotonergic neurotransmission in the rat frontal cortex. J Neurochem 1996;66(4):1582-91.

8. Passi S, Cataudella S, Di Marco P, et al. Fatty acid composition and antioxidant levels in muscle tissue of different Mediterranean marine species of fish and shellfish. J Agric Food Chem 2002;50(25):7314-22.

9. Hudson CJ, Young LT, Li PP, Warsh JJ. CNS signal transduction in the pathophysiology and pharmacology of affective disorders and schizophrenia. Synapse 1993;13(3):278-93.

10. Sperling RI, Benincaso AI, Knoell CT, et al. Dietary omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids inhibit phosphoinositide formation and chemotaxis in neutrophils. J Clin Invest 1993;91(2):651-60.

11. Endres S. Messengers and mediators: interactions among lipids, eicosanoids and cytokines. Am J Clin Nutr 1993;57(5 suppl):798S-800S.

12. Kris-Etherton PM, Harris WS, Appel LJ. Fish consumption, fish oil, omega-3 fatty acids, and cardiovascular disease. Arterioscler Thromb Vasc Biol 2003;23(2):e20-e30.

13. Nemets B, Stahl Z, Belmaker RH. Addition of omega-3 fatty acid to maintenance medication treatment for recurrent unipolar depressive disorder. Am J Psychiatry 2002;159(3):477-9.

14. Peet M, Horrobin DF. A dose-ranging study of the effects of ethyl-eicosapentaenoate in patients with ongoing depression despite apparently adequate treatment with standard drugs. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2002;59(10):913-9.

15. Su K-P, Huang S-Y, Chiu C-C, Shen WW. Omega-3 fatty acids in major depressive disorder: a preliminary double-blind, placebo-con-trolled trial. Eur Neuropsychopharmacol 2003;13(4):267-71.

16. Marangell LB, Martinez JM, Zboyan HA, et al. A double-blind, placebo-controlled study of the omega-3 fatty acid docosahexaenoic acid in the treatment of major depression. Am J Psychiatry 2003;160(5):996-8.

17. Stoll AL, Severus WE. Mood stabilizers: shared mechanisms of action at postsynaptic signal transduction and kindling processes. Harv Rev Psychiatry 1996;4(2):77-89.

18. Chiu CC, Huang SY, Su KP, et al. Polyunsaturated fatty acid deficit in patients with bipolar disorder. Eur Neuropsychopharmacol 2003;13(2):99-103.

19. Stoll AL, Severus WE, Freeman MP, et al. Omega-3 fatty acids in bipolar disorder: a preliminary double-blind, placebo-controlled trial. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1999;56(5):407-12.

20. Keck PE, Jr, McElroy SL, Freeman MP, et al. Randomized, placebo-controlled trial of eicosapentaenoic acid in bipolar depression. Bipolar Disord 2003;5(suppl 1):58.-

21. Keck PE, Jr, McElroy SL, Freeman MP, et al. Randomized, placebo-controlled trial of eicosapentaenoic acid in rapid cycling bipolar disorder. Bipolar Disord 2003;5(suppl 1):58.-

22. Horrobin DF. The membrane phospholipid hypothesis as a biochemical basis for the neurodevelopmental concept of schizophrenia. Schizophr Res 1998;30(3):193-208.

23. Christensen O, Christensen E. Fat consumption and schizophrenia. Acta Psychiatr Scand 1988;78(5):587-591

24. Mellor JE, Laugharne JD, Peet M. Schizophrenic symptoms and dietary intake of n-3 fatty acids. Schizophr Res 1995;18(1):85-6.

25. Arvindakshan M, Ghate M, Ranjekar PK, et al. Supplementation with a combination of omega-3 fatty acids and antioxidants (vitamins E and C) improves the outcome of schizophrenia. Schizophr Res 2003;62(3):195-204.

26. Peet M, Brind J, Ramchand CN, et al. Two double-blind placebo-controlled pilot studies of eicosapentaenoic acid in the treatment of schizophrenia. Schizophr Res 2001;49(3):243-51.

27. Fenton WS, Dickerson F, Boronow J, et al. A placebo-controlled trial of omega-3 fatty acid (ethyl eicosapentaenoic acid) supplementation for residual symptoms and cognitive impairment in schizophrenia. Am J Psychiatry 2001;158(12):2071-4.

28. Peet M, Horrobin DF. E-E Multicentre Study Group. A dose-ranging exploratory study of the effects of ethyl-eicosapentaenoate in patients with persistent schizophrenic symptoms. J Psychiatr Res 2002;36(1):7-18.

29. Emsley R, Myburgh C, Oosthuizen P, Van Rensburg SJ. Randomized, placebo-controlled study of ethyl-eicosapentaenoic acid as supplemental treatment in schizophrenia. Am J Psychiatry 2002;159(9):1596-8.

30. Al MD, van Houwelingen AC, Kester AD, et al. Maternal essential fatty acid patterns during normal pregnancy and their relationship to neonatal essential fatty acid status. Br J Nutr 1995;74(1):55-68.

31. Hibbeln JR, Salem N, Jr. Dietary polyunsaturated fatty acids and depression: when cholesterol does not satisfy. Am J Clin Nutr 1995;62(1):1-9.

32. Hibbeln JR. Seafood consumption, the DHA content of mothers’ milk and prevalence rates of postpartum depression: a cross-national, ecological analysis. J Affect Disord 2002;69(1-3):15-29.

33. Llorente AM, Jensen CL, Voigt RG, et al. Effect of maternal docosahexaenoic acid supplementation on postpartum depression and information processing. Am J Obstet Gynecol 2003;188(5):1348-53.

34. Zanarini MC, Frankenburg FR. Omega-3 fatty acid treatment of women with borderline personality disorder: a double-blind, placebo-controlled pilot study. Am J Psychiatry 2003;160(1):167-9.

35. Mitchell EA, Aman MG, Turbott SH, Manku M. Clinical characteristics and serum essential fatty acid levels in hyperactive children. Clin Pediatr 1987;26(8):406-11.

36. Stevens LJ, Zentall SS, Deck JL, et al. Essential fatty acid metabolism in boys with attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. Am J Clin Nutr 1995;62(4):761-8.

37. Stevens LJ, Zentall SS, Abate ML, et al. Omega-3 fatty acids in boys with behavior, learning, and health problems. Physiol Behav 1996;59(4-5):915-20.

38. Voigt RG, Llorente AM, Jensen CL, et al. A randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial of docosahexaenoic acid supplementation in children with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder. J Pediatr 2001;139(2):189-96.

39. Kalmijn S, Launer LJ, Ott A, et al. Dietary fat intake and the risk of incident dementia in the Rotterdam Study. Ann Neurol 1997;42(5):776-82.

40. Barberger-Gateau P, Letenneur L, Deschamps V, et al. Fish, meat, and risk of dementia: cohort study. BMJ 2002;325(7370):932-3.

41. Morris MC, Evans DA, Bienias JL, et al. Consumption of fish and n-3 fatty acids and risk of incident Alzheimer disease. Arch Neurol 2003;60(7):940-6.

42. Engelhart MJ, Geerlings MI, Ruitenberg A, et al. Diet and risk of dementia: does fat matter? The Rotterdam Study. Neurology 2002;59(12):1915-21.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 03(01)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 03(01)
Page Number
25-52
Page Number
25-52
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Omega-3 fatty acids: Do ‘fish oils’ have a therapeutic role in psychiatry?
Display Headline
Omega-3 fatty acids: Do ‘fish oils’ have a therapeutic role in psychiatry?
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

Update on eating disorders Bulimia nervosa: Persistent disorder requires equally persistent treatment

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:11
Display Headline
Update on eating disorders Bulimia nervosa: Persistent disorder requires equally persistent treatment

Thousands of scientific papers have been written about bulimia, but not all patients receive effective treatments that produce remission.

To set the record straight and help psychiatrists avoid undertreating bulimia, this article discusses:

  • evidence for using antidepressants, even when patients are not “depressed”
  • merits of psychotherapies, including those shown to work and those that can harm
  • augmentation therapies that can help increase response from partial to full remission.

Initial evaluation

Diagnosis. Bulimia nervosa is characterized by eating binges, followed by purging behaviors such as self-induced vomiting or laxative abuse1,2 (Table 1). It affects 1% to 3% of adolescent girls and young women and occurs in women 5 to 10 times more often than in men.

Bulimia is often persistent. About one-half of bulimic patients—including those who have been treated—continue to show eating disorder features on long-term follow-up.3,4

Psychiatric comorbidity. Most bulimic patients report a history of other psychiatric disorders, especially major depressive and bipolar disorders and anxiety disorders such as panic disorder, social phobia, and obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD).5 Because these psychiatric comorbidities may occur before, during, or after bulimia nervosa, one cannot assume that mood or anxiety disorders are a cause or consequence of bulimia. Instead, bulimia nervosa, mood disorders, and anxiety disorders may be different expressions of a shared etiologic abnormality.

Table 1

DSM-IV-TR diagnostic criteria for bulimia nervosa

  1. Recurrent episodes of binge eating, characterized by both of the following:
  2. Recurrent inappropriate compensatory behavior in order to prevent weight gain, such as self-induced vomiting; misuse of laxatives, diuretics, enemas, or other medications; fasting; or excessive exercise
  3. The binge eating and inappropriate compensatory behaviors both occur, on average, at least twice a week for 3 months
  4. Self-evaluation is unduly influenced by body shape and weight
  5. The disturbance does not occur exclusively during episodes of anorexia nervosa
Specify type:
Purging type: during the current episode of bulimia nervosa, the person has regularly engaged in self-induced vomiting or the misuse of laxatives, diuretics, or enemas
Non-purging type: during the current episode of bulimia nervosa, the person has used other inappropriate compensatory behaviors, such as fasting or excessive exercise but has not regularly engaged in self-induced vomiting or the misuse of laxatives, diuretics, or enemas
Source: Reprinted with permission from the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 4th ed, text rev. Copyright 2000 American Psychiatric Association.

Evidence supporting this hypothesis comes from studies showing that these disorders:

  • respond to several chemically unrelated families of antidepressants6,7
  • frequently co-occur in individual patients5,7
  • frequently co-aggregate in families.7-9

We have published this evidence6,7 and proposed that bulimia nervosa may be one form of a larger underlying disorder, which we termed “affective spectrum disorder.”

Antidepressants are often rapidly effective in treating bulimic symptoms,10 regardless of whether patients exhibit depressive symptoms. Thus, there is no reason to withhold antidepressant therapy simply because a bulimic patient is not depressed. The term “antidepressant” may be a misnomer; these drugs are effective for numerous conditions, of which depression is only one.

Anorexic symptoms. Co-occurring depressive or anxiety disorders in a bulimic patient will not greatly alter treatment. The antidepressants and psychotherapies typically used to treat bulimia are often equally effective for affective disorders. Co-occurring anorexia nervosa, however, is a more serious concern.

Bulimic patients often display a history of anorexia nervosa; in many cases, the patient develops anorexia nervosa as a teenager and then progresses to bulimia nervosa across several years. Her prognosis is much better if her weight normalizes with the shift to bulimia nervosa, than if her weight remains well below normal for her height. It is unclear why medications and psychotherapy are much less effective in bulimic patients with anorexic symptoms than in those with bulimia alone. Watch for further details on anorexia nervosa as this series continues in future issues of.

Medical considerations. Potential medical complications—mostly consequences of vomiting or laxative use—are important to consider when you assess a bulimic patient:1

  • The acid in vomitus may gradually erode tooth enamel, requiring dental consultation.
  • Vomitus may inflame salivary gland ducts, though the swelling is usually benign.
  • Frequent vomiting may result in hypokalemia and alkalosis, although aggressive medical treatment usually is not needed.

Ask about ipecac use. To induce vomiting, some patients may abuse ipecac syrup, which can cause cardiomyopathy.11

Inpatient or outpatient? Unless the bulimic patient displays severe and medically dangerous anorexic symptoms, she can usually be treated as an outpatient. However, evaluate her carefully for suicidal ideation—which is not uncommon in bulimia nervosa—and consider inpatient treatment if necessary.

Medication vs. psychotherapy

The relative merits of medication versus psychotherapy in treating bulimia nervosa continue to be debated. The Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews includes meta-analyses of both drug therapy12 and psychotherapy13 for bulimia nervosa. The 2001 drug therapy review found that “the use of a single antidepressant agent was clinically effective,” with no one drug clearly superior to another. Notably, this review was published before recent findings on topiramate.

 

 

The corresponding 2002 review of psychotherapy concludes—somewhat more cautiously—that “there is a small body of evidence for the efficacy of cognitive-behavior therapy in bulimia nervosa and similar syndromes, but the quality of trials is very variable and sample sizes are often small.”

In bulimia nervosa and other psychiatric disorders, comparing psychotherapy with drug therapy is hazardous because several factors bias the comparison in favor of psychotherapy. These factors include an expectational effect, a responsibility effect, and differential generalizability of study results.

Expectational effect. Patients in clinical trials are aware that they are receiving psychotherapy and, presumably, that study investigators hope to demonstrate its efficacy. This might account for much of psychotherapy’s apparent effect, as even placebos can produce 30% to 50% improvement in bulimia.14

Responsibility effect. If a patient fails to improve in a drug study, she will conclude that the drug has failed. But if she fails to improve in a psychotherapy study, she may conclude that she has failed. Because psychological treatments generally require patients to work in therapy, the patient may feel partially responsible for the outcome. Thus, to avoid cognitive dissonance, she may consciously or unconsciously exaggerate her improvement, both in her own mind and when reporting to treaters.

Differential generalizability. Psychological study protocols, such as administering several months of a behavioral treatment, usually mimic clinical practice fairly well. This is not the case with drug study protocols.

No responsible clinician would inflexibly administer a single dosage of a single drug for a fixed period to every bulimic patient and then declare failure for all nonresponders, as is done in study protocols. In practice, the clinician can offer nonresponders augmentation strategies and additional drug trials. Thus, calculations of bulimia response rates in drug studies substantially understate response to drug therapy in clinical practice.

Table 2

How effective are medications in treating bulimia nervosa?

MedicationEvidence for efficacyRemarks
Antidepressants
Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors+++Fluoxetine is only SSRI studied in controlled trials
Tricyclics+++Generally more side effects than SSRIs
Monoamine oxidase inhibitors++High rates of remission, but dietary restrictions
Trazodone++Only one controlled trial
Venlafaxine, mirtazapine, nefazodone?No controlled trials, but probably effective
Bupropion(++)Not recommended; caused seizures in bulimic patients
Anticonvulsants
Topiramate++Only one controlled trial, but substantial effect size
Phenytoin+Little efficacy in only controlled study
Carbamazepine+May be useful in bulimia with comorbid bipolar disorder
Valproate+May be useful in bulimia with comorbid bipolar disorder
Other agents
Liothyronine+Augmentation agent in patients with incomplete antidepressant response
Lithium+Ineffective in only controlled trial; possible augmentation strategy
Naltrexone0Ineffective in two controlled trials
Ondansetron+One controlled trial
0 No apparent efficacy
+ Occasional effect; limited evidence
++ Clear effect; good evidence from controlled trial(s)
+++ Strongly documented effect; evidence from multiple controlled trials.
( ) Negative effect

One also might note that psychological study findings have not “sold” well in the clinical practice marketplace. For example, in a recent survey of more than 220 bulimic women treated with psychotherapy, only 6.9% said they received a full course of cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT)14 —despite two decades of evidence of its efficacy. By contrast, untested, inefficacious, and possibly harmful psychotherapies for bulimia—including recovered-memory therapy—appear to be thriving.

Recommendation. Interpret with caution any head-to-head comparisons of psychological versus drug therapies—especially when clinical practice recommendations are made. Certain psychological therapies provided by specifically-trained individuals likely do help patients with bulimia nervosa. However, biases inherent to the studies may inflate psychological therapies’ efficacy when compared with that of drug therapy.

Therefore, for a psychiatrist who does not specialize in eating disorders to offer exclusively psychological therapy to a bulimic patient—while withholding or postponing drug therapy—may now be a questionable practice.

Choosing drug therapies

Although consensus is lacking on an optimal treatment trial sequence for bulimia nervosa, we suggest a rational approach based on the evidence and our experience (Algorithm).

First-line antidepressants. A selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SSRI) trial is usually the first choice (Table 2), and some data suggest that higher-than-usual dosages may be required. For example, in a large multicenter trial of fluoxetine in bulimia nervosa, 60 mg/d was considerably more effective than 20 mg/d for reducing binge eating behavior and vomiting frequency.15

Based on our observations, however, we believe that noncompliance or irregular compliance may account for this difference in response. Bulimic patients’ impulsive and obsessional behavior may keep them from taking their medications as prescribed. The higher fluoxetine dosage may therefore have been more effective simply because it ensured adequate plasma levels, even when patients missed or forgot multiple doses.

Augmenting agents. A first antidepressant trial rarely leads to complete remission of bulimic symptoms. This is not a serious concern, however, because many other options are available.

Liothyronine. Partial responders to SSRIs often become complete responders when we add a 10-day trial of liothyronine (T3), 25 μg/d. If this fails, we may try augmenting with lithium carbonate, although bulimic patients are often afraid of weight gain or lithium’s other side effects.

 

 

Topiramate. A newer augmentation strategy is to add the anticonvulsant topiramate. Used alone, topiramate demonstrated effectiveness for bulimia nervosa in one placebo-controlled, double-blind trial.16

Adding topiramate to an antidepressant regimen will likely reduce any remaining bulimic symptoms. In addition, topiramate often produces weight loss—a side effect that bulimic patients usually welcome. It remains unclear whether topiramate’s weight-loss effects might pose a hazard in patients with simultaneous bulimic and anorexic symptoms.

Other antidepressants. If the above strategies fail, other antidepressant options include venlafaxine, tricyclics, and monoamine oxidase inhibitors. Bupropion is not recommended in bulimia nervosa; one trial17 of this agent resulted in a much higher rate of grand mal seizures in bulimic patients than in patients taking bupropion for depression.

In bulimic patients with concomitant bipolar disorder, the anticonvulsants carbamazepine and valproate often reduce affective and bulimic symptoms. By contrast, the anticonvulsant phenytoin—once thought to be useful in bulimia nervosa10 —offers little benefit for either bulimic or affective symptoms.

Persistence is important when initial medication trials fail. One unblinded study followed 36 bulimic patients 9 to 19 months after they completed a controlled study with trazodone.18 Of the 26 patients who tried a second or third antidepressant, 17 (65%) achieved remission of bulimia on follow-up. Of the 10 patients who declined a second or third trial, only 1 (10%) attained remission.

Notably, these study results were obtained before the SSRIs and other newer antidepressants or topiramate became available. Cooperative patients using present-day medications might be able to achieve remission rates that exceed 65%.

Algorithm Proposed treatment approach to bulimia nervosa



Table 3

How effective are psychotherapies in treating bulimia nervosa?

PsychotherapyEvidence for efficacyRemarks
Cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT)+++Controlled evidence for efficacy in individual and group treatment
Interpersonal psychotherapy (IPT)++Effective, but slower than CBT
Exposure with response prevention+May be added to other behavioral techniques, though additive benefit questionable
Dialectical behavior therapy+Highly structured behavioral technique originally developed for borderline personality disorder
Self-help groups+Frequently considered very helpful by patients
Psychodynamic psychotherapy0“Recovered memory” approaches are frankly harmful
Eye movement desensitization and reprocessing (EMDR)0Dubious theoretical basis; no methodologically acceptable evidence for efficacy
0 No apparent efficacy
+ Occasional effect; limited evidence
++ Clear effect; good evidence from controlled trial(s)
+++ Strongly documented effect; evidence from multiple controlled trials.

Psychotherapy

Cognitive-behavioral therapy. CBT—given either individually or in groups—is the most effective psychotherapy for bulimia (Table 3).19 CBT typically involves 3 to 6 months of helping the patient focus on her bulimic behaviors and on specific attitudes—such as unrealistic preoccupations with being “too fat”—that perpetuate the behaviors.

In practice, unfortunately, few bulimic patients are offered CBT, perhaps because few clinicians are trained in the specific approach used for bulimia nervosa.19 If you are not trained in using CBT for bulimia and do not have access to colleagues who offer this treatment, you may begin with medication plus simple behavioral treatments, such as:

  • offering supportive therapy in the office
  • referring patients to self-help groups for persons with eating disorders.

If this strategy fails, encourage patients to consider CBT—even if they must travel some distance to obtain it.

Other specialized psychotherapies. Dialectical behavior therapy and interpersonal psychotherapy appear to be effective in bulimia. Again, however, clinicians who lack training in these techniques or access to local experts may be unable to offer them. Psychodynamic therapy does not appear to offer greater benefit in bulimia nervosa than ordinary supportive counseling.

Dubious therapies. One psychodynamic approach—regrettably still practiced—is “recovered memory therapy.” Therapists who use it claim that childhood sexual abuse or other trauma can cause bulimic symptoms but patients have repressed the memory of these events.20

No methodologically sound evidence has shown that childhood sexual abuse can cause bulimia nervosa years or decades later.21 Nor is there acceptable evidence that people can repress the memory of a traumatic experience.22 Therapists administering recovered memory therapy have been subjected to malpractice judgments totaling tens of millions of dollars from suits filed by patients who eventually realized that so-called “recovered” memories were false.23

Another dubious therapy—eye movement desensitization and reprocessing (EMDR)—also may involve attempts to “recover” memories of putative traumatic events.24 No methodologically sound evidence has shown that EMDR is effective in bulimic patients, and the technique’s theoretical basis is questionable.24,25

Related resources

Drug brand names

  • Bupropion • Wellbutrin
  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Desipramine • Norpramin
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Lithium • Lithobid, Eskalith
  • Nortriptyline • Pamelor, Aventyl
  • Sertraline • Zoloft
  • Topiramate • Topamax
  • Trazodone • Desyrel
  • Liothyronine • Cytomel
  • Venlafaxine • Effexor

Disclosure

Dr. Pope receives research support from Ortho-McNeil Pharmaceuticals and is a consultant to Solvay Pharmaceuticals and Auxilium Pharmaceuticals.

 

 

Dr. Hudson receives research support from and is a consultant to Eli Lilly & Co. and Ortho-McNeil Pharmaceuticals.

References

1. Mehler PS. Clinical practice. Bulimia nervosa. N Engl J Med 2003;349(9):875-81.

2. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed, text rev). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association,2000.

3. Fisher M. The course and outcome of eating disorders in adults and in adolescents: a review. Adolesc Med 2003;14(1):149-58.

4. Fairburn CG, Norman PA, Welch SL, et al. A prospective study of outcome in bulimia nervosa and the long-term effects of three psychological treatments. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1995;52(4):304-12.

5. Hudson JI, Pope HG, Jr, Yurgelun-Todd D, et al. A controlled study of lifetime prevalence of affective and other psychiatric disorders in bulimic outpatients. Am J Psychiatry 1987;144(10):1283-7.

6. Hudson JI, Pope HG, Jr. Affective spectrum disorder: does antidepressant response identify a family of disorders with a common pathophysiology? Am J Psychiatry 1990;147(5):552-64.

7. Hudson JI, Mangweth B, Pope HG, Jr, et al. Family study of affective spectrum disorder. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2003;60:170-7.

8. Hudson JI, Laird NM, Betensky RA, et al. Multivariate logistic regression for familial aggregation of two disorders: II. Analysis of studies of eating and mood disorders. Am J Epidemiology 2001;153(5):506-14.

9. Mangweth B, Hudson JI, Pope HG, Jr, et al. Family study of the aggregation of eating disorders and mood disorders. Psychol Med (in press).

10. Hudson JI, Pope HG, Jr, Carter WP. Pharmacologic therapy of bulimia nervosa. In: Goldstein D (ed). The management of eating disorders and obesity (2nd ed) Totowa, NJ: Humana Press, Inc.(in press).

11. Pope HG, Jr, Hudson JI, Nixon RA, Herridge PL. The epidemiology of ipecac abuse. N Engl J Med 1986;14(4):245-6.

12. Hay PJ, Bacaltchuk J. Psychotherapy for bulimia nervosa and binging. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2003;(1):CD000562.-

13. Bacaltchuk J, Hay P. Antidepressants versus placebo for people with bulimia nervosa. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2001;(4):CD003391.-

14. Crow S, Mussell MP, Peterson C, et al. Prior treatment received by patients with bulimia nervosa. Int J Eating Disord 1999;25(1):39-44.

15. Fluoxetine Bulimia Collaborative Study Group Fluoxetine in the treatment of bulimia nervosa: a multicenter placebo-controlled, double-blind trial. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1992;49:139-47.

16. Hoopes S, Reimherr F, Hedges D, et al. Part 1:Topiramate in the treatment of bulimia nervosa: a randomized, double-blind, placebocontrolled trial. J Clin Psychiatry (in press).

17. Horne RL, Ferguson JM, Pope HG, Jr, et al. Treatment of bulimia with bupropion: a controlled multi-center trial. J Clin Psychiatry 1988;49(7):262-6.

18. Pope HG, Jr, McElroy SL, Keck PE, Jr, Hudson JI. Long-term pharmacotherapy of bulimia nervosa. J Clin Psychopharmacol 1989;9(5):385-6.

19. Fairburn CG, Harrison PJ. Eating disorders. Lancet 2003;361(9355):407-16.

20. Pope HG, Jr, Hudson JI. “Recovered memory” therapy for eating disorders: implications of the Ramona verdict. Int J Eat Disord 1996;19(2):139-45.

21. Pope HG, Jr, Hudson JI. Does childhood sexual abuse cause adult psychiatric disorders? Essentials of methodology. J Psychiatry Law 1995;Fall:363-81.

22. Pope HG, Jr, Oliva PS, Hudson JI. Repressed memories. The scientific status of research on repressed memories. In: Faigman DL, Kaye DH, Saks MJ, Sanders J (eds). Science in the law: social and behavioral science issues St. Paul, MN: West Group, 2002;487-526.

23. Cannell J, Hudson JI, Pope HG, Jr. Standards for informed consent in recovered memory therapy. J Am Acad Psychiatry Law 2001;29(2):138-47.

24. Hudson JI, Chase EA, Pope HG, Jr. Eye movement desensitization and reprocessing in eating disorders: caution against premature acceptance. Int J Eat Disord 1998;23:1-5.

25. McNally RJ. EMDR and mesmerism: a comparative historical analysis. J Anxiety Disord 1999;13(1-2):225-36.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Paul E. Keck, Jr, MD

Harrison G. Pope, Jr, MD
Professor of psychiatry Harvard Medical School, Boston Director, Biological Psychiatry Laboratory McLean Hospital, Belmont, MA

James I. Hudson, MD, ScD
Associate professor of psychiatry Harvard Medical School, Boston Director, Biological Psychiatry Laboratory McLean Hospital, Belmont, MA

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 03(01)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
12-22
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Paul E. Keck, Jr, MD

Harrison G. Pope, Jr, MD
Professor of psychiatry Harvard Medical School, Boston Director, Biological Psychiatry Laboratory McLean Hospital, Belmont, MA

James I. Hudson, MD, ScD
Associate professor of psychiatry Harvard Medical School, Boston Director, Biological Psychiatry Laboratory McLean Hospital, Belmont, MA

Author and Disclosure Information

Paul E. Keck, Jr, MD

Harrison G. Pope, Jr, MD
Professor of psychiatry Harvard Medical School, Boston Director, Biological Psychiatry Laboratory McLean Hospital, Belmont, MA

James I. Hudson, MD, ScD
Associate professor of psychiatry Harvard Medical School, Boston Director, Biological Psychiatry Laboratory McLean Hospital, Belmont, MA

Article PDF
Article PDF

Thousands of scientific papers have been written about bulimia, but not all patients receive effective treatments that produce remission.

To set the record straight and help psychiatrists avoid undertreating bulimia, this article discusses:

  • evidence for using antidepressants, even when patients are not “depressed”
  • merits of psychotherapies, including those shown to work and those that can harm
  • augmentation therapies that can help increase response from partial to full remission.

Initial evaluation

Diagnosis. Bulimia nervosa is characterized by eating binges, followed by purging behaviors such as self-induced vomiting or laxative abuse1,2 (Table 1). It affects 1% to 3% of adolescent girls and young women and occurs in women 5 to 10 times more often than in men.

Bulimia is often persistent. About one-half of bulimic patients—including those who have been treated—continue to show eating disorder features on long-term follow-up.3,4

Psychiatric comorbidity. Most bulimic patients report a history of other psychiatric disorders, especially major depressive and bipolar disorders and anxiety disorders such as panic disorder, social phobia, and obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD).5 Because these psychiatric comorbidities may occur before, during, or after bulimia nervosa, one cannot assume that mood or anxiety disorders are a cause or consequence of bulimia. Instead, bulimia nervosa, mood disorders, and anxiety disorders may be different expressions of a shared etiologic abnormality.

Table 1

DSM-IV-TR diagnostic criteria for bulimia nervosa

  1. Recurrent episodes of binge eating, characterized by both of the following:
  2. Recurrent inappropriate compensatory behavior in order to prevent weight gain, such as self-induced vomiting; misuse of laxatives, diuretics, enemas, or other medications; fasting; or excessive exercise
  3. The binge eating and inappropriate compensatory behaviors both occur, on average, at least twice a week for 3 months
  4. Self-evaluation is unduly influenced by body shape and weight
  5. The disturbance does not occur exclusively during episodes of anorexia nervosa
Specify type:
Purging type: during the current episode of bulimia nervosa, the person has regularly engaged in self-induced vomiting or the misuse of laxatives, diuretics, or enemas
Non-purging type: during the current episode of bulimia nervosa, the person has used other inappropriate compensatory behaviors, such as fasting or excessive exercise but has not regularly engaged in self-induced vomiting or the misuse of laxatives, diuretics, or enemas
Source: Reprinted with permission from the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 4th ed, text rev. Copyright 2000 American Psychiatric Association.

Evidence supporting this hypothesis comes from studies showing that these disorders:

  • respond to several chemically unrelated families of antidepressants6,7
  • frequently co-occur in individual patients5,7
  • frequently co-aggregate in families.7-9

We have published this evidence6,7 and proposed that bulimia nervosa may be one form of a larger underlying disorder, which we termed “affective spectrum disorder.”

Antidepressants are often rapidly effective in treating bulimic symptoms,10 regardless of whether patients exhibit depressive symptoms. Thus, there is no reason to withhold antidepressant therapy simply because a bulimic patient is not depressed. The term “antidepressant” may be a misnomer; these drugs are effective for numerous conditions, of which depression is only one.

Anorexic symptoms. Co-occurring depressive or anxiety disorders in a bulimic patient will not greatly alter treatment. The antidepressants and psychotherapies typically used to treat bulimia are often equally effective for affective disorders. Co-occurring anorexia nervosa, however, is a more serious concern.

Bulimic patients often display a history of anorexia nervosa; in many cases, the patient develops anorexia nervosa as a teenager and then progresses to bulimia nervosa across several years. Her prognosis is much better if her weight normalizes with the shift to bulimia nervosa, than if her weight remains well below normal for her height. It is unclear why medications and psychotherapy are much less effective in bulimic patients with anorexic symptoms than in those with bulimia alone. Watch for further details on anorexia nervosa as this series continues in future issues of.

Medical considerations. Potential medical complications—mostly consequences of vomiting or laxative use—are important to consider when you assess a bulimic patient:1

  • The acid in vomitus may gradually erode tooth enamel, requiring dental consultation.
  • Vomitus may inflame salivary gland ducts, though the swelling is usually benign.
  • Frequent vomiting may result in hypokalemia and alkalosis, although aggressive medical treatment usually is not needed.

Ask about ipecac use. To induce vomiting, some patients may abuse ipecac syrup, which can cause cardiomyopathy.11

Inpatient or outpatient? Unless the bulimic patient displays severe and medically dangerous anorexic symptoms, she can usually be treated as an outpatient. However, evaluate her carefully for suicidal ideation—which is not uncommon in bulimia nervosa—and consider inpatient treatment if necessary.

Medication vs. psychotherapy

The relative merits of medication versus psychotherapy in treating bulimia nervosa continue to be debated. The Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews includes meta-analyses of both drug therapy12 and psychotherapy13 for bulimia nervosa. The 2001 drug therapy review found that “the use of a single antidepressant agent was clinically effective,” with no one drug clearly superior to another. Notably, this review was published before recent findings on topiramate.

 

 

The corresponding 2002 review of psychotherapy concludes—somewhat more cautiously—that “there is a small body of evidence for the efficacy of cognitive-behavior therapy in bulimia nervosa and similar syndromes, but the quality of trials is very variable and sample sizes are often small.”

In bulimia nervosa and other psychiatric disorders, comparing psychotherapy with drug therapy is hazardous because several factors bias the comparison in favor of psychotherapy. These factors include an expectational effect, a responsibility effect, and differential generalizability of study results.

Expectational effect. Patients in clinical trials are aware that they are receiving psychotherapy and, presumably, that study investigators hope to demonstrate its efficacy. This might account for much of psychotherapy’s apparent effect, as even placebos can produce 30% to 50% improvement in bulimia.14

Responsibility effect. If a patient fails to improve in a drug study, she will conclude that the drug has failed. But if she fails to improve in a psychotherapy study, she may conclude that she has failed. Because psychological treatments generally require patients to work in therapy, the patient may feel partially responsible for the outcome. Thus, to avoid cognitive dissonance, she may consciously or unconsciously exaggerate her improvement, both in her own mind and when reporting to treaters.

Differential generalizability. Psychological study protocols, such as administering several months of a behavioral treatment, usually mimic clinical practice fairly well. This is not the case with drug study protocols.

No responsible clinician would inflexibly administer a single dosage of a single drug for a fixed period to every bulimic patient and then declare failure for all nonresponders, as is done in study protocols. In practice, the clinician can offer nonresponders augmentation strategies and additional drug trials. Thus, calculations of bulimia response rates in drug studies substantially understate response to drug therapy in clinical practice.

Table 2

How effective are medications in treating bulimia nervosa?

MedicationEvidence for efficacyRemarks
Antidepressants
Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors+++Fluoxetine is only SSRI studied in controlled trials
Tricyclics+++Generally more side effects than SSRIs
Monoamine oxidase inhibitors++High rates of remission, but dietary restrictions
Trazodone++Only one controlled trial
Venlafaxine, mirtazapine, nefazodone?No controlled trials, but probably effective
Bupropion(++)Not recommended; caused seizures in bulimic patients
Anticonvulsants
Topiramate++Only one controlled trial, but substantial effect size
Phenytoin+Little efficacy in only controlled study
Carbamazepine+May be useful in bulimia with comorbid bipolar disorder
Valproate+May be useful in bulimia with comorbid bipolar disorder
Other agents
Liothyronine+Augmentation agent in patients with incomplete antidepressant response
Lithium+Ineffective in only controlled trial; possible augmentation strategy
Naltrexone0Ineffective in two controlled trials
Ondansetron+One controlled trial
0 No apparent efficacy
+ Occasional effect; limited evidence
++ Clear effect; good evidence from controlled trial(s)
+++ Strongly documented effect; evidence from multiple controlled trials.
( ) Negative effect

One also might note that psychological study findings have not “sold” well in the clinical practice marketplace. For example, in a recent survey of more than 220 bulimic women treated with psychotherapy, only 6.9% said they received a full course of cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT)14 —despite two decades of evidence of its efficacy. By contrast, untested, inefficacious, and possibly harmful psychotherapies for bulimia—including recovered-memory therapy—appear to be thriving.

Recommendation. Interpret with caution any head-to-head comparisons of psychological versus drug therapies—especially when clinical practice recommendations are made. Certain psychological therapies provided by specifically-trained individuals likely do help patients with bulimia nervosa. However, biases inherent to the studies may inflate psychological therapies’ efficacy when compared with that of drug therapy.

Therefore, for a psychiatrist who does not specialize in eating disorders to offer exclusively psychological therapy to a bulimic patient—while withholding or postponing drug therapy—may now be a questionable practice.

Choosing drug therapies

Although consensus is lacking on an optimal treatment trial sequence for bulimia nervosa, we suggest a rational approach based on the evidence and our experience (Algorithm).

First-line antidepressants. A selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SSRI) trial is usually the first choice (Table 2), and some data suggest that higher-than-usual dosages may be required. For example, in a large multicenter trial of fluoxetine in bulimia nervosa, 60 mg/d was considerably more effective than 20 mg/d for reducing binge eating behavior and vomiting frequency.15

Based on our observations, however, we believe that noncompliance or irregular compliance may account for this difference in response. Bulimic patients’ impulsive and obsessional behavior may keep them from taking their medications as prescribed. The higher fluoxetine dosage may therefore have been more effective simply because it ensured adequate plasma levels, even when patients missed or forgot multiple doses.

Augmenting agents. A first antidepressant trial rarely leads to complete remission of bulimic symptoms. This is not a serious concern, however, because many other options are available.

Liothyronine. Partial responders to SSRIs often become complete responders when we add a 10-day trial of liothyronine (T3), 25 μg/d. If this fails, we may try augmenting with lithium carbonate, although bulimic patients are often afraid of weight gain or lithium’s other side effects.

 

 

Topiramate. A newer augmentation strategy is to add the anticonvulsant topiramate. Used alone, topiramate demonstrated effectiveness for bulimia nervosa in one placebo-controlled, double-blind trial.16

Adding topiramate to an antidepressant regimen will likely reduce any remaining bulimic symptoms. In addition, topiramate often produces weight loss—a side effect that bulimic patients usually welcome. It remains unclear whether topiramate’s weight-loss effects might pose a hazard in patients with simultaneous bulimic and anorexic symptoms.

Other antidepressants. If the above strategies fail, other antidepressant options include venlafaxine, tricyclics, and monoamine oxidase inhibitors. Bupropion is not recommended in bulimia nervosa; one trial17 of this agent resulted in a much higher rate of grand mal seizures in bulimic patients than in patients taking bupropion for depression.

In bulimic patients with concomitant bipolar disorder, the anticonvulsants carbamazepine and valproate often reduce affective and bulimic symptoms. By contrast, the anticonvulsant phenytoin—once thought to be useful in bulimia nervosa10 —offers little benefit for either bulimic or affective symptoms.

Persistence is important when initial medication trials fail. One unblinded study followed 36 bulimic patients 9 to 19 months after they completed a controlled study with trazodone.18 Of the 26 patients who tried a second or third antidepressant, 17 (65%) achieved remission of bulimia on follow-up. Of the 10 patients who declined a second or third trial, only 1 (10%) attained remission.

Notably, these study results were obtained before the SSRIs and other newer antidepressants or topiramate became available. Cooperative patients using present-day medications might be able to achieve remission rates that exceed 65%.

Algorithm Proposed treatment approach to bulimia nervosa



Table 3

How effective are psychotherapies in treating bulimia nervosa?

PsychotherapyEvidence for efficacyRemarks
Cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT)+++Controlled evidence for efficacy in individual and group treatment
Interpersonal psychotherapy (IPT)++Effective, but slower than CBT
Exposure with response prevention+May be added to other behavioral techniques, though additive benefit questionable
Dialectical behavior therapy+Highly structured behavioral technique originally developed for borderline personality disorder
Self-help groups+Frequently considered very helpful by patients
Psychodynamic psychotherapy0“Recovered memory” approaches are frankly harmful
Eye movement desensitization and reprocessing (EMDR)0Dubious theoretical basis; no methodologically acceptable evidence for efficacy
0 No apparent efficacy
+ Occasional effect; limited evidence
++ Clear effect; good evidence from controlled trial(s)
+++ Strongly documented effect; evidence from multiple controlled trials.

Psychotherapy

Cognitive-behavioral therapy. CBT—given either individually or in groups—is the most effective psychotherapy for bulimia (Table 3).19 CBT typically involves 3 to 6 months of helping the patient focus on her bulimic behaviors and on specific attitudes—such as unrealistic preoccupations with being “too fat”—that perpetuate the behaviors.

In practice, unfortunately, few bulimic patients are offered CBT, perhaps because few clinicians are trained in the specific approach used for bulimia nervosa.19 If you are not trained in using CBT for bulimia and do not have access to colleagues who offer this treatment, you may begin with medication plus simple behavioral treatments, such as:

  • offering supportive therapy in the office
  • referring patients to self-help groups for persons with eating disorders.

If this strategy fails, encourage patients to consider CBT—even if they must travel some distance to obtain it.

Other specialized psychotherapies. Dialectical behavior therapy and interpersonal psychotherapy appear to be effective in bulimia. Again, however, clinicians who lack training in these techniques or access to local experts may be unable to offer them. Psychodynamic therapy does not appear to offer greater benefit in bulimia nervosa than ordinary supportive counseling.

Dubious therapies. One psychodynamic approach—regrettably still practiced—is “recovered memory therapy.” Therapists who use it claim that childhood sexual abuse or other trauma can cause bulimic symptoms but patients have repressed the memory of these events.20

No methodologically sound evidence has shown that childhood sexual abuse can cause bulimia nervosa years or decades later.21 Nor is there acceptable evidence that people can repress the memory of a traumatic experience.22 Therapists administering recovered memory therapy have been subjected to malpractice judgments totaling tens of millions of dollars from suits filed by patients who eventually realized that so-called “recovered” memories were false.23

Another dubious therapy—eye movement desensitization and reprocessing (EMDR)—also may involve attempts to “recover” memories of putative traumatic events.24 No methodologically sound evidence has shown that EMDR is effective in bulimic patients, and the technique’s theoretical basis is questionable.24,25

Related resources

Drug brand names

  • Bupropion • Wellbutrin
  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Desipramine • Norpramin
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Lithium • Lithobid, Eskalith
  • Nortriptyline • Pamelor, Aventyl
  • Sertraline • Zoloft
  • Topiramate • Topamax
  • Trazodone • Desyrel
  • Liothyronine • Cytomel
  • Venlafaxine • Effexor

Disclosure

Dr. Pope receives research support from Ortho-McNeil Pharmaceuticals and is a consultant to Solvay Pharmaceuticals and Auxilium Pharmaceuticals.

 

 

Dr. Hudson receives research support from and is a consultant to Eli Lilly & Co. and Ortho-McNeil Pharmaceuticals.

Thousands of scientific papers have been written about bulimia, but not all patients receive effective treatments that produce remission.

To set the record straight and help psychiatrists avoid undertreating bulimia, this article discusses:

  • evidence for using antidepressants, even when patients are not “depressed”
  • merits of psychotherapies, including those shown to work and those that can harm
  • augmentation therapies that can help increase response from partial to full remission.

Initial evaluation

Diagnosis. Bulimia nervosa is characterized by eating binges, followed by purging behaviors such as self-induced vomiting or laxative abuse1,2 (Table 1). It affects 1% to 3% of adolescent girls and young women and occurs in women 5 to 10 times more often than in men.

Bulimia is often persistent. About one-half of bulimic patients—including those who have been treated—continue to show eating disorder features on long-term follow-up.3,4

Psychiatric comorbidity. Most bulimic patients report a history of other psychiatric disorders, especially major depressive and bipolar disorders and anxiety disorders such as panic disorder, social phobia, and obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD).5 Because these psychiatric comorbidities may occur before, during, or after bulimia nervosa, one cannot assume that mood or anxiety disorders are a cause or consequence of bulimia. Instead, bulimia nervosa, mood disorders, and anxiety disorders may be different expressions of a shared etiologic abnormality.

Table 1

DSM-IV-TR diagnostic criteria for bulimia nervosa

  1. Recurrent episodes of binge eating, characterized by both of the following:
  2. Recurrent inappropriate compensatory behavior in order to prevent weight gain, such as self-induced vomiting; misuse of laxatives, diuretics, enemas, or other medications; fasting; or excessive exercise
  3. The binge eating and inappropriate compensatory behaviors both occur, on average, at least twice a week for 3 months
  4. Self-evaluation is unduly influenced by body shape and weight
  5. The disturbance does not occur exclusively during episodes of anorexia nervosa
Specify type:
Purging type: during the current episode of bulimia nervosa, the person has regularly engaged in self-induced vomiting or the misuse of laxatives, diuretics, or enemas
Non-purging type: during the current episode of bulimia nervosa, the person has used other inappropriate compensatory behaviors, such as fasting or excessive exercise but has not regularly engaged in self-induced vomiting or the misuse of laxatives, diuretics, or enemas
Source: Reprinted with permission from the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 4th ed, text rev. Copyright 2000 American Psychiatric Association.

Evidence supporting this hypothesis comes from studies showing that these disorders:

  • respond to several chemically unrelated families of antidepressants6,7
  • frequently co-occur in individual patients5,7
  • frequently co-aggregate in families.7-9

We have published this evidence6,7 and proposed that bulimia nervosa may be one form of a larger underlying disorder, which we termed “affective spectrum disorder.”

Antidepressants are often rapidly effective in treating bulimic symptoms,10 regardless of whether patients exhibit depressive symptoms. Thus, there is no reason to withhold antidepressant therapy simply because a bulimic patient is not depressed. The term “antidepressant” may be a misnomer; these drugs are effective for numerous conditions, of which depression is only one.

Anorexic symptoms. Co-occurring depressive or anxiety disorders in a bulimic patient will not greatly alter treatment. The antidepressants and psychotherapies typically used to treat bulimia are often equally effective for affective disorders. Co-occurring anorexia nervosa, however, is a more serious concern.

Bulimic patients often display a history of anorexia nervosa; in many cases, the patient develops anorexia nervosa as a teenager and then progresses to bulimia nervosa across several years. Her prognosis is much better if her weight normalizes with the shift to bulimia nervosa, than if her weight remains well below normal for her height. It is unclear why medications and psychotherapy are much less effective in bulimic patients with anorexic symptoms than in those with bulimia alone. Watch for further details on anorexia nervosa as this series continues in future issues of.

Medical considerations. Potential medical complications—mostly consequences of vomiting or laxative use—are important to consider when you assess a bulimic patient:1

  • The acid in vomitus may gradually erode tooth enamel, requiring dental consultation.
  • Vomitus may inflame salivary gland ducts, though the swelling is usually benign.
  • Frequent vomiting may result in hypokalemia and alkalosis, although aggressive medical treatment usually is not needed.

Ask about ipecac use. To induce vomiting, some patients may abuse ipecac syrup, which can cause cardiomyopathy.11

Inpatient or outpatient? Unless the bulimic patient displays severe and medically dangerous anorexic symptoms, she can usually be treated as an outpatient. However, evaluate her carefully for suicidal ideation—which is not uncommon in bulimia nervosa—and consider inpatient treatment if necessary.

Medication vs. psychotherapy

The relative merits of medication versus psychotherapy in treating bulimia nervosa continue to be debated. The Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews includes meta-analyses of both drug therapy12 and psychotherapy13 for bulimia nervosa. The 2001 drug therapy review found that “the use of a single antidepressant agent was clinically effective,” with no one drug clearly superior to another. Notably, this review was published before recent findings on topiramate.

 

 

The corresponding 2002 review of psychotherapy concludes—somewhat more cautiously—that “there is a small body of evidence for the efficacy of cognitive-behavior therapy in bulimia nervosa and similar syndromes, but the quality of trials is very variable and sample sizes are often small.”

In bulimia nervosa and other psychiatric disorders, comparing psychotherapy with drug therapy is hazardous because several factors bias the comparison in favor of psychotherapy. These factors include an expectational effect, a responsibility effect, and differential generalizability of study results.

Expectational effect. Patients in clinical trials are aware that they are receiving psychotherapy and, presumably, that study investigators hope to demonstrate its efficacy. This might account for much of psychotherapy’s apparent effect, as even placebos can produce 30% to 50% improvement in bulimia.14

Responsibility effect. If a patient fails to improve in a drug study, she will conclude that the drug has failed. But if she fails to improve in a psychotherapy study, she may conclude that she has failed. Because psychological treatments generally require patients to work in therapy, the patient may feel partially responsible for the outcome. Thus, to avoid cognitive dissonance, she may consciously or unconsciously exaggerate her improvement, both in her own mind and when reporting to treaters.

Differential generalizability. Psychological study protocols, such as administering several months of a behavioral treatment, usually mimic clinical practice fairly well. This is not the case with drug study protocols.

No responsible clinician would inflexibly administer a single dosage of a single drug for a fixed period to every bulimic patient and then declare failure for all nonresponders, as is done in study protocols. In practice, the clinician can offer nonresponders augmentation strategies and additional drug trials. Thus, calculations of bulimia response rates in drug studies substantially understate response to drug therapy in clinical practice.

Table 2

How effective are medications in treating bulimia nervosa?

MedicationEvidence for efficacyRemarks
Antidepressants
Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors+++Fluoxetine is only SSRI studied in controlled trials
Tricyclics+++Generally more side effects than SSRIs
Monoamine oxidase inhibitors++High rates of remission, but dietary restrictions
Trazodone++Only one controlled trial
Venlafaxine, mirtazapine, nefazodone?No controlled trials, but probably effective
Bupropion(++)Not recommended; caused seizures in bulimic patients
Anticonvulsants
Topiramate++Only one controlled trial, but substantial effect size
Phenytoin+Little efficacy in only controlled study
Carbamazepine+May be useful in bulimia with comorbid bipolar disorder
Valproate+May be useful in bulimia with comorbid bipolar disorder
Other agents
Liothyronine+Augmentation agent in patients with incomplete antidepressant response
Lithium+Ineffective in only controlled trial; possible augmentation strategy
Naltrexone0Ineffective in two controlled trials
Ondansetron+One controlled trial
0 No apparent efficacy
+ Occasional effect; limited evidence
++ Clear effect; good evidence from controlled trial(s)
+++ Strongly documented effect; evidence from multiple controlled trials.
( ) Negative effect

One also might note that psychological study findings have not “sold” well in the clinical practice marketplace. For example, in a recent survey of more than 220 bulimic women treated with psychotherapy, only 6.9% said they received a full course of cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT)14 —despite two decades of evidence of its efficacy. By contrast, untested, inefficacious, and possibly harmful psychotherapies for bulimia—including recovered-memory therapy—appear to be thriving.

Recommendation. Interpret with caution any head-to-head comparisons of psychological versus drug therapies—especially when clinical practice recommendations are made. Certain psychological therapies provided by specifically-trained individuals likely do help patients with bulimia nervosa. However, biases inherent to the studies may inflate psychological therapies’ efficacy when compared with that of drug therapy.

Therefore, for a psychiatrist who does not specialize in eating disorders to offer exclusively psychological therapy to a bulimic patient—while withholding or postponing drug therapy—may now be a questionable practice.

Choosing drug therapies

Although consensus is lacking on an optimal treatment trial sequence for bulimia nervosa, we suggest a rational approach based on the evidence and our experience (Algorithm).

First-line antidepressants. A selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SSRI) trial is usually the first choice (Table 2), and some data suggest that higher-than-usual dosages may be required. For example, in a large multicenter trial of fluoxetine in bulimia nervosa, 60 mg/d was considerably more effective than 20 mg/d for reducing binge eating behavior and vomiting frequency.15

Based on our observations, however, we believe that noncompliance or irregular compliance may account for this difference in response. Bulimic patients’ impulsive and obsessional behavior may keep them from taking their medications as prescribed. The higher fluoxetine dosage may therefore have been more effective simply because it ensured adequate plasma levels, even when patients missed or forgot multiple doses.

Augmenting agents. A first antidepressant trial rarely leads to complete remission of bulimic symptoms. This is not a serious concern, however, because many other options are available.

Liothyronine. Partial responders to SSRIs often become complete responders when we add a 10-day trial of liothyronine (T3), 25 μg/d. If this fails, we may try augmenting with lithium carbonate, although bulimic patients are often afraid of weight gain or lithium’s other side effects.

 

 

Topiramate. A newer augmentation strategy is to add the anticonvulsant topiramate. Used alone, topiramate demonstrated effectiveness for bulimia nervosa in one placebo-controlled, double-blind trial.16

Adding topiramate to an antidepressant regimen will likely reduce any remaining bulimic symptoms. In addition, topiramate often produces weight loss—a side effect that bulimic patients usually welcome. It remains unclear whether topiramate’s weight-loss effects might pose a hazard in patients with simultaneous bulimic and anorexic symptoms.

Other antidepressants. If the above strategies fail, other antidepressant options include venlafaxine, tricyclics, and monoamine oxidase inhibitors. Bupropion is not recommended in bulimia nervosa; one trial17 of this agent resulted in a much higher rate of grand mal seizures in bulimic patients than in patients taking bupropion for depression.

In bulimic patients with concomitant bipolar disorder, the anticonvulsants carbamazepine and valproate often reduce affective and bulimic symptoms. By contrast, the anticonvulsant phenytoin—once thought to be useful in bulimia nervosa10 —offers little benefit for either bulimic or affective symptoms.

Persistence is important when initial medication trials fail. One unblinded study followed 36 bulimic patients 9 to 19 months after they completed a controlled study with trazodone.18 Of the 26 patients who tried a second or third antidepressant, 17 (65%) achieved remission of bulimia on follow-up. Of the 10 patients who declined a second or third trial, only 1 (10%) attained remission.

Notably, these study results were obtained before the SSRIs and other newer antidepressants or topiramate became available. Cooperative patients using present-day medications might be able to achieve remission rates that exceed 65%.

Algorithm Proposed treatment approach to bulimia nervosa



Table 3

How effective are psychotherapies in treating bulimia nervosa?

PsychotherapyEvidence for efficacyRemarks
Cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT)+++Controlled evidence for efficacy in individual and group treatment
Interpersonal psychotherapy (IPT)++Effective, but slower than CBT
Exposure with response prevention+May be added to other behavioral techniques, though additive benefit questionable
Dialectical behavior therapy+Highly structured behavioral technique originally developed for borderline personality disorder
Self-help groups+Frequently considered very helpful by patients
Psychodynamic psychotherapy0“Recovered memory” approaches are frankly harmful
Eye movement desensitization and reprocessing (EMDR)0Dubious theoretical basis; no methodologically acceptable evidence for efficacy
0 No apparent efficacy
+ Occasional effect; limited evidence
++ Clear effect; good evidence from controlled trial(s)
+++ Strongly documented effect; evidence from multiple controlled trials.

Psychotherapy

Cognitive-behavioral therapy. CBT—given either individually or in groups—is the most effective psychotherapy for bulimia (Table 3).19 CBT typically involves 3 to 6 months of helping the patient focus on her bulimic behaviors and on specific attitudes—such as unrealistic preoccupations with being “too fat”—that perpetuate the behaviors.

In practice, unfortunately, few bulimic patients are offered CBT, perhaps because few clinicians are trained in the specific approach used for bulimia nervosa.19 If you are not trained in using CBT for bulimia and do not have access to colleagues who offer this treatment, you may begin with medication plus simple behavioral treatments, such as:

  • offering supportive therapy in the office
  • referring patients to self-help groups for persons with eating disorders.

If this strategy fails, encourage patients to consider CBT—even if they must travel some distance to obtain it.

Other specialized psychotherapies. Dialectical behavior therapy and interpersonal psychotherapy appear to be effective in bulimia. Again, however, clinicians who lack training in these techniques or access to local experts may be unable to offer them. Psychodynamic therapy does not appear to offer greater benefit in bulimia nervosa than ordinary supportive counseling.

Dubious therapies. One psychodynamic approach—regrettably still practiced—is “recovered memory therapy.” Therapists who use it claim that childhood sexual abuse or other trauma can cause bulimic symptoms but patients have repressed the memory of these events.20

No methodologically sound evidence has shown that childhood sexual abuse can cause bulimia nervosa years or decades later.21 Nor is there acceptable evidence that people can repress the memory of a traumatic experience.22 Therapists administering recovered memory therapy have been subjected to malpractice judgments totaling tens of millions of dollars from suits filed by patients who eventually realized that so-called “recovered” memories were false.23

Another dubious therapy—eye movement desensitization and reprocessing (EMDR)—also may involve attempts to “recover” memories of putative traumatic events.24 No methodologically sound evidence has shown that EMDR is effective in bulimic patients, and the technique’s theoretical basis is questionable.24,25

Related resources

Drug brand names

  • Bupropion • Wellbutrin
  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Desipramine • Norpramin
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Lithium • Lithobid, Eskalith
  • Nortriptyline • Pamelor, Aventyl
  • Sertraline • Zoloft
  • Topiramate • Topamax
  • Trazodone • Desyrel
  • Liothyronine • Cytomel
  • Venlafaxine • Effexor

Disclosure

Dr. Pope receives research support from Ortho-McNeil Pharmaceuticals and is a consultant to Solvay Pharmaceuticals and Auxilium Pharmaceuticals.

 

 

Dr. Hudson receives research support from and is a consultant to Eli Lilly & Co. and Ortho-McNeil Pharmaceuticals.

References

1. Mehler PS. Clinical practice. Bulimia nervosa. N Engl J Med 2003;349(9):875-81.

2. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed, text rev). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association,2000.

3. Fisher M. The course and outcome of eating disorders in adults and in adolescents: a review. Adolesc Med 2003;14(1):149-58.

4. Fairburn CG, Norman PA, Welch SL, et al. A prospective study of outcome in bulimia nervosa and the long-term effects of three psychological treatments. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1995;52(4):304-12.

5. Hudson JI, Pope HG, Jr, Yurgelun-Todd D, et al. A controlled study of lifetime prevalence of affective and other psychiatric disorders in bulimic outpatients. Am J Psychiatry 1987;144(10):1283-7.

6. Hudson JI, Pope HG, Jr. Affective spectrum disorder: does antidepressant response identify a family of disorders with a common pathophysiology? Am J Psychiatry 1990;147(5):552-64.

7. Hudson JI, Mangweth B, Pope HG, Jr, et al. Family study of affective spectrum disorder. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2003;60:170-7.

8. Hudson JI, Laird NM, Betensky RA, et al. Multivariate logistic regression for familial aggregation of two disorders: II. Analysis of studies of eating and mood disorders. Am J Epidemiology 2001;153(5):506-14.

9. Mangweth B, Hudson JI, Pope HG, Jr, et al. Family study of the aggregation of eating disorders and mood disorders. Psychol Med (in press).

10. Hudson JI, Pope HG, Jr, Carter WP. Pharmacologic therapy of bulimia nervosa. In: Goldstein D (ed). The management of eating disorders and obesity (2nd ed) Totowa, NJ: Humana Press, Inc.(in press).

11. Pope HG, Jr, Hudson JI, Nixon RA, Herridge PL. The epidemiology of ipecac abuse. N Engl J Med 1986;14(4):245-6.

12. Hay PJ, Bacaltchuk J. Psychotherapy for bulimia nervosa and binging. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2003;(1):CD000562.-

13. Bacaltchuk J, Hay P. Antidepressants versus placebo for people with bulimia nervosa. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2001;(4):CD003391.-

14. Crow S, Mussell MP, Peterson C, et al. Prior treatment received by patients with bulimia nervosa. Int J Eating Disord 1999;25(1):39-44.

15. Fluoxetine Bulimia Collaborative Study Group Fluoxetine in the treatment of bulimia nervosa: a multicenter placebo-controlled, double-blind trial. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1992;49:139-47.

16. Hoopes S, Reimherr F, Hedges D, et al. Part 1:Topiramate in the treatment of bulimia nervosa: a randomized, double-blind, placebocontrolled trial. J Clin Psychiatry (in press).

17. Horne RL, Ferguson JM, Pope HG, Jr, et al. Treatment of bulimia with bupropion: a controlled multi-center trial. J Clin Psychiatry 1988;49(7):262-6.

18. Pope HG, Jr, McElroy SL, Keck PE, Jr, Hudson JI. Long-term pharmacotherapy of bulimia nervosa. J Clin Psychopharmacol 1989;9(5):385-6.

19. Fairburn CG, Harrison PJ. Eating disorders. Lancet 2003;361(9355):407-16.

20. Pope HG, Jr, Hudson JI. “Recovered memory” therapy for eating disorders: implications of the Ramona verdict. Int J Eat Disord 1996;19(2):139-45.

21. Pope HG, Jr, Hudson JI. Does childhood sexual abuse cause adult psychiatric disorders? Essentials of methodology. J Psychiatry Law 1995;Fall:363-81.

22. Pope HG, Jr, Oliva PS, Hudson JI. Repressed memories. The scientific status of research on repressed memories. In: Faigman DL, Kaye DH, Saks MJ, Sanders J (eds). Science in the law: social and behavioral science issues St. Paul, MN: West Group, 2002;487-526.

23. Cannell J, Hudson JI, Pope HG, Jr. Standards for informed consent in recovered memory therapy. J Am Acad Psychiatry Law 2001;29(2):138-47.

24. Hudson JI, Chase EA, Pope HG, Jr. Eye movement desensitization and reprocessing in eating disorders: caution against premature acceptance. Int J Eat Disord 1998;23:1-5.

25. McNally RJ. EMDR and mesmerism: a comparative historical analysis. J Anxiety Disord 1999;13(1-2):225-36.

References

1. Mehler PS. Clinical practice. Bulimia nervosa. N Engl J Med 2003;349(9):875-81.

2. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (4th ed, text rev). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association,2000.

3. Fisher M. The course and outcome of eating disorders in adults and in adolescents: a review. Adolesc Med 2003;14(1):149-58.

4. Fairburn CG, Norman PA, Welch SL, et al. A prospective study of outcome in bulimia nervosa and the long-term effects of three psychological treatments. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1995;52(4):304-12.

5. Hudson JI, Pope HG, Jr, Yurgelun-Todd D, et al. A controlled study of lifetime prevalence of affective and other psychiatric disorders in bulimic outpatients. Am J Psychiatry 1987;144(10):1283-7.

6. Hudson JI, Pope HG, Jr. Affective spectrum disorder: does antidepressant response identify a family of disorders with a common pathophysiology? Am J Psychiatry 1990;147(5):552-64.

7. Hudson JI, Mangweth B, Pope HG, Jr, et al. Family study of affective spectrum disorder. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2003;60:170-7.

8. Hudson JI, Laird NM, Betensky RA, et al. Multivariate logistic regression for familial aggregation of two disorders: II. Analysis of studies of eating and mood disorders. Am J Epidemiology 2001;153(5):506-14.

9. Mangweth B, Hudson JI, Pope HG, Jr, et al. Family study of the aggregation of eating disorders and mood disorders. Psychol Med (in press).

10. Hudson JI, Pope HG, Jr, Carter WP. Pharmacologic therapy of bulimia nervosa. In: Goldstein D (ed). The management of eating disorders and obesity (2nd ed) Totowa, NJ: Humana Press, Inc.(in press).

11. Pope HG, Jr, Hudson JI, Nixon RA, Herridge PL. The epidemiology of ipecac abuse. N Engl J Med 1986;14(4):245-6.

12. Hay PJ, Bacaltchuk J. Psychotherapy for bulimia nervosa and binging. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2003;(1):CD000562.-

13. Bacaltchuk J, Hay P. Antidepressants versus placebo for people with bulimia nervosa. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2001;(4):CD003391.-

14. Crow S, Mussell MP, Peterson C, et al. Prior treatment received by patients with bulimia nervosa. Int J Eating Disord 1999;25(1):39-44.

15. Fluoxetine Bulimia Collaborative Study Group Fluoxetine in the treatment of bulimia nervosa: a multicenter placebo-controlled, double-blind trial. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1992;49:139-47.

16. Hoopes S, Reimherr F, Hedges D, et al. Part 1:Topiramate in the treatment of bulimia nervosa: a randomized, double-blind, placebocontrolled trial. J Clin Psychiatry (in press).

17. Horne RL, Ferguson JM, Pope HG, Jr, et al. Treatment of bulimia with bupropion: a controlled multi-center trial. J Clin Psychiatry 1988;49(7):262-6.

18. Pope HG, Jr, McElroy SL, Keck PE, Jr, Hudson JI. Long-term pharmacotherapy of bulimia nervosa. J Clin Psychopharmacol 1989;9(5):385-6.

19. Fairburn CG, Harrison PJ. Eating disorders. Lancet 2003;361(9355):407-16.

20. Pope HG, Jr, Hudson JI. “Recovered memory” therapy for eating disorders: implications of the Ramona verdict. Int J Eat Disord 1996;19(2):139-45.

21. Pope HG, Jr, Hudson JI. Does childhood sexual abuse cause adult psychiatric disorders? Essentials of methodology. J Psychiatry Law 1995;Fall:363-81.

22. Pope HG, Jr, Oliva PS, Hudson JI. Repressed memories. The scientific status of research on repressed memories. In: Faigman DL, Kaye DH, Saks MJ, Sanders J (eds). Science in the law: social and behavioral science issues St. Paul, MN: West Group, 2002;487-526.

23. Cannell J, Hudson JI, Pope HG, Jr. Standards for informed consent in recovered memory therapy. J Am Acad Psychiatry Law 2001;29(2):138-47.

24. Hudson JI, Chase EA, Pope HG, Jr. Eye movement desensitization and reprocessing in eating disorders: caution against premature acceptance. Int J Eat Disord 1998;23:1-5.

25. McNally RJ. EMDR and mesmerism: a comparative historical analysis. J Anxiety Disord 1999;13(1-2):225-36.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 03(01)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 03(01)
Page Number
12-22
Page Number
12-22
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Update on eating disorders Bulimia nervosa: Persistent disorder requires equally persistent treatment
Display Headline
Update on eating disorders Bulimia nervosa: Persistent disorder requires equally persistent treatment
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

Captive of the mirror: ‘I pick at my face all day, every day’

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:11
Display Headline
Captive of the mirror: ‘I pick at my face all day, every day’

Lying in the hospital bed, her face covered in bandages, Ms. S talked of suicide while awaiting reconstructive surgery on her nose: “If the only way to stop is by killing myself, I will.” When asked what she wanted to stop, she replied, “The picking. I pick at my face all day, every day.”

Ms. S, age 22, had picked a hole through the bridge of her nose, and her face was scarred and covered with scabs. Every morning for 5 years, she had gotten up, dressed, and then—after washing her face—felt intense, uncontrollable urges to pick at her face. Hours would go by and she was still picking, even as her face started to bleed: “I try to resist, but I can’t.”

Ms. S started picking her face when she was 17. She missed so much of high school because of time spent picking that she did not graduate. She now lives alone on medical disability. Conscious of her facial scarring, she rarely goes out in public. “People stare at me as if I’m a zoo animal; it’s so painful,” she says.

After her plastic surgery, she told the staff psychiatrist she had never sought help because she thought no one would understand her behavior. “It doesn’t make sense to me, and I’ve lived with it for years.”

Patients such as Ms. S often suffer in isolation for years, unaware that skin picking is a psychiatric disorder that can be treated successfully. Some are referred to psychiatrists through hospital emergency rooms or by dermatologists; others commit suicide, as Ms. S threatened to do.

In our practice, we recognize skin picking in patients with comorbid mood and anxiety disorders, body dysmorphic disorder (BDD), substance use disorders, impulse control disorders such as trichotillomania or kleptomania, and personality disorders.

Based on recent evidence and our experience, we discuss three steps to help you diagnose pathologic skin picking. We then examine treatment options that have shown benefit for skinpicking patients, including habit reversal psychotherapy and medications.

WHAT IS SKIN PICKING?

Pathologic skin picking is repetitive, ritualistic, or impulsive picking of normal skin, leading to tissue damage, personal distress, and impaired functioning.1 The behavior has been described for more than 100 years but remains poorly understood, under-diagnosed, and under-treated.2,3

Most people pick at their hands or face to a limited extent,4 and picking does not by itself suggest a psychiatric disorder. Pathology exists in the focus, duration, and extent of the behavior, as well as reasons for picking, associated emotions, and resulting problems. Persons with pathologic skin picking report irresistible, intrusive, and/or senseless thoughts of picking or impulses to pick, accompanied by marked distress.1 Pathologic skin picking is recurrent and usually results in noticeable skin damage, although many patients try to camouflage the lesions or scarring with makeup.

Pathologic skin picking’s prevalence is unknown. One early study estimated that 2% of dermatology patients suffer from skin picking.1 Two clinical studies found that 3.8% of college students4 and 28% of patients with BDD meet diagnostic criteria.5,6

TWEEZERS, RAZOR BLADES, KNIVES…

Persons who engage in pathologic skin picking typically spend substantial time picking. Most often they pick the face, but any body part—lips, arms, hands, or legs—may be the focus. They may pick at blemishes, pimples, scars, or healthy skin. Some use their hands and fingernails to pick, and others use pins, tweezers, razor blades, or knives. Picking may worsen in the evening.2,7

Although picking episodes may last only a few minutes, many patients have multiple episodes each day. Some pick for as long as 12 hours every day,2,5 which often leads to scarring and disfigurement. In one study, 90% of patients had at least minor tissue damage, 61% suffered infections, and 45% had “deep craters” because of picking.2

Reasons for picking. Many patients pick to relieve discomfort or tension.1 Others pick to improve their appearance, as in BDD, or to remove perceived dirt or contaminants, as in obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD).1,5 Still others say they pick as a habit, with minimal awareness.1 Itching or uneven skin may also cause the behavior.1,3 We have found that a patient may pick for several of these reasons. Most report:

  • tension before picking
  • satisfaction during picking
  • guilt, shame, and dysphoria after picking.1

Social impairment. Shame after picking episodes often leads patients to cover lesions with clothing or makeup and to avoid social contact.7 Substantial social and occupational impairment have been reported3,5,7 because of the hours spent picking and from avoiding people because of disfigurement.

Physical injury. Skin picking may cause serious injuries. Some of our patients have required emergency medical intervention and sutures after picking through a major blood vessel (such as the facial artery). One woman—who picked at a pimple on her neck with tweezers—lacerated her carotid artery, causing a near-fatal hemorrhage that required emergency surgery.8

 

 

Suicide risk. In a series of 123 patients with BDD, 33 (27%) excessively picked their skin and 10 of those who picked their skin (33%) had attempted suicide.5 In a case series of 31 patients with skin picking, 10% had attempted suicide.2 We know of several young women whose chief complaint was skin picking and who committed suicide.5

Gender. The gender ratio of patients with skin picking remains unclear. In two case series that totaled 65 patients, 87% to 92% of those with pathologic skin picking were female.2,7 In the series of patients with BDD, 58% of the 33 who compulsively picked their skin were female.5 On the other hand, most of 28 patients seen in a dermatology clinic for neurotic excoriations were male.9

Onset and chronicity. Pathologic skin picking may develop at any age, but it usually manifests in late adolescence or early adulthood, often after onset of a dermatologic illness such as acne2 or in response to itching.3 Although long-term studies have not been done, the disorder appears to often be chronic, with waxing and waning of picking intensity and frequency.1,2

Table 1

Skin picking: 3 steps to diagnosis and treatment

Step 1: Assess reasons for skin picking
 Dermatologic or medical disorder?
  • atopic dermatitis
  • scabies
  • Prader-Willi syndrome

 Psychiatric disorder?
  • body dysmorphic disorder
  • obsessive-compulsive disorder
  • delusional disorder
  • dermatitis artefacta

 Impulse control disorder, not otherwise specified?
Step 2: Assess picking severity
 Treat comorbid mood or anxiety disorders
 Treat skin picking if:
  • patient is preoccupied with picking
  • picking causes distress or dysfunction
  • picking is causing skin lesions/disfigurement
Step 3: Provide recommended treatment
 For adults
 Habit reversal therapy plus medication is usually necessary
 For children and adolescents
 Habit reversal therapy alone for mild to moderate symptoms
 Habit reversal therapy plus medication for severe symptoms

Comorbid psychopathology. In clinical settings, common comorbid psychopathologies include mood disorders (in 48% to 68% of patients with skin picking), anxiety disorders (41% to 64%), and alcohol use disorders (39%).2

In one patient sample, 71% of skin pickers met criteria for at least one personality disorder (48% had obsessive-compulsive personality disorder, and 26% met criteria for borderline personality disorder).2

Table 2

Medications with evidence of benefit for skin picking*

MedicationDosageType of evidence
SSRIs
 Citalopram40 mg/dCase report (effective only with inositol augmentation)16
 Fluoxetine20 to 80 mg/dCase reports5,14-15 and two double-blind studies23-24
 Fluvoxamine100 to 300 mg/dCase report,8 open-label study,21 and double-blind trial22
 Sertraline50 to 200 mg/dOpen-label study9
Other agents
 Clomipramine50 mg/dCase report3
 Doxepin30 mg/dCase report1
 Naltrexone50 mg/dCase report20
 Olanzapine2.5 to 7.5 mg/dCase report17
 Pimozide4 mg/dCase report18
* Off-label uses; little scientific evidence supports using medications other than SSRIs for treating skin picking. Inform patients of the evidence for using any medication, risk of side effects including change in cardiac conduction (pimozide, clomipramine), seizure risk (pimozide, clomipramine), and tardive dyskinesia (pimozide), and potential interactions with other medications (all of the above).

PRIMARY VS. SECONDARY DISORDER

Is skin picking an independent disorder or a symptom of other psychiatric disorders? Although skin picking is not included in DSM-IV and has no formal diagnostic criteria, some forms of this behavior may belong among the impulse control disorders.

Patients often report an urge to pick their skin in response to increasing tension,1,3 and picking results in transient relief or pleasure.1,2 This description mirrors that of other impulse control disorders, such as trichotillomania and kleptomania. In fact, one study found that trichotillomania and kleptomania were common comorbidities among patients with skin picking (23% and 16%, respectively).2 In 34 patients with psychogenic excoriation, only 7 (21%) appeared to have skin picking as a primary complaint, unaccounted for by another psychiatric disorder.7

Skin picking may also be a symptom of other psychiatric disorders. To determine whether another disorder is present, we ask patients why they pick their skin. Patients may be reluctant to reveal either the picking or the underlying disorder because of embarrassment and shame. The diagnosis can often be clarified by asking about the following conditions:

Body dysmorphic disorder. Nearly 30% of patients with BDD pick their skin to a pathologic extent.5,6 The purpose of picking in BDD is to remove or minimize a nonexistent or slight imperfection in appearance (such as scars, pimples, bumps).5,6

Obsessive-compulsive disorder. Patients with OCD may pick their skin in response to contamination obsessions.1 Picking is often repetitive and ritualistic, and—as with compulsions—the behavior may reduce tension.10

Genetic disorders. Skin picking may be a symptom of Prader-Willi syndrome, a genetic disorder characterized by muscular hypotonia, short stature, characteristic facial features, intellectual disabilities, hypogonadism, hyperphagia, and an increased obesity risk. In one study, 97% of patients with Prader-Willi syndrome engaged in skin picking.11

 

 

Delusional disorder. Delusions of parasitosis may result in skin picking, as patients attempt to remove imagined parasites or other vermin from on or under their skin.12

Dermatitis artefacta. Patients may consciously create skin lesions to assume the sick role. Onethird of patients presenting to dermatologists with a disease that is primarily psychiatric may be suffering from dermatitis artefacta.13

TREATMENT RECOMMENDATIONS

Successful clinical care of pathologic skin picking requires perseverance and patience from both patient and clinician.

Treatment begins with a thorough dermatologic examination for medical causes of skin picking (such as atopic dermatitis or scabies) and to treat excoriations (such as with antibiotics for infection). After the dermatologist has ruled out a medical cause, carefully assess the patient’s picking behavior and related psychiatric problems (Table 1).

  • If picking is secondary to a psychiatric disorder, begin by providing appropriate treatment for that disorder.
  • If picking results from BDD or OCD, we recommend habit reversal therapy combined with medication.
  • If picking appears to be an independent impulse control disorder, simultaneous habit reversal therapy and medication is usually necessary to reduce symptoms.

SSRIs are a reasonable first medication because of evidence for their efficacy in reducing skin picking. Higher dosages—comparable to those used in treating OCD—are usually required to improve skin-picking behavior. You may need to try another SSRI if the first trial results in partial or no response.

In our experience, augmenting an SSRI with naltrexone, 50 mg/d, helps reduce intrusive urges to pick and is worth considering if SSRI therapy results in only partial response.

Children or adolescents. Depending upon symptom severity, a trial of habit reversal therapy may be appropriate before you recommend using medication.

EVIDENCE FOR DRUG THERAPY

Although few treatment studies have been done, skin picking does appear to respond to medication (Table 2).

Because no medications are approved to treat skin-picking behavior, inform patients of any “off-label” uses and the scientific or clinical evidence for considering medication treatment.

Case reports and case series. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) appear most effective in patients with picking behavior, including:

  • fluvoxamine, 300 mg/d, in one case report8
  • fluoxetine, 20 to 80 mg/d, in several case reports.5,14-15

In a series of 33 patients with BDD and compulsive skin picking, one-half (49%) of a variety of SSRI treatment trials improved BDD symptoms and skin picking behavior. The percentage of patients who improved was not examined. Dermatologic treatment alone was effective for only 15% of patients.5

Medications other than SSRIs have also been studied. One patient improved within 3 weeks of taking the tricyclic antidepressant clomipramine, 50 mg/d.3 Another patient picked her skin less often 4 weeks after inositol, 18 grams/d, was added to citalopram, 40 mg/d. Inositol, a nonprescription isomer of glucose, is a precursor in the phosphatidylinositol second-messenger cycle, which may play a role at certain serotonin receptors.16 The patient was given 6 grams dissolved in water three times daily.

Case reports have also suggested that olanzapine, pimozide, doxepin, and naltrexone may be beneficial in reducing skin excoriations. These reports often involved patients with psychiatric and medical comorbidities.17-20

Table 3

Habit reversal: 5 components in patient learning

Awareness about picking behavior
Relaxation to reduce anxiety
Competing responses to learn behaviors incompatible with picking (such as fist clenching)
Rewarding oneself for successfully resisting picking
Generalizing the behavioral control

Open-label studies. In an open-label study of 28 patients with neurotic excoriation treated in a dermatology clinic, 68% improved within 1 month with sertraline, mean dosage 95 mg/d.9 Similarly, open-label fluvoxamine, mean dosage 112.5 mg/d, was effective in reducing skin excoriation in 7 of 14 patients treated for 12 weeks in a psychiatric setting.21

Double-blind studies. In a double-blind study using fluvoxamine with supportive psychotherapy in patients with psychocutaneous disorders, all five patients with acne excoriee improved after 4 weeks of medication treatment (none was randomized to placebo).22

In a 10-week, double-blind study, 10 patients were assigned to fluoxetine, mean dosage 53.0 ± 16.4 mg/d, and 11 to placebo. A patient self-report visual analog scale showed that fluoxetine was significantly more effective than placebo in reducing picking behavior. Two other measures did not show significant improvement, however, perhaps because of the small sample size.23

In a third study, 8 of 15 patients responded to open-label fluoxetine, 20 to 60 mg/d after 6 weeks. The responders were then randomized to 6 additional weeks of fluoxetine or placebo. All four patients assigned to continue active medication maintained their improvement. Symptoms returned to baseline by week 12 in the four assigned to placebo.24

EVIDENCE FOR HABIT REVERSAL THERAPY

No controlled trials have examined psychosocial treatments for skin picking, but several psychotherapeutic interventions appear promising. Habit reversal has shown promise in three case reports totaling seven patients and appears to reduce picking behavior within a few weeks.25-27

 

 

In a case series, three patients were successfully treated with habit reversal (Table 3) and cognitive-behavioral techniques, consisting of:

  • awareness training (using a skin-picking diary)
  • competing response techniques (such as making a fist or squeezing a ball)
  • emotion regulation skills
  • psychoeducation
  • cognitive restructuring (such as using Socratic questioning to produce rational alternatives) in situations that elicit the urge to pick.28

In another case series, 22 dermatology patients with skin picking received psychotherapy with insight-oriented and behavioral components. Therapy included attention to developmental issues and active conflicts, cognitive restructuring, and tools to manage aggression and social relations. Although treatment duration varied— the mean was weekly for 14 months—skin lesions healed in 17 patients (77%).29

Related resources

  • Obsessive-Compulsive Foundation http://www.ocfoundation.org
  • Koran LM. Obsessive-compulsive and related disorders in adults: A comprehensive clinical guide. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 1999.
  • Phillips KA. The broken mirror: Recognizing and treating body dysmorphic disorder. New York: Oxford University Press, 1996.

Drug brand names

  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Clomipramine • Anafranil
  • Doxepin • Sinequan
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Fluvoxamine • Luvox
  • Naltrexone • ReVia
  • Olanzapine • Zyprexa
  • Pimozide • Orap
  • Sertraline • Zoloft

Disclosure

Dr. Grant reports no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Dr. Phillips receives research support from Eli Lilly and Co., Forest Pharmaceuticals, and Gate Pharmaceuticals; she is a speaker for or consultant to Eli Lilly and Co., Forest Pharmaceuticals, and UCB Pharma.

References

1. Arnold LM, Auchenbach MB, McElroy SL. Psychogenic excoriation: clinical features, proposed diagnostic criteria, epidemiology and approaches to treatment. CNS Drugs 2001;15:351-9.

2. Wilhelm S, Keuthen NJ, Deckersbach T, et al. Self-injurious skin picking: clinical characteristics and comorbidity. J Clin Psychiatry 1999;60:454-9.

3. Gupta MA, Gupta AK, Haberman HF. Neurotic excoriations: a review and some new perspectives. Compr Psychiatry 1986;27:381-6.

4. Keuthen NJ, Deckersbach T, Wilhelm S, et al. Repetitive skinpicking in a student population and comparison with a sample of self-injurious skin-pickers. Psychosomatics 2000;41:210-15.

5. Phillips KA, Taub SL. Skin picking as a symptom of body dysmorphic disorder. Psychopharmacol Bull 1995;31:279-88.

6. Phillips KA, Diaz S. Gender differences in body dysmorphic disorder. J Nerv Ment Dis 1997;185:570-7

7. Arnold LM, McElroy SL, Mutasim DF, et al. Characteristics of 34 adults with psychogenic excoriation. J Clin Psychiatry 1998;59:509-14.

8. O’Sullivan RL, Phillips KA, Keuthen NJ, Wilhelm S. Near fatal skin picking from delusional body dysmorphic disorder responsive to fluvoxamine. Psychosomatics 1999;40:79-81.

9. Kalivas J, Kalivas L, Gilman D, Hayden CT. Sertraline in the treatment of neurotic excoriations and related disorders [letter]. Arch Dermatol 1996;132:589-90.

10. Stein DJ, Hollander E. Dermatology and conditions related to obsessive-compulsive disorder. J Am Acad Dermatol 1992;26:237-42.

11. Dykens E, Shah B. Psychiatric disorders in Prader-Willi syndrome: epidemiology and management. CNS Drugs 2003;17:167-78.

12. Bishop ER. Monosymptomatic hypochondriacal syndromes in dermatology. J Am Acad Dermatol 1983;9:152-8.

13. Koblenzer CS. Dermatitis artefacta: clinical features and approaches to treatment. Am J Clin Dermatol 2000;1:47-55.

14. Stein DJ, Hutt CS, Spitz JL, Hollander E. Compulsive picking and obsessive-compulsive disorder. Psychosomatics 1993;34:177-80.

15. Stout RJ. Fluoxetine for the treatment of compulsive facial picking [letter]. Am J Psychiatry 1990;147:370.-

16. Seedat S, Stein DJ, Harvey BH. Inositol in the treatment of trichotillomania and compulsive skin picking [letter]. J Clin Psychiatry 2001;62:60-1.

17. Gupta MA, Gupta AK. Olanzapine is effective in the management of some self-induced dermatoses: three case reports. Cutis 2000;66:143-6.

18. Duke EE. Clinical experience with pimozide: emphasis on its use in postherpetic neuralgia. J Am Acad Dermatol 1983;8:845-50.

19. Harris BA, Sherertz EF, Flowers FP. Improvement of chronic neurotic excoriations with oral doxepin therapy. Int J Dermatol 1987;26:541-3.

20. Lienemann J, Walker FD. Reversal of self-abusive behavior with naltrexone [letter]. J Clin Psychopharmacol 1989;9:448-9.

21. Arnold LM, Mutasim DF, Dwight MM, et al. An open clinical trial of fluvoxamine treatment of psychogenic excoriation. J Clin Psychopharmacol 1999;19:15-18.

22. Hendrickx B, Van Moffaert M, Spiers R, Von Frenckell R. The treatment of psychocutaneous disorders: a new approach. Curr Ther Res Clin Exp 1991;49:111-19.

23. Simeon D, Stein DJ, Gross S, et al. A double-blind trial of fluoxetine in pathologic skin picking. J Clin Psychiatry 1997;58:341-7.

24. Bloch MR, Elliott M, Thompson H, Koran LM. Fluoxetine in pathologic skin-picking: open-label and double-blind results. Psychosomatics 2001;42:314-19.

25. Kent A, Drummond LM. Acne excoriee—a case report of treatment using habit-reversal. Clin Exp Dermatol 1989;14:163-4.

26. Rosenbaum MS, Ayllon T. The behavioral treatment of neurodermatitis through habit-reversal. Behav Res Ther 1981;19:313-18.

27. Twohig MP, Woods DW. Habit reversal as a treatment for chronic skin picking in typically developing adult male siblings. J App Behav Analysis 2001;34:217-20.

28. Deckersbach T, Wilhelm S, Keuthen NJ, et al. Cognitive-behavior therapy for self-injurious skin picking. Behav Modif 2002;26:361-77.

29. Fruensgaard K. Psychotherapy and neurotic excoriations. Int J Dermatol 1991;30:262-5.

Author and Disclosure Information

Jon E. Grant, JD, MD
Assistant professor

Katharine A. Phillips, MD
Professor

Department of psychiatry and human behavior Brown Medical School, Providence, RI

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(12)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
45-52
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Jon E. Grant, JD, MD
Assistant professor

Katharine A. Phillips, MD
Professor

Department of psychiatry and human behavior Brown Medical School, Providence, RI

Author and Disclosure Information

Jon E. Grant, JD, MD
Assistant professor

Katharine A. Phillips, MD
Professor

Department of psychiatry and human behavior Brown Medical School, Providence, RI

Lying in the hospital bed, her face covered in bandages, Ms. S talked of suicide while awaiting reconstructive surgery on her nose: “If the only way to stop is by killing myself, I will.” When asked what she wanted to stop, she replied, “The picking. I pick at my face all day, every day.”

Ms. S, age 22, had picked a hole through the bridge of her nose, and her face was scarred and covered with scabs. Every morning for 5 years, she had gotten up, dressed, and then—after washing her face—felt intense, uncontrollable urges to pick at her face. Hours would go by and she was still picking, even as her face started to bleed: “I try to resist, but I can’t.”

Ms. S started picking her face when she was 17. She missed so much of high school because of time spent picking that she did not graduate. She now lives alone on medical disability. Conscious of her facial scarring, she rarely goes out in public. “People stare at me as if I’m a zoo animal; it’s so painful,” she says.

After her plastic surgery, she told the staff psychiatrist she had never sought help because she thought no one would understand her behavior. “It doesn’t make sense to me, and I’ve lived with it for years.”

Patients such as Ms. S often suffer in isolation for years, unaware that skin picking is a psychiatric disorder that can be treated successfully. Some are referred to psychiatrists through hospital emergency rooms or by dermatologists; others commit suicide, as Ms. S threatened to do.

In our practice, we recognize skin picking in patients with comorbid mood and anxiety disorders, body dysmorphic disorder (BDD), substance use disorders, impulse control disorders such as trichotillomania or kleptomania, and personality disorders.

Based on recent evidence and our experience, we discuss three steps to help you diagnose pathologic skin picking. We then examine treatment options that have shown benefit for skinpicking patients, including habit reversal psychotherapy and medications.

WHAT IS SKIN PICKING?

Pathologic skin picking is repetitive, ritualistic, or impulsive picking of normal skin, leading to tissue damage, personal distress, and impaired functioning.1 The behavior has been described for more than 100 years but remains poorly understood, under-diagnosed, and under-treated.2,3

Most people pick at their hands or face to a limited extent,4 and picking does not by itself suggest a psychiatric disorder. Pathology exists in the focus, duration, and extent of the behavior, as well as reasons for picking, associated emotions, and resulting problems. Persons with pathologic skin picking report irresistible, intrusive, and/or senseless thoughts of picking or impulses to pick, accompanied by marked distress.1 Pathologic skin picking is recurrent and usually results in noticeable skin damage, although many patients try to camouflage the lesions or scarring with makeup.

Pathologic skin picking’s prevalence is unknown. One early study estimated that 2% of dermatology patients suffer from skin picking.1 Two clinical studies found that 3.8% of college students4 and 28% of patients with BDD meet diagnostic criteria.5,6

TWEEZERS, RAZOR BLADES, KNIVES…

Persons who engage in pathologic skin picking typically spend substantial time picking. Most often they pick the face, but any body part—lips, arms, hands, or legs—may be the focus. They may pick at blemishes, pimples, scars, or healthy skin. Some use their hands and fingernails to pick, and others use pins, tweezers, razor blades, or knives. Picking may worsen in the evening.2,7

Although picking episodes may last only a few minutes, many patients have multiple episodes each day. Some pick for as long as 12 hours every day,2,5 which often leads to scarring and disfigurement. In one study, 90% of patients had at least minor tissue damage, 61% suffered infections, and 45% had “deep craters” because of picking.2

Reasons for picking. Many patients pick to relieve discomfort or tension.1 Others pick to improve their appearance, as in BDD, or to remove perceived dirt or contaminants, as in obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD).1,5 Still others say they pick as a habit, with minimal awareness.1 Itching or uneven skin may also cause the behavior.1,3 We have found that a patient may pick for several of these reasons. Most report:

  • tension before picking
  • satisfaction during picking
  • guilt, shame, and dysphoria after picking.1

Social impairment. Shame after picking episodes often leads patients to cover lesions with clothing or makeup and to avoid social contact.7 Substantial social and occupational impairment have been reported3,5,7 because of the hours spent picking and from avoiding people because of disfigurement.

Physical injury. Skin picking may cause serious injuries. Some of our patients have required emergency medical intervention and sutures after picking through a major blood vessel (such as the facial artery). One woman—who picked at a pimple on her neck with tweezers—lacerated her carotid artery, causing a near-fatal hemorrhage that required emergency surgery.8

 

 

Suicide risk. In a series of 123 patients with BDD, 33 (27%) excessively picked their skin and 10 of those who picked their skin (33%) had attempted suicide.5 In a case series of 31 patients with skin picking, 10% had attempted suicide.2 We know of several young women whose chief complaint was skin picking and who committed suicide.5

Gender. The gender ratio of patients with skin picking remains unclear. In two case series that totaled 65 patients, 87% to 92% of those with pathologic skin picking were female.2,7 In the series of patients with BDD, 58% of the 33 who compulsively picked their skin were female.5 On the other hand, most of 28 patients seen in a dermatology clinic for neurotic excoriations were male.9

Onset and chronicity. Pathologic skin picking may develop at any age, but it usually manifests in late adolescence or early adulthood, often after onset of a dermatologic illness such as acne2 or in response to itching.3 Although long-term studies have not been done, the disorder appears to often be chronic, with waxing and waning of picking intensity and frequency.1,2

Table 1

Skin picking: 3 steps to diagnosis and treatment

Step 1: Assess reasons for skin picking
 Dermatologic or medical disorder?
  • atopic dermatitis
  • scabies
  • Prader-Willi syndrome

 Psychiatric disorder?
  • body dysmorphic disorder
  • obsessive-compulsive disorder
  • delusional disorder
  • dermatitis artefacta

 Impulse control disorder, not otherwise specified?
Step 2: Assess picking severity
 Treat comorbid mood or anxiety disorders
 Treat skin picking if:
  • patient is preoccupied with picking
  • picking causes distress or dysfunction
  • picking is causing skin lesions/disfigurement
Step 3: Provide recommended treatment
 For adults
 Habit reversal therapy plus medication is usually necessary
 For children and adolescents
 Habit reversal therapy alone for mild to moderate symptoms
 Habit reversal therapy plus medication for severe symptoms

Comorbid psychopathology. In clinical settings, common comorbid psychopathologies include mood disorders (in 48% to 68% of patients with skin picking), anxiety disorders (41% to 64%), and alcohol use disorders (39%).2

In one patient sample, 71% of skin pickers met criteria for at least one personality disorder (48% had obsessive-compulsive personality disorder, and 26% met criteria for borderline personality disorder).2

Table 2

Medications with evidence of benefit for skin picking*

MedicationDosageType of evidence
SSRIs
 Citalopram40 mg/dCase report (effective only with inositol augmentation)16
 Fluoxetine20 to 80 mg/dCase reports5,14-15 and two double-blind studies23-24
 Fluvoxamine100 to 300 mg/dCase report,8 open-label study,21 and double-blind trial22
 Sertraline50 to 200 mg/dOpen-label study9
Other agents
 Clomipramine50 mg/dCase report3
 Doxepin30 mg/dCase report1
 Naltrexone50 mg/dCase report20
 Olanzapine2.5 to 7.5 mg/dCase report17
 Pimozide4 mg/dCase report18
* Off-label uses; little scientific evidence supports using medications other than SSRIs for treating skin picking. Inform patients of the evidence for using any medication, risk of side effects including change in cardiac conduction (pimozide, clomipramine), seizure risk (pimozide, clomipramine), and tardive dyskinesia (pimozide), and potential interactions with other medications (all of the above).

PRIMARY VS. SECONDARY DISORDER

Is skin picking an independent disorder or a symptom of other psychiatric disorders? Although skin picking is not included in DSM-IV and has no formal diagnostic criteria, some forms of this behavior may belong among the impulse control disorders.

Patients often report an urge to pick their skin in response to increasing tension,1,3 and picking results in transient relief or pleasure.1,2 This description mirrors that of other impulse control disorders, such as trichotillomania and kleptomania. In fact, one study found that trichotillomania and kleptomania were common comorbidities among patients with skin picking (23% and 16%, respectively).2 In 34 patients with psychogenic excoriation, only 7 (21%) appeared to have skin picking as a primary complaint, unaccounted for by another psychiatric disorder.7

Skin picking may also be a symptom of other psychiatric disorders. To determine whether another disorder is present, we ask patients why they pick their skin. Patients may be reluctant to reveal either the picking or the underlying disorder because of embarrassment and shame. The diagnosis can often be clarified by asking about the following conditions:

Body dysmorphic disorder. Nearly 30% of patients with BDD pick their skin to a pathologic extent.5,6 The purpose of picking in BDD is to remove or minimize a nonexistent or slight imperfection in appearance (such as scars, pimples, bumps).5,6

Obsessive-compulsive disorder. Patients with OCD may pick their skin in response to contamination obsessions.1 Picking is often repetitive and ritualistic, and—as with compulsions—the behavior may reduce tension.10

Genetic disorders. Skin picking may be a symptom of Prader-Willi syndrome, a genetic disorder characterized by muscular hypotonia, short stature, characteristic facial features, intellectual disabilities, hypogonadism, hyperphagia, and an increased obesity risk. In one study, 97% of patients with Prader-Willi syndrome engaged in skin picking.11

 

 

Delusional disorder. Delusions of parasitosis may result in skin picking, as patients attempt to remove imagined parasites or other vermin from on or under their skin.12

Dermatitis artefacta. Patients may consciously create skin lesions to assume the sick role. Onethird of patients presenting to dermatologists with a disease that is primarily psychiatric may be suffering from dermatitis artefacta.13

TREATMENT RECOMMENDATIONS

Successful clinical care of pathologic skin picking requires perseverance and patience from both patient and clinician.

Treatment begins with a thorough dermatologic examination for medical causes of skin picking (such as atopic dermatitis or scabies) and to treat excoriations (such as with antibiotics for infection). After the dermatologist has ruled out a medical cause, carefully assess the patient’s picking behavior and related psychiatric problems (Table 1).

  • If picking is secondary to a psychiatric disorder, begin by providing appropriate treatment for that disorder.
  • If picking results from BDD or OCD, we recommend habit reversal therapy combined with medication.
  • If picking appears to be an independent impulse control disorder, simultaneous habit reversal therapy and medication is usually necessary to reduce symptoms.

SSRIs are a reasonable first medication because of evidence for their efficacy in reducing skin picking. Higher dosages—comparable to those used in treating OCD—are usually required to improve skin-picking behavior. You may need to try another SSRI if the first trial results in partial or no response.

In our experience, augmenting an SSRI with naltrexone, 50 mg/d, helps reduce intrusive urges to pick and is worth considering if SSRI therapy results in only partial response.

Children or adolescents. Depending upon symptom severity, a trial of habit reversal therapy may be appropriate before you recommend using medication.

EVIDENCE FOR DRUG THERAPY

Although few treatment studies have been done, skin picking does appear to respond to medication (Table 2).

Because no medications are approved to treat skin-picking behavior, inform patients of any “off-label” uses and the scientific or clinical evidence for considering medication treatment.

Case reports and case series. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) appear most effective in patients with picking behavior, including:

  • fluvoxamine, 300 mg/d, in one case report8
  • fluoxetine, 20 to 80 mg/d, in several case reports.5,14-15

In a series of 33 patients with BDD and compulsive skin picking, one-half (49%) of a variety of SSRI treatment trials improved BDD symptoms and skin picking behavior. The percentage of patients who improved was not examined. Dermatologic treatment alone was effective for only 15% of patients.5

Medications other than SSRIs have also been studied. One patient improved within 3 weeks of taking the tricyclic antidepressant clomipramine, 50 mg/d.3 Another patient picked her skin less often 4 weeks after inositol, 18 grams/d, was added to citalopram, 40 mg/d. Inositol, a nonprescription isomer of glucose, is a precursor in the phosphatidylinositol second-messenger cycle, which may play a role at certain serotonin receptors.16 The patient was given 6 grams dissolved in water three times daily.

Case reports have also suggested that olanzapine, pimozide, doxepin, and naltrexone may be beneficial in reducing skin excoriations. These reports often involved patients with psychiatric and medical comorbidities.17-20

Table 3

Habit reversal: 5 components in patient learning

Awareness about picking behavior
Relaxation to reduce anxiety
Competing responses to learn behaviors incompatible with picking (such as fist clenching)
Rewarding oneself for successfully resisting picking
Generalizing the behavioral control

Open-label studies. In an open-label study of 28 patients with neurotic excoriation treated in a dermatology clinic, 68% improved within 1 month with sertraline, mean dosage 95 mg/d.9 Similarly, open-label fluvoxamine, mean dosage 112.5 mg/d, was effective in reducing skin excoriation in 7 of 14 patients treated for 12 weeks in a psychiatric setting.21

Double-blind studies. In a double-blind study using fluvoxamine with supportive psychotherapy in patients with psychocutaneous disorders, all five patients with acne excoriee improved after 4 weeks of medication treatment (none was randomized to placebo).22

In a 10-week, double-blind study, 10 patients were assigned to fluoxetine, mean dosage 53.0 ± 16.4 mg/d, and 11 to placebo. A patient self-report visual analog scale showed that fluoxetine was significantly more effective than placebo in reducing picking behavior. Two other measures did not show significant improvement, however, perhaps because of the small sample size.23

In a third study, 8 of 15 patients responded to open-label fluoxetine, 20 to 60 mg/d after 6 weeks. The responders were then randomized to 6 additional weeks of fluoxetine or placebo. All four patients assigned to continue active medication maintained their improvement. Symptoms returned to baseline by week 12 in the four assigned to placebo.24

EVIDENCE FOR HABIT REVERSAL THERAPY

No controlled trials have examined psychosocial treatments for skin picking, but several psychotherapeutic interventions appear promising. Habit reversal has shown promise in three case reports totaling seven patients and appears to reduce picking behavior within a few weeks.25-27

 

 

In a case series, three patients were successfully treated with habit reversal (Table 3) and cognitive-behavioral techniques, consisting of:

  • awareness training (using a skin-picking diary)
  • competing response techniques (such as making a fist or squeezing a ball)
  • emotion regulation skills
  • psychoeducation
  • cognitive restructuring (such as using Socratic questioning to produce rational alternatives) in situations that elicit the urge to pick.28

In another case series, 22 dermatology patients with skin picking received psychotherapy with insight-oriented and behavioral components. Therapy included attention to developmental issues and active conflicts, cognitive restructuring, and tools to manage aggression and social relations. Although treatment duration varied— the mean was weekly for 14 months—skin lesions healed in 17 patients (77%).29

Related resources

  • Obsessive-Compulsive Foundation http://www.ocfoundation.org
  • Koran LM. Obsessive-compulsive and related disorders in adults: A comprehensive clinical guide. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 1999.
  • Phillips KA. The broken mirror: Recognizing and treating body dysmorphic disorder. New York: Oxford University Press, 1996.

Drug brand names

  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Clomipramine • Anafranil
  • Doxepin • Sinequan
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Fluvoxamine • Luvox
  • Naltrexone • ReVia
  • Olanzapine • Zyprexa
  • Pimozide • Orap
  • Sertraline • Zoloft

Disclosure

Dr. Grant reports no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Dr. Phillips receives research support from Eli Lilly and Co., Forest Pharmaceuticals, and Gate Pharmaceuticals; she is a speaker for or consultant to Eli Lilly and Co., Forest Pharmaceuticals, and UCB Pharma.

Lying in the hospital bed, her face covered in bandages, Ms. S talked of suicide while awaiting reconstructive surgery on her nose: “If the only way to stop is by killing myself, I will.” When asked what she wanted to stop, she replied, “The picking. I pick at my face all day, every day.”

Ms. S, age 22, had picked a hole through the bridge of her nose, and her face was scarred and covered with scabs. Every morning for 5 years, she had gotten up, dressed, and then—after washing her face—felt intense, uncontrollable urges to pick at her face. Hours would go by and she was still picking, even as her face started to bleed: “I try to resist, but I can’t.”

Ms. S started picking her face when she was 17. She missed so much of high school because of time spent picking that she did not graduate. She now lives alone on medical disability. Conscious of her facial scarring, she rarely goes out in public. “People stare at me as if I’m a zoo animal; it’s so painful,” she says.

After her plastic surgery, she told the staff psychiatrist she had never sought help because she thought no one would understand her behavior. “It doesn’t make sense to me, and I’ve lived with it for years.”

Patients such as Ms. S often suffer in isolation for years, unaware that skin picking is a psychiatric disorder that can be treated successfully. Some are referred to psychiatrists through hospital emergency rooms or by dermatologists; others commit suicide, as Ms. S threatened to do.

In our practice, we recognize skin picking in patients with comorbid mood and anxiety disorders, body dysmorphic disorder (BDD), substance use disorders, impulse control disorders such as trichotillomania or kleptomania, and personality disorders.

Based on recent evidence and our experience, we discuss three steps to help you diagnose pathologic skin picking. We then examine treatment options that have shown benefit for skinpicking patients, including habit reversal psychotherapy and medications.

WHAT IS SKIN PICKING?

Pathologic skin picking is repetitive, ritualistic, or impulsive picking of normal skin, leading to tissue damage, personal distress, and impaired functioning.1 The behavior has been described for more than 100 years but remains poorly understood, under-diagnosed, and under-treated.2,3

Most people pick at their hands or face to a limited extent,4 and picking does not by itself suggest a psychiatric disorder. Pathology exists in the focus, duration, and extent of the behavior, as well as reasons for picking, associated emotions, and resulting problems. Persons with pathologic skin picking report irresistible, intrusive, and/or senseless thoughts of picking or impulses to pick, accompanied by marked distress.1 Pathologic skin picking is recurrent and usually results in noticeable skin damage, although many patients try to camouflage the lesions or scarring with makeup.

Pathologic skin picking’s prevalence is unknown. One early study estimated that 2% of dermatology patients suffer from skin picking.1 Two clinical studies found that 3.8% of college students4 and 28% of patients with BDD meet diagnostic criteria.5,6

TWEEZERS, RAZOR BLADES, KNIVES…

Persons who engage in pathologic skin picking typically spend substantial time picking. Most often they pick the face, but any body part—lips, arms, hands, or legs—may be the focus. They may pick at blemishes, pimples, scars, or healthy skin. Some use their hands and fingernails to pick, and others use pins, tweezers, razor blades, or knives. Picking may worsen in the evening.2,7

Although picking episodes may last only a few minutes, many patients have multiple episodes each day. Some pick for as long as 12 hours every day,2,5 which often leads to scarring and disfigurement. In one study, 90% of patients had at least minor tissue damage, 61% suffered infections, and 45% had “deep craters” because of picking.2

Reasons for picking. Many patients pick to relieve discomfort or tension.1 Others pick to improve their appearance, as in BDD, or to remove perceived dirt or contaminants, as in obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD).1,5 Still others say they pick as a habit, with minimal awareness.1 Itching or uneven skin may also cause the behavior.1,3 We have found that a patient may pick for several of these reasons. Most report:

  • tension before picking
  • satisfaction during picking
  • guilt, shame, and dysphoria after picking.1

Social impairment. Shame after picking episodes often leads patients to cover lesions with clothing or makeup and to avoid social contact.7 Substantial social and occupational impairment have been reported3,5,7 because of the hours spent picking and from avoiding people because of disfigurement.

Physical injury. Skin picking may cause serious injuries. Some of our patients have required emergency medical intervention and sutures after picking through a major blood vessel (such as the facial artery). One woman—who picked at a pimple on her neck with tweezers—lacerated her carotid artery, causing a near-fatal hemorrhage that required emergency surgery.8

 

 

Suicide risk. In a series of 123 patients with BDD, 33 (27%) excessively picked their skin and 10 of those who picked their skin (33%) had attempted suicide.5 In a case series of 31 patients with skin picking, 10% had attempted suicide.2 We know of several young women whose chief complaint was skin picking and who committed suicide.5

Gender. The gender ratio of patients with skin picking remains unclear. In two case series that totaled 65 patients, 87% to 92% of those with pathologic skin picking were female.2,7 In the series of patients with BDD, 58% of the 33 who compulsively picked their skin were female.5 On the other hand, most of 28 patients seen in a dermatology clinic for neurotic excoriations were male.9

Onset and chronicity. Pathologic skin picking may develop at any age, but it usually manifests in late adolescence or early adulthood, often after onset of a dermatologic illness such as acne2 or in response to itching.3 Although long-term studies have not been done, the disorder appears to often be chronic, with waxing and waning of picking intensity and frequency.1,2

Table 1

Skin picking: 3 steps to diagnosis and treatment

Step 1: Assess reasons for skin picking
 Dermatologic or medical disorder?
  • atopic dermatitis
  • scabies
  • Prader-Willi syndrome

 Psychiatric disorder?
  • body dysmorphic disorder
  • obsessive-compulsive disorder
  • delusional disorder
  • dermatitis artefacta

 Impulse control disorder, not otherwise specified?
Step 2: Assess picking severity
 Treat comorbid mood or anxiety disorders
 Treat skin picking if:
  • patient is preoccupied with picking
  • picking causes distress or dysfunction
  • picking is causing skin lesions/disfigurement
Step 3: Provide recommended treatment
 For adults
 Habit reversal therapy plus medication is usually necessary
 For children and adolescents
 Habit reversal therapy alone for mild to moderate symptoms
 Habit reversal therapy plus medication for severe symptoms

Comorbid psychopathology. In clinical settings, common comorbid psychopathologies include mood disorders (in 48% to 68% of patients with skin picking), anxiety disorders (41% to 64%), and alcohol use disorders (39%).2

In one patient sample, 71% of skin pickers met criteria for at least one personality disorder (48% had obsessive-compulsive personality disorder, and 26% met criteria for borderline personality disorder).2

Table 2

Medications with evidence of benefit for skin picking*

MedicationDosageType of evidence
SSRIs
 Citalopram40 mg/dCase report (effective only with inositol augmentation)16
 Fluoxetine20 to 80 mg/dCase reports5,14-15 and two double-blind studies23-24
 Fluvoxamine100 to 300 mg/dCase report,8 open-label study,21 and double-blind trial22
 Sertraline50 to 200 mg/dOpen-label study9
Other agents
 Clomipramine50 mg/dCase report3
 Doxepin30 mg/dCase report1
 Naltrexone50 mg/dCase report20
 Olanzapine2.5 to 7.5 mg/dCase report17
 Pimozide4 mg/dCase report18
* Off-label uses; little scientific evidence supports using medications other than SSRIs for treating skin picking. Inform patients of the evidence for using any medication, risk of side effects including change in cardiac conduction (pimozide, clomipramine), seizure risk (pimozide, clomipramine), and tardive dyskinesia (pimozide), and potential interactions with other medications (all of the above).

PRIMARY VS. SECONDARY DISORDER

Is skin picking an independent disorder or a symptom of other psychiatric disorders? Although skin picking is not included in DSM-IV and has no formal diagnostic criteria, some forms of this behavior may belong among the impulse control disorders.

Patients often report an urge to pick their skin in response to increasing tension,1,3 and picking results in transient relief or pleasure.1,2 This description mirrors that of other impulse control disorders, such as trichotillomania and kleptomania. In fact, one study found that trichotillomania and kleptomania were common comorbidities among patients with skin picking (23% and 16%, respectively).2 In 34 patients with psychogenic excoriation, only 7 (21%) appeared to have skin picking as a primary complaint, unaccounted for by another psychiatric disorder.7

Skin picking may also be a symptom of other psychiatric disorders. To determine whether another disorder is present, we ask patients why they pick their skin. Patients may be reluctant to reveal either the picking or the underlying disorder because of embarrassment and shame. The diagnosis can often be clarified by asking about the following conditions:

Body dysmorphic disorder. Nearly 30% of patients with BDD pick their skin to a pathologic extent.5,6 The purpose of picking in BDD is to remove or minimize a nonexistent or slight imperfection in appearance (such as scars, pimples, bumps).5,6

Obsessive-compulsive disorder. Patients with OCD may pick their skin in response to contamination obsessions.1 Picking is often repetitive and ritualistic, and—as with compulsions—the behavior may reduce tension.10

Genetic disorders. Skin picking may be a symptom of Prader-Willi syndrome, a genetic disorder characterized by muscular hypotonia, short stature, characteristic facial features, intellectual disabilities, hypogonadism, hyperphagia, and an increased obesity risk. In one study, 97% of patients with Prader-Willi syndrome engaged in skin picking.11

 

 

Delusional disorder. Delusions of parasitosis may result in skin picking, as patients attempt to remove imagined parasites or other vermin from on or under their skin.12

Dermatitis artefacta. Patients may consciously create skin lesions to assume the sick role. Onethird of patients presenting to dermatologists with a disease that is primarily psychiatric may be suffering from dermatitis artefacta.13

TREATMENT RECOMMENDATIONS

Successful clinical care of pathologic skin picking requires perseverance and patience from both patient and clinician.

Treatment begins with a thorough dermatologic examination for medical causes of skin picking (such as atopic dermatitis or scabies) and to treat excoriations (such as with antibiotics for infection). After the dermatologist has ruled out a medical cause, carefully assess the patient’s picking behavior and related psychiatric problems (Table 1).

  • If picking is secondary to a psychiatric disorder, begin by providing appropriate treatment for that disorder.
  • If picking results from BDD or OCD, we recommend habit reversal therapy combined with medication.
  • If picking appears to be an independent impulse control disorder, simultaneous habit reversal therapy and medication is usually necessary to reduce symptoms.

SSRIs are a reasonable first medication because of evidence for their efficacy in reducing skin picking. Higher dosages—comparable to those used in treating OCD—are usually required to improve skin-picking behavior. You may need to try another SSRI if the first trial results in partial or no response.

In our experience, augmenting an SSRI with naltrexone, 50 mg/d, helps reduce intrusive urges to pick and is worth considering if SSRI therapy results in only partial response.

Children or adolescents. Depending upon symptom severity, a trial of habit reversal therapy may be appropriate before you recommend using medication.

EVIDENCE FOR DRUG THERAPY

Although few treatment studies have been done, skin picking does appear to respond to medication (Table 2).

Because no medications are approved to treat skin-picking behavior, inform patients of any “off-label” uses and the scientific or clinical evidence for considering medication treatment.

Case reports and case series. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) appear most effective in patients with picking behavior, including:

  • fluvoxamine, 300 mg/d, in one case report8
  • fluoxetine, 20 to 80 mg/d, in several case reports.5,14-15

In a series of 33 patients with BDD and compulsive skin picking, one-half (49%) of a variety of SSRI treatment trials improved BDD symptoms and skin picking behavior. The percentage of patients who improved was not examined. Dermatologic treatment alone was effective for only 15% of patients.5

Medications other than SSRIs have also been studied. One patient improved within 3 weeks of taking the tricyclic antidepressant clomipramine, 50 mg/d.3 Another patient picked her skin less often 4 weeks after inositol, 18 grams/d, was added to citalopram, 40 mg/d. Inositol, a nonprescription isomer of glucose, is a precursor in the phosphatidylinositol second-messenger cycle, which may play a role at certain serotonin receptors.16 The patient was given 6 grams dissolved in water three times daily.

Case reports have also suggested that olanzapine, pimozide, doxepin, and naltrexone may be beneficial in reducing skin excoriations. These reports often involved patients with psychiatric and medical comorbidities.17-20

Table 3

Habit reversal: 5 components in patient learning

Awareness about picking behavior
Relaxation to reduce anxiety
Competing responses to learn behaviors incompatible with picking (such as fist clenching)
Rewarding oneself for successfully resisting picking
Generalizing the behavioral control

Open-label studies. In an open-label study of 28 patients with neurotic excoriation treated in a dermatology clinic, 68% improved within 1 month with sertraline, mean dosage 95 mg/d.9 Similarly, open-label fluvoxamine, mean dosage 112.5 mg/d, was effective in reducing skin excoriation in 7 of 14 patients treated for 12 weeks in a psychiatric setting.21

Double-blind studies. In a double-blind study using fluvoxamine with supportive psychotherapy in patients with psychocutaneous disorders, all five patients with acne excoriee improved after 4 weeks of medication treatment (none was randomized to placebo).22

In a 10-week, double-blind study, 10 patients were assigned to fluoxetine, mean dosage 53.0 ± 16.4 mg/d, and 11 to placebo. A patient self-report visual analog scale showed that fluoxetine was significantly more effective than placebo in reducing picking behavior. Two other measures did not show significant improvement, however, perhaps because of the small sample size.23

In a third study, 8 of 15 patients responded to open-label fluoxetine, 20 to 60 mg/d after 6 weeks. The responders were then randomized to 6 additional weeks of fluoxetine or placebo. All four patients assigned to continue active medication maintained their improvement. Symptoms returned to baseline by week 12 in the four assigned to placebo.24

EVIDENCE FOR HABIT REVERSAL THERAPY

No controlled trials have examined psychosocial treatments for skin picking, but several psychotherapeutic interventions appear promising. Habit reversal has shown promise in three case reports totaling seven patients and appears to reduce picking behavior within a few weeks.25-27

 

 

In a case series, three patients were successfully treated with habit reversal (Table 3) and cognitive-behavioral techniques, consisting of:

  • awareness training (using a skin-picking diary)
  • competing response techniques (such as making a fist or squeezing a ball)
  • emotion regulation skills
  • psychoeducation
  • cognitive restructuring (such as using Socratic questioning to produce rational alternatives) in situations that elicit the urge to pick.28

In another case series, 22 dermatology patients with skin picking received psychotherapy with insight-oriented and behavioral components. Therapy included attention to developmental issues and active conflicts, cognitive restructuring, and tools to manage aggression and social relations. Although treatment duration varied— the mean was weekly for 14 months—skin lesions healed in 17 patients (77%).29

Related resources

  • Obsessive-Compulsive Foundation http://www.ocfoundation.org
  • Koran LM. Obsessive-compulsive and related disorders in adults: A comprehensive clinical guide. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 1999.
  • Phillips KA. The broken mirror: Recognizing and treating body dysmorphic disorder. New York: Oxford University Press, 1996.

Drug brand names

  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Clomipramine • Anafranil
  • Doxepin • Sinequan
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Fluvoxamine • Luvox
  • Naltrexone • ReVia
  • Olanzapine • Zyprexa
  • Pimozide • Orap
  • Sertraline • Zoloft

Disclosure

Dr. Grant reports no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Dr. Phillips receives research support from Eli Lilly and Co., Forest Pharmaceuticals, and Gate Pharmaceuticals; she is a speaker for or consultant to Eli Lilly and Co., Forest Pharmaceuticals, and UCB Pharma.

References

1. Arnold LM, Auchenbach MB, McElroy SL. Psychogenic excoriation: clinical features, proposed diagnostic criteria, epidemiology and approaches to treatment. CNS Drugs 2001;15:351-9.

2. Wilhelm S, Keuthen NJ, Deckersbach T, et al. Self-injurious skin picking: clinical characteristics and comorbidity. J Clin Psychiatry 1999;60:454-9.

3. Gupta MA, Gupta AK, Haberman HF. Neurotic excoriations: a review and some new perspectives. Compr Psychiatry 1986;27:381-6.

4. Keuthen NJ, Deckersbach T, Wilhelm S, et al. Repetitive skinpicking in a student population and comparison with a sample of self-injurious skin-pickers. Psychosomatics 2000;41:210-15.

5. Phillips KA, Taub SL. Skin picking as a symptom of body dysmorphic disorder. Psychopharmacol Bull 1995;31:279-88.

6. Phillips KA, Diaz S. Gender differences in body dysmorphic disorder. J Nerv Ment Dis 1997;185:570-7

7. Arnold LM, McElroy SL, Mutasim DF, et al. Characteristics of 34 adults with psychogenic excoriation. J Clin Psychiatry 1998;59:509-14.

8. O’Sullivan RL, Phillips KA, Keuthen NJ, Wilhelm S. Near fatal skin picking from delusional body dysmorphic disorder responsive to fluvoxamine. Psychosomatics 1999;40:79-81.

9. Kalivas J, Kalivas L, Gilman D, Hayden CT. Sertraline in the treatment of neurotic excoriations and related disorders [letter]. Arch Dermatol 1996;132:589-90.

10. Stein DJ, Hollander E. Dermatology and conditions related to obsessive-compulsive disorder. J Am Acad Dermatol 1992;26:237-42.

11. Dykens E, Shah B. Psychiatric disorders in Prader-Willi syndrome: epidemiology and management. CNS Drugs 2003;17:167-78.

12. Bishop ER. Monosymptomatic hypochondriacal syndromes in dermatology. J Am Acad Dermatol 1983;9:152-8.

13. Koblenzer CS. Dermatitis artefacta: clinical features and approaches to treatment. Am J Clin Dermatol 2000;1:47-55.

14. Stein DJ, Hutt CS, Spitz JL, Hollander E. Compulsive picking and obsessive-compulsive disorder. Psychosomatics 1993;34:177-80.

15. Stout RJ. Fluoxetine for the treatment of compulsive facial picking [letter]. Am J Psychiatry 1990;147:370.-

16. Seedat S, Stein DJ, Harvey BH. Inositol in the treatment of trichotillomania and compulsive skin picking [letter]. J Clin Psychiatry 2001;62:60-1.

17. Gupta MA, Gupta AK. Olanzapine is effective in the management of some self-induced dermatoses: three case reports. Cutis 2000;66:143-6.

18. Duke EE. Clinical experience with pimozide: emphasis on its use in postherpetic neuralgia. J Am Acad Dermatol 1983;8:845-50.

19. Harris BA, Sherertz EF, Flowers FP. Improvement of chronic neurotic excoriations with oral doxepin therapy. Int J Dermatol 1987;26:541-3.

20. Lienemann J, Walker FD. Reversal of self-abusive behavior with naltrexone [letter]. J Clin Psychopharmacol 1989;9:448-9.

21. Arnold LM, Mutasim DF, Dwight MM, et al. An open clinical trial of fluvoxamine treatment of psychogenic excoriation. J Clin Psychopharmacol 1999;19:15-18.

22. Hendrickx B, Van Moffaert M, Spiers R, Von Frenckell R. The treatment of psychocutaneous disorders: a new approach. Curr Ther Res Clin Exp 1991;49:111-19.

23. Simeon D, Stein DJ, Gross S, et al. A double-blind trial of fluoxetine in pathologic skin picking. J Clin Psychiatry 1997;58:341-7.

24. Bloch MR, Elliott M, Thompson H, Koran LM. Fluoxetine in pathologic skin-picking: open-label and double-blind results. Psychosomatics 2001;42:314-19.

25. Kent A, Drummond LM. Acne excoriee—a case report of treatment using habit-reversal. Clin Exp Dermatol 1989;14:163-4.

26. Rosenbaum MS, Ayllon T. The behavioral treatment of neurodermatitis through habit-reversal. Behav Res Ther 1981;19:313-18.

27. Twohig MP, Woods DW. Habit reversal as a treatment for chronic skin picking in typically developing adult male siblings. J App Behav Analysis 2001;34:217-20.

28. Deckersbach T, Wilhelm S, Keuthen NJ, et al. Cognitive-behavior therapy for self-injurious skin picking. Behav Modif 2002;26:361-77.

29. Fruensgaard K. Psychotherapy and neurotic excoriations. Int J Dermatol 1991;30:262-5.

References

1. Arnold LM, Auchenbach MB, McElroy SL. Psychogenic excoriation: clinical features, proposed diagnostic criteria, epidemiology and approaches to treatment. CNS Drugs 2001;15:351-9.

2. Wilhelm S, Keuthen NJ, Deckersbach T, et al. Self-injurious skin picking: clinical characteristics and comorbidity. J Clin Psychiatry 1999;60:454-9.

3. Gupta MA, Gupta AK, Haberman HF. Neurotic excoriations: a review and some new perspectives. Compr Psychiatry 1986;27:381-6.

4. Keuthen NJ, Deckersbach T, Wilhelm S, et al. Repetitive skinpicking in a student population and comparison with a sample of self-injurious skin-pickers. Psychosomatics 2000;41:210-15.

5. Phillips KA, Taub SL. Skin picking as a symptom of body dysmorphic disorder. Psychopharmacol Bull 1995;31:279-88.

6. Phillips KA, Diaz S. Gender differences in body dysmorphic disorder. J Nerv Ment Dis 1997;185:570-7

7. Arnold LM, McElroy SL, Mutasim DF, et al. Characteristics of 34 adults with psychogenic excoriation. J Clin Psychiatry 1998;59:509-14.

8. O’Sullivan RL, Phillips KA, Keuthen NJ, Wilhelm S. Near fatal skin picking from delusional body dysmorphic disorder responsive to fluvoxamine. Psychosomatics 1999;40:79-81.

9. Kalivas J, Kalivas L, Gilman D, Hayden CT. Sertraline in the treatment of neurotic excoriations and related disorders [letter]. Arch Dermatol 1996;132:589-90.

10. Stein DJ, Hollander E. Dermatology and conditions related to obsessive-compulsive disorder. J Am Acad Dermatol 1992;26:237-42.

11. Dykens E, Shah B. Psychiatric disorders in Prader-Willi syndrome: epidemiology and management. CNS Drugs 2003;17:167-78.

12. Bishop ER. Monosymptomatic hypochondriacal syndromes in dermatology. J Am Acad Dermatol 1983;9:152-8.

13. Koblenzer CS. Dermatitis artefacta: clinical features and approaches to treatment. Am J Clin Dermatol 2000;1:47-55.

14. Stein DJ, Hutt CS, Spitz JL, Hollander E. Compulsive picking and obsessive-compulsive disorder. Psychosomatics 1993;34:177-80.

15. Stout RJ. Fluoxetine for the treatment of compulsive facial picking [letter]. Am J Psychiatry 1990;147:370.-

16. Seedat S, Stein DJ, Harvey BH. Inositol in the treatment of trichotillomania and compulsive skin picking [letter]. J Clin Psychiatry 2001;62:60-1.

17. Gupta MA, Gupta AK. Olanzapine is effective in the management of some self-induced dermatoses: three case reports. Cutis 2000;66:143-6.

18. Duke EE. Clinical experience with pimozide: emphasis on its use in postherpetic neuralgia. J Am Acad Dermatol 1983;8:845-50.

19. Harris BA, Sherertz EF, Flowers FP. Improvement of chronic neurotic excoriations with oral doxepin therapy. Int J Dermatol 1987;26:541-3.

20. Lienemann J, Walker FD. Reversal of self-abusive behavior with naltrexone [letter]. J Clin Psychopharmacol 1989;9:448-9.

21. Arnold LM, Mutasim DF, Dwight MM, et al. An open clinical trial of fluvoxamine treatment of psychogenic excoriation. J Clin Psychopharmacol 1999;19:15-18.

22. Hendrickx B, Van Moffaert M, Spiers R, Von Frenckell R. The treatment of psychocutaneous disorders: a new approach. Curr Ther Res Clin Exp 1991;49:111-19.

23. Simeon D, Stein DJ, Gross S, et al. A double-blind trial of fluoxetine in pathologic skin picking. J Clin Psychiatry 1997;58:341-7.

24. Bloch MR, Elliott M, Thompson H, Koran LM. Fluoxetine in pathologic skin-picking: open-label and double-blind results. Psychosomatics 2001;42:314-19.

25. Kent A, Drummond LM. Acne excoriee—a case report of treatment using habit-reversal. Clin Exp Dermatol 1989;14:163-4.

26. Rosenbaum MS, Ayllon T. The behavioral treatment of neurodermatitis through habit-reversal. Behav Res Ther 1981;19:313-18.

27. Twohig MP, Woods DW. Habit reversal as a treatment for chronic skin picking in typically developing adult male siblings. J App Behav Analysis 2001;34:217-20.

28. Deckersbach T, Wilhelm S, Keuthen NJ, et al. Cognitive-behavior therapy for self-injurious skin picking. Behav Modif 2002;26:361-77.

29. Fruensgaard K. Psychotherapy and neurotic excoriations. Int J Dermatol 1991;30:262-5.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(12)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(12)
Page Number
45-52
Page Number
45-52
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Captive of the mirror: ‘I pick at my face all day, every day’
Display Headline
Captive of the mirror: ‘I pick at my face all day, every day’
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Neuroleptic malignant syndrome: Still a risk, but which patients may be in danger?

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:11
Display Headline
Neuroleptic malignant syndrome: Still a risk, but which patients may be in danger?

Potentially fatal neuroleptic malignant syndrome (NMS)—though less common than in the past—can happen with either conventional or atypical antipsychotics.1,2 To help you protect patients when prescribing antipsychotics or consulting with other clinicians about these drugs, this article discusses:

  • risk factors and clinical features that warn of NMS onset
  • differential diagnosis of disease states most often confused with NMS
  • management recommendations, including supportive measures and specific interventions such as benzodiazepines, dopamine agonists, dantrolene, and electroconvulsive therapy (ECT).

WHY NMS REMAINS RELEVANT

NMS remains a risk in susceptible patients receiving atypical antipsychotics, according to clinical reports and drug adverse event surveys (Figure).2

Moreover, NMS continues to be reported with conventional antipsychotics, which remain in widespread use. Patients who receive long-acting depot conventional antipsychotics are at risk for prolonged NMS episodes.

Figure 55 NMS cases reported with use of antipsychotics, 1998-2002


Probable or definite neuroleptic malignant syndrome cases associated with antipsychotic monotherapy reported to the Neuroleptic Malignant Syndrome Information Service.NMS in medical settings. Psychiatrists may be consulted when patients develop NMS while receiving conventional antipsychotics or other dopaminereceptor antagonists used in medical settings.3,4 Haloperidol remains the recommended drug of choice for treating agitation and delirium and continues to be the single most common trigger of NMS. Although often overlooked, antiemetics and sedatives with neuroleptic properties—such as prochlorperazine, metoclopramide, and promethazine—also have triggered NMS.

Other hyperthermic conditions. NMS is often considered in the differential diagnosis of patients who develop fever or encephalopathy while being treated with psychotropics. In these acute, complex, and often grave situations, psychiatrists may be consulted to recommend treatment for behavioral control or to distinguish NMS from other conditions.

NEWER VS. OLDER ANTIPSYCHOTICS

Has NMS incidence declined with the atypical agents? Probably, but providing proof is difficult:

  • NMS is uncommon; its incidence in psychiatric patients treated with conventional antipsychotics is approximately 0.2%.5 To demonstrate reduced NMS incidence with atypicals, a very large sample of patients would be required to reach statistical significance.
  • As doctors have used lower doses of conventional agents—which reduces the risk of NMS—any beneficial impact from atypicals has become more difficult to detect.5,6
  • Reports of NMS frequency with atypicals may be inflated by bias in publishing adverse events with newer versus older agents.
  • Patients switched to atypicals may represent a high-risk group that is intolerant or resistant to conventional antipsychotics.

So far, few unequivocal cases of NMS have been attributed to the use of quetiapine, ziprasidone, or aripiprazole, the most recently introduced atypicals. Moreover, case reports of NMS associated with clozapine, risperidone, or olanzapine2 are often difficult to interpret because of incomplete clinical details, varying diagnostic criteria, and concomitant use of more than one antipsychotic.

Milder NMS? Do the newer antipsychotics produce an “atypical” or milder form of NMS? Case reports indicate that extreme temperature elevations and extrapyramidal dysfunction are less frequent in NMS associated with atypical compared with conventional antipsychotics.2 However, case descriptions of NMS were heterogeneous even with conventional agents, and clinicians’ growing awareness of NMS even before atypicals were introduced allowed for earlier diagnosis of mild and partial NMS cases.7

CLINICAL FEATURES OF NMS

Regardless of drug selection, it is important to recognize early and mild signs of NMS. Any case can progress to a fulminant form that is more difficult to treat.

Patients at risk. NMS may be more likely to develop in patients with:5,6,8

  • dehydration
  • agitation
  • low serum iron
  • underlying brain damage
  • catatonia.

Some patients may have genetic abnormalities in central dopamine systems that increase their susceptibility to NMS.6,9

Fifteen to 20% of patients who develop NMS have experienced a previous episode while taking antipsychotics, which is why taking a careful drug history is important.5,6 Although most often reported with therapeutic antipsychotic doses, NMS has been associated with rapid dose titration, especially when given parenterally.8

On the other hand, the practical value of these risk factors is often limited in individual cases and may lead one to overestimate NMS risk. NMS is rare and idiosyncratic. Risk factors may not outweigh antipsychotics’ benefits when these drugs are indicated for a patient with psychosis.

Incipient NMS. Identifying early signs of NMS may be impossible in fulminant cases, but patients with incipient NMS may show:

  • unexpected mental status changes
  • new-onset catatonia
  • refractory extrapyramidal and bulbar signs such as rigidity, dysphagia, or dysarthria.5,7,10

Other clues to NMS onset include tachycardia, tachypnea, and elevated temperature or serum creatine phosphokinase (CPK). These signs, however, do not precede or progress to NMS in all cases. A high index of suspicion for NMS, tempered by sound clinical judgment, is called for when assessing all patients receiving antipsychotics.

 

 

Diagnostic criteria. Clinical signs of NMS as a fullblown hypermetabolic syndrome are distinctive and well described (Table 1).5,6,11,12 Elevated temperature is accompanied by profuse sweating. Extreme temperatures (>104° F), especially if prolonged or associated with hypoxia or hypotension, pose a high risk for brain damage, rhabdomyolysis, disseminated intravascular coagulation, multisystem organ failure, and death.

Muscle rigidity is a characteristic finding and may be accompanied by tremors, cogwheeling, myoclonus, or rhabdomyolysis. Changes in vital signs—such as tachycardia and tachypnea—are typical.

Mental status examination usually reveals catatonic signs of mutism and stupor, but delirium and coma also have been described. No laboratory findings are specific for NMS, but elevated white blood cell counts, low serum iron, metabolic acidosis, hypoxia, and elevated serum CPK and catecholamines have been reported.

Table 1

Common clinical features of NMS

Signs and symptomsAltered level of consciousness, catatonia, dysarthria, dysphagia, elevated temperature, labile blood pressure, muscle rigidity, mutism, myoclonus, tachycardia, tachypnea, tremor
Laboratory findingsElevated catecholamines and serum creatine phosphokinase, hypoxia, leukocytosis, low serum iron, metabolic acidosis

Resolution. If recognized promptly, NMS resolves within 1 to 2 weeks in two-thirds of patients after antipsychotics are discontinued. The average recovery time of 7 to 10 days may be prolonged in patients who were taking long-acting depot antipsychotics or in those with persistent residual catatonic symptoms.13

Risk of death. NMS remains potentially fatal, especially if high temperatures develop or episodes are prolonged. Causes of death include cardiorespiratory arrest, renal failure, pulmonary emboli, pneumonia, sepsis, disseminated intravascular coagulation, and multisystem organ failure.

DIFFERENTIAL DIAGNOSIS

Differential diagnosis of NMS encompasses disorders that present with fever and encephalopathy.5,6,12 Primary brain disorders that resemble NMS include:9,14-16

  • infections
  • acute psychotic disorders that progress to malignant catatonia or delirious mania
  • midbrain structural lesions
  • seizures.

Also exclude hormonal and autoimmune disorders and environmental heatstroke (Table 2).17,18 Similar hyperthermic syndromes have been reported with other toxins and drugs, including malignant hyperthermia of anesthesia, serotonin syndrome, and dopamine agonist withdrawal in patients with Parkinson’s disease (Table 3).5,6,19

Table 2

7 disease states most often confused with NMS

Infections
Malignant catatonia secondary to psychotic disorders
Benign extrapyramidal side effects
Agitated delirium from diverse causes
Environmental heatstroke
Serotonin syndrome
Withdrawal from dopamine agonists, other drugs, or alcohol
Source: Neuroleptic Malignant Syndrome Information Service hotline

Table 3

Drugs that can cause NMS-like hyperthermic syndromes

Anticholinergics
Dopamine antagonists
Hallucinogens
Inhalational anesthetics
Monoamine oxidase inhibitors
Psychostimulants
Salicylates
Serotonergic drugs
Succinylcholine
Withdrawal from:
• Dopamine agonists
• Alcohol
• Sedative/hypnotics
• Baclofen

MANAGING NMS

The standard approach to managing patients with NMS includes four steps:

  • recognize the diagnosis early
  • exclude alternate causes of symptoms
  • discontinue suspected triggering drugs
  • provide supportive care to reduce temperatures, ensure fluid balance, and detect complications.5,6,20

Beyond supportive care, several specific therapies have been proposed based on theoretical mechanisms of NMS and meta-analyses of offlabel use in anecdotal clinical reports (Table 4). If benzodiazepines, dopamine agonists, or dantrolene are effective, taper slowly after recovery to prevent rebound symptoms.

Benzodiazepines. Given the concept of NMS as a form of catatonia, benzodiazepines have been used effectively in some cases.20,21 A trial of lorazepam, 1 to 2 mg parenterally, is a reasonable first step. Higher doses may be required, with adequate monitoring of respiratory status. Oral lorazepam can maintain the therapeutic effect.

Dopamine agonists. To reverse the parkinsonism and dopamine antagonist properties of antipsychotics, dopamine agonists such as bromocriptine or amantadine have been tried and have reduced NMS duration and mortality.20,22,23 Newer drugs such as ropinorole and pramipexole may also be useful. Dopaminergic drugs, however, can worsen psychosis and cause hypotension and emesis.

Dantrolene may reduce hyperthermia related to skeletal muscle hypermetabolism of any cause and has been effective in rapidly reducing extreme temperatures in some NMS cases.20,22-26 Dantrolene is given IV, 1 to 2.5 mg/kg every 6 hours. An oral form can be substituted if a response is obtained. Dantrolene can impair respiratory and hepatic function and should not be combined with calcium channel blockers.

ECT is increasingly recognized as an effective NMS treatment and should not be overlooked for patients:

  • who fail to respond to drug therapy or supportive care
  • with residual catatonic symptoms.13,20,27,28

Standard ECT is given, although nondepolarizing muscle relaxants instead of succinylcholine are used in patients with serious rhabdomyolysis to avoid the risk of hyperkalemia.20

Recommendation. Although these modalities offer a spectrum of therapeutic options, it is premature to recommend any single remedy over others or over supportive care alone because:

  • randomized, controlled trials have not been conducted
  • NMS episodes are heterogeneous in presentation and outcome
  • the syndrome is often self-limited after antipsychotics are discontinued.
 

 

I recommend that you choose therapies empirically, based on the character, severity, and duration of symptoms in a given case.5,6,20

Table 4

How to treat neuroleptic malignant syndrome

General measuresDiagnose early, discontinue antipsychotic, provide supportive care
Specific interventions under investigation
BenzodiazepinesParenteral lorazepam, 1 to 2 mg or higher; monitor respiratory status
Dopamine agonistsBromocriptine, 2.5 mg every 8 hours or amantadine, 100 mg every 8 hours; monitor psychosis, blood pressure, nausea
Dantrolene1 to 2.5 mg/kg IV every 6 hours; monitor respiratory and hepatic function; avoid calcium channel blockers
ECTStandard administration; avoid succinylcholine in patients with rhabdomyolysis

REDUCING RISK OF RECURRENCE

Patients vary in susceptibility to recurrence after they recover from NMS, but the risk approaches 30% with future exposure to antipsychotics.5,6 You may be able to minimize recurrence risk by:

  • reducing risk factors, such as dehydration
  • considering alternatives to antipsychotics, such as treating bipolar disorder with lithium or ECT
  • using atypical instead of conventional antipsychotics, starting with low dosages and titrating slowly.

Before you reintroduce antipsychotics, carefully document informed consent and your rationale for treatment decisions in the patient’s chart.

Related resources

  • Neuroleptic Malignant Syndrome Information Service. Hotline for health professionals. (888) 667-8367. www.nmsis.org
  • Mann SC, Caroff SN, Keck PE Jr, Lazarus A. Neuroleptic malignant syndrome and related conditions (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing, 2003.
  • Caroff SN, Mann SC, Francis A, Fricchione GL. Catatonia: from psychopathology to neurobiology. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing (in press).

Drug brand names

  • Amantadine • Symmetrel
  • Aripiprazole • Abilify
  • Bromocriptine • Parlodel
  • Clozapine • Clozaril
  • Dantrolene • Dantrium
  • Haloperidol • Haldol
  • Lorazepam • Ativan
  • Metoclopramide • Reglan
  • Olanzapine • Zyprexa
  • Pramipexole • Mirapex
  • Prochlorperazine • Compazine
  • Promethazine • Phenergan
  • Quetiapine • Seroquel
  • Risperidone • Risperdal
  • Ropinirole • Requip
  • Ziprasidone • Geodon

Disclosure

Dr. Caroff receives research support from Janssen Pharmaceutica and Pfizer Inc., and is a consultant to Eli Lilly and Co. and Bristol-Myers Squibb Co.

References

1. Caroff SN, Mann SC, Campbell EC, Sullivan KA. Movement disorders associated with atypical antipsychotic drugs. J Clin Psychiatry 2002;63(suppl 4):12-19.

2. Caroff SN, Mann SC, Campbell EC. Atypical antipsychotics and neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Psychiatric Annals 2000;30(5):314-21.

3. Caroff SN, Rosenberg H, Mann SC, et al. Neuroleptic malignant syndrome in the perioperative setting. Am J Anesthesiology 2001;28(8):387-93.

4. Caroff SN, Rosenberg H, Mann SC, et al. Neuroleptic malignant syndrome in the critical care unit. Crit Care Med 2002;30(11):2609.-

5. Caroff SN, Mann SC. Neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Med Clin North Am 1993;77(1):185-202.

6. Caroff SN. Neuroleptic malignant syndrome. In: Mann SC, Caroff SN, Keck PE Jr, Lazarus A (eds). Neuroleptic malignant syndrome and related conditions (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing Inc., 2003;1-44.

7. Velamoor VR, Swamy GN, Parmar RS, et al. Management of suspected neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Can J Psychiatry 1995;40(9):545-50.

8. Keck PE, Jr, Pope HG, Jr, Cohen BM, et al. Risk factors for neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1989;46:914-18.

9. Mann SC. Malignant catatonia. In: Mann SC, Caroff SN, Keck PE Jr, Lazarus A (eds). Neuroleptic malignant syndrome and related conditions (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing, 2003;121-43.

10. Velamoor VR, Norman RMG, Caroff SN, et al. Progression of symptoms in neuroleptic malignant syndrome. J Nerv Ment Dis 1994;182(3):168-73.

11. Delay J, Pichot P, Lemperiere T, et al. Un neuroleptique majeur non-phenothiazine et non reserpinique, l’haloperidol, dans le traitement des psychoses. Annales Medico-Psychologique 1960;118(1):145-52.

12. Caroff SN. The neuroleptic malignant syndrome. J Clin Psychiatry 1980;41(3):79-83.

13. Caroff SN, Mann SC, Keck PE, Jr, Francis A. Residual catatonic state following neuroleptic malignant syndrome. J Clin Psychopharmacol 2000;20(2):257-9.

14. Caroff SN, Mann SC, McCarthy M, et al. Acute infectious encephalitis complicated by neuroleptic malignant syndrome. J Clin Psychopharmacol 1998;18(4):349-51.

15. Caroff SN, Mann SC, Gliatto MF, et al. Psychiatric manifestations of acute viral encephalitis. Psychiatric Annals 2001;31(3):193-204.

16. Caroff SN, Mann SC, Francis A, Fricchione GL (eds). Catatonia: from psychopathology to neurobiology. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing (in press).

17. Mann SC. Thermoregulatory mechanisms and antipsychotic drugrelated heatstroke. In: Mann SC, Caroff SN, Keck PE Jr, Lazarus A (eds). Neuroleptic malignant syndrome and related conditions (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing, 2003;45-74.

18. Caroff SN, Mann SC, Campbell EC. Risk of fatal heatstroke after hospitalization. Psychiatric Serv 2000;51(7):938.-

19. Keck PE, Jr. Serotonin syndrome. In: Mann SC, Caroff SN, Keck PE Jr, Lazarus A (eds). Neuroleptic malignant syndrome and related conditions (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing, 2003;75-92.

20. Davis JM, Caroff SN, Mann SC. Treatment of neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Psychiatric Annals 2000;30(5):325-31.

21. Francis A, Chandragiri S, Rizvi S, et al. Lorazepam a treatment for neuroleptic malignant syndrome? CNS Spectrums 2000;5(7):54-7.

22. Sakkas P, Davis JM, Hua J, Wang Z. Pharmacotherapy of neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Psychiatr Ann 1991;21:157-64.

23. Rosenberg MR, Green M. Neuroleptic malignant syndrome: review of response to therapy. Arch Intern Med 1989;149:1927-31.

24. Henderson A, Longdon P. Fulminant metoclopramide-induced neuroleptic malignant syndrome rapidly responsive to intravenous dantrolene. Aust N Z J Med 1991;21:742-3.

25. Yamawaki S, Morio M, Kazamatsuri G, et al. Clinical evaluation and effective usage of dantrolene sodium in neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Kiso to Rinsyou (Clinical Reports) 1993;27(3):1045-66.

26. Tsutsumi Y, Yamamoto K, Matsuura S, et al. The treatment of neuroleptic malignant syndrome using dantrolene sodium. Psychiatry Clin Neurosci 1998;52:433-8.

27. Nisijima K, Ishiguro T. Electroconvulsive therapy for the treatment of neuroleptic malignant syndrome: a report of five cases. J ECT 1999;15:158-63.

28. Troller JN, Sachdev PS. Electroconvulsive treatment of neuroleptic malignant syndrome: a review and report of cases. Aust N Z J Psychiatry 1999;33:650-9.

Author and Disclosure Information

Stanley N. Caroff, MD
Professor of psychiatry, University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine
Chief, inpatient psychiatry service, Department of Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Philadelphia, PA

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(12)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
36-42
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Stanley N. Caroff, MD
Professor of psychiatry, University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine
Chief, inpatient psychiatry service, Department of Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Philadelphia, PA

Author and Disclosure Information

Stanley N. Caroff, MD
Professor of psychiatry, University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine
Chief, inpatient psychiatry service, Department of Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Philadelphia, PA

Potentially fatal neuroleptic malignant syndrome (NMS)—though less common than in the past—can happen with either conventional or atypical antipsychotics.1,2 To help you protect patients when prescribing antipsychotics or consulting with other clinicians about these drugs, this article discusses:

  • risk factors and clinical features that warn of NMS onset
  • differential diagnosis of disease states most often confused with NMS
  • management recommendations, including supportive measures and specific interventions such as benzodiazepines, dopamine agonists, dantrolene, and electroconvulsive therapy (ECT).

WHY NMS REMAINS RELEVANT

NMS remains a risk in susceptible patients receiving atypical antipsychotics, according to clinical reports and drug adverse event surveys (Figure).2

Moreover, NMS continues to be reported with conventional antipsychotics, which remain in widespread use. Patients who receive long-acting depot conventional antipsychotics are at risk for prolonged NMS episodes.

Figure 55 NMS cases reported with use of antipsychotics, 1998-2002


Probable or definite neuroleptic malignant syndrome cases associated with antipsychotic monotherapy reported to the Neuroleptic Malignant Syndrome Information Service.NMS in medical settings. Psychiatrists may be consulted when patients develop NMS while receiving conventional antipsychotics or other dopaminereceptor antagonists used in medical settings.3,4 Haloperidol remains the recommended drug of choice for treating agitation and delirium and continues to be the single most common trigger of NMS. Although often overlooked, antiemetics and sedatives with neuroleptic properties—such as prochlorperazine, metoclopramide, and promethazine—also have triggered NMS.

Other hyperthermic conditions. NMS is often considered in the differential diagnosis of patients who develop fever or encephalopathy while being treated with psychotropics. In these acute, complex, and often grave situations, psychiatrists may be consulted to recommend treatment for behavioral control or to distinguish NMS from other conditions.

NEWER VS. OLDER ANTIPSYCHOTICS

Has NMS incidence declined with the atypical agents? Probably, but providing proof is difficult:

  • NMS is uncommon; its incidence in psychiatric patients treated with conventional antipsychotics is approximately 0.2%.5 To demonstrate reduced NMS incidence with atypicals, a very large sample of patients would be required to reach statistical significance.
  • As doctors have used lower doses of conventional agents—which reduces the risk of NMS—any beneficial impact from atypicals has become more difficult to detect.5,6
  • Reports of NMS frequency with atypicals may be inflated by bias in publishing adverse events with newer versus older agents.
  • Patients switched to atypicals may represent a high-risk group that is intolerant or resistant to conventional antipsychotics.

So far, few unequivocal cases of NMS have been attributed to the use of quetiapine, ziprasidone, or aripiprazole, the most recently introduced atypicals. Moreover, case reports of NMS associated with clozapine, risperidone, or olanzapine2 are often difficult to interpret because of incomplete clinical details, varying diagnostic criteria, and concomitant use of more than one antipsychotic.

Milder NMS? Do the newer antipsychotics produce an “atypical” or milder form of NMS? Case reports indicate that extreme temperature elevations and extrapyramidal dysfunction are less frequent in NMS associated with atypical compared with conventional antipsychotics.2 However, case descriptions of NMS were heterogeneous even with conventional agents, and clinicians’ growing awareness of NMS even before atypicals were introduced allowed for earlier diagnosis of mild and partial NMS cases.7

CLINICAL FEATURES OF NMS

Regardless of drug selection, it is important to recognize early and mild signs of NMS. Any case can progress to a fulminant form that is more difficult to treat.

Patients at risk. NMS may be more likely to develop in patients with:5,6,8

  • dehydration
  • agitation
  • low serum iron
  • underlying brain damage
  • catatonia.

Some patients may have genetic abnormalities in central dopamine systems that increase their susceptibility to NMS.6,9

Fifteen to 20% of patients who develop NMS have experienced a previous episode while taking antipsychotics, which is why taking a careful drug history is important.5,6 Although most often reported with therapeutic antipsychotic doses, NMS has been associated with rapid dose titration, especially when given parenterally.8

On the other hand, the practical value of these risk factors is often limited in individual cases and may lead one to overestimate NMS risk. NMS is rare and idiosyncratic. Risk factors may not outweigh antipsychotics’ benefits when these drugs are indicated for a patient with psychosis.

Incipient NMS. Identifying early signs of NMS may be impossible in fulminant cases, but patients with incipient NMS may show:

  • unexpected mental status changes
  • new-onset catatonia
  • refractory extrapyramidal and bulbar signs such as rigidity, dysphagia, or dysarthria.5,7,10

Other clues to NMS onset include tachycardia, tachypnea, and elevated temperature or serum creatine phosphokinase (CPK). These signs, however, do not precede or progress to NMS in all cases. A high index of suspicion for NMS, tempered by sound clinical judgment, is called for when assessing all patients receiving antipsychotics.

 

 

Diagnostic criteria. Clinical signs of NMS as a fullblown hypermetabolic syndrome are distinctive and well described (Table 1).5,6,11,12 Elevated temperature is accompanied by profuse sweating. Extreme temperatures (>104° F), especially if prolonged or associated with hypoxia or hypotension, pose a high risk for brain damage, rhabdomyolysis, disseminated intravascular coagulation, multisystem organ failure, and death.

Muscle rigidity is a characteristic finding and may be accompanied by tremors, cogwheeling, myoclonus, or rhabdomyolysis. Changes in vital signs—such as tachycardia and tachypnea—are typical.

Mental status examination usually reveals catatonic signs of mutism and stupor, but delirium and coma also have been described. No laboratory findings are specific for NMS, but elevated white blood cell counts, low serum iron, metabolic acidosis, hypoxia, and elevated serum CPK and catecholamines have been reported.

Table 1

Common clinical features of NMS

Signs and symptomsAltered level of consciousness, catatonia, dysarthria, dysphagia, elevated temperature, labile blood pressure, muscle rigidity, mutism, myoclonus, tachycardia, tachypnea, tremor
Laboratory findingsElevated catecholamines and serum creatine phosphokinase, hypoxia, leukocytosis, low serum iron, metabolic acidosis

Resolution. If recognized promptly, NMS resolves within 1 to 2 weeks in two-thirds of patients after antipsychotics are discontinued. The average recovery time of 7 to 10 days may be prolonged in patients who were taking long-acting depot antipsychotics or in those with persistent residual catatonic symptoms.13

Risk of death. NMS remains potentially fatal, especially if high temperatures develop or episodes are prolonged. Causes of death include cardiorespiratory arrest, renal failure, pulmonary emboli, pneumonia, sepsis, disseminated intravascular coagulation, and multisystem organ failure.

DIFFERENTIAL DIAGNOSIS

Differential diagnosis of NMS encompasses disorders that present with fever and encephalopathy.5,6,12 Primary brain disorders that resemble NMS include:9,14-16

  • infections
  • acute psychotic disorders that progress to malignant catatonia or delirious mania
  • midbrain structural lesions
  • seizures.

Also exclude hormonal and autoimmune disorders and environmental heatstroke (Table 2).17,18 Similar hyperthermic syndromes have been reported with other toxins and drugs, including malignant hyperthermia of anesthesia, serotonin syndrome, and dopamine agonist withdrawal in patients with Parkinson’s disease (Table 3).5,6,19

Table 2

7 disease states most often confused with NMS

Infections
Malignant catatonia secondary to psychotic disorders
Benign extrapyramidal side effects
Agitated delirium from diverse causes
Environmental heatstroke
Serotonin syndrome
Withdrawal from dopamine agonists, other drugs, or alcohol
Source: Neuroleptic Malignant Syndrome Information Service hotline

Table 3

Drugs that can cause NMS-like hyperthermic syndromes

Anticholinergics
Dopamine antagonists
Hallucinogens
Inhalational anesthetics
Monoamine oxidase inhibitors
Psychostimulants
Salicylates
Serotonergic drugs
Succinylcholine
Withdrawal from:
• Dopamine agonists
• Alcohol
• Sedative/hypnotics
• Baclofen

MANAGING NMS

The standard approach to managing patients with NMS includes four steps:

  • recognize the diagnosis early
  • exclude alternate causes of symptoms
  • discontinue suspected triggering drugs
  • provide supportive care to reduce temperatures, ensure fluid balance, and detect complications.5,6,20

Beyond supportive care, several specific therapies have been proposed based on theoretical mechanisms of NMS and meta-analyses of offlabel use in anecdotal clinical reports (Table 4). If benzodiazepines, dopamine agonists, or dantrolene are effective, taper slowly after recovery to prevent rebound symptoms.

Benzodiazepines. Given the concept of NMS as a form of catatonia, benzodiazepines have been used effectively in some cases.20,21 A trial of lorazepam, 1 to 2 mg parenterally, is a reasonable first step. Higher doses may be required, with adequate monitoring of respiratory status. Oral lorazepam can maintain the therapeutic effect.

Dopamine agonists. To reverse the parkinsonism and dopamine antagonist properties of antipsychotics, dopamine agonists such as bromocriptine or amantadine have been tried and have reduced NMS duration and mortality.20,22,23 Newer drugs such as ropinorole and pramipexole may also be useful. Dopaminergic drugs, however, can worsen psychosis and cause hypotension and emesis.

Dantrolene may reduce hyperthermia related to skeletal muscle hypermetabolism of any cause and has been effective in rapidly reducing extreme temperatures in some NMS cases.20,22-26 Dantrolene is given IV, 1 to 2.5 mg/kg every 6 hours. An oral form can be substituted if a response is obtained. Dantrolene can impair respiratory and hepatic function and should not be combined with calcium channel blockers.

ECT is increasingly recognized as an effective NMS treatment and should not be overlooked for patients:

  • who fail to respond to drug therapy or supportive care
  • with residual catatonic symptoms.13,20,27,28

Standard ECT is given, although nondepolarizing muscle relaxants instead of succinylcholine are used in patients with serious rhabdomyolysis to avoid the risk of hyperkalemia.20

Recommendation. Although these modalities offer a spectrum of therapeutic options, it is premature to recommend any single remedy over others or over supportive care alone because:

  • randomized, controlled trials have not been conducted
  • NMS episodes are heterogeneous in presentation and outcome
  • the syndrome is often self-limited after antipsychotics are discontinued.
 

 

I recommend that you choose therapies empirically, based on the character, severity, and duration of symptoms in a given case.5,6,20

Table 4

How to treat neuroleptic malignant syndrome

General measuresDiagnose early, discontinue antipsychotic, provide supportive care
Specific interventions under investigation
BenzodiazepinesParenteral lorazepam, 1 to 2 mg or higher; monitor respiratory status
Dopamine agonistsBromocriptine, 2.5 mg every 8 hours or amantadine, 100 mg every 8 hours; monitor psychosis, blood pressure, nausea
Dantrolene1 to 2.5 mg/kg IV every 6 hours; monitor respiratory and hepatic function; avoid calcium channel blockers
ECTStandard administration; avoid succinylcholine in patients with rhabdomyolysis

REDUCING RISK OF RECURRENCE

Patients vary in susceptibility to recurrence after they recover from NMS, but the risk approaches 30% with future exposure to antipsychotics.5,6 You may be able to minimize recurrence risk by:

  • reducing risk factors, such as dehydration
  • considering alternatives to antipsychotics, such as treating bipolar disorder with lithium or ECT
  • using atypical instead of conventional antipsychotics, starting with low dosages and titrating slowly.

Before you reintroduce antipsychotics, carefully document informed consent and your rationale for treatment decisions in the patient’s chart.

Related resources

  • Neuroleptic Malignant Syndrome Information Service. Hotline for health professionals. (888) 667-8367. www.nmsis.org
  • Mann SC, Caroff SN, Keck PE Jr, Lazarus A. Neuroleptic malignant syndrome and related conditions (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing, 2003.
  • Caroff SN, Mann SC, Francis A, Fricchione GL. Catatonia: from psychopathology to neurobiology. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing (in press).

Drug brand names

  • Amantadine • Symmetrel
  • Aripiprazole • Abilify
  • Bromocriptine • Parlodel
  • Clozapine • Clozaril
  • Dantrolene • Dantrium
  • Haloperidol • Haldol
  • Lorazepam • Ativan
  • Metoclopramide • Reglan
  • Olanzapine • Zyprexa
  • Pramipexole • Mirapex
  • Prochlorperazine • Compazine
  • Promethazine • Phenergan
  • Quetiapine • Seroquel
  • Risperidone • Risperdal
  • Ropinirole • Requip
  • Ziprasidone • Geodon

Disclosure

Dr. Caroff receives research support from Janssen Pharmaceutica and Pfizer Inc., and is a consultant to Eli Lilly and Co. and Bristol-Myers Squibb Co.

Potentially fatal neuroleptic malignant syndrome (NMS)—though less common than in the past—can happen with either conventional or atypical antipsychotics.1,2 To help you protect patients when prescribing antipsychotics or consulting with other clinicians about these drugs, this article discusses:

  • risk factors and clinical features that warn of NMS onset
  • differential diagnosis of disease states most often confused with NMS
  • management recommendations, including supportive measures and specific interventions such as benzodiazepines, dopamine agonists, dantrolene, and electroconvulsive therapy (ECT).

WHY NMS REMAINS RELEVANT

NMS remains a risk in susceptible patients receiving atypical antipsychotics, according to clinical reports and drug adverse event surveys (Figure).2

Moreover, NMS continues to be reported with conventional antipsychotics, which remain in widespread use. Patients who receive long-acting depot conventional antipsychotics are at risk for prolonged NMS episodes.

Figure 55 NMS cases reported with use of antipsychotics, 1998-2002


Probable or definite neuroleptic malignant syndrome cases associated with antipsychotic monotherapy reported to the Neuroleptic Malignant Syndrome Information Service.NMS in medical settings. Psychiatrists may be consulted when patients develop NMS while receiving conventional antipsychotics or other dopaminereceptor antagonists used in medical settings.3,4 Haloperidol remains the recommended drug of choice for treating agitation and delirium and continues to be the single most common trigger of NMS. Although often overlooked, antiemetics and sedatives with neuroleptic properties—such as prochlorperazine, metoclopramide, and promethazine—also have triggered NMS.

Other hyperthermic conditions. NMS is often considered in the differential diagnosis of patients who develop fever or encephalopathy while being treated with psychotropics. In these acute, complex, and often grave situations, psychiatrists may be consulted to recommend treatment for behavioral control or to distinguish NMS from other conditions.

NEWER VS. OLDER ANTIPSYCHOTICS

Has NMS incidence declined with the atypical agents? Probably, but providing proof is difficult:

  • NMS is uncommon; its incidence in psychiatric patients treated with conventional antipsychotics is approximately 0.2%.5 To demonstrate reduced NMS incidence with atypicals, a very large sample of patients would be required to reach statistical significance.
  • As doctors have used lower doses of conventional agents—which reduces the risk of NMS—any beneficial impact from atypicals has become more difficult to detect.5,6
  • Reports of NMS frequency with atypicals may be inflated by bias in publishing adverse events with newer versus older agents.
  • Patients switched to atypicals may represent a high-risk group that is intolerant or resistant to conventional antipsychotics.

So far, few unequivocal cases of NMS have been attributed to the use of quetiapine, ziprasidone, or aripiprazole, the most recently introduced atypicals. Moreover, case reports of NMS associated with clozapine, risperidone, or olanzapine2 are often difficult to interpret because of incomplete clinical details, varying diagnostic criteria, and concomitant use of more than one antipsychotic.

Milder NMS? Do the newer antipsychotics produce an “atypical” or milder form of NMS? Case reports indicate that extreme temperature elevations and extrapyramidal dysfunction are less frequent in NMS associated with atypical compared with conventional antipsychotics.2 However, case descriptions of NMS were heterogeneous even with conventional agents, and clinicians’ growing awareness of NMS even before atypicals were introduced allowed for earlier diagnosis of mild and partial NMS cases.7

CLINICAL FEATURES OF NMS

Regardless of drug selection, it is important to recognize early and mild signs of NMS. Any case can progress to a fulminant form that is more difficult to treat.

Patients at risk. NMS may be more likely to develop in patients with:5,6,8

  • dehydration
  • agitation
  • low serum iron
  • underlying brain damage
  • catatonia.

Some patients may have genetic abnormalities in central dopamine systems that increase their susceptibility to NMS.6,9

Fifteen to 20% of patients who develop NMS have experienced a previous episode while taking antipsychotics, which is why taking a careful drug history is important.5,6 Although most often reported with therapeutic antipsychotic doses, NMS has been associated with rapid dose titration, especially when given parenterally.8

On the other hand, the practical value of these risk factors is often limited in individual cases and may lead one to overestimate NMS risk. NMS is rare and idiosyncratic. Risk factors may not outweigh antipsychotics’ benefits when these drugs are indicated for a patient with psychosis.

Incipient NMS. Identifying early signs of NMS may be impossible in fulminant cases, but patients with incipient NMS may show:

  • unexpected mental status changes
  • new-onset catatonia
  • refractory extrapyramidal and bulbar signs such as rigidity, dysphagia, or dysarthria.5,7,10

Other clues to NMS onset include tachycardia, tachypnea, and elevated temperature or serum creatine phosphokinase (CPK). These signs, however, do not precede or progress to NMS in all cases. A high index of suspicion for NMS, tempered by sound clinical judgment, is called for when assessing all patients receiving antipsychotics.

 

 

Diagnostic criteria. Clinical signs of NMS as a fullblown hypermetabolic syndrome are distinctive and well described (Table 1).5,6,11,12 Elevated temperature is accompanied by profuse sweating. Extreme temperatures (>104° F), especially if prolonged or associated with hypoxia or hypotension, pose a high risk for brain damage, rhabdomyolysis, disseminated intravascular coagulation, multisystem organ failure, and death.

Muscle rigidity is a characteristic finding and may be accompanied by tremors, cogwheeling, myoclonus, or rhabdomyolysis. Changes in vital signs—such as tachycardia and tachypnea—are typical.

Mental status examination usually reveals catatonic signs of mutism and stupor, but delirium and coma also have been described. No laboratory findings are specific for NMS, but elevated white blood cell counts, low serum iron, metabolic acidosis, hypoxia, and elevated serum CPK and catecholamines have been reported.

Table 1

Common clinical features of NMS

Signs and symptomsAltered level of consciousness, catatonia, dysarthria, dysphagia, elevated temperature, labile blood pressure, muscle rigidity, mutism, myoclonus, tachycardia, tachypnea, tremor
Laboratory findingsElevated catecholamines and serum creatine phosphokinase, hypoxia, leukocytosis, low serum iron, metabolic acidosis

Resolution. If recognized promptly, NMS resolves within 1 to 2 weeks in two-thirds of patients after antipsychotics are discontinued. The average recovery time of 7 to 10 days may be prolonged in patients who were taking long-acting depot antipsychotics or in those with persistent residual catatonic symptoms.13

Risk of death. NMS remains potentially fatal, especially if high temperatures develop or episodes are prolonged. Causes of death include cardiorespiratory arrest, renal failure, pulmonary emboli, pneumonia, sepsis, disseminated intravascular coagulation, and multisystem organ failure.

DIFFERENTIAL DIAGNOSIS

Differential diagnosis of NMS encompasses disorders that present with fever and encephalopathy.5,6,12 Primary brain disorders that resemble NMS include:9,14-16

  • infections
  • acute psychotic disorders that progress to malignant catatonia or delirious mania
  • midbrain structural lesions
  • seizures.

Also exclude hormonal and autoimmune disorders and environmental heatstroke (Table 2).17,18 Similar hyperthermic syndromes have been reported with other toxins and drugs, including malignant hyperthermia of anesthesia, serotonin syndrome, and dopamine agonist withdrawal in patients with Parkinson’s disease (Table 3).5,6,19

Table 2

7 disease states most often confused with NMS

Infections
Malignant catatonia secondary to psychotic disorders
Benign extrapyramidal side effects
Agitated delirium from diverse causes
Environmental heatstroke
Serotonin syndrome
Withdrawal from dopamine agonists, other drugs, or alcohol
Source: Neuroleptic Malignant Syndrome Information Service hotline

Table 3

Drugs that can cause NMS-like hyperthermic syndromes

Anticholinergics
Dopamine antagonists
Hallucinogens
Inhalational anesthetics
Monoamine oxidase inhibitors
Psychostimulants
Salicylates
Serotonergic drugs
Succinylcholine
Withdrawal from:
• Dopamine agonists
• Alcohol
• Sedative/hypnotics
• Baclofen

MANAGING NMS

The standard approach to managing patients with NMS includes four steps:

  • recognize the diagnosis early
  • exclude alternate causes of symptoms
  • discontinue suspected triggering drugs
  • provide supportive care to reduce temperatures, ensure fluid balance, and detect complications.5,6,20

Beyond supportive care, several specific therapies have been proposed based on theoretical mechanisms of NMS and meta-analyses of offlabel use in anecdotal clinical reports (Table 4). If benzodiazepines, dopamine agonists, or dantrolene are effective, taper slowly after recovery to prevent rebound symptoms.

Benzodiazepines. Given the concept of NMS as a form of catatonia, benzodiazepines have been used effectively in some cases.20,21 A trial of lorazepam, 1 to 2 mg parenterally, is a reasonable first step. Higher doses may be required, with adequate monitoring of respiratory status. Oral lorazepam can maintain the therapeutic effect.

Dopamine agonists. To reverse the parkinsonism and dopamine antagonist properties of antipsychotics, dopamine agonists such as bromocriptine or amantadine have been tried and have reduced NMS duration and mortality.20,22,23 Newer drugs such as ropinorole and pramipexole may also be useful. Dopaminergic drugs, however, can worsen psychosis and cause hypotension and emesis.

Dantrolene may reduce hyperthermia related to skeletal muscle hypermetabolism of any cause and has been effective in rapidly reducing extreme temperatures in some NMS cases.20,22-26 Dantrolene is given IV, 1 to 2.5 mg/kg every 6 hours. An oral form can be substituted if a response is obtained. Dantrolene can impair respiratory and hepatic function and should not be combined with calcium channel blockers.

ECT is increasingly recognized as an effective NMS treatment and should not be overlooked for patients:

  • who fail to respond to drug therapy or supportive care
  • with residual catatonic symptoms.13,20,27,28

Standard ECT is given, although nondepolarizing muscle relaxants instead of succinylcholine are used in patients with serious rhabdomyolysis to avoid the risk of hyperkalemia.20

Recommendation. Although these modalities offer a spectrum of therapeutic options, it is premature to recommend any single remedy over others or over supportive care alone because:

  • randomized, controlled trials have not been conducted
  • NMS episodes are heterogeneous in presentation and outcome
  • the syndrome is often self-limited after antipsychotics are discontinued.
 

 

I recommend that you choose therapies empirically, based on the character, severity, and duration of symptoms in a given case.5,6,20

Table 4

How to treat neuroleptic malignant syndrome

General measuresDiagnose early, discontinue antipsychotic, provide supportive care
Specific interventions under investigation
BenzodiazepinesParenteral lorazepam, 1 to 2 mg or higher; monitor respiratory status
Dopamine agonistsBromocriptine, 2.5 mg every 8 hours or amantadine, 100 mg every 8 hours; monitor psychosis, blood pressure, nausea
Dantrolene1 to 2.5 mg/kg IV every 6 hours; monitor respiratory and hepatic function; avoid calcium channel blockers
ECTStandard administration; avoid succinylcholine in patients with rhabdomyolysis

REDUCING RISK OF RECURRENCE

Patients vary in susceptibility to recurrence after they recover from NMS, but the risk approaches 30% with future exposure to antipsychotics.5,6 You may be able to minimize recurrence risk by:

  • reducing risk factors, such as dehydration
  • considering alternatives to antipsychotics, such as treating bipolar disorder with lithium or ECT
  • using atypical instead of conventional antipsychotics, starting with low dosages and titrating slowly.

Before you reintroduce antipsychotics, carefully document informed consent and your rationale for treatment decisions in the patient’s chart.

Related resources

  • Neuroleptic Malignant Syndrome Information Service. Hotline for health professionals. (888) 667-8367. www.nmsis.org
  • Mann SC, Caroff SN, Keck PE Jr, Lazarus A. Neuroleptic malignant syndrome and related conditions (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing, 2003.
  • Caroff SN, Mann SC, Francis A, Fricchione GL. Catatonia: from psychopathology to neurobiology. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing (in press).

Drug brand names

  • Amantadine • Symmetrel
  • Aripiprazole • Abilify
  • Bromocriptine • Parlodel
  • Clozapine • Clozaril
  • Dantrolene • Dantrium
  • Haloperidol • Haldol
  • Lorazepam • Ativan
  • Metoclopramide • Reglan
  • Olanzapine • Zyprexa
  • Pramipexole • Mirapex
  • Prochlorperazine • Compazine
  • Promethazine • Phenergan
  • Quetiapine • Seroquel
  • Risperidone • Risperdal
  • Ropinirole • Requip
  • Ziprasidone • Geodon

Disclosure

Dr. Caroff receives research support from Janssen Pharmaceutica and Pfizer Inc., and is a consultant to Eli Lilly and Co. and Bristol-Myers Squibb Co.

References

1. Caroff SN, Mann SC, Campbell EC, Sullivan KA. Movement disorders associated with atypical antipsychotic drugs. J Clin Psychiatry 2002;63(suppl 4):12-19.

2. Caroff SN, Mann SC, Campbell EC. Atypical antipsychotics and neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Psychiatric Annals 2000;30(5):314-21.

3. Caroff SN, Rosenberg H, Mann SC, et al. Neuroleptic malignant syndrome in the perioperative setting. Am J Anesthesiology 2001;28(8):387-93.

4. Caroff SN, Rosenberg H, Mann SC, et al. Neuroleptic malignant syndrome in the critical care unit. Crit Care Med 2002;30(11):2609.-

5. Caroff SN, Mann SC. Neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Med Clin North Am 1993;77(1):185-202.

6. Caroff SN. Neuroleptic malignant syndrome. In: Mann SC, Caroff SN, Keck PE Jr, Lazarus A (eds). Neuroleptic malignant syndrome and related conditions (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing Inc., 2003;1-44.

7. Velamoor VR, Swamy GN, Parmar RS, et al. Management of suspected neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Can J Psychiatry 1995;40(9):545-50.

8. Keck PE, Jr, Pope HG, Jr, Cohen BM, et al. Risk factors for neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1989;46:914-18.

9. Mann SC. Malignant catatonia. In: Mann SC, Caroff SN, Keck PE Jr, Lazarus A (eds). Neuroleptic malignant syndrome and related conditions (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing, 2003;121-43.

10. Velamoor VR, Norman RMG, Caroff SN, et al. Progression of symptoms in neuroleptic malignant syndrome. J Nerv Ment Dis 1994;182(3):168-73.

11. Delay J, Pichot P, Lemperiere T, et al. Un neuroleptique majeur non-phenothiazine et non reserpinique, l’haloperidol, dans le traitement des psychoses. Annales Medico-Psychologique 1960;118(1):145-52.

12. Caroff SN. The neuroleptic malignant syndrome. J Clin Psychiatry 1980;41(3):79-83.

13. Caroff SN, Mann SC, Keck PE, Jr, Francis A. Residual catatonic state following neuroleptic malignant syndrome. J Clin Psychopharmacol 2000;20(2):257-9.

14. Caroff SN, Mann SC, McCarthy M, et al. Acute infectious encephalitis complicated by neuroleptic malignant syndrome. J Clin Psychopharmacol 1998;18(4):349-51.

15. Caroff SN, Mann SC, Gliatto MF, et al. Psychiatric manifestations of acute viral encephalitis. Psychiatric Annals 2001;31(3):193-204.

16. Caroff SN, Mann SC, Francis A, Fricchione GL (eds). Catatonia: from psychopathology to neurobiology. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing (in press).

17. Mann SC. Thermoregulatory mechanisms and antipsychotic drugrelated heatstroke. In: Mann SC, Caroff SN, Keck PE Jr, Lazarus A (eds). Neuroleptic malignant syndrome and related conditions (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing, 2003;45-74.

18. Caroff SN, Mann SC, Campbell EC. Risk of fatal heatstroke after hospitalization. Psychiatric Serv 2000;51(7):938.-

19. Keck PE, Jr. Serotonin syndrome. In: Mann SC, Caroff SN, Keck PE Jr, Lazarus A (eds). Neuroleptic malignant syndrome and related conditions (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing, 2003;75-92.

20. Davis JM, Caroff SN, Mann SC. Treatment of neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Psychiatric Annals 2000;30(5):325-31.

21. Francis A, Chandragiri S, Rizvi S, et al. Lorazepam a treatment for neuroleptic malignant syndrome? CNS Spectrums 2000;5(7):54-7.

22. Sakkas P, Davis JM, Hua J, Wang Z. Pharmacotherapy of neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Psychiatr Ann 1991;21:157-64.

23. Rosenberg MR, Green M. Neuroleptic malignant syndrome: review of response to therapy. Arch Intern Med 1989;149:1927-31.

24. Henderson A, Longdon P. Fulminant metoclopramide-induced neuroleptic malignant syndrome rapidly responsive to intravenous dantrolene. Aust N Z J Med 1991;21:742-3.

25. Yamawaki S, Morio M, Kazamatsuri G, et al. Clinical evaluation and effective usage of dantrolene sodium in neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Kiso to Rinsyou (Clinical Reports) 1993;27(3):1045-66.

26. Tsutsumi Y, Yamamoto K, Matsuura S, et al. The treatment of neuroleptic malignant syndrome using dantrolene sodium. Psychiatry Clin Neurosci 1998;52:433-8.

27. Nisijima K, Ishiguro T. Electroconvulsive therapy for the treatment of neuroleptic malignant syndrome: a report of five cases. J ECT 1999;15:158-63.

28. Troller JN, Sachdev PS. Electroconvulsive treatment of neuroleptic malignant syndrome: a review and report of cases. Aust N Z J Psychiatry 1999;33:650-9.

References

1. Caroff SN, Mann SC, Campbell EC, Sullivan KA. Movement disorders associated with atypical antipsychotic drugs. J Clin Psychiatry 2002;63(suppl 4):12-19.

2. Caroff SN, Mann SC, Campbell EC. Atypical antipsychotics and neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Psychiatric Annals 2000;30(5):314-21.

3. Caroff SN, Rosenberg H, Mann SC, et al. Neuroleptic malignant syndrome in the perioperative setting. Am J Anesthesiology 2001;28(8):387-93.

4. Caroff SN, Rosenberg H, Mann SC, et al. Neuroleptic malignant syndrome in the critical care unit. Crit Care Med 2002;30(11):2609.-

5. Caroff SN, Mann SC. Neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Med Clin North Am 1993;77(1):185-202.

6. Caroff SN. Neuroleptic malignant syndrome. In: Mann SC, Caroff SN, Keck PE Jr, Lazarus A (eds). Neuroleptic malignant syndrome and related conditions (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing Inc., 2003;1-44.

7. Velamoor VR, Swamy GN, Parmar RS, et al. Management of suspected neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Can J Psychiatry 1995;40(9):545-50.

8. Keck PE, Jr, Pope HG, Jr, Cohen BM, et al. Risk factors for neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1989;46:914-18.

9. Mann SC. Malignant catatonia. In: Mann SC, Caroff SN, Keck PE Jr, Lazarus A (eds). Neuroleptic malignant syndrome and related conditions (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing, 2003;121-43.

10. Velamoor VR, Norman RMG, Caroff SN, et al. Progression of symptoms in neuroleptic malignant syndrome. J Nerv Ment Dis 1994;182(3):168-73.

11. Delay J, Pichot P, Lemperiere T, et al. Un neuroleptique majeur non-phenothiazine et non reserpinique, l’haloperidol, dans le traitement des psychoses. Annales Medico-Psychologique 1960;118(1):145-52.

12. Caroff SN. The neuroleptic malignant syndrome. J Clin Psychiatry 1980;41(3):79-83.

13. Caroff SN, Mann SC, Keck PE, Jr, Francis A. Residual catatonic state following neuroleptic malignant syndrome. J Clin Psychopharmacol 2000;20(2):257-9.

14. Caroff SN, Mann SC, McCarthy M, et al. Acute infectious encephalitis complicated by neuroleptic malignant syndrome. J Clin Psychopharmacol 1998;18(4):349-51.

15. Caroff SN, Mann SC, Gliatto MF, et al. Psychiatric manifestations of acute viral encephalitis. Psychiatric Annals 2001;31(3):193-204.

16. Caroff SN, Mann SC, Francis A, Fricchione GL (eds). Catatonia: from psychopathology to neurobiology. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing (in press).

17. Mann SC. Thermoregulatory mechanisms and antipsychotic drugrelated heatstroke. In: Mann SC, Caroff SN, Keck PE Jr, Lazarus A (eds). Neuroleptic malignant syndrome and related conditions (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing, 2003;45-74.

18. Caroff SN, Mann SC, Campbell EC. Risk of fatal heatstroke after hospitalization. Psychiatric Serv 2000;51(7):938.-

19. Keck PE, Jr. Serotonin syndrome. In: Mann SC, Caroff SN, Keck PE Jr, Lazarus A (eds). Neuroleptic malignant syndrome and related conditions (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing, 2003;75-92.

20. Davis JM, Caroff SN, Mann SC. Treatment of neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Psychiatric Annals 2000;30(5):325-31.

21. Francis A, Chandragiri S, Rizvi S, et al. Lorazepam a treatment for neuroleptic malignant syndrome? CNS Spectrums 2000;5(7):54-7.

22. Sakkas P, Davis JM, Hua J, Wang Z. Pharmacotherapy of neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Psychiatr Ann 1991;21:157-64.

23. Rosenberg MR, Green M. Neuroleptic malignant syndrome: review of response to therapy. Arch Intern Med 1989;149:1927-31.

24. Henderson A, Longdon P. Fulminant metoclopramide-induced neuroleptic malignant syndrome rapidly responsive to intravenous dantrolene. Aust N Z J Med 1991;21:742-3.

25. Yamawaki S, Morio M, Kazamatsuri G, et al. Clinical evaluation and effective usage of dantrolene sodium in neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Kiso to Rinsyou (Clinical Reports) 1993;27(3):1045-66.

26. Tsutsumi Y, Yamamoto K, Matsuura S, et al. The treatment of neuroleptic malignant syndrome using dantrolene sodium. Psychiatry Clin Neurosci 1998;52:433-8.

27. Nisijima K, Ishiguro T. Electroconvulsive therapy for the treatment of neuroleptic malignant syndrome: a report of five cases. J ECT 1999;15:158-63.

28. Troller JN, Sachdev PS. Electroconvulsive treatment of neuroleptic malignant syndrome: a review and report of cases. Aust N Z J Psychiatry 1999;33:650-9.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(12)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(12)
Page Number
36-42
Page Number
36-42
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Neuroleptic malignant syndrome: Still a risk, but which patients may be in danger?
Display Headline
Neuroleptic malignant syndrome: Still a risk, but which patients may be in danger?
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Practice, not malpractice: 3 clinical habits to reduce liability risk

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:11
Display Headline
Practice, not malpractice: 3 clinical habits to reduce liability risk

Psychiatrists’ risk of malpractice liability1 is broadening as courts consider the uncertainties of off-label prescribing, telemedicine, and confidentiality. Juries are holding mental health practitioners responsible for harm done both to and by psychiatric patients.

How you keep medical records, communicate with patients and colleagues, and arrange consultations can reduce your malpractice risk (Box 1).4-9 We offer recommendations based on court decisions and other evidence for managing:

  • traditional risks—such as patient violence and suicide, adverse drug reactions, sex with patients, faulty termination of treatment, and supervisory and consultative relationships4
  • newer risks—such as recovered memory, off-label prescribing, practice guidelines, and e-mail and confidentiality.

Box 1

Want to reduce malpractice risk? Cultivate 3 clinical habits

1. Keep thorough medical records

The most powerful defense against a malpractice suit is a well-documented chart. It can often prevent a malpractice suit by providing evidence that the physician adequately evaluated the available information and made good-faith efforts with his or her best judgment. Juries are typically forgiving of mistakes made in this context.4,5

Write legibly, and sign and date all entries. Try to think out loud in the chart. By outlining your thoughts about differential diagnosis, risks and benefits, and treatment options, you can help a jury understand your decision-making process and show that you carefully evaluated the situation. When documenting difficult cases, for example, imagine a plaintiff’s attorney reading your notes to a jury.6

2. Communicate freely with patients

Careful interaction with patients and their families can also prevent lawsuits. Communicating includes preparing patients for what to expect during treatment sessions, encouraging feedback, and even using humor.7 Freely sharing treatment information with patients can build a sense of mutual decision-making and responsibility.8 Acknowledging treatment limitations and deflating unrealistic expectations can also protect you.

Patients who file malpractice suits are often seeking an apology or expression of regret from their physicians. It is appropriate and prudent to admit and apologize for minor errors. It is also appropriate to express condolence over what both sides agree is a severe, negative outcome.9 Expressing sympathy is not equivalent to admitting wrongdoing.

3. Seek consultation as needed

Discussing difficult or ambiguous cases with peers, supervisors, or legal staff can help shield you from liability. For example:

  • Second opinions may help you make difficult clinical decisions.
  • Peers and supervisors may provide useful suggestions to improve patient care.
  • Legal staff can give advice regarding liability.

The fact that you sought consultation can be used in court as evidence against negligence, as it shows you tried to ensure appropriate care for your patient.9

This article describes general guidelines and is not intended to constitute legal advice. All practitioners have a responsibility to know the laws of the jurisdictions in which they practice.

PREVENTING PATIENT VIOLENCE

The case that opened Pandora’s box. Prosenjit Poddar, a student at the University of California at Berkeley, was infatuated with coed Tanya Tarasoff and told his psychologist he intended to kill her. The psychologist notified his psychiatric supervisor and called campus police.

The psychologist told police Poddar was dangerous to himself and others. He stated that he would sign an emergency hold if they would bring Poddar to the hospital.

The police apprehended Poddar but released him. Poddar dropped out of therapy and 2 months later fatally stabbed Ms. Tarasoff.

Ms. Tarasoff’s parents sued those who treated Poddar and the University of California.2 After a complicated legal course, the California Supreme Court ruled that once a therapist determines—or should have determined—that a patient poses a serious danger of violence to others, “he bears a duty to exercise reasonable care to protect the foreseeable victim of that danger.”3

The 1976 Tarasoff ruling has become a national standard of practice, leading to numerous other patient violence lawsuits. In these cases, psychiatrists are most likely to be found liable when recently released inpatients commit violent acts, particularly if the physician had reason to know the patient was dangerous and failed to take adequate precautions or appropriately assess the patient.4

Wider interpretations. Cases in several states have extended the Tarasoff ruling. In at least two cases, this standard has been applied when the patient threatened no specific victim before committing violence:

  • A New Jersey court (McIntosh v. Milano, 1979) found a psychiatrist liable for malpractice on grounds that a therapist has a duty to protect society, just as a doctor must protect society by reporting carriers of dangerous diseases.
  • A Nebraska court (Lipari v. Sears, Roebuck, and Co., 1980) held that physicians have a duty to protect—even if the specific identity of victims is unknown—so long as the physician should know that the patient presents an unreasonable risk of harm to others.2
 

 

Auto accidents. Tarasoff liability also has been extended to auto accidents. In Washington state (Petersen v. Washington, 1983), a psychiatrist was held liable for injuries to victims of an accident caused by a psychiatric patient. The court ruled that the psychiatrist had a duty to take reasonable precautions to protect any foreseeable persons from being endangered by the patient.

In a similar case in Wisconsin (Schuster and Schuster v. Altenberg, et al., 1988), the court ruled that damages could be awarded to anyone whose harm could have been prevented had the physician practiced according to professional standards.2

Other extensions include cases such as Naidu v. Laird, 1988, in which patient violence occurred more than 5 months after hospitalization.2 Vermont has extended the Tarasoff precedent to property destruction by psychiatric patients.10

Recommendation. Most states require a psychiatrist to protect against only specific threats to identifiable victims.10 To defend yourself against a Tarasoff-type suit, you must show that you:

  • carefully assessed the patient’s risk for violence
  • provided appropriate care
  • and took appropriate precautions.

The most protective evidence is a medical record documenting that you thoroughly assessed a patient for risk of violence (Table).4,11

If you are unsure about how to manage a patient you believe may be dangerous to himself or others, consult with supervisors, peers, and legal advisors. Many states have Tarasoff-like statutes that specify the conditions that require action and the appropriate actions.

In states without specific statutes, options that generally satisfy Tarasoff requirements include hospitalizing the patient, notifying authorities, and/or warning the potential victim.10 As the Tarasoff case demonstrated, notifying authorities may not substitute for warning or hospitalizing.2

SUICIDE RISK? DOCUMENT CAREFULLY

Patient suicide accounts for one-fifth of claims covered by the American Psychiatric Association (APA) insurance plan.

In court, key points of challenge to a physician’s judgment in a suicide case include the admission evaluation and any status changes. Thorough risk assessment includes carefully reviewing existing records, evaluating risk factors for suicide, and seeking advice from colleagues or supervisors when appropriate.4

Recommendation. Document for every inpatient admission, discharge, or status change that the patient’s risk for suicide was assessed. List risk factors, protective factors, and risk for self-harm.

Explicitly address in the patient’s chart any comments about suicidality (such as heard by nursing staff).9 Document your rationale for medical decisions and orders, consistently follow unit policies, and explain risks and benefits of hospitalization to patients and their families.

Before discharge, schedule appropriate follow-up and make reasonable efforts to ensure medication adherence.4

SEX WITH PATIENTS IS UNPROTECTED

Sexual involvement with patients is indefensible and uncontestable in malpractice cases. Even so, up to 9% of male therapists and 3% of female therapists report in surveys that they have had sexual interaction with their patients.4

In 1985 the APA excluded sex with patients from its malpractice insurance coverage. Courts generally consider a treatment to be within the standard of care if a respectable minority of physicians consider it to be appropriate. Sex with patients is considered an absolute deviation from the standard of care, and no respectable minority of practitioners supports this practice. Because patients are substantially harmed, sex with patients is considered prima facie malpractice.12

Table

Is this patient dangerous? Risk factors for violence

Psychiatric
  • Delusions of persecution, mind-control, or thought insertion
  • Command hallucinations
  • Impulsivity and low frustration tolerance
  • Current thoughts of violence
  • Past violent behavior
  • Evidence of aggression and hostility
  • Current intoxication, history of substance abuse
Demographic
  • Male gender
  • Age late teens to early twenties
  • Low IQ
  • Access to and proficiency with weapons
Socioeconomic
  • Employment instability
  • Residential instability
  • Low socioeconomic status
  • Recent losses, stressors, and conflicts

WHEN MEDICATIONS CAUSE HARM

Adverse drug reactions—particularly tardive dyskinesia (TD)—are a source of significant losses in malpractice cases. Multimillion-dollar awards have been granted, especially when neuroleptic antipsychotics have been given in excessive dosages without proper monitoring.13

Informed consent has been a particularly difficult issue with the use of neuroleptic medications. Many doctors worry that patients who fear developing TD will not take prescribed neuroleptics. A study of North Carolina psychiatrists in the 1980s revealed that only 30% mentioned TD when telling their patients about neuroleptics’ possible side effects.13

The fact that a patient develops TD while taking an antipsychotic does not establish grounds for malpractice; a valid malpractice suit must also establish negligence. Negligence could include failing to obtain appropriate informed consent or continuing to prescribe an antipsychotic without adequately examining the patient.4

Informed consent does not require a patient to fully understand everything about a medication. The patient must understand the information a reasonable patient would want to know. Obvious misunderstandings must be corrected.

Recommendation. Consider informed consent a process, rather than one event—especially when you give neuroleptics for acute psychotic episodes. You can establish, review, and refresh consent in follow-up visits as medications help patients become more coherent and organized.

 

 

If you doubt a patient’s capacity to provide informed consent, a court determination may be necessary. In emergencies, however, treatment becomes a priority, even if the patient’s capacity to make rational decisions has not been established.13

TERMINATE TREATMENT WITH CAUTION

Terminating treatment can lead to malpractice, particularly if a patient becomes suicidal or violent. Psychiatrists have the right to choose their patients but cannot terminate care if a patient is acutely ill or requires emergency care.

Ensuring appropriate follow-up for patients at risk for decompensation often requires more than providing a referral or phone number. With the patient’s permission, for example, you could contact his subsequent psychiatrist or work with his support network to ensure that he receives follow-up care.14

Recommendation. With stable patients, send a written notice of termination and specify a reasonable period, usually 30 days. Send the letter by certified mail, and request a return receipt. Offer to help the patient find a new doctor, and say that you will forward the patient’s records to the new doctor when you receive appropriate release-of-information paperwork.15

LET THE SUPERVISOR BEWARE

Under the legal concept of respondeat superior (“let the master reply”), liability for the actions of subordinates may be transferred upward to the supervisor.4 For psychiatrists, supervisory liability obviously applies to teaching residents but may also apply in joint care, as with psychologists or social workers.

Recommendation. As a co-treating psychiatrist, you may be liable for other therapists’ actions unless you formally distinguish your role as a prescriber and not as a supervisor.9

When you prescribe medications for patients of nonphysician therapists, be sure you, the therapist, and patient understand the nature of your collaboration. Document the type of relationship and your discussion with the patient in the patient’s chart.

WATCH OUT FOR ‘CURBSIDE’ CONSULTS

Consult-liaison psychiatrists typically face a lower malpractice risk than do those who provide primary treatment. Duty to care for the patient is usually established by a formal consult request, after which the psychiatrist examines the patient and recommends treatment to the primary team.

You can, however, establish duty without meeting a patient. If sufficiently detailed, an informal “curbside” consult may establish a duty and corresponding liability16 (Box 2).4,5,9,17.18

Liability is usually shared with the primary team but may be related to how much responsibility you assume in the patient’s care. Any direct treatment—electroconvulsive therapy, psychotherapy, prescribing, writing orders in the chart—can elevate your risk to the primary level. Similarly, if the patient is harmed because the primary treater followed a consulting psychiatrist’s negligent advice, the psychiatrist can be found solely liable.

When you recommend a treatment, you share a portion of liability for informed consent. If neither you nor the provider obtains appropriate informed consent, you may both share liability for adverse outcomes. Both teams also share the duty to report child and elder abuse.16

Recommendation. Establish an explicit division of responsibilities with the primary team, including who writes orders and manages medications and who provides follow-up and discharge planning.

For curbside consults, inform the primary physician that you are providing general information and not a specific treatment recommendation. If the case is too complicated for general information to be useful, a formal consultation would serve the patient better. In written consultations, specify:

  • the reason for the consult
  • the issues addressed
  • and the parties responsible for follow-up.16

RECOVERED MEMORY? FORGET PROSECUTION

In 1994, a father successfully sued his daughter’s therapists for implanting false memories of incest. A California court awarded him $500,000 on grounds that the therapists owed a duty of care to the patient’s parents as well as to the patient. Since then, multimillion-dollar cases have been litigated on grounds of false recovered memories, and some insurers exclude coverage for “revival of memory.”12

Most therapists who have been found liable have strongly supported the accuracy of their patients’ memories. These memories have usually contained bizarre features, including satanic abuse, baby breeding, human sacrifice, and cannibalism. Therapists in these cases have often recommended that their patients press charges or file lawsuits against their alleged abusers.

Lawsuits against therapists have been won on grounds that they used unorthodox procedures without informed consent, negligently or recklessly implanted memories of abuse, negligently reinforced such memories, and failed to sufficiently investigate the memories’ accuracy.19

Box 2

When does practice become malpractice?

Malpractice requires four conditions:

  • A doctor-patient relationship was established.
  • The physician practiced below the standard of care.
  • The patient was harmed.
  • The patient’s harm was a direct result of the physician’s failure to practice at the standard of care.4

Standard of care. A treatment may be considered within the standard of care so long as a “respectable minority” of practitioners considers it appropriate.17 Standard of care may be established by expert testimony, published texts, or practice guidelines18 and tends to be flexible in medical specialties—such as mental health—that allow for multiple treatment options.

Preponderance of evidence. In court proceedings, the plaintiff must establish malpractice by a reponderance of the evidence, which means “more likely than not.” This is a much less-stringent level of proof than beyond a reasonable doubt, as is required in criminal cases.9

Although a preponderance of the evidence may seem disturbingly easy to establish, courts are often forgiving of adverse outcomes caused by judgment errors if the physician acted in good faith and followed professional standards.4,5

 

 

Recommendation. Patients in therapy sometimes report newly found memories. To reduce your risk:

  • obtain informed consent from patients before you begin any psychotherapy
  • carefully document therapy session details when patients divulge new memories—particularly of abuse
  • avoid encouraging patients to act on recovered memories.19

OFF-LABEL DRUG USE: KNOW THE LITERATURE

Off-label prescribing is both common and legal but may increase a physician’s liability risk if adverse events occur. Cases in Minnesota, Texas, and Louisiana have established precedents for using the Physician’s Desk Reference or package inserts to establish a standard of care.

In 1970 the Minnesota Supreme Court held that deviating from the package insert constituted prima facie evidence of negligence. This interpretation shifts the burden of proof from the plaintiff to the physician, who must then prove that he or she was not negligent when prescribing the drug.20

Recommendation. Off-label prescribing is an important component of modern psychiatric care. Research supports most accepted off-label prescribing, at least to the point of establishing a respectable minority for a standard of care (Box 2).

When prescribing, know which indications are FDA-approved and which are off-label. For off-label prescribing, know the literature supporting that use and notify patients of off-label status as you document informed consent.20

PROS AND CONS OF PRACTICE GUIDELINES

Clinical practice guidelines developed by professional organizations to assist physicians have also acquired legal ramifications. Difficult questions about guidelines include:

  • Do they set the standard of care, or are they merely suggestions?
  • Do they provide a defense against liability?
  • How does a practitioner select between conflicting guidelines?

On the other hand, following clinical guidelines can protect you in cases with adverse outcomes. In a study of insurance company claims, approximately one-fourth of plaintiff’s attorneys who were surveyed said they had refused cases because the physician had followed practice guidelines. Conversely, one-fourth of defense attorneys said they had been influenced to settle cases because the physicians they represented had not followed practice guidelines.21

Liability cases involving practice guidelines have produced varying decisions. As a rule of thumb, courts tend to find that more-specific guidelines constitute a standard of care, whereas more-general guidelines are flexible suggestions.

Recommendation. If the court finds that existing guidelines establish the standard of care and your care has deviated from the guidelines with adverse consequences, the burden of proof shifts to you to prove that you were not negligent.18 When guidelines exist, know them and be prepared to defend decisions that deviate from them.

TELEMEDICINE: DANGERS IN CYBERSPACE

Unauthorized use or disclosure of patients’ electronic information can leave physicians liable for invasion of privacy and breach of confidentiality.22

E-mail communication with a patient may also be sufficient to establish a duty of care, especially if the patient presents diagnostic information and the physician provides medical advice. Once duty to care is established, the physician is responsible for ongoing care or may face charges of abandonment.

Establishing duty to patients through e-mail is particularly troublesome, as patients may be writing from another state where you are not licensed to practice. Several states have explicitly forbidden unlicensed telemedicine; others have offered limited licenses for telemedicine practice.22

Using e-mail to communicate with established patients introduces other liabilities. E-mail is legally considered part of the medical record and is subject to discovery in legal proceedings. Failure to preserve important patient e-mail may be evidence of negligence, especially in cases involving the medical record.

On the other hand, e-mail can be surprisingly permanent; it is virtually impossible to definitively delete e-mail that contains sensitive or embarrassing information. Deleted e-mail frequently can be recovered, and every e-mail exists in multiple copies, including the sender’s, the receiver’s, and at least one in a centralized server.23

Recommendation. Reduce liability risks with informed consent if you use e-mail to communicate with existing patients. Minimize e-mail contact with nonestablished patients, and make sure the confidentiality of patients’ communications is secure.22

Related resources

  • Gutheil TG, Appelbaum PS. Clinical handbook of psychiatry and the law (3rd ed). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2000.
  • American Psychiatric Association. Practice guidelines. http://www.psych.org/clin_res/prac_guide.cfm
References

1. Slawson PF, Guggenheim FG. Psychiatric malpractice: a review of the national loss experience. Am J Psychiatry 1984;141:979-81.

2. Buckner F, Firestone M. Where the public peril begins: 25 years after Tarasoff. J Legal Med 2000;21(2):187-222.

3. Tarasoff v. Regents of the University of California, 551 P.2d 334 (California 1976).

4. Menninger WW. The impact of litigation and court decisions on clinical practice. Bull Menninger Clin 1989;53:203-14.

5. Davenport J. Documenting high-risk cases to avoid malpractice liability. Fam Pract Manag 2000;7(9):33-6.

6. Rice B. How plaintiffs’ lawyers pick their targets. Medical Economics 2000;8:94-110.

7. Levinson W, Roter DL, Mullooly JP, et al. Physician-patient communication: the relationship with malpractice claims among primary care physicians and surgeons. JAMA 1997;277(7):553-9.

8. Condon JT. Medical litigation the aetiological role of psychological and interpersonal factors. Med J Aust 1992;157:768-70.

9. Gutheil TG, Appelbaum PS. Clinical handbook of psychiatry and the law (3rd ed). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2000.

10. Resnick PJ, Scott CL. Legal issues in treating perpetrators and victims of violence. Psychiatr Clin North Am 1997;20(2):473-87.

11. Resnick PJ. Risk assessment for violence (lecture). Cleveland, OH: Case Western Reserve University, June 26, 2003.

12. Slovenko R. Malpractice in psychotherapy. Psychiatr Clin North Am 1999;22(1):1-15.

13. Mills MJ, Eth S. Legal liability with psychotropic drug use: extrapyramidal syndromes and tardive dyskinesia. J Clin Psychiatry 1987;48(9S):28-33.

14. Appelbaum PS. Can a psychiatrist be held responsible when a patient commits murder? Law Psychiatry 2002;53(1):27-9.

15. Tan MW, McDonough WJ. Risk management in psychiatry. Psychiatr Clin North Am 1990;13(1):135-47.

16. Garrick TR, Weinstock R. Liability of psychiatric consultants. Psychosomatics 1994;35:474-84.

17. Bradford GE. The “respectable minority” doctrine in Missouri medical negligence law. J Missouri Bar 2000;56(6):326-34.

18. Jacobson PD. Legal and policy considerations in using clinical practice guidelines. Am J Cardiol 1997;30(8B):74H-79H.

19. Scheflin AW, Spiegel D. From courtroom to couch: working with repressed memory and avoiding lawsuits. Psychiatr Clin North Am 1998;21(4):847-67.

20. Bradford GE, Elben CC. The drug package insert and the PDR as establishing the standard of care in prescription drug liability cases. J Missouri Bar 2001;57(5):233-42.

21. Hyams AL, Brandenburg JA, Lipsitz SR, et al. Practice guidelines and malpractice litigation: a two-way street. Ann Intern Med 1995;122(6):450-5.

22. Jones J. MD liability for electronic medical communications. Physician’s News Digest [serial online] 2000;(5).

23. Spielberg AR. Online without a net: physician-patient communication by electronic mail. Am J Law Med 1999;25:267-95.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Jeffrey M. Watabe, MD
Fellow in forensic psychiatry University Hospitals of Cleveland Case Western Reserve University Cleveland, OH

Daniel K. Hall-Flavin, MD
Assistant professor of psychiatry Mayo Medical School Consultant, department of psychiatry and psychology Mayo Clinic Rochester, MN

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(12)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
17-34
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Jeffrey M. Watabe, MD
Fellow in forensic psychiatry University Hospitals of Cleveland Case Western Reserve University Cleveland, OH

Daniel K. Hall-Flavin, MD
Assistant professor of psychiatry Mayo Medical School Consultant, department of psychiatry and psychology Mayo Clinic Rochester, MN

Author and Disclosure Information

Jeffrey M. Watabe, MD
Fellow in forensic psychiatry University Hospitals of Cleveland Case Western Reserve University Cleveland, OH

Daniel K. Hall-Flavin, MD
Assistant professor of psychiatry Mayo Medical School Consultant, department of psychiatry and psychology Mayo Clinic Rochester, MN

Article PDF
Article PDF

Psychiatrists’ risk of malpractice liability1 is broadening as courts consider the uncertainties of off-label prescribing, telemedicine, and confidentiality. Juries are holding mental health practitioners responsible for harm done both to and by psychiatric patients.

How you keep medical records, communicate with patients and colleagues, and arrange consultations can reduce your malpractice risk (Box 1).4-9 We offer recommendations based on court decisions and other evidence for managing:

  • traditional risks—such as patient violence and suicide, adverse drug reactions, sex with patients, faulty termination of treatment, and supervisory and consultative relationships4
  • newer risks—such as recovered memory, off-label prescribing, practice guidelines, and e-mail and confidentiality.

Box 1

Want to reduce malpractice risk? Cultivate 3 clinical habits

1. Keep thorough medical records

The most powerful defense against a malpractice suit is a well-documented chart. It can often prevent a malpractice suit by providing evidence that the physician adequately evaluated the available information and made good-faith efforts with his or her best judgment. Juries are typically forgiving of mistakes made in this context.4,5

Write legibly, and sign and date all entries. Try to think out loud in the chart. By outlining your thoughts about differential diagnosis, risks and benefits, and treatment options, you can help a jury understand your decision-making process and show that you carefully evaluated the situation. When documenting difficult cases, for example, imagine a plaintiff’s attorney reading your notes to a jury.6

2. Communicate freely with patients

Careful interaction with patients and their families can also prevent lawsuits. Communicating includes preparing patients for what to expect during treatment sessions, encouraging feedback, and even using humor.7 Freely sharing treatment information with patients can build a sense of mutual decision-making and responsibility.8 Acknowledging treatment limitations and deflating unrealistic expectations can also protect you.

Patients who file malpractice suits are often seeking an apology or expression of regret from their physicians. It is appropriate and prudent to admit and apologize for minor errors. It is also appropriate to express condolence over what both sides agree is a severe, negative outcome.9 Expressing sympathy is not equivalent to admitting wrongdoing.

3. Seek consultation as needed

Discussing difficult or ambiguous cases with peers, supervisors, or legal staff can help shield you from liability. For example:

  • Second opinions may help you make difficult clinical decisions.
  • Peers and supervisors may provide useful suggestions to improve patient care.
  • Legal staff can give advice regarding liability.

The fact that you sought consultation can be used in court as evidence against negligence, as it shows you tried to ensure appropriate care for your patient.9

This article describes general guidelines and is not intended to constitute legal advice. All practitioners have a responsibility to know the laws of the jurisdictions in which they practice.

PREVENTING PATIENT VIOLENCE

The case that opened Pandora’s box. Prosenjit Poddar, a student at the University of California at Berkeley, was infatuated with coed Tanya Tarasoff and told his psychologist he intended to kill her. The psychologist notified his psychiatric supervisor and called campus police.

The psychologist told police Poddar was dangerous to himself and others. He stated that he would sign an emergency hold if they would bring Poddar to the hospital.

The police apprehended Poddar but released him. Poddar dropped out of therapy and 2 months later fatally stabbed Ms. Tarasoff.

Ms. Tarasoff’s parents sued those who treated Poddar and the University of California.2 After a complicated legal course, the California Supreme Court ruled that once a therapist determines—or should have determined—that a patient poses a serious danger of violence to others, “he bears a duty to exercise reasonable care to protect the foreseeable victim of that danger.”3

The 1976 Tarasoff ruling has become a national standard of practice, leading to numerous other patient violence lawsuits. In these cases, psychiatrists are most likely to be found liable when recently released inpatients commit violent acts, particularly if the physician had reason to know the patient was dangerous and failed to take adequate precautions or appropriately assess the patient.4

Wider interpretations. Cases in several states have extended the Tarasoff ruling. In at least two cases, this standard has been applied when the patient threatened no specific victim before committing violence:

  • A New Jersey court (McIntosh v. Milano, 1979) found a psychiatrist liable for malpractice on grounds that a therapist has a duty to protect society, just as a doctor must protect society by reporting carriers of dangerous diseases.
  • A Nebraska court (Lipari v. Sears, Roebuck, and Co., 1980) held that physicians have a duty to protect—even if the specific identity of victims is unknown—so long as the physician should know that the patient presents an unreasonable risk of harm to others.2
 

 

Auto accidents. Tarasoff liability also has been extended to auto accidents. In Washington state (Petersen v. Washington, 1983), a psychiatrist was held liable for injuries to victims of an accident caused by a psychiatric patient. The court ruled that the psychiatrist had a duty to take reasonable precautions to protect any foreseeable persons from being endangered by the patient.

In a similar case in Wisconsin (Schuster and Schuster v. Altenberg, et al., 1988), the court ruled that damages could be awarded to anyone whose harm could have been prevented had the physician practiced according to professional standards.2

Other extensions include cases such as Naidu v. Laird, 1988, in which patient violence occurred more than 5 months after hospitalization.2 Vermont has extended the Tarasoff precedent to property destruction by psychiatric patients.10

Recommendation. Most states require a psychiatrist to protect against only specific threats to identifiable victims.10 To defend yourself against a Tarasoff-type suit, you must show that you:

  • carefully assessed the patient’s risk for violence
  • provided appropriate care
  • and took appropriate precautions.

The most protective evidence is a medical record documenting that you thoroughly assessed a patient for risk of violence (Table).4,11

If you are unsure about how to manage a patient you believe may be dangerous to himself or others, consult with supervisors, peers, and legal advisors. Many states have Tarasoff-like statutes that specify the conditions that require action and the appropriate actions.

In states without specific statutes, options that generally satisfy Tarasoff requirements include hospitalizing the patient, notifying authorities, and/or warning the potential victim.10 As the Tarasoff case demonstrated, notifying authorities may not substitute for warning or hospitalizing.2

SUICIDE RISK? DOCUMENT CAREFULLY

Patient suicide accounts for one-fifth of claims covered by the American Psychiatric Association (APA) insurance plan.

In court, key points of challenge to a physician’s judgment in a suicide case include the admission evaluation and any status changes. Thorough risk assessment includes carefully reviewing existing records, evaluating risk factors for suicide, and seeking advice from colleagues or supervisors when appropriate.4

Recommendation. Document for every inpatient admission, discharge, or status change that the patient’s risk for suicide was assessed. List risk factors, protective factors, and risk for self-harm.

Explicitly address in the patient’s chart any comments about suicidality (such as heard by nursing staff).9 Document your rationale for medical decisions and orders, consistently follow unit policies, and explain risks and benefits of hospitalization to patients and their families.

Before discharge, schedule appropriate follow-up and make reasonable efforts to ensure medication adherence.4

SEX WITH PATIENTS IS UNPROTECTED

Sexual involvement with patients is indefensible and uncontestable in malpractice cases. Even so, up to 9% of male therapists and 3% of female therapists report in surveys that they have had sexual interaction with their patients.4

In 1985 the APA excluded sex with patients from its malpractice insurance coverage. Courts generally consider a treatment to be within the standard of care if a respectable minority of physicians consider it to be appropriate. Sex with patients is considered an absolute deviation from the standard of care, and no respectable minority of practitioners supports this practice. Because patients are substantially harmed, sex with patients is considered prima facie malpractice.12

Table

Is this patient dangerous? Risk factors for violence

Psychiatric
  • Delusions of persecution, mind-control, or thought insertion
  • Command hallucinations
  • Impulsivity and low frustration tolerance
  • Current thoughts of violence
  • Past violent behavior
  • Evidence of aggression and hostility
  • Current intoxication, history of substance abuse
Demographic
  • Male gender
  • Age late teens to early twenties
  • Low IQ
  • Access to and proficiency with weapons
Socioeconomic
  • Employment instability
  • Residential instability
  • Low socioeconomic status
  • Recent losses, stressors, and conflicts

WHEN MEDICATIONS CAUSE HARM

Adverse drug reactions—particularly tardive dyskinesia (TD)—are a source of significant losses in malpractice cases. Multimillion-dollar awards have been granted, especially when neuroleptic antipsychotics have been given in excessive dosages without proper monitoring.13

Informed consent has been a particularly difficult issue with the use of neuroleptic medications. Many doctors worry that patients who fear developing TD will not take prescribed neuroleptics. A study of North Carolina psychiatrists in the 1980s revealed that only 30% mentioned TD when telling their patients about neuroleptics’ possible side effects.13

The fact that a patient develops TD while taking an antipsychotic does not establish grounds for malpractice; a valid malpractice suit must also establish negligence. Negligence could include failing to obtain appropriate informed consent or continuing to prescribe an antipsychotic without adequately examining the patient.4

Informed consent does not require a patient to fully understand everything about a medication. The patient must understand the information a reasonable patient would want to know. Obvious misunderstandings must be corrected.

Recommendation. Consider informed consent a process, rather than one event—especially when you give neuroleptics for acute psychotic episodes. You can establish, review, and refresh consent in follow-up visits as medications help patients become more coherent and organized.

 

 

If you doubt a patient’s capacity to provide informed consent, a court determination may be necessary. In emergencies, however, treatment becomes a priority, even if the patient’s capacity to make rational decisions has not been established.13

TERMINATE TREATMENT WITH CAUTION

Terminating treatment can lead to malpractice, particularly if a patient becomes suicidal or violent. Psychiatrists have the right to choose their patients but cannot terminate care if a patient is acutely ill or requires emergency care.

Ensuring appropriate follow-up for patients at risk for decompensation often requires more than providing a referral or phone number. With the patient’s permission, for example, you could contact his subsequent psychiatrist or work with his support network to ensure that he receives follow-up care.14

Recommendation. With stable patients, send a written notice of termination and specify a reasonable period, usually 30 days. Send the letter by certified mail, and request a return receipt. Offer to help the patient find a new doctor, and say that you will forward the patient’s records to the new doctor when you receive appropriate release-of-information paperwork.15

LET THE SUPERVISOR BEWARE

Under the legal concept of respondeat superior (“let the master reply”), liability for the actions of subordinates may be transferred upward to the supervisor.4 For psychiatrists, supervisory liability obviously applies to teaching residents but may also apply in joint care, as with psychologists or social workers.

Recommendation. As a co-treating psychiatrist, you may be liable for other therapists’ actions unless you formally distinguish your role as a prescriber and not as a supervisor.9

When you prescribe medications for patients of nonphysician therapists, be sure you, the therapist, and patient understand the nature of your collaboration. Document the type of relationship and your discussion with the patient in the patient’s chart.

WATCH OUT FOR ‘CURBSIDE’ CONSULTS

Consult-liaison psychiatrists typically face a lower malpractice risk than do those who provide primary treatment. Duty to care for the patient is usually established by a formal consult request, after which the psychiatrist examines the patient and recommends treatment to the primary team.

You can, however, establish duty without meeting a patient. If sufficiently detailed, an informal “curbside” consult may establish a duty and corresponding liability16 (Box 2).4,5,9,17.18

Liability is usually shared with the primary team but may be related to how much responsibility you assume in the patient’s care. Any direct treatment—electroconvulsive therapy, psychotherapy, prescribing, writing orders in the chart—can elevate your risk to the primary level. Similarly, if the patient is harmed because the primary treater followed a consulting psychiatrist’s negligent advice, the psychiatrist can be found solely liable.

When you recommend a treatment, you share a portion of liability for informed consent. If neither you nor the provider obtains appropriate informed consent, you may both share liability for adverse outcomes. Both teams also share the duty to report child and elder abuse.16

Recommendation. Establish an explicit division of responsibilities with the primary team, including who writes orders and manages medications and who provides follow-up and discharge planning.

For curbside consults, inform the primary physician that you are providing general information and not a specific treatment recommendation. If the case is too complicated for general information to be useful, a formal consultation would serve the patient better. In written consultations, specify:

  • the reason for the consult
  • the issues addressed
  • and the parties responsible for follow-up.16

RECOVERED MEMORY? FORGET PROSECUTION

In 1994, a father successfully sued his daughter’s therapists for implanting false memories of incest. A California court awarded him $500,000 on grounds that the therapists owed a duty of care to the patient’s parents as well as to the patient. Since then, multimillion-dollar cases have been litigated on grounds of false recovered memories, and some insurers exclude coverage for “revival of memory.”12

Most therapists who have been found liable have strongly supported the accuracy of their patients’ memories. These memories have usually contained bizarre features, including satanic abuse, baby breeding, human sacrifice, and cannibalism. Therapists in these cases have often recommended that their patients press charges or file lawsuits against their alleged abusers.

Lawsuits against therapists have been won on grounds that they used unorthodox procedures without informed consent, negligently or recklessly implanted memories of abuse, negligently reinforced such memories, and failed to sufficiently investigate the memories’ accuracy.19

Box 2

When does practice become malpractice?

Malpractice requires four conditions:

  • A doctor-patient relationship was established.
  • The physician practiced below the standard of care.
  • The patient was harmed.
  • The patient’s harm was a direct result of the physician’s failure to practice at the standard of care.4

Standard of care. A treatment may be considered within the standard of care so long as a “respectable minority” of practitioners considers it appropriate.17 Standard of care may be established by expert testimony, published texts, or practice guidelines18 and tends to be flexible in medical specialties—such as mental health—that allow for multiple treatment options.

Preponderance of evidence. In court proceedings, the plaintiff must establish malpractice by a reponderance of the evidence, which means “more likely than not.” This is a much less-stringent level of proof than beyond a reasonable doubt, as is required in criminal cases.9

Although a preponderance of the evidence may seem disturbingly easy to establish, courts are often forgiving of adverse outcomes caused by judgment errors if the physician acted in good faith and followed professional standards.4,5

 

 

Recommendation. Patients in therapy sometimes report newly found memories. To reduce your risk:

  • obtain informed consent from patients before you begin any psychotherapy
  • carefully document therapy session details when patients divulge new memories—particularly of abuse
  • avoid encouraging patients to act on recovered memories.19

OFF-LABEL DRUG USE: KNOW THE LITERATURE

Off-label prescribing is both common and legal but may increase a physician’s liability risk if adverse events occur. Cases in Minnesota, Texas, and Louisiana have established precedents for using the Physician’s Desk Reference or package inserts to establish a standard of care.

In 1970 the Minnesota Supreme Court held that deviating from the package insert constituted prima facie evidence of negligence. This interpretation shifts the burden of proof from the plaintiff to the physician, who must then prove that he or she was not negligent when prescribing the drug.20

Recommendation. Off-label prescribing is an important component of modern psychiatric care. Research supports most accepted off-label prescribing, at least to the point of establishing a respectable minority for a standard of care (Box 2).

When prescribing, know which indications are FDA-approved and which are off-label. For off-label prescribing, know the literature supporting that use and notify patients of off-label status as you document informed consent.20

PROS AND CONS OF PRACTICE GUIDELINES

Clinical practice guidelines developed by professional organizations to assist physicians have also acquired legal ramifications. Difficult questions about guidelines include:

  • Do they set the standard of care, or are they merely suggestions?
  • Do they provide a defense against liability?
  • How does a practitioner select between conflicting guidelines?

On the other hand, following clinical guidelines can protect you in cases with adverse outcomes. In a study of insurance company claims, approximately one-fourth of plaintiff’s attorneys who were surveyed said they had refused cases because the physician had followed practice guidelines. Conversely, one-fourth of defense attorneys said they had been influenced to settle cases because the physicians they represented had not followed practice guidelines.21

Liability cases involving practice guidelines have produced varying decisions. As a rule of thumb, courts tend to find that more-specific guidelines constitute a standard of care, whereas more-general guidelines are flexible suggestions.

Recommendation. If the court finds that existing guidelines establish the standard of care and your care has deviated from the guidelines with adverse consequences, the burden of proof shifts to you to prove that you were not negligent.18 When guidelines exist, know them and be prepared to defend decisions that deviate from them.

TELEMEDICINE: DANGERS IN CYBERSPACE

Unauthorized use or disclosure of patients’ electronic information can leave physicians liable for invasion of privacy and breach of confidentiality.22

E-mail communication with a patient may also be sufficient to establish a duty of care, especially if the patient presents diagnostic information and the physician provides medical advice. Once duty to care is established, the physician is responsible for ongoing care or may face charges of abandonment.

Establishing duty to patients through e-mail is particularly troublesome, as patients may be writing from another state where you are not licensed to practice. Several states have explicitly forbidden unlicensed telemedicine; others have offered limited licenses for telemedicine practice.22

Using e-mail to communicate with established patients introduces other liabilities. E-mail is legally considered part of the medical record and is subject to discovery in legal proceedings. Failure to preserve important patient e-mail may be evidence of negligence, especially in cases involving the medical record.

On the other hand, e-mail can be surprisingly permanent; it is virtually impossible to definitively delete e-mail that contains sensitive or embarrassing information. Deleted e-mail frequently can be recovered, and every e-mail exists in multiple copies, including the sender’s, the receiver’s, and at least one in a centralized server.23

Recommendation. Reduce liability risks with informed consent if you use e-mail to communicate with existing patients. Minimize e-mail contact with nonestablished patients, and make sure the confidentiality of patients’ communications is secure.22

Related resources

  • Gutheil TG, Appelbaum PS. Clinical handbook of psychiatry and the law (3rd ed). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2000.
  • American Psychiatric Association. Practice guidelines. http://www.psych.org/clin_res/prac_guide.cfm

Psychiatrists’ risk of malpractice liability1 is broadening as courts consider the uncertainties of off-label prescribing, telemedicine, and confidentiality. Juries are holding mental health practitioners responsible for harm done both to and by psychiatric patients.

How you keep medical records, communicate with patients and colleagues, and arrange consultations can reduce your malpractice risk (Box 1).4-9 We offer recommendations based on court decisions and other evidence for managing:

  • traditional risks—such as patient violence and suicide, adverse drug reactions, sex with patients, faulty termination of treatment, and supervisory and consultative relationships4
  • newer risks—such as recovered memory, off-label prescribing, practice guidelines, and e-mail and confidentiality.

Box 1

Want to reduce malpractice risk? Cultivate 3 clinical habits

1. Keep thorough medical records

The most powerful defense against a malpractice suit is a well-documented chart. It can often prevent a malpractice suit by providing evidence that the physician adequately evaluated the available information and made good-faith efforts with his or her best judgment. Juries are typically forgiving of mistakes made in this context.4,5

Write legibly, and sign and date all entries. Try to think out loud in the chart. By outlining your thoughts about differential diagnosis, risks and benefits, and treatment options, you can help a jury understand your decision-making process and show that you carefully evaluated the situation. When documenting difficult cases, for example, imagine a plaintiff’s attorney reading your notes to a jury.6

2. Communicate freely with patients

Careful interaction with patients and their families can also prevent lawsuits. Communicating includes preparing patients for what to expect during treatment sessions, encouraging feedback, and even using humor.7 Freely sharing treatment information with patients can build a sense of mutual decision-making and responsibility.8 Acknowledging treatment limitations and deflating unrealistic expectations can also protect you.

Patients who file malpractice suits are often seeking an apology or expression of regret from their physicians. It is appropriate and prudent to admit and apologize for minor errors. It is also appropriate to express condolence over what both sides agree is a severe, negative outcome.9 Expressing sympathy is not equivalent to admitting wrongdoing.

3. Seek consultation as needed

Discussing difficult or ambiguous cases with peers, supervisors, or legal staff can help shield you from liability. For example:

  • Second opinions may help you make difficult clinical decisions.
  • Peers and supervisors may provide useful suggestions to improve patient care.
  • Legal staff can give advice regarding liability.

The fact that you sought consultation can be used in court as evidence against negligence, as it shows you tried to ensure appropriate care for your patient.9

This article describes general guidelines and is not intended to constitute legal advice. All practitioners have a responsibility to know the laws of the jurisdictions in which they practice.

PREVENTING PATIENT VIOLENCE

The case that opened Pandora’s box. Prosenjit Poddar, a student at the University of California at Berkeley, was infatuated with coed Tanya Tarasoff and told his psychologist he intended to kill her. The psychologist notified his psychiatric supervisor and called campus police.

The psychologist told police Poddar was dangerous to himself and others. He stated that he would sign an emergency hold if they would bring Poddar to the hospital.

The police apprehended Poddar but released him. Poddar dropped out of therapy and 2 months later fatally stabbed Ms. Tarasoff.

Ms. Tarasoff’s parents sued those who treated Poddar and the University of California.2 After a complicated legal course, the California Supreme Court ruled that once a therapist determines—or should have determined—that a patient poses a serious danger of violence to others, “he bears a duty to exercise reasonable care to protect the foreseeable victim of that danger.”3

The 1976 Tarasoff ruling has become a national standard of practice, leading to numerous other patient violence lawsuits. In these cases, psychiatrists are most likely to be found liable when recently released inpatients commit violent acts, particularly if the physician had reason to know the patient was dangerous and failed to take adequate precautions or appropriately assess the patient.4

Wider interpretations. Cases in several states have extended the Tarasoff ruling. In at least two cases, this standard has been applied when the patient threatened no specific victim before committing violence:

  • A New Jersey court (McIntosh v. Milano, 1979) found a psychiatrist liable for malpractice on grounds that a therapist has a duty to protect society, just as a doctor must protect society by reporting carriers of dangerous diseases.
  • A Nebraska court (Lipari v. Sears, Roebuck, and Co., 1980) held that physicians have a duty to protect—even if the specific identity of victims is unknown—so long as the physician should know that the patient presents an unreasonable risk of harm to others.2
 

 

Auto accidents. Tarasoff liability also has been extended to auto accidents. In Washington state (Petersen v. Washington, 1983), a psychiatrist was held liable for injuries to victims of an accident caused by a psychiatric patient. The court ruled that the psychiatrist had a duty to take reasonable precautions to protect any foreseeable persons from being endangered by the patient.

In a similar case in Wisconsin (Schuster and Schuster v. Altenberg, et al., 1988), the court ruled that damages could be awarded to anyone whose harm could have been prevented had the physician practiced according to professional standards.2

Other extensions include cases such as Naidu v. Laird, 1988, in which patient violence occurred more than 5 months after hospitalization.2 Vermont has extended the Tarasoff precedent to property destruction by psychiatric patients.10

Recommendation. Most states require a psychiatrist to protect against only specific threats to identifiable victims.10 To defend yourself against a Tarasoff-type suit, you must show that you:

  • carefully assessed the patient’s risk for violence
  • provided appropriate care
  • and took appropriate precautions.

The most protective evidence is a medical record documenting that you thoroughly assessed a patient for risk of violence (Table).4,11

If you are unsure about how to manage a patient you believe may be dangerous to himself or others, consult with supervisors, peers, and legal advisors. Many states have Tarasoff-like statutes that specify the conditions that require action and the appropriate actions.

In states without specific statutes, options that generally satisfy Tarasoff requirements include hospitalizing the patient, notifying authorities, and/or warning the potential victim.10 As the Tarasoff case demonstrated, notifying authorities may not substitute for warning or hospitalizing.2

SUICIDE RISK? DOCUMENT CAREFULLY

Patient suicide accounts for one-fifth of claims covered by the American Psychiatric Association (APA) insurance plan.

In court, key points of challenge to a physician’s judgment in a suicide case include the admission evaluation and any status changes. Thorough risk assessment includes carefully reviewing existing records, evaluating risk factors for suicide, and seeking advice from colleagues or supervisors when appropriate.4

Recommendation. Document for every inpatient admission, discharge, or status change that the patient’s risk for suicide was assessed. List risk factors, protective factors, and risk for self-harm.

Explicitly address in the patient’s chart any comments about suicidality (such as heard by nursing staff).9 Document your rationale for medical decisions and orders, consistently follow unit policies, and explain risks and benefits of hospitalization to patients and their families.

Before discharge, schedule appropriate follow-up and make reasonable efforts to ensure medication adherence.4

SEX WITH PATIENTS IS UNPROTECTED

Sexual involvement with patients is indefensible and uncontestable in malpractice cases. Even so, up to 9% of male therapists and 3% of female therapists report in surveys that they have had sexual interaction with their patients.4

In 1985 the APA excluded sex with patients from its malpractice insurance coverage. Courts generally consider a treatment to be within the standard of care if a respectable minority of physicians consider it to be appropriate. Sex with patients is considered an absolute deviation from the standard of care, and no respectable minority of practitioners supports this practice. Because patients are substantially harmed, sex with patients is considered prima facie malpractice.12

Table

Is this patient dangerous? Risk factors for violence

Psychiatric
  • Delusions of persecution, mind-control, or thought insertion
  • Command hallucinations
  • Impulsivity and low frustration tolerance
  • Current thoughts of violence
  • Past violent behavior
  • Evidence of aggression and hostility
  • Current intoxication, history of substance abuse
Demographic
  • Male gender
  • Age late teens to early twenties
  • Low IQ
  • Access to and proficiency with weapons
Socioeconomic
  • Employment instability
  • Residential instability
  • Low socioeconomic status
  • Recent losses, stressors, and conflicts

WHEN MEDICATIONS CAUSE HARM

Adverse drug reactions—particularly tardive dyskinesia (TD)—are a source of significant losses in malpractice cases. Multimillion-dollar awards have been granted, especially when neuroleptic antipsychotics have been given in excessive dosages without proper monitoring.13

Informed consent has been a particularly difficult issue with the use of neuroleptic medications. Many doctors worry that patients who fear developing TD will not take prescribed neuroleptics. A study of North Carolina psychiatrists in the 1980s revealed that only 30% mentioned TD when telling their patients about neuroleptics’ possible side effects.13

The fact that a patient develops TD while taking an antipsychotic does not establish grounds for malpractice; a valid malpractice suit must also establish negligence. Negligence could include failing to obtain appropriate informed consent or continuing to prescribe an antipsychotic without adequately examining the patient.4

Informed consent does not require a patient to fully understand everything about a medication. The patient must understand the information a reasonable patient would want to know. Obvious misunderstandings must be corrected.

Recommendation. Consider informed consent a process, rather than one event—especially when you give neuroleptics for acute psychotic episodes. You can establish, review, and refresh consent in follow-up visits as medications help patients become more coherent and organized.

 

 

If you doubt a patient’s capacity to provide informed consent, a court determination may be necessary. In emergencies, however, treatment becomes a priority, even if the patient’s capacity to make rational decisions has not been established.13

TERMINATE TREATMENT WITH CAUTION

Terminating treatment can lead to malpractice, particularly if a patient becomes suicidal or violent. Psychiatrists have the right to choose their patients but cannot terminate care if a patient is acutely ill or requires emergency care.

Ensuring appropriate follow-up for patients at risk for decompensation often requires more than providing a referral or phone number. With the patient’s permission, for example, you could contact his subsequent psychiatrist or work with his support network to ensure that he receives follow-up care.14

Recommendation. With stable patients, send a written notice of termination and specify a reasonable period, usually 30 days. Send the letter by certified mail, and request a return receipt. Offer to help the patient find a new doctor, and say that you will forward the patient’s records to the new doctor when you receive appropriate release-of-information paperwork.15

LET THE SUPERVISOR BEWARE

Under the legal concept of respondeat superior (“let the master reply”), liability for the actions of subordinates may be transferred upward to the supervisor.4 For psychiatrists, supervisory liability obviously applies to teaching residents but may also apply in joint care, as with psychologists or social workers.

Recommendation. As a co-treating psychiatrist, you may be liable for other therapists’ actions unless you formally distinguish your role as a prescriber and not as a supervisor.9

When you prescribe medications for patients of nonphysician therapists, be sure you, the therapist, and patient understand the nature of your collaboration. Document the type of relationship and your discussion with the patient in the patient’s chart.

WATCH OUT FOR ‘CURBSIDE’ CONSULTS

Consult-liaison psychiatrists typically face a lower malpractice risk than do those who provide primary treatment. Duty to care for the patient is usually established by a formal consult request, after which the psychiatrist examines the patient and recommends treatment to the primary team.

You can, however, establish duty without meeting a patient. If sufficiently detailed, an informal “curbside” consult may establish a duty and corresponding liability16 (Box 2).4,5,9,17.18

Liability is usually shared with the primary team but may be related to how much responsibility you assume in the patient’s care. Any direct treatment—electroconvulsive therapy, psychotherapy, prescribing, writing orders in the chart—can elevate your risk to the primary level. Similarly, if the patient is harmed because the primary treater followed a consulting psychiatrist’s negligent advice, the psychiatrist can be found solely liable.

When you recommend a treatment, you share a portion of liability for informed consent. If neither you nor the provider obtains appropriate informed consent, you may both share liability for adverse outcomes. Both teams also share the duty to report child and elder abuse.16

Recommendation. Establish an explicit division of responsibilities with the primary team, including who writes orders and manages medications and who provides follow-up and discharge planning.

For curbside consults, inform the primary physician that you are providing general information and not a specific treatment recommendation. If the case is too complicated for general information to be useful, a formal consultation would serve the patient better. In written consultations, specify:

  • the reason for the consult
  • the issues addressed
  • and the parties responsible for follow-up.16

RECOVERED MEMORY? FORGET PROSECUTION

In 1994, a father successfully sued his daughter’s therapists for implanting false memories of incest. A California court awarded him $500,000 on grounds that the therapists owed a duty of care to the patient’s parents as well as to the patient. Since then, multimillion-dollar cases have been litigated on grounds of false recovered memories, and some insurers exclude coverage for “revival of memory.”12

Most therapists who have been found liable have strongly supported the accuracy of their patients’ memories. These memories have usually contained bizarre features, including satanic abuse, baby breeding, human sacrifice, and cannibalism. Therapists in these cases have often recommended that their patients press charges or file lawsuits against their alleged abusers.

Lawsuits against therapists have been won on grounds that they used unorthodox procedures without informed consent, negligently or recklessly implanted memories of abuse, negligently reinforced such memories, and failed to sufficiently investigate the memories’ accuracy.19

Box 2

When does practice become malpractice?

Malpractice requires four conditions:

  • A doctor-patient relationship was established.
  • The physician practiced below the standard of care.
  • The patient was harmed.
  • The patient’s harm was a direct result of the physician’s failure to practice at the standard of care.4

Standard of care. A treatment may be considered within the standard of care so long as a “respectable minority” of practitioners considers it appropriate.17 Standard of care may be established by expert testimony, published texts, or practice guidelines18 and tends to be flexible in medical specialties—such as mental health—that allow for multiple treatment options.

Preponderance of evidence. In court proceedings, the plaintiff must establish malpractice by a reponderance of the evidence, which means “more likely than not.” This is a much less-stringent level of proof than beyond a reasonable doubt, as is required in criminal cases.9

Although a preponderance of the evidence may seem disturbingly easy to establish, courts are often forgiving of adverse outcomes caused by judgment errors if the physician acted in good faith and followed professional standards.4,5

 

 

Recommendation. Patients in therapy sometimes report newly found memories. To reduce your risk:

  • obtain informed consent from patients before you begin any psychotherapy
  • carefully document therapy session details when patients divulge new memories—particularly of abuse
  • avoid encouraging patients to act on recovered memories.19

OFF-LABEL DRUG USE: KNOW THE LITERATURE

Off-label prescribing is both common and legal but may increase a physician’s liability risk if adverse events occur. Cases in Minnesota, Texas, and Louisiana have established precedents for using the Physician’s Desk Reference or package inserts to establish a standard of care.

In 1970 the Minnesota Supreme Court held that deviating from the package insert constituted prima facie evidence of negligence. This interpretation shifts the burden of proof from the plaintiff to the physician, who must then prove that he or she was not negligent when prescribing the drug.20

Recommendation. Off-label prescribing is an important component of modern psychiatric care. Research supports most accepted off-label prescribing, at least to the point of establishing a respectable minority for a standard of care (Box 2).

When prescribing, know which indications are FDA-approved and which are off-label. For off-label prescribing, know the literature supporting that use and notify patients of off-label status as you document informed consent.20

PROS AND CONS OF PRACTICE GUIDELINES

Clinical practice guidelines developed by professional organizations to assist physicians have also acquired legal ramifications. Difficult questions about guidelines include:

  • Do they set the standard of care, or are they merely suggestions?
  • Do they provide a defense against liability?
  • How does a practitioner select between conflicting guidelines?

On the other hand, following clinical guidelines can protect you in cases with adverse outcomes. In a study of insurance company claims, approximately one-fourth of plaintiff’s attorneys who were surveyed said they had refused cases because the physician had followed practice guidelines. Conversely, one-fourth of defense attorneys said they had been influenced to settle cases because the physicians they represented had not followed practice guidelines.21

Liability cases involving practice guidelines have produced varying decisions. As a rule of thumb, courts tend to find that more-specific guidelines constitute a standard of care, whereas more-general guidelines are flexible suggestions.

Recommendation. If the court finds that existing guidelines establish the standard of care and your care has deviated from the guidelines with adverse consequences, the burden of proof shifts to you to prove that you were not negligent.18 When guidelines exist, know them and be prepared to defend decisions that deviate from them.

TELEMEDICINE: DANGERS IN CYBERSPACE

Unauthorized use or disclosure of patients’ electronic information can leave physicians liable for invasion of privacy and breach of confidentiality.22

E-mail communication with a patient may also be sufficient to establish a duty of care, especially if the patient presents diagnostic information and the physician provides medical advice. Once duty to care is established, the physician is responsible for ongoing care or may face charges of abandonment.

Establishing duty to patients through e-mail is particularly troublesome, as patients may be writing from another state where you are not licensed to practice. Several states have explicitly forbidden unlicensed telemedicine; others have offered limited licenses for telemedicine practice.22

Using e-mail to communicate with established patients introduces other liabilities. E-mail is legally considered part of the medical record and is subject to discovery in legal proceedings. Failure to preserve important patient e-mail may be evidence of negligence, especially in cases involving the medical record.

On the other hand, e-mail can be surprisingly permanent; it is virtually impossible to definitively delete e-mail that contains sensitive or embarrassing information. Deleted e-mail frequently can be recovered, and every e-mail exists in multiple copies, including the sender’s, the receiver’s, and at least one in a centralized server.23

Recommendation. Reduce liability risks with informed consent if you use e-mail to communicate with existing patients. Minimize e-mail contact with nonestablished patients, and make sure the confidentiality of patients’ communications is secure.22

Related resources

  • Gutheil TG, Appelbaum PS. Clinical handbook of psychiatry and the law (3rd ed). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2000.
  • American Psychiatric Association. Practice guidelines. http://www.psych.org/clin_res/prac_guide.cfm
References

1. Slawson PF, Guggenheim FG. Psychiatric malpractice: a review of the national loss experience. Am J Psychiatry 1984;141:979-81.

2. Buckner F, Firestone M. Where the public peril begins: 25 years after Tarasoff. J Legal Med 2000;21(2):187-222.

3. Tarasoff v. Regents of the University of California, 551 P.2d 334 (California 1976).

4. Menninger WW. The impact of litigation and court decisions on clinical practice. Bull Menninger Clin 1989;53:203-14.

5. Davenport J. Documenting high-risk cases to avoid malpractice liability. Fam Pract Manag 2000;7(9):33-6.

6. Rice B. How plaintiffs’ lawyers pick their targets. Medical Economics 2000;8:94-110.

7. Levinson W, Roter DL, Mullooly JP, et al. Physician-patient communication: the relationship with malpractice claims among primary care physicians and surgeons. JAMA 1997;277(7):553-9.

8. Condon JT. Medical litigation the aetiological role of psychological and interpersonal factors. Med J Aust 1992;157:768-70.

9. Gutheil TG, Appelbaum PS. Clinical handbook of psychiatry and the law (3rd ed). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2000.

10. Resnick PJ, Scott CL. Legal issues in treating perpetrators and victims of violence. Psychiatr Clin North Am 1997;20(2):473-87.

11. Resnick PJ. Risk assessment for violence (lecture). Cleveland, OH: Case Western Reserve University, June 26, 2003.

12. Slovenko R. Malpractice in psychotherapy. Psychiatr Clin North Am 1999;22(1):1-15.

13. Mills MJ, Eth S. Legal liability with psychotropic drug use: extrapyramidal syndromes and tardive dyskinesia. J Clin Psychiatry 1987;48(9S):28-33.

14. Appelbaum PS. Can a psychiatrist be held responsible when a patient commits murder? Law Psychiatry 2002;53(1):27-9.

15. Tan MW, McDonough WJ. Risk management in psychiatry. Psychiatr Clin North Am 1990;13(1):135-47.

16. Garrick TR, Weinstock R. Liability of psychiatric consultants. Psychosomatics 1994;35:474-84.

17. Bradford GE. The “respectable minority” doctrine in Missouri medical negligence law. J Missouri Bar 2000;56(6):326-34.

18. Jacobson PD. Legal and policy considerations in using clinical practice guidelines. Am J Cardiol 1997;30(8B):74H-79H.

19. Scheflin AW, Spiegel D. From courtroom to couch: working with repressed memory and avoiding lawsuits. Psychiatr Clin North Am 1998;21(4):847-67.

20. Bradford GE, Elben CC. The drug package insert and the PDR as establishing the standard of care in prescription drug liability cases. J Missouri Bar 2001;57(5):233-42.

21. Hyams AL, Brandenburg JA, Lipsitz SR, et al. Practice guidelines and malpractice litigation: a two-way street. Ann Intern Med 1995;122(6):450-5.

22. Jones J. MD liability for electronic medical communications. Physician’s News Digest [serial online] 2000;(5).

23. Spielberg AR. Online without a net: physician-patient communication by electronic mail. Am J Law Med 1999;25:267-95.

References

1. Slawson PF, Guggenheim FG. Psychiatric malpractice: a review of the national loss experience. Am J Psychiatry 1984;141:979-81.

2. Buckner F, Firestone M. Where the public peril begins: 25 years after Tarasoff. J Legal Med 2000;21(2):187-222.

3. Tarasoff v. Regents of the University of California, 551 P.2d 334 (California 1976).

4. Menninger WW. The impact of litigation and court decisions on clinical practice. Bull Menninger Clin 1989;53:203-14.

5. Davenport J. Documenting high-risk cases to avoid malpractice liability. Fam Pract Manag 2000;7(9):33-6.

6. Rice B. How plaintiffs’ lawyers pick their targets. Medical Economics 2000;8:94-110.

7. Levinson W, Roter DL, Mullooly JP, et al. Physician-patient communication: the relationship with malpractice claims among primary care physicians and surgeons. JAMA 1997;277(7):553-9.

8. Condon JT. Medical litigation the aetiological role of psychological and interpersonal factors. Med J Aust 1992;157:768-70.

9. Gutheil TG, Appelbaum PS. Clinical handbook of psychiatry and the law (3rd ed). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 2000.

10. Resnick PJ, Scott CL. Legal issues in treating perpetrators and victims of violence. Psychiatr Clin North Am 1997;20(2):473-87.

11. Resnick PJ. Risk assessment for violence (lecture). Cleveland, OH: Case Western Reserve University, June 26, 2003.

12. Slovenko R. Malpractice in psychotherapy. Psychiatr Clin North Am 1999;22(1):1-15.

13. Mills MJ, Eth S. Legal liability with psychotropic drug use: extrapyramidal syndromes and tardive dyskinesia. J Clin Psychiatry 1987;48(9S):28-33.

14. Appelbaum PS. Can a psychiatrist be held responsible when a patient commits murder? Law Psychiatry 2002;53(1):27-9.

15. Tan MW, McDonough WJ. Risk management in psychiatry. Psychiatr Clin North Am 1990;13(1):135-47.

16. Garrick TR, Weinstock R. Liability of psychiatric consultants. Psychosomatics 1994;35:474-84.

17. Bradford GE. The “respectable minority” doctrine in Missouri medical negligence law. J Missouri Bar 2000;56(6):326-34.

18. Jacobson PD. Legal and policy considerations in using clinical practice guidelines. Am J Cardiol 1997;30(8B):74H-79H.

19. Scheflin AW, Spiegel D. From courtroom to couch: working with repressed memory and avoiding lawsuits. Psychiatr Clin North Am 1998;21(4):847-67.

20. Bradford GE, Elben CC. The drug package insert and the PDR as establishing the standard of care in prescription drug liability cases. J Missouri Bar 2001;57(5):233-42.

21. Hyams AL, Brandenburg JA, Lipsitz SR, et al. Practice guidelines and malpractice litigation: a two-way street. Ann Intern Med 1995;122(6):450-5.

22. Jones J. MD liability for electronic medical communications. Physician’s News Digest [serial online] 2000;(5).

23. Spielberg AR. Online without a net: physician-patient communication by electronic mail. Am J Law Med 1999;25:267-95.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(12)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(12)
Page Number
17-34
Page Number
17-34
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Practice, not malpractice: 3 clinical habits to reduce liability risk
Display Headline
Practice, not malpractice: 3 clinical habits to reduce liability risk
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

Break the ‘fear circuit’ in resistant panic disorder

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:11
Display Headline
Break the ‘fear circuit’ in resistant panic disorder

When initial therapy fails to control a patient’s panic attacks, a neuroanatomic model of anxiety disorders may help. This model proposes that panic sufferers have an abnormally sensitive brain “fear circuit.”1 It suggests why both medications and cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) are effective for treating panic disorder (PD) and can be used as a guide to more successful treatment.

This article explains the fear circuit model and describes how to determine whether initial drug treatment of panic symptoms has been adequate. It offers evidence-and experience-based dosing ranges, augmentation strategies, tips for antidepressant titration, and solutions to the most common inadequate response problems.

HOW THE FEAR CIRCUIT WORKS

Panic disorder may occur with or without agoraphobia. The diagnosis requires recurrent, unexpected panic attacks (Table 1), with at least one attack followed by 1 month or more of:

  • persistent concern about having additional attacks
  • worry about the implications of the attack
  • or significant change in behavior related to the attack.

Panic disorder is usually accompanied by phobic avoidance and anticipatory anxiety, and it often coexists with other psychiatric disorders. Anxiety disorders may share a common genetic vulnerability. Childhood experiences, gender, and life events may increase or decrease the probability that a biologically vulnerable individual will develop an anxiety disorder or depression.1

Table 1

Panic attacks: The core symptom of panic disorder

A panic attack is a discrete period of intense fear or discomfort, in which four (or more) of the following symptoms develop abruptly and peak within 10 minutes:
  • Palpitations, pounding heart, or accelerated heart rate
  • Sweating
  • Trembling or shaking
  • Sensations of shortness of breath or smothering
  • Feeling of choking
  • Chest pain or discomfort
  • Nausea or abdominal distress
  • Feeling dizzy, unsteady, lightheaded, or faint
  • Derealization (feelings of unreality) or depersonalization (being detached from oneself)
  • Fear of losing control or going crazy
  • Fear of dying
  • Paresthesias (numbness or tingling sensations)
  • Chills or hot flushes
Source: DSM-IV-TR

Fear circuit model. PD’s pathophysiology is not completely understood, but evidence suggests that an overactive brain alarm network may increase vulnerability for PD (Box).1,2 Individual patients require different intensities of treatment to normalize their panic symptoms:

Mild to moderate PD (characterized by little or no avoidance and no comorbid disorders) often responds to either medication or CBT. A single intervention—such as using CBT to enhance the cortical inhibitory effects or using medication to reduce the amygdala’s reactivity—may suffice for symptomatic relief.

Severe or complicated PD (characterized by frequent panic attacks, significant agoraphobia, and comorbid anxiety disorders or depression) may require high medication dosages, intense CBT/exposure therapy, or both to normalize more severely disrupted communication among the fear circuit’s components.

ASSESSING TREATMENT OUTCOME

The goal of treatment is remission: a return to functioning without illness-related impairment or loss of quality of life, as if the patient had never been ill. In clinical practice, we can use validated, patient-rated assessment tools to document improvement in panic-related impairment, patient satisfaction, and quality of life—the real targets of treatment. Two useful tools are the Sheehan Disability Scale3 and the Quality of Life Enjoyment and Satisfaction Questionnaire.4

With adequate treatment, achieving remission can take several months or more; without it, remission may never occur. The following guidelines can help ensure that you provide adequate treatment.

What is adequate CBT? When patients’ symptoms fail to respond to CBT, the first step is to examine whether inadequate treatment is the culprit. At least 10 weekly CBT sessions administered by a “qualified professional” has been suggested as an adequate CBT trial for PD.5 Unfortunately, qualified CBT therapists are not always available. If CBT referral is not an option, clinicians can provide patients with at least some elements of CBT, such as education about PD, information resources, and self-exposure instruction as indicated. For more information on CBT for PD, see Related Resources.

What is adequate drug treatment? Noncompliance with medication because a patient fears adverse effects or has insufficient information can easily thwart treatment. Before treatment begins, therefore, it is important to establish your credibility. Provide the patient with information about PD, its treatment options, and what to expect so that he or she can collaborate in treatment (Table 2).

Box

How an abnormal ‘fear circuit’ may trigger panic attacks

An inherited, abnormally active brain alarm mechanism—or “fear circuit”—may explain panic disorder, according to a theoretical neuroanatomic model.1 Its hub is the central nucleus of the amygdala, which coordinates fear responses via pathways communicating with the hippocampus, thalamus, hypothalamus, brainstem, and cortical processing areas.

The amygdala mediates acute emotional responses, including fear and anxiety. The hypothalamus mediates physiologic changes connected with emotions, such as release of stress hormones and some changes in heart rate. The prefrontal cortex is involved in thinking and memory and may be instrumental in predicting the consequences of rewards or punishments. In vulnerable individuals, defects in coordinating the sensory input among these brain regions may cause the central nucleus to discharge, resulting in a panic attack.

Medication and cognitive-behavioral therapy may reduce fear circuit reactivity and prevent panic attacks by acting at different components of the fear circuit. When the amygdala’s central nucleus no longer overreacts to sensory input, anticipatory anxiety and phobic avoidance usually dissipate over time.2,3 Thus, the fear circuit model integrates the clinical observation that both cognitive-behavioral therapy and medication are effective for treating panic.1

Abnormal interactions among components of this oversensitive fear circuit also may occur in social anxiety disorder, generalized anxiety disorder, posttraumatic stress disorder, and depression.1 In these disorders, communication patterns among the parts of the hypothesized circuit may be disrupted in different ways. The clinical observation that anxious individuals often become depressed when under stress is consistent with this model and with the literature.

 

 

Antidepressants are preferred as first-line treatment of PD, even in nondepressed patients. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) are recommended for PD because of their comparable efficacy and tolerability compared with older antipanic agents.6 SSRIs are also effective against other anxiety disorders likely to co-occur with PD.7

Many panic patients are exquisitely sensitive to activation by initial antidepressant dosages. Activation rarely occurs in other disorders, so its appearance suggests that your diagnosis is correct. Clinical strategies to help you manage antidepressant titration are suggested in Table 3.

Table 2

Prescription for success in treating panic disorder

Relieve patient of perceived burden of being ill
Explain the disorder’s familial/genetic origins
Describe the fear circuit model
Include spouse or significant other in treatment
Build patient-physician collaboration
Explain potential medication side effects
Describe the usual pattern of symptom relief (stop panic attacks → reduce anticipatory anxiety → decrease phobia)
Estimate a time frame for improvement
Map out next steps if first try is unsuccessful
Be available, especially at first
Address patient’s long-term medication concerns
Discuss safety, long-term efficacy
Frame treatment as a pathway to independence from panic attacks
Use analogy of diabetes or hypertension to explain that medication is for managing symptoms, rather than a cure
Discuss tapering medication after sustained improvement (12 to 18 months) to determine continued need for medication

In clinical settings, two naturalistic studies suggested that more-favorable outcomes are associated with antipanic medication dosages shown in Table 4 as “possibly effective”—and that most patients with poor medication response received inadequate treatment.8,9Table 4 ’s dosages come from those two studies—published before the efficacy studies of SSRIs in PD—and from later studies of SSRIs and the selective norepinephrine-serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SNRI) venlafaxine.7,8,10

The lower end of the “probably effective” range in Table 4 represents the lowest dose levels generally expected to be effective for PD. Not all agents in the table are FDA-approved for PD, nor are the dosages of approved agents necessarily “within labeling.” Some patients’ symptoms may resolve at higher or lower dosages.

Table 3

Tips to help the patient tolerate antidepressant titration

Be pre-emptive
Before starting therapy, explain that low initial dosing and flexible titration help to control unpleasant but medically safe “jitteriness” known as antidepressant-induced activation
Tell the patient that activation rarely occurs in disorders other than PD (“Its appearance suggests that the diagnosis is correct and that we’re likely on the right track”)
Be reassuring
Tell the patient, “You control the gas peddle—I’ll help you steer” (to an effective dose)
Be cautious
Start with 25 to 50% of the usual antidepressant initial dosage for depression (Table 4); if too activating, reduce and advance more gradually
Activation usually dissipates in 1 to 2 weeks; over time, larger dosage increments are often possible
Be attentive
Use benzodiazepines or beta blockers as needed to attenuate activation

Some patients require months to reach and maintain the “probably effective” dosage for at least 6 weeks. Short-term benzodiazepines can be used to control panic symptoms during antidepressant titration, then tapered off.11 We categorize patients who are unable to tolerate an “adequate dose” as not having had a therapeutic trial—not as treatment failures.

No controlled studies of PD have examined the success rate of switching to a second antidepressant after a first one has been ineffective.12 In clinical practice, we may try two different SSRIs and venlafaxine. When switching agents, we usually co-administer the treatments for a few weeks, titrate the second agent upward gradually, then taper and discontinue the first agent over 2 to 4 weeks. We use short-term benzodiazepines as needed.

Partial improvement. Sometimes overall symptoms improve meaningfully, but bothersome panic symptoms remain. Clinical response may improve sufficiently if you raise the medication dosage in increments while monitoring for safety and tolerability. Address medicolegal concerns by documenting in the patient’s chart:

  • your rationale for prescribing dosages that exceed FDA guidelines
  • that you discussed possible risks versus benefits with the patient, and the patient agrees to the treatment.

When in doubt about using dosages that exceed FDA guidelines for patients with unusually resistant panic symptoms, obtain consultation from an expert or colleague.

Table 4

Recommended drug dosages for panic disorder

Class/agentPossibly effective (mg/d)Probably effective (mg/d)High dosage (mg/d)Initial dosage (mg/d)Confidence level
SSRIs
Citalopram<2020-60>6010++
Escitalopram<1010-30>305++++
Fluoxetine<4040-80>8010++
Fluvoxamine<150150-300>30025++++
Paroxetine*<4040-60>605-10++++
Sertraline*<150150-300>30012.5-25++++
SNRI
Venlafaxine<150150-300>30018.75-37.5++
Benzodiazepines
Alprazolam*<22-8>80.5-1.0++++
Clonazepam*<12-4>40.25-0.5++++
Tricyclics
Clomipramine<100100-200>20010++++
Desipramine<150150-300>30010++
Imipramine<150150-300>30010++++
MAOIs
Phenelzine<4545-90>9015+++
Tranylcypromine<3030-70>7010+
Antiepileptics
Gabapentin100-200600-3,400  ++
Valproate (VPA)250-5001,000-2,000  ++
* FDA-approved for treating panic disorder
Confidence:
+ (uncontrolled series)
++ (at least 1 controlled study)
+++ (>1 controlled study)
++++ (Unequivocal)

Using benzodiazepines. As noted above, adjunctive use of benzodiazepines while initiating antidepressant therapy can help extremely anxious or medication-sensitive patients.11 Many clinicians coadminister benzodiazepines with antidepressants over the longer term.7 As a primary treatment, benzodiazepines may be useful for patients who could not tolerate or did not respond to at least two or three antidepressant trials.

 

 

Table 5

Solving inadequate response to initial SSRI treatment of panic disorder

ProblemDifferential diagnosisSuggested solutions
Persistent panic attacksUnexpected attacks Inadequate treatment or duration
Situational attacks
Medical condition
Other psychiatric disorder
≥Threshold dose for 6 weeks
Try second SSRI
Try venlafaxine
CBT/exposure therapy
Address specific conditions
Rule out social phobia, OCD, PTSD
Persistent nonpanic anxietyMedication-related Activation (SSRI or SNRI) Akathisia from SSRI
Comorbid GAD
Interdose BZD rebound
BZD or alcohol withdrawal
Residual anxiety
Adjust dosage, add BZD or beta blocker
Adjust dosage, add beta blocker or BZD
Increase antidepressant dosage, add BZD
Switch to longer-acting agent
Assess and treat as indicated
Add/increase BZD
Residual phobiaAgoraphobiaCBT/exposure, adjust medication
Other disordersDepression
Bipolar disorder
Personality disorders
Medical disorder
Aggressive antidepressant treatment ±BZDs
Mood stabilizer and antidepressant ±BZDs
Specific psychotherapy
Review and modify treatment as indicated
Environmental event or stressor(s)Review work, family events, patient perception of stressorFamily/spouse interview and education
Environmental hygiene as indicated
Brief adjustment in treatment plan(s) as needed
Poor adherenceDrug sexual side effects
Inadequate patient or family understanding of panic disorder and its treatment
Try bupropion, sildenafil, amantadine, switch agents
Patient/family education
Make resource materials available
BZD: Benzodiazepine
CBT: Cognitive-behavioral therapy
GAD: Generalized anxiety disorder
OCD: Obsessive-compulsive disorder
PTSD: Posttraumatic stress disorder
SNRI: Serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor
SSRI: Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor

Because benzodiazepine monotherapy does not reliably protect against depression, we advise clinicians to encourage patients to self-monitor and report any signs of emerging depression. Avoid benzodiazepines in patients with a history of alcohol or substance abuse.7

Other agents. Once the mainstay of antipanic treatment, tricyclic antidepressants (TCAs) and monoamine oxidase inhibitors (MAOIs) are seldom used today because of their side effects, toxicity in overdose, and—for MAOIs—tyramine-restricted diet. Their usefulness in resistant panic is probably limited to last-ditch efforts.

DISSECTING TREATMENT FAILURE

In uncomplicated PD, lack of improvement after two or more adequate medication trials is unusual. If you observe minimal or no improvement, review carefully for other causes of anxiety or factors that can complicate PD treatment (Table 5).

If no other cause for the persistent symptom(s) is apparent, the fear circuit model may help you decide how to modify or enhance medication treatment, add CBT, or both.

For example:

  • If panic attacks persist, advancing the medication dosage (if tolerated and acceptably safe) may help. Consider increasing the dosage, augmenting, or switching to a different agent.
  • If persistent attacks are consistently cued to feared situations, try intervening with moreaggressive exposure therapy. Consider whether other disorders such as unrecognized social anxiety disorder, obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD), or posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) may be perpetuating the fearful avoidance.
  • If the patient is depressed, consider that depression-related social withdrawal may be causing the avoidance symptoms. Aggressive antidepressant pharmacotherapy is strongly suggested.

AUGMENTATION STRATEGIES

Medication for CBT failure. Only two controlled studies have examined adding an adequate dose of medication after patients failed to respond to exposure/CBT alone:

  • One study of 18 hospitalized patients with agoraphobia who failed a course of behavioral psychodynamic therapy reported improvement when clomipramine, 150 mg/d, was given for 3 weeks.13
  • In a study of 43 patients who failed initial CBT, greater improvement was reported in patients who received CBT plus paroxetine, 40 mg/d, compared with those who received placebo while continuing CBT.14

Augmentation in drug therapy. Only one controlled study has examined augmentation therapy after lack of response to an SSRI—in this case 8 weeks of fluoxetine after two undefined “antidepressant failures.” When pindolol, 2.5 mg tid, or placebo were added to the fluoxetine therapy, the 13 patients who received pindolol improved clinically and statistically more on several standardized ratings than the 12 who received placebo.15

An 8-week, open-label trial showed beneficial effects of olanzapine, up to 20 mg/d, in patients with well-described treatment-resistant PD.16

Other well-described treatment adjustments reported to benefit nonresponsive PD include:

  • Adding fluoxetine to a TCA or adding a TCA to fluoxetine, for TCA/SSRI combination therapy17
  • Switching to the selective norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor reboxetine, 2 to 8 mg/d for 6 weeks after inadequate paroxetine or fluoxetine response (average of 8 weeks, maximum dosage 40 mg/d).18 (Note: Reboxetine is not available in the United States.)
  • Using open-label gabapentin, 600 to 2,400 mg/d, after two SSRI treatment failures.19
  • Adding the dopamine receptor agonist pramipexole, 1.0 to 1.5 mg/d, to various antipanic medications.20

Augmenting an SSRI with pindolol or supplementing unsuccessful behavioral treatment with “probably effective” dosages of paroxetine or clomipramine could be recommended with some confidence, although more definitive studies are needed. As outlined above, some strategies17-20 might be considered if a patient fails to respond to two or more adequate medication trials. Anecdotal reports are difficult to assess but may be clinically useful when other treatment options have been exhausted.

Related resources

  • Barlow DH. Anxiety and its disorders: the nature and treatment of anxiety and panic New York: Guilford Press, 1988.
  • Craske MG, DeCola JP, Sachs AD, Pontillo DC. Panic control treatment of agoraphobia. J Anxiety Disord 2003;17:321-33.
  • National Institute for Mental Health: Panic Disorder http://www.nimh.nih.gov/publicat/fearandtrauma.cfm
  • Anxiety Disorders Association of America http://www.adaa.org/
 

 

Drug brand names

  • Alprazolam • Xanax
  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Clomipramine • Anafranil
  • Clonazepam • Klonopin
  • Desipramine • Norpramin
  • Escitalopram • Lexapro
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Fluvoxamine • Luvox
  • Gabapentin • Neurontin
  • Imipramine • Tofranil
  • Olanzapine • Zyprexa
  • Phenelzine • Nardil
  • Pindolol • Visken
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Pramipexole • Mirapex
  • Reboxetine • Vestra
  • Sertraline • Zoloft
  • Tranylcypromine • Parnate
  • Venlafaxine • Effexor

Disclosure

Dr. Lydiard receives research support from GlaxoSmithKline, Eli Lilly and Co., Organon, Sanofi-Synthelabo, Cephalon, UCB Pharma, and Merck & Co. and he is a speaker for or consultant to Pfizer Inc., Eli Lilly and Co., Solvay Pharmaceuticals, AstraZeneca Pharmaceuticals, and Forest Pharmaceuticals.

References

1. Gorman JM, Kent JM, Sullivan GM, Coplan JD. Neuroanatomical hypothesis of panic disorder, revisited. Am J Psychiatry 2000;157:493-505.

2. Coplan JD, Lydiard RB. Brain circuits in panic disorder. Biol Psychiatry 1998;44:1264-76.

3. Sheehan DV. The anxiety disease. New York: Charles Scribner and Sons, 1983;151.-

4. Rapaport MH, Wolkow RM, Clary CM. Methodologies and outcomes from the sertraline multicenter flexible-dose trials. Psychopharmacol Bull 1998;34:183-9.

5. Otto MW. Psychosocial approach to treatment-resistant anxiety disorders (presentation). Chantilly, VA: Anxiety Disorders Association of America conference on novel approaches to treatment of refractory anxiety disorders, June 15-16, 2003.

6. Gorman JM, Shear MK, McIntyre JS, Zarin DA. American Psychiatric Association. Practice guideline for the treatment of patients with panic disorder. Am J Psychiatry 1998;155(May supplement).

7. Lydiard RB, Otto MW, Milrod B. Panic disorder treatment. In: Gabbard, GO (ed). Treatment of psychiatric disorders (3rd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, Inc, 2001;1447-82.

8. Simon NM, Safrens SA, Otto MW, et al. Outcome with pharmacotherapy in a naturalistic study of panic disorder. J Affect Disord 2002;69:201-8.

9. Yonkers KA, Ellison J, Shera D, et al. Description of antipanic therapy in a prospective longitudinal study. J Clin Psychopharmacol 1996;16:223-32.

10. Pollack MH, Worthington JJ, 3rd, Otto MW, et al. Venlafaxine for panic disorder: results from a double-blind, placebo-controlled study. Psychopharmacol Bull 1996;32:667-70.

11. Goddard AW, Brouette T, Almai A, et al. Early coadministration of clonazepam with sertraline for panic disorder. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2001;58:681-6.

12. Simon NM. Pharmacological approach to treatment-resistant anxiety disorders (presentation). Chantilly, VA: Anxiety Disorders Association of America conference on novel approaches to treatment of refractory anxiety disorders, June 15-16, 2003.

13. Hoffart A, Due-Madsen J, Lande B, et al. Clomipramine in the treatment of agoraphobic inpatients resistant to behavioral therapy. J Clin Psychiatry 1993;54:481-7.

14. Kampman M, Keijsers GP, Hoogduin CA, Hendriks GJ. A randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study of the effects of adjunctive paroxetine in panic disorder patients unsuccessfully treated with cognitive-behavioral therapy alone. J Clin Psychiatry 2002;63:772-7.

15. Hirschmann S, Dannon PN, Iancu I, et al. Pindolol augmentation in patients with treatment-resistant panic disorder: a double-blind, placebo-controlled trial. J Clin Psychopharmacol 2000;20:556-9.

16. Hollifield M, Thompson P, Uhlenluth E. Potential efficacy and safety of olanzapine in refractory panic disorder (presentation). San Francisco: American Psychiatric Association annual meeting, 2003.

17. Tiffon L, Coplan J, Papp L, Gorman J. Augmentation strategies with tricyclic or fluoxetine treatment in seven partially responsive panic disorder patients. J Clin Psychiatry 1994;55:66-9.

18. Dannon PN, Iancu I, Grunhaus L. The efficacy of reboxetine in treatment-refractory patients with panic disorder: an open-label study. Hum Psychopharmacol 2002;17:329-33.

19. Chiu S. Gabapentin treatment response in SSRI-refractory panic disorder (presentation) San Francisco: American Psychiatric Association annual meeting, 2003.

20. Marazziti D, Presta S, Pfanner C, et al. Pramipexole augmentation in panic with agoraphobia. Am J Psychiatry 2001;158:498-9.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Bruce R. Lydiard, PhD, MD
Clinical professor of psychiatry University of South Carolina Director, Southeast Health Consultants Charleston, SC

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(11)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
12-22
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Bruce R. Lydiard, PhD, MD
Clinical professor of psychiatry University of South Carolina Director, Southeast Health Consultants Charleston, SC

Author and Disclosure Information

Bruce R. Lydiard, PhD, MD
Clinical professor of psychiatry University of South Carolina Director, Southeast Health Consultants Charleston, SC

Article PDF
Article PDF

When initial therapy fails to control a patient’s panic attacks, a neuroanatomic model of anxiety disorders may help. This model proposes that panic sufferers have an abnormally sensitive brain “fear circuit.”1 It suggests why both medications and cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) are effective for treating panic disorder (PD) and can be used as a guide to more successful treatment.

This article explains the fear circuit model and describes how to determine whether initial drug treatment of panic symptoms has been adequate. It offers evidence-and experience-based dosing ranges, augmentation strategies, tips for antidepressant titration, and solutions to the most common inadequate response problems.

HOW THE FEAR CIRCUIT WORKS

Panic disorder may occur with or without agoraphobia. The diagnosis requires recurrent, unexpected panic attacks (Table 1), with at least one attack followed by 1 month or more of:

  • persistent concern about having additional attacks
  • worry about the implications of the attack
  • or significant change in behavior related to the attack.

Panic disorder is usually accompanied by phobic avoidance and anticipatory anxiety, and it often coexists with other psychiatric disorders. Anxiety disorders may share a common genetic vulnerability. Childhood experiences, gender, and life events may increase or decrease the probability that a biologically vulnerable individual will develop an anxiety disorder or depression.1

Table 1

Panic attacks: The core symptom of panic disorder

A panic attack is a discrete period of intense fear or discomfort, in which four (or more) of the following symptoms develop abruptly and peak within 10 minutes:
  • Palpitations, pounding heart, or accelerated heart rate
  • Sweating
  • Trembling or shaking
  • Sensations of shortness of breath or smothering
  • Feeling of choking
  • Chest pain or discomfort
  • Nausea or abdominal distress
  • Feeling dizzy, unsteady, lightheaded, or faint
  • Derealization (feelings of unreality) or depersonalization (being detached from oneself)
  • Fear of losing control or going crazy
  • Fear of dying
  • Paresthesias (numbness or tingling sensations)
  • Chills or hot flushes
Source: DSM-IV-TR

Fear circuit model. PD’s pathophysiology is not completely understood, but evidence suggests that an overactive brain alarm network may increase vulnerability for PD (Box).1,2 Individual patients require different intensities of treatment to normalize their panic symptoms:

Mild to moderate PD (characterized by little or no avoidance and no comorbid disorders) often responds to either medication or CBT. A single intervention—such as using CBT to enhance the cortical inhibitory effects or using medication to reduce the amygdala’s reactivity—may suffice for symptomatic relief.

Severe or complicated PD (characterized by frequent panic attacks, significant agoraphobia, and comorbid anxiety disorders or depression) may require high medication dosages, intense CBT/exposure therapy, or both to normalize more severely disrupted communication among the fear circuit’s components.

ASSESSING TREATMENT OUTCOME

The goal of treatment is remission: a return to functioning without illness-related impairment or loss of quality of life, as if the patient had never been ill. In clinical practice, we can use validated, patient-rated assessment tools to document improvement in panic-related impairment, patient satisfaction, and quality of life—the real targets of treatment. Two useful tools are the Sheehan Disability Scale3 and the Quality of Life Enjoyment and Satisfaction Questionnaire.4

With adequate treatment, achieving remission can take several months or more; without it, remission may never occur. The following guidelines can help ensure that you provide adequate treatment.

What is adequate CBT? When patients’ symptoms fail to respond to CBT, the first step is to examine whether inadequate treatment is the culprit. At least 10 weekly CBT sessions administered by a “qualified professional” has been suggested as an adequate CBT trial for PD.5 Unfortunately, qualified CBT therapists are not always available. If CBT referral is not an option, clinicians can provide patients with at least some elements of CBT, such as education about PD, information resources, and self-exposure instruction as indicated. For more information on CBT for PD, see Related Resources.

What is adequate drug treatment? Noncompliance with medication because a patient fears adverse effects or has insufficient information can easily thwart treatment. Before treatment begins, therefore, it is important to establish your credibility. Provide the patient with information about PD, its treatment options, and what to expect so that he or she can collaborate in treatment (Table 2).

Box

How an abnormal ‘fear circuit’ may trigger panic attacks

An inherited, abnormally active brain alarm mechanism—or “fear circuit”—may explain panic disorder, according to a theoretical neuroanatomic model.1 Its hub is the central nucleus of the amygdala, which coordinates fear responses via pathways communicating with the hippocampus, thalamus, hypothalamus, brainstem, and cortical processing areas.

The amygdala mediates acute emotional responses, including fear and anxiety. The hypothalamus mediates physiologic changes connected with emotions, such as release of stress hormones and some changes in heart rate. The prefrontal cortex is involved in thinking and memory and may be instrumental in predicting the consequences of rewards or punishments. In vulnerable individuals, defects in coordinating the sensory input among these brain regions may cause the central nucleus to discharge, resulting in a panic attack.

Medication and cognitive-behavioral therapy may reduce fear circuit reactivity and prevent panic attacks by acting at different components of the fear circuit. When the amygdala’s central nucleus no longer overreacts to sensory input, anticipatory anxiety and phobic avoidance usually dissipate over time.2,3 Thus, the fear circuit model integrates the clinical observation that both cognitive-behavioral therapy and medication are effective for treating panic.1

Abnormal interactions among components of this oversensitive fear circuit also may occur in social anxiety disorder, generalized anxiety disorder, posttraumatic stress disorder, and depression.1 In these disorders, communication patterns among the parts of the hypothesized circuit may be disrupted in different ways. The clinical observation that anxious individuals often become depressed when under stress is consistent with this model and with the literature.

 

 

Antidepressants are preferred as first-line treatment of PD, even in nondepressed patients. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) are recommended for PD because of their comparable efficacy and tolerability compared with older antipanic agents.6 SSRIs are also effective against other anxiety disorders likely to co-occur with PD.7

Many panic patients are exquisitely sensitive to activation by initial antidepressant dosages. Activation rarely occurs in other disorders, so its appearance suggests that your diagnosis is correct. Clinical strategies to help you manage antidepressant titration are suggested in Table 3.

Table 2

Prescription for success in treating panic disorder

Relieve patient of perceived burden of being ill
Explain the disorder’s familial/genetic origins
Describe the fear circuit model
Include spouse or significant other in treatment
Build patient-physician collaboration
Explain potential medication side effects
Describe the usual pattern of symptom relief (stop panic attacks → reduce anticipatory anxiety → decrease phobia)
Estimate a time frame for improvement
Map out next steps if first try is unsuccessful
Be available, especially at first
Address patient’s long-term medication concerns
Discuss safety, long-term efficacy
Frame treatment as a pathway to independence from panic attacks
Use analogy of diabetes or hypertension to explain that medication is for managing symptoms, rather than a cure
Discuss tapering medication after sustained improvement (12 to 18 months) to determine continued need for medication

In clinical settings, two naturalistic studies suggested that more-favorable outcomes are associated with antipanic medication dosages shown in Table 4 as “possibly effective”—and that most patients with poor medication response received inadequate treatment.8,9Table 4 ’s dosages come from those two studies—published before the efficacy studies of SSRIs in PD—and from later studies of SSRIs and the selective norepinephrine-serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SNRI) venlafaxine.7,8,10

The lower end of the “probably effective” range in Table 4 represents the lowest dose levels generally expected to be effective for PD. Not all agents in the table are FDA-approved for PD, nor are the dosages of approved agents necessarily “within labeling.” Some patients’ symptoms may resolve at higher or lower dosages.

Table 3

Tips to help the patient tolerate antidepressant titration

Be pre-emptive
Before starting therapy, explain that low initial dosing and flexible titration help to control unpleasant but medically safe “jitteriness” known as antidepressant-induced activation
Tell the patient that activation rarely occurs in disorders other than PD (“Its appearance suggests that the diagnosis is correct and that we’re likely on the right track”)
Be reassuring
Tell the patient, “You control the gas peddle—I’ll help you steer” (to an effective dose)
Be cautious
Start with 25 to 50% of the usual antidepressant initial dosage for depression (Table 4); if too activating, reduce and advance more gradually
Activation usually dissipates in 1 to 2 weeks; over time, larger dosage increments are often possible
Be attentive
Use benzodiazepines or beta blockers as needed to attenuate activation

Some patients require months to reach and maintain the “probably effective” dosage for at least 6 weeks. Short-term benzodiazepines can be used to control panic symptoms during antidepressant titration, then tapered off.11 We categorize patients who are unable to tolerate an “adequate dose” as not having had a therapeutic trial—not as treatment failures.

No controlled studies of PD have examined the success rate of switching to a second antidepressant after a first one has been ineffective.12 In clinical practice, we may try two different SSRIs and venlafaxine. When switching agents, we usually co-administer the treatments for a few weeks, titrate the second agent upward gradually, then taper and discontinue the first agent over 2 to 4 weeks. We use short-term benzodiazepines as needed.

Partial improvement. Sometimes overall symptoms improve meaningfully, but bothersome panic symptoms remain. Clinical response may improve sufficiently if you raise the medication dosage in increments while monitoring for safety and tolerability. Address medicolegal concerns by documenting in the patient’s chart:

  • your rationale for prescribing dosages that exceed FDA guidelines
  • that you discussed possible risks versus benefits with the patient, and the patient agrees to the treatment.

When in doubt about using dosages that exceed FDA guidelines for patients with unusually resistant panic symptoms, obtain consultation from an expert or colleague.

Table 4

Recommended drug dosages for panic disorder

Class/agentPossibly effective (mg/d)Probably effective (mg/d)High dosage (mg/d)Initial dosage (mg/d)Confidence level
SSRIs
Citalopram<2020-60>6010++
Escitalopram<1010-30>305++++
Fluoxetine<4040-80>8010++
Fluvoxamine<150150-300>30025++++
Paroxetine*<4040-60>605-10++++
Sertraline*<150150-300>30012.5-25++++
SNRI
Venlafaxine<150150-300>30018.75-37.5++
Benzodiazepines
Alprazolam*<22-8>80.5-1.0++++
Clonazepam*<12-4>40.25-0.5++++
Tricyclics
Clomipramine<100100-200>20010++++
Desipramine<150150-300>30010++
Imipramine<150150-300>30010++++
MAOIs
Phenelzine<4545-90>9015+++
Tranylcypromine<3030-70>7010+
Antiepileptics
Gabapentin100-200600-3,400  ++
Valproate (VPA)250-5001,000-2,000  ++
* FDA-approved for treating panic disorder
Confidence:
+ (uncontrolled series)
++ (at least 1 controlled study)
+++ (>1 controlled study)
++++ (Unequivocal)

Using benzodiazepines. As noted above, adjunctive use of benzodiazepines while initiating antidepressant therapy can help extremely anxious or medication-sensitive patients.11 Many clinicians coadminister benzodiazepines with antidepressants over the longer term.7 As a primary treatment, benzodiazepines may be useful for patients who could not tolerate or did not respond to at least two or three antidepressant trials.

 

 

Table 5

Solving inadequate response to initial SSRI treatment of panic disorder

ProblemDifferential diagnosisSuggested solutions
Persistent panic attacksUnexpected attacks Inadequate treatment or duration
Situational attacks
Medical condition
Other psychiatric disorder
≥Threshold dose for 6 weeks
Try second SSRI
Try venlafaxine
CBT/exposure therapy
Address specific conditions
Rule out social phobia, OCD, PTSD
Persistent nonpanic anxietyMedication-related Activation (SSRI or SNRI) Akathisia from SSRI
Comorbid GAD
Interdose BZD rebound
BZD or alcohol withdrawal
Residual anxiety
Adjust dosage, add BZD or beta blocker
Adjust dosage, add beta blocker or BZD
Increase antidepressant dosage, add BZD
Switch to longer-acting agent
Assess and treat as indicated
Add/increase BZD
Residual phobiaAgoraphobiaCBT/exposure, adjust medication
Other disordersDepression
Bipolar disorder
Personality disorders
Medical disorder
Aggressive antidepressant treatment ±BZDs
Mood stabilizer and antidepressant ±BZDs
Specific psychotherapy
Review and modify treatment as indicated
Environmental event or stressor(s)Review work, family events, patient perception of stressorFamily/spouse interview and education
Environmental hygiene as indicated
Brief adjustment in treatment plan(s) as needed
Poor adherenceDrug sexual side effects
Inadequate patient or family understanding of panic disorder and its treatment
Try bupropion, sildenafil, amantadine, switch agents
Patient/family education
Make resource materials available
BZD: Benzodiazepine
CBT: Cognitive-behavioral therapy
GAD: Generalized anxiety disorder
OCD: Obsessive-compulsive disorder
PTSD: Posttraumatic stress disorder
SNRI: Serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor
SSRI: Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor

Because benzodiazepine monotherapy does not reliably protect against depression, we advise clinicians to encourage patients to self-monitor and report any signs of emerging depression. Avoid benzodiazepines in patients with a history of alcohol or substance abuse.7

Other agents. Once the mainstay of antipanic treatment, tricyclic antidepressants (TCAs) and monoamine oxidase inhibitors (MAOIs) are seldom used today because of their side effects, toxicity in overdose, and—for MAOIs—tyramine-restricted diet. Their usefulness in resistant panic is probably limited to last-ditch efforts.

DISSECTING TREATMENT FAILURE

In uncomplicated PD, lack of improvement after two or more adequate medication trials is unusual. If you observe minimal or no improvement, review carefully for other causes of anxiety or factors that can complicate PD treatment (Table 5).

If no other cause for the persistent symptom(s) is apparent, the fear circuit model may help you decide how to modify or enhance medication treatment, add CBT, or both.

For example:

  • If panic attacks persist, advancing the medication dosage (if tolerated and acceptably safe) may help. Consider increasing the dosage, augmenting, or switching to a different agent.
  • If persistent attacks are consistently cued to feared situations, try intervening with moreaggressive exposure therapy. Consider whether other disorders such as unrecognized social anxiety disorder, obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD), or posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) may be perpetuating the fearful avoidance.
  • If the patient is depressed, consider that depression-related social withdrawal may be causing the avoidance symptoms. Aggressive antidepressant pharmacotherapy is strongly suggested.

AUGMENTATION STRATEGIES

Medication for CBT failure. Only two controlled studies have examined adding an adequate dose of medication after patients failed to respond to exposure/CBT alone:

  • One study of 18 hospitalized patients with agoraphobia who failed a course of behavioral psychodynamic therapy reported improvement when clomipramine, 150 mg/d, was given for 3 weeks.13
  • In a study of 43 patients who failed initial CBT, greater improvement was reported in patients who received CBT plus paroxetine, 40 mg/d, compared with those who received placebo while continuing CBT.14

Augmentation in drug therapy. Only one controlled study has examined augmentation therapy after lack of response to an SSRI—in this case 8 weeks of fluoxetine after two undefined “antidepressant failures.” When pindolol, 2.5 mg tid, or placebo were added to the fluoxetine therapy, the 13 patients who received pindolol improved clinically and statistically more on several standardized ratings than the 12 who received placebo.15

An 8-week, open-label trial showed beneficial effects of olanzapine, up to 20 mg/d, in patients with well-described treatment-resistant PD.16

Other well-described treatment adjustments reported to benefit nonresponsive PD include:

  • Adding fluoxetine to a TCA or adding a TCA to fluoxetine, for TCA/SSRI combination therapy17
  • Switching to the selective norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor reboxetine, 2 to 8 mg/d for 6 weeks after inadequate paroxetine or fluoxetine response (average of 8 weeks, maximum dosage 40 mg/d).18 (Note: Reboxetine is not available in the United States.)
  • Using open-label gabapentin, 600 to 2,400 mg/d, after two SSRI treatment failures.19
  • Adding the dopamine receptor agonist pramipexole, 1.0 to 1.5 mg/d, to various antipanic medications.20

Augmenting an SSRI with pindolol or supplementing unsuccessful behavioral treatment with “probably effective” dosages of paroxetine or clomipramine could be recommended with some confidence, although more definitive studies are needed. As outlined above, some strategies17-20 might be considered if a patient fails to respond to two or more adequate medication trials. Anecdotal reports are difficult to assess but may be clinically useful when other treatment options have been exhausted.

Related resources

  • Barlow DH. Anxiety and its disorders: the nature and treatment of anxiety and panic New York: Guilford Press, 1988.
  • Craske MG, DeCola JP, Sachs AD, Pontillo DC. Panic control treatment of agoraphobia. J Anxiety Disord 2003;17:321-33.
  • National Institute for Mental Health: Panic Disorder http://www.nimh.nih.gov/publicat/fearandtrauma.cfm
  • Anxiety Disorders Association of America http://www.adaa.org/
 

 

Drug brand names

  • Alprazolam • Xanax
  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Clomipramine • Anafranil
  • Clonazepam • Klonopin
  • Desipramine • Norpramin
  • Escitalopram • Lexapro
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Fluvoxamine • Luvox
  • Gabapentin • Neurontin
  • Imipramine • Tofranil
  • Olanzapine • Zyprexa
  • Phenelzine • Nardil
  • Pindolol • Visken
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Pramipexole • Mirapex
  • Reboxetine • Vestra
  • Sertraline • Zoloft
  • Tranylcypromine • Parnate
  • Venlafaxine • Effexor

Disclosure

Dr. Lydiard receives research support from GlaxoSmithKline, Eli Lilly and Co., Organon, Sanofi-Synthelabo, Cephalon, UCB Pharma, and Merck & Co. and he is a speaker for or consultant to Pfizer Inc., Eli Lilly and Co., Solvay Pharmaceuticals, AstraZeneca Pharmaceuticals, and Forest Pharmaceuticals.

When initial therapy fails to control a patient’s panic attacks, a neuroanatomic model of anxiety disorders may help. This model proposes that panic sufferers have an abnormally sensitive brain “fear circuit.”1 It suggests why both medications and cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) are effective for treating panic disorder (PD) and can be used as a guide to more successful treatment.

This article explains the fear circuit model and describes how to determine whether initial drug treatment of panic symptoms has been adequate. It offers evidence-and experience-based dosing ranges, augmentation strategies, tips for antidepressant titration, and solutions to the most common inadequate response problems.

HOW THE FEAR CIRCUIT WORKS

Panic disorder may occur with or without agoraphobia. The diagnosis requires recurrent, unexpected panic attacks (Table 1), with at least one attack followed by 1 month or more of:

  • persistent concern about having additional attacks
  • worry about the implications of the attack
  • or significant change in behavior related to the attack.

Panic disorder is usually accompanied by phobic avoidance and anticipatory anxiety, and it often coexists with other psychiatric disorders. Anxiety disorders may share a common genetic vulnerability. Childhood experiences, gender, and life events may increase or decrease the probability that a biologically vulnerable individual will develop an anxiety disorder or depression.1

Table 1

Panic attacks: The core symptom of panic disorder

A panic attack is a discrete period of intense fear or discomfort, in which four (or more) of the following symptoms develop abruptly and peak within 10 minutes:
  • Palpitations, pounding heart, or accelerated heart rate
  • Sweating
  • Trembling or shaking
  • Sensations of shortness of breath or smothering
  • Feeling of choking
  • Chest pain or discomfort
  • Nausea or abdominal distress
  • Feeling dizzy, unsteady, lightheaded, or faint
  • Derealization (feelings of unreality) or depersonalization (being detached from oneself)
  • Fear of losing control or going crazy
  • Fear of dying
  • Paresthesias (numbness or tingling sensations)
  • Chills or hot flushes
Source: DSM-IV-TR

Fear circuit model. PD’s pathophysiology is not completely understood, but evidence suggests that an overactive brain alarm network may increase vulnerability for PD (Box).1,2 Individual patients require different intensities of treatment to normalize their panic symptoms:

Mild to moderate PD (characterized by little or no avoidance and no comorbid disorders) often responds to either medication or CBT. A single intervention—such as using CBT to enhance the cortical inhibitory effects or using medication to reduce the amygdala’s reactivity—may suffice for symptomatic relief.

Severe or complicated PD (characterized by frequent panic attacks, significant agoraphobia, and comorbid anxiety disorders or depression) may require high medication dosages, intense CBT/exposure therapy, or both to normalize more severely disrupted communication among the fear circuit’s components.

ASSESSING TREATMENT OUTCOME

The goal of treatment is remission: a return to functioning without illness-related impairment or loss of quality of life, as if the patient had never been ill. In clinical practice, we can use validated, patient-rated assessment tools to document improvement in panic-related impairment, patient satisfaction, and quality of life—the real targets of treatment. Two useful tools are the Sheehan Disability Scale3 and the Quality of Life Enjoyment and Satisfaction Questionnaire.4

With adequate treatment, achieving remission can take several months or more; without it, remission may never occur. The following guidelines can help ensure that you provide adequate treatment.

What is adequate CBT? When patients’ symptoms fail to respond to CBT, the first step is to examine whether inadequate treatment is the culprit. At least 10 weekly CBT sessions administered by a “qualified professional” has been suggested as an adequate CBT trial for PD.5 Unfortunately, qualified CBT therapists are not always available. If CBT referral is not an option, clinicians can provide patients with at least some elements of CBT, such as education about PD, information resources, and self-exposure instruction as indicated. For more information on CBT for PD, see Related Resources.

What is adequate drug treatment? Noncompliance with medication because a patient fears adverse effects or has insufficient information can easily thwart treatment. Before treatment begins, therefore, it is important to establish your credibility. Provide the patient with information about PD, its treatment options, and what to expect so that he or she can collaborate in treatment (Table 2).

Box

How an abnormal ‘fear circuit’ may trigger panic attacks

An inherited, abnormally active brain alarm mechanism—or “fear circuit”—may explain panic disorder, according to a theoretical neuroanatomic model.1 Its hub is the central nucleus of the amygdala, which coordinates fear responses via pathways communicating with the hippocampus, thalamus, hypothalamus, brainstem, and cortical processing areas.

The amygdala mediates acute emotional responses, including fear and anxiety. The hypothalamus mediates physiologic changes connected with emotions, such as release of stress hormones and some changes in heart rate. The prefrontal cortex is involved in thinking and memory and may be instrumental in predicting the consequences of rewards or punishments. In vulnerable individuals, defects in coordinating the sensory input among these brain regions may cause the central nucleus to discharge, resulting in a panic attack.

Medication and cognitive-behavioral therapy may reduce fear circuit reactivity and prevent panic attacks by acting at different components of the fear circuit. When the amygdala’s central nucleus no longer overreacts to sensory input, anticipatory anxiety and phobic avoidance usually dissipate over time.2,3 Thus, the fear circuit model integrates the clinical observation that both cognitive-behavioral therapy and medication are effective for treating panic.1

Abnormal interactions among components of this oversensitive fear circuit also may occur in social anxiety disorder, generalized anxiety disorder, posttraumatic stress disorder, and depression.1 In these disorders, communication patterns among the parts of the hypothesized circuit may be disrupted in different ways. The clinical observation that anxious individuals often become depressed when under stress is consistent with this model and with the literature.

 

 

Antidepressants are preferred as first-line treatment of PD, even in nondepressed patients. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) are recommended for PD because of their comparable efficacy and tolerability compared with older antipanic agents.6 SSRIs are also effective against other anxiety disorders likely to co-occur with PD.7

Many panic patients are exquisitely sensitive to activation by initial antidepressant dosages. Activation rarely occurs in other disorders, so its appearance suggests that your diagnosis is correct. Clinical strategies to help you manage antidepressant titration are suggested in Table 3.

Table 2

Prescription for success in treating panic disorder

Relieve patient of perceived burden of being ill
Explain the disorder’s familial/genetic origins
Describe the fear circuit model
Include spouse or significant other in treatment
Build patient-physician collaboration
Explain potential medication side effects
Describe the usual pattern of symptom relief (stop panic attacks → reduce anticipatory anxiety → decrease phobia)
Estimate a time frame for improvement
Map out next steps if first try is unsuccessful
Be available, especially at first
Address patient’s long-term medication concerns
Discuss safety, long-term efficacy
Frame treatment as a pathway to independence from panic attacks
Use analogy of diabetes or hypertension to explain that medication is for managing symptoms, rather than a cure
Discuss tapering medication after sustained improvement (12 to 18 months) to determine continued need for medication

In clinical settings, two naturalistic studies suggested that more-favorable outcomes are associated with antipanic medication dosages shown in Table 4 as “possibly effective”—and that most patients with poor medication response received inadequate treatment.8,9Table 4 ’s dosages come from those two studies—published before the efficacy studies of SSRIs in PD—and from later studies of SSRIs and the selective norepinephrine-serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SNRI) venlafaxine.7,8,10

The lower end of the “probably effective” range in Table 4 represents the lowest dose levels generally expected to be effective for PD. Not all agents in the table are FDA-approved for PD, nor are the dosages of approved agents necessarily “within labeling.” Some patients’ symptoms may resolve at higher or lower dosages.

Table 3

Tips to help the patient tolerate antidepressant titration

Be pre-emptive
Before starting therapy, explain that low initial dosing and flexible titration help to control unpleasant but medically safe “jitteriness” known as antidepressant-induced activation
Tell the patient that activation rarely occurs in disorders other than PD (“Its appearance suggests that the diagnosis is correct and that we’re likely on the right track”)
Be reassuring
Tell the patient, “You control the gas peddle—I’ll help you steer” (to an effective dose)
Be cautious
Start with 25 to 50% of the usual antidepressant initial dosage for depression (Table 4); if too activating, reduce and advance more gradually
Activation usually dissipates in 1 to 2 weeks; over time, larger dosage increments are often possible
Be attentive
Use benzodiazepines or beta blockers as needed to attenuate activation

Some patients require months to reach and maintain the “probably effective” dosage for at least 6 weeks. Short-term benzodiazepines can be used to control panic symptoms during antidepressant titration, then tapered off.11 We categorize patients who are unable to tolerate an “adequate dose” as not having had a therapeutic trial—not as treatment failures.

No controlled studies of PD have examined the success rate of switching to a second antidepressant after a first one has been ineffective.12 In clinical practice, we may try two different SSRIs and venlafaxine. When switching agents, we usually co-administer the treatments for a few weeks, titrate the second agent upward gradually, then taper and discontinue the first agent over 2 to 4 weeks. We use short-term benzodiazepines as needed.

Partial improvement. Sometimes overall symptoms improve meaningfully, but bothersome panic symptoms remain. Clinical response may improve sufficiently if you raise the medication dosage in increments while monitoring for safety and tolerability. Address medicolegal concerns by documenting in the patient’s chart:

  • your rationale for prescribing dosages that exceed FDA guidelines
  • that you discussed possible risks versus benefits with the patient, and the patient agrees to the treatment.

When in doubt about using dosages that exceed FDA guidelines for patients with unusually resistant panic symptoms, obtain consultation from an expert or colleague.

Table 4

Recommended drug dosages for panic disorder

Class/agentPossibly effective (mg/d)Probably effective (mg/d)High dosage (mg/d)Initial dosage (mg/d)Confidence level
SSRIs
Citalopram<2020-60>6010++
Escitalopram<1010-30>305++++
Fluoxetine<4040-80>8010++
Fluvoxamine<150150-300>30025++++
Paroxetine*<4040-60>605-10++++
Sertraline*<150150-300>30012.5-25++++
SNRI
Venlafaxine<150150-300>30018.75-37.5++
Benzodiazepines
Alprazolam*<22-8>80.5-1.0++++
Clonazepam*<12-4>40.25-0.5++++
Tricyclics
Clomipramine<100100-200>20010++++
Desipramine<150150-300>30010++
Imipramine<150150-300>30010++++
MAOIs
Phenelzine<4545-90>9015+++
Tranylcypromine<3030-70>7010+
Antiepileptics
Gabapentin100-200600-3,400  ++
Valproate (VPA)250-5001,000-2,000  ++
* FDA-approved for treating panic disorder
Confidence:
+ (uncontrolled series)
++ (at least 1 controlled study)
+++ (>1 controlled study)
++++ (Unequivocal)

Using benzodiazepines. As noted above, adjunctive use of benzodiazepines while initiating antidepressant therapy can help extremely anxious or medication-sensitive patients.11 Many clinicians coadminister benzodiazepines with antidepressants over the longer term.7 As a primary treatment, benzodiazepines may be useful for patients who could not tolerate or did not respond to at least two or three antidepressant trials.

 

 

Table 5

Solving inadequate response to initial SSRI treatment of panic disorder

ProblemDifferential diagnosisSuggested solutions
Persistent panic attacksUnexpected attacks Inadequate treatment or duration
Situational attacks
Medical condition
Other psychiatric disorder
≥Threshold dose for 6 weeks
Try second SSRI
Try venlafaxine
CBT/exposure therapy
Address specific conditions
Rule out social phobia, OCD, PTSD
Persistent nonpanic anxietyMedication-related Activation (SSRI or SNRI) Akathisia from SSRI
Comorbid GAD
Interdose BZD rebound
BZD or alcohol withdrawal
Residual anxiety
Adjust dosage, add BZD or beta blocker
Adjust dosage, add beta blocker or BZD
Increase antidepressant dosage, add BZD
Switch to longer-acting agent
Assess and treat as indicated
Add/increase BZD
Residual phobiaAgoraphobiaCBT/exposure, adjust medication
Other disordersDepression
Bipolar disorder
Personality disorders
Medical disorder
Aggressive antidepressant treatment ±BZDs
Mood stabilizer and antidepressant ±BZDs
Specific psychotherapy
Review and modify treatment as indicated
Environmental event or stressor(s)Review work, family events, patient perception of stressorFamily/spouse interview and education
Environmental hygiene as indicated
Brief adjustment in treatment plan(s) as needed
Poor adherenceDrug sexual side effects
Inadequate patient or family understanding of panic disorder and its treatment
Try bupropion, sildenafil, amantadine, switch agents
Patient/family education
Make resource materials available
BZD: Benzodiazepine
CBT: Cognitive-behavioral therapy
GAD: Generalized anxiety disorder
OCD: Obsessive-compulsive disorder
PTSD: Posttraumatic stress disorder
SNRI: Serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor
SSRI: Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor

Because benzodiazepine monotherapy does not reliably protect against depression, we advise clinicians to encourage patients to self-monitor and report any signs of emerging depression. Avoid benzodiazepines in patients with a history of alcohol or substance abuse.7

Other agents. Once the mainstay of antipanic treatment, tricyclic antidepressants (TCAs) and monoamine oxidase inhibitors (MAOIs) are seldom used today because of their side effects, toxicity in overdose, and—for MAOIs—tyramine-restricted diet. Their usefulness in resistant panic is probably limited to last-ditch efforts.

DISSECTING TREATMENT FAILURE

In uncomplicated PD, lack of improvement after two or more adequate medication trials is unusual. If you observe minimal or no improvement, review carefully for other causes of anxiety or factors that can complicate PD treatment (Table 5).

If no other cause for the persistent symptom(s) is apparent, the fear circuit model may help you decide how to modify or enhance medication treatment, add CBT, or both.

For example:

  • If panic attacks persist, advancing the medication dosage (if tolerated and acceptably safe) may help. Consider increasing the dosage, augmenting, or switching to a different agent.
  • If persistent attacks are consistently cued to feared situations, try intervening with moreaggressive exposure therapy. Consider whether other disorders such as unrecognized social anxiety disorder, obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD), or posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) may be perpetuating the fearful avoidance.
  • If the patient is depressed, consider that depression-related social withdrawal may be causing the avoidance symptoms. Aggressive antidepressant pharmacotherapy is strongly suggested.

AUGMENTATION STRATEGIES

Medication for CBT failure. Only two controlled studies have examined adding an adequate dose of medication after patients failed to respond to exposure/CBT alone:

  • One study of 18 hospitalized patients with agoraphobia who failed a course of behavioral psychodynamic therapy reported improvement when clomipramine, 150 mg/d, was given for 3 weeks.13
  • In a study of 43 patients who failed initial CBT, greater improvement was reported in patients who received CBT plus paroxetine, 40 mg/d, compared with those who received placebo while continuing CBT.14

Augmentation in drug therapy. Only one controlled study has examined augmentation therapy after lack of response to an SSRI—in this case 8 weeks of fluoxetine after two undefined “antidepressant failures.” When pindolol, 2.5 mg tid, or placebo were added to the fluoxetine therapy, the 13 patients who received pindolol improved clinically and statistically more on several standardized ratings than the 12 who received placebo.15

An 8-week, open-label trial showed beneficial effects of olanzapine, up to 20 mg/d, in patients with well-described treatment-resistant PD.16

Other well-described treatment adjustments reported to benefit nonresponsive PD include:

  • Adding fluoxetine to a TCA or adding a TCA to fluoxetine, for TCA/SSRI combination therapy17
  • Switching to the selective norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor reboxetine, 2 to 8 mg/d for 6 weeks after inadequate paroxetine or fluoxetine response (average of 8 weeks, maximum dosage 40 mg/d).18 (Note: Reboxetine is not available in the United States.)
  • Using open-label gabapentin, 600 to 2,400 mg/d, after two SSRI treatment failures.19
  • Adding the dopamine receptor agonist pramipexole, 1.0 to 1.5 mg/d, to various antipanic medications.20

Augmenting an SSRI with pindolol or supplementing unsuccessful behavioral treatment with “probably effective” dosages of paroxetine or clomipramine could be recommended with some confidence, although more definitive studies are needed. As outlined above, some strategies17-20 might be considered if a patient fails to respond to two or more adequate medication trials. Anecdotal reports are difficult to assess but may be clinically useful when other treatment options have been exhausted.

Related resources

  • Barlow DH. Anxiety and its disorders: the nature and treatment of anxiety and panic New York: Guilford Press, 1988.
  • Craske MG, DeCola JP, Sachs AD, Pontillo DC. Panic control treatment of agoraphobia. J Anxiety Disord 2003;17:321-33.
  • National Institute for Mental Health: Panic Disorder http://www.nimh.nih.gov/publicat/fearandtrauma.cfm
  • Anxiety Disorders Association of America http://www.adaa.org/
 

 

Drug brand names

  • Alprazolam • Xanax
  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Clomipramine • Anafranil
  • Clonazepam • Klonopin
  • Desipramine • Norpramin
  • Escitalopram • Lexapro
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Fluvoxamine • Luvox
  • Gabapentin • Neurontin
  • Imipramine • Tofranil
  • Olanzapine • Zyprexa
  • Phenelzine • Nardil
  • Pindolol • Visken
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Pramipexole • Mirapex
  • Reboxetine • Vestra
  • Sertraline • Zoloft
  • Tranylcypromine • Parnate
  • Venlafaxine • Effexor

Disclosure

Dr. Lydiard receives research support from GlaxoSmithKline, Eli Lilly and Co., Organon, Sanofi-Synthelabo, Cephalon, UCB Pharma, and Merck & Co. and he is a speaker for or consultant to Pfizer Inc., Eli Lilly and Co., Solvay Pharmaceuticals, AstraZeneca Pharmaceuticals, and Forest Pharmaceuticals.

References

1. Gorman JM, Kent JM, Sullivan GM, Coplan JD. Neuroanatomical hypothesis of panic disorder, revisited. Am J Psychiatry 2000;157:493-505.

2. Coplan JD, Lydiard RB. Brain circuits in panic disorder. Biol Psychiatry 1998;44:1264-76.

3. Sheehan DV. The anxiety disease. New York: Charles Scribner and Sons, 1983;151.-

4. Rapaport MH, Wolkow RM, Clary CM. Methodologies and outcomes from the sertraline multicenter flexible-dose trials. Psychopharmacol Bull 1998;34:183-9.

5. Otto MW. Psychosocial approach to treatment-resistant anxiety disorders (presentation). Chantilly, VA: Anxiety Disorders Association of America conference on novel approaches to treatment of refractory anxiety disorders, June 15-16, 2003.

6. Gorman JM, Shear MK, McIntyre JS, Zarin DA. American Psychiatric Association. Practice guideline for the treatment of patients with panic disorder. Am J Psychiatry 1998;155(May supplement).

7. Lydiard RB, Otto MW, Milrod B. Panic disorder treatment. In: Gabbard, GO (ed). Treatment of psychiatric disorders (3rd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, Inc, 2001;1447-82.

8. Simon NM, Safrens SA, Otto MW, et al. Outcome with pharmacotherapy in a naturalistic study of panic disorder. J Affect Disord 2002;69:201-8.

9. Yonkers KA, Ellison J, Shera D, et al. Description of antipanic therapy in a prospective longitudinal study. J Clin Psychopharmacol 1996;16:223-32.

10. Pollack MH, Worthington JJ, 3rd, Otto MW, et al. Venlafaxine for panic disorder: results from a double-blind, placebo-controlled study. Psychopharmacol Bull 1996;32:667-70.

11. Goddard AW, Brouette T, Almai A, et al. Early coadministration of clonazepam with sertraline for panic disorder. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2001;58:681-6.

12. Simon NM. Pharmacological approach to treatment-resistant anxiety disorders (presentation). Chantilly, VA: Anxiety Disorders Association of America conference on novel approaches to treatment of refractory anxiety disorders, June 15-16, 2003.

13. Hoffart A, Due-Madsen J, Lande B, et al. Clomipramine in the treatment of agoraphobic inpatients resistant to behavioral therapy. J Clin Psychiatry 1993;54:481-7.

14. Kampman M, Keijsers GP, Hoogduin CA, Hendriks GJ. A randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study of the effects of adjunctive paroxetine in panic disorder patients unsuccessfully treated with cognitive-behavioral therapy alone. J Clin Psychiatry 2002;63:772-7.

15. Hirschmann S, Dannon PN, Iancu I, et al. Pindolol augmentation in patients with treatment-resistant panic disorder: a double-blind, placebo-controlled trial. J Clin Psychopharmacol 2000;20:556-9.

16. Hollifield M, Thompson P, Uhlenluth E. Potential efficacy and safety of olanzapine in refractory panic disorder (presentation). San Francisco: American Psychiatric Association annual meeting, 2003.

17. Tiffon L, Coplan J, Papp L, Gorman J. Augmentation strategies with tricyclic or fluoxetine treatment in seven partially responsive panic disorder patients. J Clin Psychiatry 1994;55:66-9.

18. Dannon PN, Iancu I, Grunhaus L. The efficacy of reboxetine in treatment-refractory patients with panic disorder: an open-label study. Hum Psychopharmacol 2002;17:329-33.

19. Chiu S. Gabapentin treatment response in SSRI-refractory panic disorder (presentation) San Francisco: American Psychiatric Association annual meeting, 2003.

20. Marazziti D, Presta S, Pfanner C, et al. Pramipexole augmentation in panic with agoraphobia. Am J Psychiatry 2001;158:498-9.

References

1. Gorman JM, Kent JM, Sullivan GM, Coplan JD. Neuroanatomical hypothesis of panic disorder, revisited. Am J Psychiatry 2000;157:493-505.

2. Coplan JD, Lydiard RB. Brain circuits in panic disorder. Biol Psychiatry 1998;44:1264-76.

3. Sheehan DV. The anxiety disease. New York: Charles Scribner and Sons, 1983;151.-

4. Rapaport MH, Wolkow RM, Clary CM. Methodologies and outcomes from the sertraline multicenter flexible-dose trials. Psychopharmacol Bull 1998;34:183-9.

5. Otto MW. Psychosocial approach to treatment-resistant anxiety disorders (presentation). Chantilly, VA: Anxiety Disorders Association of America conference on novel approaches to treatment of refractory anxiety disorders, June 15-16, 2003.

6. Gorman JM, Shear MK, McIntyre JS, Zarin DA. American Psychiatric Association. Practice guideline for the treatment of patients with panic disorder. Am J Psychiatry 1998;155(May supplement).

7. Lydiard RB, Otto MW, Milrod B. Panic disorder treatment. In: Gabbard, GO (ed). Treatment of psychiatric disorders (3rd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, Inc, 2001;1447-82.

8. Simon NM, Safrens SA, Otto MW, et al. Outcome with pharmacotherapy in a naturalistic study of panic disorder. J Affect Disord 2002;69:201-8.

9. Yonkers KA, Ellison J, Shera D, et al. Description of antipanic therapy in a prospective longitudinal study. J Clin Psychopharmacol 1996;16:223-32.

10. Pollack MH, Worthington JJ, 3rd, Otto MW, et al. Venlafaxine for panic disorder: results from a double-blind, placebo-controlled study. Psychopharmacol Bull 1996;32:667-70.

11. Goddard AW, Brouette T, Almai A, et al. Early coadministration of clonazepam with sertraline for panic disorder. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2001;58:681-6.

12. Simon NM. Pharmacological approach to treatment-resistant anxiety disorders (presentation). Chantilly, VA: Anxiety Disorders Association of America conference on novel approaches to treatment of refractory anxiety disorders, June 15-16, 2003.

13. Hoffart A, Due-Madsen J, Lande B, et al. Clomipramine in the treatment of agoraphobic inpatients resistant to behavioral therapy. J Clin Psychiatry 1993;54:481-7.

14. Kampman M, Keijsers GP, Hoogduin CA, Hendriks GJ. A randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study of the effects of adjunctive paroxetine in panic disorder patients unsuccessfully treated with cognitive-behavioral therapy alone. J Clin Psychiatry 2002;63:772-7.

15. Hirschmann S, Dannon PN, Iancu I, et al. Pindolol augmentation in patients with treatment-resistant panic disorder: a double-blind, placebo-controlled trial. J Clin Psychopharmacol 2000;20:556-9.

16. Hollifield M, Thompson P, Uhlenluth E. Potential efficacy and safety of olanzapine in refractory panic disorder (presentation). San Francisco: American Psychiatric Association annual meeting, 2003.

17. Tiffon L, Coplan J, Papp L, Gorman J. Augmentation strategies with tricyclic or fluoxetine treatment in seven partially responsive panic disorder patients. J Clin Psychiatry 1994;55:66-9.

18. Dannon PN, Iancu I, Grunhaus L. The efficacy of reboxetine in treatment-refractory patients with panic disorder: an open-label study. Hum Psychopharmacol 2002;17:329-33.

19. Chiu S. Gabapentin treatment response in SSRI-refractory panic disorder (presentation) San Francisco: American Psychiatric Association annual meeting, 2003.

20. Marazziti D, Presta S, Pfanner C, et al. Pramipexole augmentation in panic with agoraphobia. Am J Psychiatry 2001;158:498-9.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(11)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(11)
Page Number
12-22
Page Number
12-22
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Break the ‘fear circuit’ in resistant panic disorder
Display Headline
Break the ‘fear circuit’ in resistant panic disorder
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

Germ warfare: Arm young patients to fight obsessive-compulsive disorder

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:11
Display Headline
Germ warfare: Arm young patients to fight obsessive-compulsive disorder

Adam, age 10, is extremely distressed at school. Because of obsessional contamination fears, he avoids contact with other children and refuses to eat in the cafeteria. He washes his hands 20 times per day and changes his clothes at least three times daily.

His primary obsessions involve contact with bodily fluids—such as saliva or feces—and excessive concerns that this contamination would cause him serious illness.

Adam’s parents say their son’s worries about dirt and germs began when he entered kindergarten. They sought treatment for him 2 years ago, and he has been receiving outpatient psychotherapy since then. They have brought him to an anxiety disorders specialty clinic for evaluation because his obsessive-compulsive symptoms are worsening,

When treating patients such as Adam, our approach is to use cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) and adjunctive drug therapies to relieve their symptoms and help them reclaim their lives. Diagnosis of pediatric OCD is often delayed, and few children receive state-of-the-art treatment.1 The good news, however, is that skillful CBT combined, as needed, with medication is highly effective.

Box 1

‘Fight OCD, not each other:’ What families need to know

Although family dysfunction does not cause OCD, families affect and are affected by OCD. Control struggles over the child’s rituals are common, as are differences of opinion about how to cope with OCD symptoms. It is important to address these issues early in treatment, as helping the family combat the disorder—rather than each other—is crucial to effective treatment.

Parents need to know that neither they nor the child are to blame. OCD is a neurobehavioral illness, and treatment is most effective when the patient, therapist, and family are aligned to combat it. Families are often entangled in the child’s OCD symptoms, and disentangling them by eliminating their role in ritualizing (such as giving excessive reassurance) is important to address in therapy.

Scaling family involvement is part of the “art” of CBT, and it will remain so until empiric studies determine the family’s role in the treatment plan.2

‘Contaminated’ mother.

Adam becomes distressed when he comes in contact with objects that have been touched by others (such as doorknobs). He is especially anxious when these items are associated with public bathrooms or sick people.

Adam’s mother is a family physician who has daily patient contact. In the last 6 months, Adam has insisted that his mother change her work clothes before she enters his room, touches him, prepares his food, or handles his possessions.

As in Adam’s case, the family often gets caught up in a child or adolescent’s obsessive rituals (Box 1).2 After a detailed discussion with Adam and his parents and because his symptoms were severe, we recommended combined treatment with sertraline and CBT. Adam was willing to consider CBT and medication because he recognized that he was having increasing difficulty doing the things he wanted to do in school and at home.

SNAPSHOT OF PEDIATRIC OCD

Approximately 1 in 200 children and adolescents suffer from clinically significant OCD.3 They experience intrusive thoughts, urges, or images to which they respond with dysphoria-reducing behaviors or rituals.

Common obsessions include:

  • fear of dirt or germs
  • fear of harm to oneself or someone else
  • or a persistent need to complete something “just so.”

Corresponding compulsions include hand washing, checking, and repeating or arranging.

OCD appears more common in boys than in girls. Onset occurs in two modes: first at age 9 for boys and age 12 for girls, followed by a second mode in late adolescence or early adulthood.

Two practice guidelines address OCD in youth: an independent expert consensus guideline4 and the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry’s practice parameters for OCD.5

For uncomplicated OCD, these guidelines recommend CBT as first-line treatment. If symptoms do not respond after six to eight sessions, a selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SSRI) is added to CBT.

For complicated OCD, medication is considered an appropriate initial treatment. Complicated OCD includes patients who:

  • display severe symptoms—such as with scores >30 on the Children’s Yale-Brown Obsessive Compulsive Scale (CY-BOCS)
  • or have comorbidity such as depression or panic disorder that is likely to complicate treatment.

KEYS TO SUCCESSFUL TREATMENT

OCD is remarkably resistant to insight-oriented psychotherapy and other nondirective therapies. The benefits of CBT, however, are well-established, with reported response rates of >80% in pilot studies.6,7 Although confirming studies have yet to be conducted, successful CBT for pediatric OCD appears to include four elements (Table 1).

Exposure and response prevention (EX/RP) is central to psychosocial treatment of OCD.7,8 In specialized centers, exposure can be applied intensively (three to five times per week for 3 to 4 weeks).9 In most practices, however, exposure is more gradual (weekly for 12 to 20 weeks). With repeated exposure, the child’s anxiety decreases until he or she no longer fears contact with the targeted stimuli.8,10

 

 

Not ‘misbehavior.’ Children—and less commonly adolescents—with this disorder may not view their obsessions as senseless or their compulsions as excessive. Even when insight is clearly present, young OCD patients often hide their symptoms because of embarrassment or fear of being punished for their behavior.

Response predictors. A key to CBT in children or adolescents is that they come to see obsessions and compulsions as symptoms of an illness. The symptoms, therefore, require a skillfully applied “antidote,” as taught by the clinician and implemented by the child, family, and others on the child’s behalf. Besides overt rituals, three response predictors include the patient’s:

  • desire to eliminate symptoms
  • ability to monitor and report symptoms
  • willingness to cooperate with treatment.

Table 1

Pediatric OCD: 4 keys to successful cognitive therapy

Treat OCD as a neurobehavioral disorder, not a misbehavior
Help the child develop a “tool kit” to manage dysphoria and faulty thinking
Expose the patient to anxiety-producing stimuli until he or she becomes desensitized and can refrain from the usual compulsive responses (exposure and response prevention)
Educate family members and school personnel

CBT may be difficult with patients younger than age 6 and will invariably involve training the parents to serve as “coaches;” a CBT protocol for patients ages 4 to 6 is under investigation (H. Leonard, personal communication). CBT also can be adapted for patients with intellectual deficits.11

A ‘tool kit.’ Successful exposure therapy for OCD relies on equipping children and adolescents with the knowledge and skills to battle the illness. They often have tried unsuccessfully to resist OCD’s compulsions and must be convinced that EX/RP techniques will work. Using a “tool kit” concept reminds young patients that they have the implements they need to combat OCD (Table 2).

A ‘germ ladder’ and ‘fear thermometer.’

Adam’s tools include a stimulus hierarchy called a “germ ladder,” which the therapist and Adam create collaboratively. It ranks stimuli from low (his own doorknob) to very high (public toilets, sinks, and door handles).

As part of his treatment, Adam begins to touch objects in his room and house while voluntarily refraining from ritualizing. He uses another tool—a fear thermometer—to record his distress level on a scale of 1 to 10 during and after these exposures.

Adam discovers that when he comes into contact with less-threatening items his fear ratings typically return to baseline within 20 to 30 minutes. This insight helps him modify his assessment of the risk they pose.

Table 2

OCD ‘tool box’ can help patients build new behaviors

ToolFunction
Training in exposure response prevention (EX/RP) therapyHelps patients learn to confront rather than avoid feared stimuli
‘Fear thermometer’Enables patients to express the intensity of their distress on a scale of 1 (lowest) to 10 (highest)
Positive self-statementsTeaches patients to use statements such as “I can do this” and “I’m the boss of OCD now” to build confidence that they can control their response to feared stimuli

During office visits, he confronts similar items around the clinic, with the therapist providing encouragement and instruction for additional exposure homework. Eventually Adam works on the clinic’s public bathroom, which he perceived to be relatively clean but less so than his own bathroom. After fear in response to this bathroom is reduced, the therapist and Adam graduate to more-public facilities, such as the bathrooms at Adam’s pool and the local train station.

Exposure therapy. EX/RP is most successful when the child—rather than the therapist—chooses exposure targets from a hierarchy of fears,2 particularly when the list includes behaviors the child is resisting. In a collaborative spirit, the child takes the lead in placing items on the hierarchy and deciding when to confront them.

The therapist and child revise the hierarchy periodically, which demonstrates progress and allows them to add items as the child overcomes fears that cause less distress.

Reducing need for reassurance.

Adam has a habit of repeatedly asking his mother whether contact with particular objects in public is risky. By the third treatment session, he and the therapist agree that he will try to refrain from asking such questions.

His mother, in turn, is asked to reiterate the rationale for response prevention whenever Adam slips. She will offer encouragement and support without answering “OCD’s questions.”

ADJUNCTIVE DRUG THERAPY

While Adam is working with the behavioral therapist to reduce his anxieties and need for reassurance, he is also receiving gradually increasing dosages of sertraline. As discussed, he is considered a candidate for CBT plus medication because of his symptoms are severe. Drug treatment can benefit most pediatric OCD patients.

SSRIs. Two SSRIs are approved for pediatric OCD—fluvoxamine for ages 8 to 18 and sertraline for ages 6 to 18. Most SSRIs are likely effective for OCD in youth (Table 3),12-14 although reports have suggested a link between paroxetine and suicidality in pediatric patients. Other options may be more suitable choices unless further evidence supports the use of paroxetine as a first- or second-line agent for pediatric OCD.

 

 

Clomipramine—a nonselective tricyclic—was the first medication studied in treating OCD in children and adolescents. It is now usually considered only after two or three failed SSRI trials because of its potential for cardiac toxicity.15-17

Table 3

Suggested dosages (mg/d) for drug therapy of pediatric OCD

DrugUsual starting dosageApproximate mean dosage*Typical rangeUsual maximum dosage
Citalopram204020 to 6080
Clomipramine50150200300
Escitalopram51010 to 2030
Fluoxetine204040 to 6080
Fluvoxamine50175150 to 250300
Sertraline50125150225
*Mean dosage derived from registration trials, expert recommendation, and the authors’ clinical experience

Dosing. Fixed-dose studies suggest that dosing schedules for OCD are similar to those used for depression. For example, sertraline, 50 mg/d, or fluoxetine, 20 mg/d, are as effective as higher dosages.18

The common misconception that OCD requires higher dosages likely results from:

  • increasing the dosage too early in the time-response window for a drug effect to emerge
  • giving medication without concomitant exposure therapy.19

Delayed response. Although many patients respond early to an SSRI, others do not respond until 8 or even 12 weeks of treatment at therapeutic dosages. It often takes 3 to 4 weeks for evidence of benefit to emerge, so wait at least 3 weeks between dosage increases. Maintain therapeutic dosages at least 6 to 8 weeks before changing agents or beginning augmentation therapy.

Two-barrel approach.

In treating Adam, we began with sertraline, using a flexible titration schedule keyed to whether he experienced OCD symptom remission.

The starting dosage of 50 mg was titrated to 150 mg over 8 weeks while he was receiving behavioral therapy. We made adjustments with a time-response window of 2 to 3 weeks, allowing us to observe a response to each dosage escalation.

Adam’s OCD symptoms responded well to CBT plus sertraline. The maximum drug effect helped him confront the most difficult EX/RP tasks at the top of his stimulus hierarchy, which he attacked near the end of treatment.

Lessons learned. Multicenter trials have taught important lessons about drug therapy for OCD:

  • OCD patients experience little or no placebo effect, unlike patients with depression.
  • Clinical effects may appear as early as 2 to 3 weeks after medications are started and plateau at 10 to 12 weeks.
  • Partial response is the rule; SSRIs reduce OCD symptoms by about 30%—which correlates with “moderately” to “markedly” improved ratings on patient satisfaction measures.
  • Side effects and magnitude of improvement are comparable in pediatric and adult medication trials.

Box 2

Acute-onset OCD may be bacterial

In some children, OCD or tic symptoms arise from or are exacerbated by group A beta hemolytic streptococcal infection (GABHS), which has been labeled pediatric autoimmune neuropsychiatric disorders associated with Streptococcus (PANDAS).21 Obsessive-compulsive symptoms are not uncommon in pediatric patients with Sydenham’s chorea, a neurologic variant of rheumatic fever. OCD is far more common in patients with rheumatic fever when chorea is present.

Acute-onset or dramatic exacerbation of OCD or tic symptoms should prompt investigation of GABHS infection. Immunomodulatory treatments—including antibiotics, plasmapheresis, or IV immunoglobulin G—may benefit some patients.22

MANAGING RESISTANT OCD

Adequate SSRI monotherapy trials fail to relieve OCD symptoms in one-third of patients. Some patients benefit from combination therapy—such as an SSRI plus risperidone—especially when comorbid schizotypal personality disorder or a tic-spectrum disorder is present.

Drug switching or augmentation trials often produce only partial response and cause unnecessary suffering. A more effective strategy for many patients is to augment drug treatment with CBT until symptoms normalize.

On the other hand, augmentation is appropriate when nonresponse or partial response to SSRI monotherapy leaves a patient clinically symptomatic and functionally impaired. Clonazepam, clomipramine, and the amino acid L-tryptophan have been used successfully. Lithium and buspirone also have been tried but seem not to be effective in controlled studies in adults and anecdotal experience in youth.

When augmenting an SSRI, adding clomipramine, 25 to 50 mg/d, is a reasonable choice. However, fluoxetine or paroxetine can inhibit clomipramine metabolism by cytochrome P-450 (CYP) 2D6, with potential for cardiac arrhythmias or seizures. Sertraline or fluvoxamine are less likely to elevate clomipramine levels.20 Fluvoxamine may be the most compatible SSRI with clomipramine because it inhibits CYP 1A2—the enzyme that demethylates clomipramine to its inactive desmethyl metabolite—thereby preserving more of the active parent compound.

Clinical evidence suggests that augmentation’s success may depend in part on a patient’s comorbidities. For example, clonazepam may be particularly helpful for children with comorbid panic symptoms.

MAINTENANCE THERAPY

We typically provide 14 weekly CBT sessions, followed by monthly contacts for a few months to ensure than a patient’s gains are maintained. Standard procedure with drug therapy is to continue maintenance treatment for up to 1 year, although some have suggested continuing maintenance treatment indefinitely.

 

 

Related resources

  • Chansky TE. Freeing your child from obsessive compulsive disorder: A powerful, practical program for parents of children and adolescents. New York: Crown Publishing Group, 2001.
  • March JS, Mulle K. OCD in children and adolescents: A cognitive behavioral treatment manual. New York: Guilford Press, 1998.
  • Moritz EK, Jablonsky J. Blink, blink, clop, clop: Why do we do things we can’t stop? An OCD storybook. Newton, MA: Professional Books, Inc, 1998.
  • Wagner AP. Up and down the worry hill: A children’s book about obsessive compulsive disorder and its treatment. Rochester, NY: Lighthouse Press, Inc. 2000.

Drug brand names

  • Buspirone • BuSpar
  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Clomipramine • Anafranil
  • Clonazepam • Klonopin
  • Escitalopram • Lexapro
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Fluvoxamine • Luvox
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Risperidone • Risperdal
  • Sertaline • Zoloft

Disclosure

Dr. March receives research support from Pfizer Inc., Eli Lilly and Co., and Wyeth Pharmaceuticals and is a speaker for and/or consultant to Solvay Pharmaceuticals, Pfizer Inc., GlaxoSmithKline, Wyeth Pharmaceuticals, Novartis Pharmaceuticals Corp., and Shire Pharmaceuticals Group.

Dr. Franklin and Dr. Foa report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Acknowledgment

Preparation of this manuscript was supported in part by National Institute of Mental Health grants 1 K24 MHO1557 and 1 R10 MH55121 to Dr. March and by contributions from the Robert and Sarah Gorrell family and the Lupin Family Foundation.

References

1. Kendall PC, Southam-Gerow MA. Issues in the transportability of treatment: the case of anxiety disorders in youths. J Consult Clin Psychol 1995;63(5):702-8.

2. March J, Mulle K. OCD in children and adolescents: A cognitive-behavioral treatment manual. New York: Guilford Press, 1998.

3. Flament MF, Whitaker A, Rapoport JL, et al. Obsessive compulsive disorder in adolescence: an epidemiological study. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1988;27(6):764-71.

4. March J, Frances A, Kahn D, Carpenter D. Expert consensus guidelines: treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder. J Clin Psychiatry 1997;58(suppl 4):1-72.

5. King R, Leonard H, March J. Practice parameters for the assessment and treatment of children and adolescents with obsessive-compulsive disorder. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1998;37(10, suppl):27-45.

6. March JS. Cognitive-behavioral psychotherapy for children and adolescents with OCD: a review and recommendations for treatment. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34(1):7-18.

7. Franklin ME, Kozak MJ, Cashman LA, et al. Cognitive-behavioral treatment of pediatric obsessive-compulsive disorder: an open clinical trial. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1998;37(4):412-19.

8. March JS, Mulle K, Herbel B. Behavioral psychotherapy for children and adolescents with obsessive-compulsive disorder: an open trial of a new protocol-driven treatment package. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1994;33(3):333-41.

9. Franklin ME, Tolin DF, March JS, Foa EB. Treatment of pediatric obsessive-compulsive disorder: A case example of intensive cognitive-behavioral therapy involving exposure and ritual prevention. Cognit Behav Pract 2001;8(4):297-304.

10. March J, Mulle K. Manualized cognitive-behavioral psychotherapy for obsessive-compulsive disorder in childhood: a preliminary single case study. J Anxiety Disord 1995;9(2):175-84.

11. Franklin ME, Rynn M, March JS, Foa EB. Obsessive-compulsive disorder. In: Hersen M (ed). Clinical behavior therapy: adults and children. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 2002;276-303.

12. March JS, Biederman J, Wolkow R, et al. Sertraline in children and adolescents with obsessive-compulsive disorder: a multicenter randomized controlled trial. JAMA 1998;280(20):1752-6.

13. Riddle MA, Reeve EA, Yaryura-Tobias JA, et al. Fluvoxamine for children and adolescents with obsessive-compulsive disorder: a randomized, controlled, multicenter trial. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2001;40(2):222-9.

14. Geller DA, Hoog SL, Heiligenstein JH, et al. Fluoxetine treatment for obsessive-compulsive disorder in children and adolescents: a placebo-controlled clinical trial. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2001;40(7):773-9.

15. Leonard H, March J, Rickler K, Allen A. Pharmacology of the selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors in children and adolescents. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1997;36(6):725-36.

16. DeVeaugh-Geiss J, Moroz G, Biederman J, et al. Clomipramine hydrochloride in childhood and adolescent obsessive-compulsive disorder—a multicenter trial. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1992;31(1):45-9.

17. Wilens TE, Biederman J, March JS, et al. Absence of cardiovascular adverse effects of sertraline in children and adolescents. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1999;38(5):573-7.

18. Greist JH, Jefferson JW, Kobak KA, et al. A 1-year double-blind placebo-controlled fixed dose study of sertraline in the treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder. Int Clin Psychopharmacol 1995;10(2):57-65.

19. Marks IM. Drug versus behavioral treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder. Biolog Psychiatry 1990;28(12):1072-3.

20. Leonard HL, March J, Rickler KC, Allen AJ. Pharmacology of the selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors in children and adolescents. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1997;36(6):725-36.

21. Leonard HL, Swedo SE. Paediatric autoimmune neuropsychiatric disorders associated with streptococcal infection (PANDAS). Int J Neuropsychopharmacol 2001;4(2):191-8.

22. Perlmutter SJ, Leitman SF, Garvey MA, et al. Therapeutic plasma exchange and intravenous immunoglobulin for obsessive-compulsive disorder and tic disorders in childhood. Lancet 1999;354 (9185):1153-8.

Author and Disclosure Information

John S. March, MD, MPH
Professor and chief, child and adolescent psychiatry Department of psychiatry and behavioral sciences Program in child and adolescent anxiety disorders Duke University Medical Center, Durham, NC

Martin E. Franklin, PhD
Assistant professor of psychiatry Center for the Treatment and Study of Anxiety Department of psychiatry University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine Philadelphia

Edna B. Foa, PhD
Professor of psychiatry Center for the Treatment and Study of Anxiety Department of psychiatry University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine Philadelphia

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(11)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
24-36
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

John S. March, MD, MPH
Professor and chief, child and adolescent psychiatry Department of psychiatry and behavioral sciences Program in child and adolescent anxiety disorders Duke University Medical Center, Durham, NC

Martin E. Franklin, PhD
Assistant professor of psychiatry Center for the Treatment and Study of Anxiety Department of psychiatry University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine Philadelphia

Edna B. Foa, PhD
Professor of psychiatry Center for the Treatment and Study of Anxiety Department of psychiatry University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine Philadelphia

Author and Disclosure Information

John S. March, MD, MPH
Professor and chief, child and adolescent psychiatry Department of psychiatry and behavioral sciences Program in child and adolescent anxiety disorders Duke University Medical Center, Durham, NC

Martin E. Franklin, PhD
Assistant professor of psychiatry Center for the Treatment and Study of Anxiety Department of psychiatry University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine Philadelphia

Edna B. Foa, PhD
Professor of psychiatry Center for the Treatment and Study of Anxiety Department of psychiatry University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine Philadelphia

Adam, age 10, is extremely distressed at school. Because of obsessional contamination fears, he avoids contact with other children and refuses to eat in the cafeteria. He washes his hands 20 times per day and changes his clothes at least three times daily.

His primary obsessions involve contact with bodily fluids—such as saliva or feces—and excessive concerns that this contamination would cause him serious illness.

Adam’s parents say their son’s worries about dirt and germs began when he entered kindergarten. They sought treatment for him 2 years ago, and he has been receiving outpatient psychotherapy since then. They have brought him to an anxiety disorders specialty clinic for evaluation because his obsessive-compulsive symptoms are worsening,

When treating patients such as Adam, our approach is to use cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) and adjunctive drug therapies to relieve their symptoms and help them reclaim their lives. Diagnosis of pediatric OCD is often delayed, and few children receive state-of-the-art treatment.1 The good news, however, is that skillful CBT combined, as needed, with medication is highly effective.

Box 1

‘Fight OCD, not each other:’ What families need to know

Although family dysfunction does not cause OCD, families affect and are affected by OCD. Control struggles over the child’s rituals are common, as are differences of opinion about how to cope with OCD symptoms. It is important to address these issues early in treatment, as helping the family combat the disorder—rather than each other—is crucial to effective treatment.

Parents need to know that neither they nor the child are to blame. OCD is a neurobehavioral illness, and treatment is most effective when the patient, therapist, and family are aligned to combat it. Families are often entangled in the child’s OCD symptoms, and disentangling them by eliminating their role in ritualizing (such as giving excessive reassurance) is important to address in therapy.

Scaling family involvement is part of the “art” of CBT, and it will remain so until empiric studies determine the family’s role in the treatment plan.2

‘Contaminated’ mother.

Adam becomes distressed when he comes in contact with objects that have been touched by others (such as doorknobs). He is especially anxious when these items are associated with public bathrooms or sick people.

Adam’s mother is a family physician who has daily patient contact. In the last 6 months, Adam has insisted that his mother change her work clothes before she enters his room, touches him, prepares his food, or handles his possessions.

As in Adam’s case, the family often gets caught up in a child or adolescent’s obsessive rituals (Box 1).2 After a detailed discussion with Adam and his parents and because his symptoms were severe, we recommended combined treatment with sertraline and CBT. Adam was willing to consider CBT and medication because he recognized that he was having increasing difficulty doing the things he wanted to do in school and at home.

SNAPSHOT OF PEDIATRIC OCD

Approximately 1 in 200 children and adolescents suffer from clinically significant OCD.3 They experience intrusive thoughts, urges, or images to which they respond with dysphoria-reducing behaviors or rituals.

Common obsessions include:

  • fear of dirt or germs
  • fear of harm to oneself or someone else
  • or a persistent need to complete something “just so.”

Corresponding compulsions include hand washing, checking, and repeating or arranging.

OCD appears more common in boys than in girls. Onset occurs in two modes: first at age 9 for boys and age 12 for girls, followed by a second mode in late adolescence or early adulthood.

Two practice guidelines address OCD in youth: an independent expert consensus guideline4 and the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry’s practice parameters for OCD.5

For uncomplicated OCD, these guidelines recommend CBT as first-line treatment. If symptoms do not respond after six to eight sessions, a selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SSRI) is added to CBT.

For complicated OCD, medication is considered an appropriate initial treatment. Complicated OCD includes patients who:

  • display severe symptoms—such as with scores >30 on the Children’s Yale-Brown Obsessive Compulsive Scale (CY-BOCS)
  • or have comorbidity such as depression or panic disorder that is likely to complicate treatment.

KEYS TO SUCCESSFUL TREATMENT

OCD is remarkably resistant to insight-oriented psychotherapy and other nondirective therapies. The benefits of CBT, however, are well-established, with reported response rates of >80% in pilot studies.6,7 Although confirming studies have yet to be conducted, successful CBT for pediatric OCD appears to include four elements (Table 1).

Exposure and response prevention (EX/RP) is central to psychosocial treatment of OCD.7,8 In specialized centers, exposure can be applied intensively (three to five times per week for 3 to 4 weeks).9 In most practices, however, exposure is more gradual (weekly for 12 to 20 weeks). With repeated exposure, the child’s anxiety decreases until he or she no longer fears contact with the targeted stimuli.8,10

 

 

Not ‘misbehavior.’ Children—and less commonly adolescents—with this disorder may not view their obsessions as senseless or their compulsions as excessive. Even when insight is clearly present, young OCD patients often hide their symptoms because of embarrassment or fear of being punished for their behavior.

Response predictors. A key to CBT in children or adolescents is that they come to see obsessions and compulsions as symptoms of an illness. The symptoms, therefore, require a skillfully applied “antidote,” as taught by the clinician and implemented by the child, family, and others on the child’s behalf. Besides overt rituals, three response predictors include the patient’s:

  • desire to eliminate symptoms
  • ability to monitor and report symptoms
  • willingness to cooperate with treatment.

Table 1

Pediatric OCD: 4 keys to successful cognitive therapy

Treat OCD as a neurobehavioral disorder, not a misbehavior
Help the child develop a “tool kit” to manage dysphoria and faulty thinking
Expose the patient to anxiety-producing stimuli until he or she becomes desensitized and can refrain from the usual compulsive responses (exposure and response prevention)
Educate family members and school personnel

CBT may be difficult with patients younger than age 6 and will invariably involve training the parents to serve as “coaches;” a CBT protocol for patients ages 4 to 6 is under investigation (H. Leonard, personal communication). CBT also can be adapted for patients with intellectual deficits.11

A ‘tool kit.’ Successful exposure therapy for OCD relies on equipping children and adolescents with the knowledge and skills to battle the illness. They often have tried unsuccessfully to resist OCD’s compulsions and must be convinced that EX/RP techniques will work. Using a “tool kit” concept reminds young patients that they have the implements they need to combat OCD (Table 2).

A ‘germ ladder’ and ‘fear thermometer.’

Adam’s tools include a stimulus hierarchy called a “germ ladder,” which the therapist and Adam create collaboratively. It ranks stimuli from low (his own doorknob) to very high (public toilets, sinks, and door handles).

As part of his treatment, Adam begins to touch objects in his room and house while voluntarily refraining from ritualizing. He uses another tool—a fear thermometer—to record his distress level on a scale of 1 to 10 during and after these exposures.

Adam discovers that when he comes into contact with less-threatening items his fear ratings typically return to baseline within 20 to 30 minutes. This insight helps him modify his assessment of the risk they pose.

Table 2

OCD ‘tool box’ can help patients build new behaviors

ToolFunction
Training in exposure response prevention (EX/RP) therapyHelps patients learn to confront rather than avoid feared stimuli
‘Fear thermometer’Enables patients to express the intensity of their distress on a scale of 1 (lowest) to 10 (highest)
Positive self-statementsTeaches patients to use statements such as “I can do this” and “I’m the boss of OCD now” to build confidence that they can control their response to feared stimuli

During office visits, he confronts similar items around the clinic, with the therapist providing encouragement and instruction for additional exposure homework. Eventually Adam works on the clinic’s public bathroom, which he perceived to be relatively clean but less so than his own bathroom. After fear in response to this bathroom is reduced, the therapist and Adam graduate to more-public facilities, such as the bathrooms at Adam’s pool and the local train station.

Exposure therapy. EX/RP is most successful when the child—rather than the therapist—chooses exposure targets from a hierarchy of fears,2 particularly when the list includes behaviors the child is resisting. In a collaborative spirit, the child takes the lead in placing items on the hierarchy and deciding when to confront them.

The therapist and child revise the hierarchy periodically, which demonstrates progress and allows them to add items as the child overcomes fears that cause less distress.

Reducing need for reassurance.

Adam has a habit of repeatedly asking his mother whether contact with particular objects in public is risky. By the third treatment session, he and the therapist agree that he will try to refrain from asking such questions.

His mother, in turn, is asked to reiterate the rationale for response prevention whenever Adam slips. She will offer encouragement and support without answering “OCD’s questions.”

ADJUNCTIVE DRUG THERAPY

While Adam is working with the behavioral therapist to reduce his anxieties and need for reassurance, he is also receiving gradually increasing dosages of sertraline. As discussed, he is considered a candidate for CBT plus medication because of his symptoms are severe. Drug treatment can benefit most pediatric OCD patients.

SSRIs. Two SSRIs are approved for pediatric OCD—fluvoxamine for ages 8 to 18 and sertraline for ages 6 to 18. Most SSRIs are likely effective for OCD in youth (Table 3),12-14 although reports have suggested a link between paroxetine and suicidality in pediatric patients. Other options may be more suitable choices unless further evidence supports the use of paroxetine as a first- or second-line agent for pediatric OCD.

 

 

Clomipramine—a nonselective tricyclic—was the first medication studied in treating OCD in children and adolescents. It is now usually considered only after two or three failed SSRI trials because of its potential for cardiac toxicity.15-17

Table 3

Suggested dosages (mg/d) for drug therapy of pediatric OCD

DrugUsual starting dosageApproximate mean dosage*Typical rangeUsual maximum dosage
Citalopram204020 to 6080
Clomipramine50150200300
Escitalopram51010 to 2030
Fluoxetine204040 to 6080
Fluvoxamine50175150 to 250300
Sertraline50125150225
*Mean dosage derived from registration trials, expert recommendation, and the authors’ clinical experience

Dosing. Fixed-dose studies suggest that dosing schedules for OCD are similar to those used for depression. For example, sertraline, 50 mg/d, or fluoxetine, 20 mg/d, are as effective as higher dosages.18

The common misconception that OCD requires higher dosages likely results from:

  • increasing the dosage too early in the time-response window for a drug effect to emerge
  • giving medication without concomitant exposure therapy.19

Delayed response. Although many patients respond early to an SSRI, others do not respond until 8 or even 12 weeks of treatment at therapeutic dosages. It often takes 3 to 4 weeks for evidence of benefit to emerge, so wait at least 3 weeks between dosage increases. Maintain therapeutic dosages at least 6 to 8 weeks before changing agents or beginning augmentation therapy.

Two-barrel approach.

In treating Adam, we began with sertraline, using a flexible titration schedule keyed to whether he experienced OCD symptom remission.

The starting dosage of 50 mg was titrated to 150 mg over 8 weeks while he was receiving behavioral therapy. We made adjustments with a time-response window of 2 to 3 weeks, allowing us to observe a response to each dosage escalation.

Adam’s OCD symptoms responded well to CBT plus sertraline. The maximum drug effect helped him confront the most difficult EX/RP tasks at the top of his stimulus hierarchy, which he attacked near the end of treatment.

Lessons learned. Multicenter trials have taught important lessons about drug therapy for OCD:

  • OCD patients experience little or no placebo effect, unlike patients with depression.
  • Clinical effects may appear as early as 2 to 3 weeks after medications are started and plateau at 10 to 12 weeks.
  • Partial response is the rule; SSRIs reduce OCD symptoms by about 30%—which correlates with “moderately” to “markedly” improved ratings on patient satisfaction measures.
  • Side effects and magnitude of improvement are comparable in pediatric and adult medication trials.

Box 2

Acute-onset OCD may be bacterial

In some children, OCD or tic symptoms arise from or are exacerbated by group A beta hemolytic streptococcal infection (GABHS), which has been labeled pediatric autoimmune neuropsychiatric disorders associated with Streptococcus (PANDAS).21 Obsessive-compulsive symptoms are not uncommon in pediatric patients with Sydenham’s chorea, a neurologic variant of rheumatic fever. OCD is far more common in patients with rheumatic fever when chorea is present.

Acute-onset or dramatic exacerbation of OCD or tic symptoms should prompt investigation of GABHS infection. Immunomodulatory treatments—including antibiotics, plasmapheresis, or IV immunoglobulin G—may benefit some patients.22

MANAGING RESISTANT OCD

Adequate SSRI monotherapy trials fail to relieve OCD symptoms in one-third of patients. Some patients benefit from combination therapy—such as an SSRI plus risperidone—especially when comorbid schizotypal personality disorder or a tic-spectrum disorder is present.

Drug switching or augmentation trials often produce only partial response and cause unnecessary suffering. A more effective strategy for many patients is to augment drug treatment with CBT until symptoms normalize.

On the other hand, augmentation is appropriate when nonresponse or partial response to SSRI monotherapy leaves a patient clinically symptomatic and functionally impaired. Clonazepam, clomipramine, and the amino acid L-tryptophan have been used successfully. Lithium and buspirone also have been tried but seem not to be effective in controlled studies in adults and anecdotal experience in youth.

When augmenting an SSRI, adding clomipramine, 25 to 50 mg/d, is a reasonable choice. However, fluoxetine or paroxetine can inhibit clomipramine metabolism by cytochrome P-450 (CYP) 2D6, with potential for cardiac arrhythmias or seizures. Sertraline or fluvoxamine are less likely to elevate clomipramine levels.20 Fluvoxamine may be the most compatible SSRI with clomipramine because it inhibits CYP 1A2—the enzyme that demethylates clomipramine to its inactive desmethyl metabolite—thereby preserving more of the active parent compound.

Clinical evidence suggests that augmentation’s success may depend in part on a patient’s comorbidities. For example, clonazepam may be particularly helpful for children with comorbid panic symptoms.

MAINTENANCE THERAPY

We typically provide 14 weekly CBT sessions, followed by monthly contacts for a few months to ensure than a patient’s gains are maintained. Standard procedure with drug therapy is to continue maintenance treatment for up to 1 year, although some have suggested continuing maintenance treatment indefinitely.

 

 

Related resources

  • Chansky TE. Freeing your child from obsessive compulsive disorder: A powerful, practical program for parents of children and adolescents. New York: Crown Publishing Group, 2001.
  • March JS, Mulle K. OCD in children and adolescents: A cognitive behavioral treatment manual. New York: Guilford Press, 1998.
  • Moritz EK, Jablonsky J. Blink, blink, clop, clop: Why do we do things we can’t stop? An OCD storybook. Newton, MA: Professional Books, Inc, 1998.
  • Wagner AP. Up and down the worry hill: A children’s book about obsessive compulsive disorder and its treatment. Rochester, NY: Lighthouse Press, Inc. 2000.

Drug brand names

  • Buspirone • BuSpar
  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Clomipramine • Anafranil
  • Clonazepam • Klonopin
  • Escitalopram • Lexapro
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Fluvoxamine • Luvox
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Risperidone • Risperdal
  • Sertaline • Zoloft

Disclosure

Dr. March receives research support from Pfizer Inc., Eli Lilly and Co., and Wyeth Pharmaceuticals and is a speaker for and/or consultant to Solvay Pharmaceuticals, Pfizer Inc., GlaxoSmithKline, Wyeth Pharmaceuticals, Novartis Pharmaceuticals Corp., and Shire Pharmaceuticals Group.

Dr. Franklin and Dr. Foa report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Acknowledgment

Preparation of this manuscript was supported in part by National Institute of Mental Health grants 1 K24 MHO1557 and 1 R10 MH55121 to Dr. March and by contributions from the Robert and Sarah Gorrell family and the Lupin Family Foundation.

Adam, age 10, is extremely distressed at school. Because of obsessional contamination fears, he avoids contact with other children and refuses to eat in the cafeteria. He washes his hands 20 times per day and changes his clothes at least three times daily.

His primary obsessions involve contact with bodily fluids—such as saliva or feces—and excessive concerns that this contamination would cause him serious illness.

Adam’s parents say their son’s worries about dirt and germs began when he entered kindergarten. They sought treatment for him 2 years ago, and he has been receiving outpatient psychotherapy since then. They have brought him to an anxiety disorders specialty clinic for evaluation because his obsessive-compulsive symptoms are worsening,

When treating patients such as Adam, our approach is to use cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) and adjunctive drug therapies to relieve their symptoms and help them reclaim their lives. Diagnosis of pediatric OCD is often delayed, and few children receive state-of-the-art treatment.1 The good news, however, is that skillful CBT combined, as needed, with medication is highly effective.

Box 1

‘Fight OCD, not each other:’ What families need to know

Although family dysfunction does not cause OCD, families affect and are affected by OCD. Control struggles over the child’s rituals are common, as are differences of opinion about how to cope with OCD symptoms. It is important to address these issues early in treatment, as helping the family combat the disorder—rather than each other—is crucial to effective treatment.

Parents need to know that neither they nor the child are to blame. OCD is a neurobehavioral illness, and treatment is most effective when the patient, therapist, and family are aligned to combat it. Families are often entangled in the child’s OCD symptoms, and disentangling them by eliminating their role in ritualizing (such as giving excessive reassurance) is important to address in therapy.

Scaling family involvement is part of the “art” of CBT, and it will remain so until empiric studies determine the family’s role in the treatment plan.2

‘Contaminated’ mother.

Adam becomes distressed when he comes in contact with objects that have been touched by others (such as doorknobs). He is especially anxious when these items are associated with public bathrooms or sick people.

Adam’s mother is a family physician who has daily patient contact. In the last 6 months, Adam has insisted that his mother change her work clothes before she enters his room, touches him, prepares his food, or handles his possessions.

As in Adam’s case, the family often gets caught up in a child or adolescent’s obsessive rituals (Box 1).2 After a detailed discussion with Adam and his parents and because his symptoms were severe, we recommended combined treatment with sertraline and CBT. Adam was willing to consider CBT and medication because he recognized that he was having increasing difficulty doing the things he wanted to do in school and at home.

SNAPSHOT OF PEDIATRIC OCD

Approximately 1 in 200 children and adolescents suffer from clinically significant OCD.3 They experience intrusive thoughts, urges, or images to which they respond with dysphoria-reducing behaviors or rituals.

Common obsessions include:

  • fear of dirt or germs
  • fear of harm to oneself or someone else
  • or a persistent need to complete something “just so.”

Corresponding compulsions include hand washing, checking, and repeating or arranging.

OCD appears more common in boys than in girls. Onset occurs in two modes: first at age 9 for boys and age 12 for girls, followed by a second mode in late adolescence or early adulthood.

Two practice guidelines address OCD in youth: an independent expert consensus guideline4 and the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry’s practice parameters for OCD.5

For uncomplicated OCD, these guidelines recommend CBT as first-line treatment. If symptoms do not respond after six to eight sessions, a selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SSRI) is added to CBT.

For complicated OCD, medication is considered an appropriate initial treatment. Complicated OCD includes patients who:

  • display severe symptoms—such as with scores >30 on the Children’s Yale-Brown Obsessive Compulsive Scale (CY-BOCS)
  • or have comorbidity such as depression or panic disorder that is likely to complicate treatment.

KEYS TO SUCCESSFUL TREATMENT

OCD is remarkably resistant to insight-oriented psychotherapy and other nondirective therapies. The benefits of CBT, however, are well-established, with reported response rates of >80% in pilot studies.6,7 Although confirming studies have yet to be conducted, successful CBT for pediatric OCD appears to include four elements (Table 1).

Exposure and response prevention (EX/RP) is central to psychosocial treatment of OCD.7,8 In specialized centers, exposure can be applied intensively (three to five times per week for 3 to 4 weeks).9 In most practices, however, exposure is more gradual (weekly for 12 to 20 weeks). With repeated exposure, the child’s anxiety decreases until he or she no longer fears contact with the targeted stimuli.8,10

 

 

Not ‘misbehavior.’ Children—and less commonly adolescents—with this disorder may not view their obsessions as senseless or their compulsions as excessive. Even when insight is clearly present, young OCD patients often hide their symptoms because of embarrassment or fear of being punished for their behavior.

Response predictors. A key to CBT in children or adolescents is that they come to see obsessions and compulsions as symptoms of an illness. The symptoms, therefore, require a skillfully applied “antidote,” as taught by the clinician and implemented by the child, family, and others on the child’s behalf. Besides overt rituals, three response predictors include the patient’s:

  • desire to eliminate symptoms
  • ability to monitor and report symptoms
  • willingness to cooperate with treatment.

Table 1

Pediatric OCD: 4 keys to successful cognitive therapy

Treat OCD as a neurobehavioral disorder, not a misbehavior
Help the child develop a “tool kit” to manage dysphoria and faulty thinking
Expose the patient to anxiety-producing stimuli until he or she becomes desensitized and can refrain from the usual compulsive responses (exposure and response prevention)
Educate family members and school personnel

CBT may be difficult with patients younger than age 6 and will invariably involve training the parents to serve as “coaches;” a CBT protocol for patients ages 4 to 6 is under investigation (H. Leonard, personal communication). CBT also can be adapted for patients with intellectual deficits.11

A ‘tool kit.’ Successful exposure therapy for OCD relies on equipping children and adolescents with the knowledge and skills to battle the illness. They often have tried unsuccessfully to resist OCD’s compulsions and must be convinced that EX/RP techniques will work. Using a “tool kit” concept reminds young patients that they have the implements they need to combat OCD (Table 2).

A ‘germ ladder’ and ‘fear thermometer.’

Adam’s tools include a stimulus hierarchy called a “germ ladder,” which the therapist and Adam create collaboratively. It ranks stimuli from low (his own doorknob) to very high (public toilets, sinks, and door handles).

As part of his treatment, Adam begins to touch objects in his room and house while voluntarily refraining from ritualizing. He uses another tool—a fear thermometer—to record his distress level on a scale of 1 to 10 during and after these exposures.

Adam discovers that when he comes into contact with less-threatening items his fear ratings typically return to baseline within 20 to 30 minutes. This insight helps him modify his assessment of the risk they pose.

Table 2

OCD ‘tool box’ can help patients build new behaviors

ToolFunction
Training in exposure response prevention (EX/RP) therapyHelps patients learn to confront rather than avoid feared stimuli
‘Fear thermometer’Enables patients to express the intensity of their distress on a scale of 1 (lowest) to 10 (highest)
Positive self-statementsTeaches patients to use statements such as “I can do this” and “I’m the boss of OCD now” to build confidence that they can control their response to feared stimuli

During office visits, he confronts similar items around the clinic, with the therapist providing encouragement and instruction for additional exposure homework. Eventually Adam works on the clinic’s public bathroom, which he perceived to be relatively clean but less so than his own bathroom. After fear in response to this bathroom is reduced, the therapist and Adam graduate to more-public facilities, such as the bathrooms at Adam’s pool and the local train station.

Exposure therapy. EX/RP is most successful when the child—rather than the therapist—chooses exposure targets from a hierarchy of fears,2 particularly when the list includes behaviors the child is resisting. In a collaborative spirit, the child takes the lead in placing items on the hierarchy and deciding when to confront them.

The therapist and child revise the hierarchy periodically, which demonstrates progress and allows them to add items as the child overcomes fears that cause less distress.

Reducing need for reassurance.

Adam has a habit of repeatedly asking his mother whether contact with particular objects in public is risky. By the third treatment session, he and the therapist agree that he will try to refrain from asking such questions.

His mother, in turn, is asked to reiterate the rationale for response prevention whenever Adam slips. She will offer encouragement and support without answering “OCD’s questions.”

ADJUNCTIVE DRUG THERAPY

While Adam is working with the behavioral therapist to reduce his anxieties and need for reassurance, he is also receiving gradually increasing dosages of sertraline. As discussed, he is considered a candidate for CBT plus medication because of his symptoms are severe. Drug treatment can benefit most pediatric OCD patients.

SSRIs. Two SSRIs are approved for pediatric OCD—fluvoxamine for ages 8 to 18 and sertraline for ages 6 to 18. Most SSRIs are likely effective for OCD in youth (Table 3),12-14 although reports have suggested a link between paroxetine and suicidality in pediatric patients. Other options may be more suitable choices unless further evidence supports the use of paroxetine as a first- or second-line agent for pediatric OCD.

 

 

Clomipramine—a nonselective tricyclic—was the first medication studied in treating OCD in children and adolescents. It is now usually considered only after two or three failed SSRI trials because of its potential for cardiac toxicity.15-17

Table 3

Suggested dosages (mg/d) for drug therapy of pediatric OCD

DrugUsual starting dosageApproximate mean dosage*Typical rangeUsual maximum dosage
Citalopram204020 to 6080
Clomipramine50150200300
Escitalopram51010 to 2030
Fluoxetine204040 to 6080
Fluvoxamine50175150 to 250300
Sertraline50125150225
*Mean dosage derived from registration trials, expert recommendation, and the authors’ clinical experience

Dosing. Fixed-dose studies suggest that dosing schedules for OCD are similar to those used for depression. For example, sertraline, 50 mg/d, or fluoxetine, 20 mg/d, are as effective as higher dosages.18

The common misconception that OCD requires higher dosages likely results from:

  • increasing the dosage too early in the time-response window for a drug effect to emerge
  • giving medication without concomitant exposure therapy.19

Delayed response. Although many patients respond early to an SSRI, others do not respond until 8 or even 12 weeks of treatment at therapeutic dosages. It often takes 3 to 4 weeks for evidence of benefit to emerge, so wait at least 3 weeks between dosage increases. Maintain therapeutic dosages at least 6 to 8 weeks before changing agents or beginning augmentation therapy.

Two-barrel approach.

In treating Adam, we began with sertraline, using a flexible titration schedule keyed to whether he experienced OCD symptom remission.

The starting dosage of 50 mg was titrated to 150 mg over 8 weeks while he was receiving behavioral therapy. We made adjustments with a time-response window of 2 to 3 weeks, allowing us to observe a response to each dosage escalation.

Adam’s OCD symptoms responded well to CBT plus sertraline. The maximum drug effect helped him confront the most difficult EX/RP tasks at the top of his stimulus hierarchy, which he attacked near the end of treatment.

Lessons learned. Multicenter trials have taught important lessons about drug therapy for OCD:

  • OCD patients experience little or no placebo effect, unlike patients with depression.
  • Clinical effects may appear as early as 2 to 3 weeks after medications are started and plateau at 10 to 12 weeks.
  • Partial response is the rule; SSRIs reduce OCD symptoms by about 30%—which correlates with “moderately” to “markedly” improved ratings on patient satisfaction measures.
  • Side effects and magnitude of improvement are comparable in pediatric and adult medication trials.

Box 2

Acute-onset OCD may be bacterial

In some children, OCD or tic symptoms arise from or are exacerbated by group A beta hemolytic streptococcal infection (GABHS), which has been labeled pediatric autoimmune neuropsychiatric disorders associated with Streptococcus (PANDAS).21 Obsessive-compulsive symptoms are not uncommon in pediatric patients with Sydenham’s chorea, a neurologic variant of rheumatic fever. OCD is far more common in patients with rheumatic fever when chorea is present.

Acute-onset or dramatic exacerbation of OCD or tic symptoms should prompt investigation of GABHS infection. Immunomodulatory treatments—including antibiotics, plasmapheresis, or IV immunoglobulin G—may benefit some patients.22

MANAGING RESISTANT OCD

Adequate SSRI monotherapy trials fail to relieve OCD symptoms in one-third of patients. Some patients benefit from combination therapy—such as an SSRI plus risperidone—especially when comorbid schizotypal personality disorder or a tic-spectrum disorder is present.

Drug switching or augmentation trials often produce only partial response and cause unnecessary suffering. A more effective strategy for many patients is to augment drug treatment with CBT until symptoms normalize.

On the other hand, augmentation is appropriate when nonresponse or partial response to SSRI monotherapy leaves a patient clinically symptomatic and functionally impaired. Clonazepam, clomipramine, and the amino acid L-tryptophan have been used successfully. Lithium and buspirone also have been tried but seem not to be effective in controlled studies in adults and anecdotal experience in youth.

When augmenting an SSRI, adding clomipramine, 25 to 50 mg/d, is a reasonable choice. However, fluoxetine or paroxetine can inhibit clomipramine metabolism by cytochrome P-450 (CYP) 2D6, with potential for cardiac arrhythmias or seizures. Sertraline or fluvoxamine are less likely to elevate clomipramine levels.20 Fluvoxamine may be the most compatible SSRI with clomipramine because it inhibits CYP 1A2—the enzyme that demethylates clomipramine to its inactive desmethyl metabolite—thereby preserving more of the active parent compound.

Clinical evidence suggests that augmentation’s success may depend in part on a patient’s comorbidities. For example, clonazepam may be particularly helpful for children with comorbid panic symptoms.

MAINTENANCE THERAPY

We typically provide 14 weekly CBT sessions, followed by monthly contacts for a few months to ensure than a patient’s gains are maintained. Standard procedure with drug therapy is to continue maintenance treatment for up to 1 year, although some have suggested continuing maintenance treatment indefinitely.

 

 

Related resources

  • Chansky TE. Freeing your child from obsessive compulsive disorder: A powerful, practical program for parents of children and adolescents. New York: Crown Publishing Group, 2001.
  • March JS, Mulle K. OCD in children and adolescents: A cognitive behavioral treatment manual. New York: Guilford Press, 1998.
  • Moritz EK, Jablonsky J. Blink, blink, clop, clop: Why do we do things we can’t stop? An OCD storybook. Newton, MA: Professional Books, Inc, 1998.
  • Wagner AP. Up and down the worry hill: A children’s book about obsessive compulsive disorder and its treatment. Rochester, NY: Lighthouse Press, Inc. 2000.

Drug brand names

  • Buspirone • BuSpar
  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Clomipramine • Anafranil
  • Clonazepam • Klonopin
  • Escitalopram • Lexapro
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Fluvoxamine • Luvox
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Risperidone • Risperdal
  • Sertaline • Zoloft

Disclosure

Dr. March receives research support from Pfizer Inc., Eli Lilly and Co., and Wyeth Pharmaceuticals and is a speaker for and/or consultant to Solvay Pharmaceuticals, Pfizer Inc., GlaxoSmithKline, Wyeth Pharmaceuticals, Novartis Pharmaceuticals Corp., and Shire Pharmaceuticals Group.

Dr. Franklin and Dr. Foa report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Acknowledgment

Preparation of this manuscript was supported in part by National Institute of Mental Health grants 1 K24 MHO1557 and 1 R10 MH55121 to Dr. March and by contributions from the Robert and Sarah Gorrell family and the Lupin Family Foundation.

References

1. Kendall PC, Southam-Gerow MA. Issues in the transportability of treatment: the case of anxiety disorders in youths. J Consult Clin Psychol 1995;63(5):702-8.

2. March J, Mulle K. OCD in children and adolescents: A cognitive-behavioral treatment manual. New York: Guilford Press, 1998.

3. Flament MF, Whitaker A, Rapoport JL, et al. Obsessive compulsive disorder in adolescence: an epidemiological study. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1988;27(6):764-71.

4. March J, Frances A, Kahn D, Carpenter D. Expert consensus guidelines: treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder. J Clin Psychiatry 1997;58(suppl 4):1-72.

5. King R, Leonard H, March J. Practice parameters for the assessment and treatment of children and adolescents with obsessive-compulsive disorder. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1998;37(10, suppl):27-45.

6. March JS. Cognitive-behavioral psychotherapy for children and adolescents with OCD: a review and recommendations for treatment. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34(1):7-18.

7. Franklin ME, Kozak MJ, Cashman LA, et al. Cognitive-behavioral treatment of pediatric obsessive-compulsive disorder: an open clinical trial. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1998;37(4):412-19.

8. March JS, Mulle K, Herbel B. Behavioral psychotherapy for children and adolescents with obsessive-compulsive disorder: an open trial of a new protocol-driven treatment package. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1994;33(3):333-41.

9. Franklin ME, Tolin DF, March JS, Foa EB. Treatment of pediatric obsessive-compulsive disorder: A case example of intensive cognitive-behavioral therapy involving exposure and ritual prevention. Cognit Behav Pract 2001;8(4):297-304.

10. March J, Mulle K. Manualized cognitive-behavioral psychotherapy for obsessive-compulsive disorder in childhood: a preliminary single case study. J Anxiety Disord 1995;9(2):175-84.

11. Franklin ME, Rynn M, March JS, Foa EB. Obsessive-compulsive disorder. In: Hersen M (ed). Clinical behavior therapy: adults and children. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 2002;276-303.

12. March JS, Biederman J, Wolkow R, et al. Sertraline in children and adolescents with obsessive-compulsive disorder: a multicenter randomized controlled trial. JAMA 1998;280(20):1752-6.

13. Riddle MA, Reeve EA, Yaryura-Tobias JA, et al. Fluvoxamine for children and adolescents with obsessive-compulsive disorder: a randomized, controlled, multicenter trial. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2001;40(2):222-9.

14. Geller DA, Hoog SL, Heiligenstein JH, et al. Fluoxetine treatment for obsessive-compulsive disorder in children and adolescents: a placebo-controlled clinical trial. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2001;40(7):773-9.

15. Leonard H, March J, Rickler K, Allen A. Pharmacology of the selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors in children and adolescents. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1997;36(6):725-36.

16. DeVeaugh-Geiss J, Moroz G, Biederman J, et al. Clomipramine hydrochloride in childhood and adolescent obsessive-compulsive disorder—a multicenter trial. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1992;31(1):45-9.

17. Wilens TE, Biederman J, March JS, et al. Absence of cardiovascular adverse effects of sertraline in children and adolescents. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1999;38(5):573-7.

18. Greist JH, Jefferson JW, Kobak KA, et al. A 1-year double-blind placebo-controlled fixed dose study of sertraline in the treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder. Int Clin Psychopharmacol 1995;10(2):57-65.

19. Marks IM. Drug versus behavioral treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder. Biolog Psychiatry 1990;28(12):1072-3.

20. Leonard HL, March J, Rickler KC, Allen AJ. Pharmacology of the selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors in children and adolescents. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1997;36(6):725-36.

21. Leonard HL, Swedo SE. Paediatric autoimmune neuropsychiatric disorders associated with streptococcal infection (PANDAS). Int J Neuropsychopharmacol 2001;4(2):191-8.

22. Perlmutter SJ, Leitman SF, Garvey MA, et al. Therapeutic plasma exchange and intravenous immunoglobulin for obsessive-compulsive disorder and tic disorders in childhood. Lancet 1999;354 (9185):1153-8.

References

1. Kendall PC, Southam-Gerow MA. Issues in the transportability of treatment: the case of anxiety disorders in youths. J Consult Clin Psychol 1995;63(5):702-8.

2. March J, Mulle K. OCD in children and adolescents: A cognitive-behavioral treatment manual. New York: Guilford Press, 1998.

3. Flament MF, Whitaker A, Rapoport JL, et al. Obsessive compulsive disorder in adolescence: an epidemiological study. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1988;27(6):764-71.

4. March J, Frances A, Kahn D, Carpenter D. Expert consensus guidelines: treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder. J Clin Psychiatry 1997;58(suppl 4):1-72.

5. King R, Leonard H, March J. Practice parameters for the assessment and treatment of children and adolescents with obsessive-compulsive disorder. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1998;37(10, suppl):27-45.

6. March JS. Cognitive-behavioral psychotherapy for children and adolescents with OCD: a review and recommendations for treatment. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1995;34(1):7-18.

7. Franklin ME, Kozak MJ, Cashman LA, et al. Cognitive-behavioral treatment of pediatric obsessive-compulsive disorder: an open clinical trial. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1998;37(4):412-19.

8. March JS, Mulle K, Herbel B. Behavioral psychotherapy for children and adolescents with obsessive-compulsive disorder: an open trial of a new protocol-driven treatment package. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1994;33(3):333-41.

9. Franklin ME, Tolin DF, March JS, Foa EB. Treatment of pediatric obsessive-compulsive disorder: A case example of intensive cognitive-behavioral therapy involving exposure and ritual prevention. Cognit Behav Pract 2001;8(4):297-304.

10. March J, Mulle K. Manualized cognitive-behavioral psychotherapy for obsessive-compulsive disorder in childhood: a preliminary single case study. J Anxiety Disord 1995;9(2):175-84.

11. Franklin ME, Rynn M, March JS, Foa EB. Obsessive-compulsive disorder. In: Hersen M (ed). Clinical behavior therapy: adults and children. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 2002;276-303.

12. March JS, Biederman J, Wolkow R, et al. Sertraline in children and adolescents with obsessive-compulsive disorder: a multicenter randomized controlled trial. JAMA 1998;280(20):1752-6.

13. Riddle MA, Reeve EA, Yaryura-Tobias JA, et al. Fluvoxamine for children and adolescents with obsessive-compulsive disorder: a randomized, controlled, multicenter trial. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2001;40(2):222-9.

14. Geller DA, Hoog SL, Heiligenstein JH, et al. Fluoxetine treatment for obsessive-compulsive disorder in children and adolescents: a placebo-controlled clinical trial. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2001;40(7):773-9.

15. Leonard H, March J, Rickler K, Allen A. Pharmacology of the selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors in children and adolescents. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1997;36(6):725-36.

16. DeVeaugh-Geiss J, Moroz G, Biederman J, et al. Clomipramine hydrochloride in childhood and adolescent obsessive-compulsive disorder—a multicenter trial. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1992;31(1):45-9.

17. Wilens TE, Biederman J, March JS, et al. Absence of cardiovascular adverse effects of sertraline in children and adolescents. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1999;38(5):573-7.

18. Greist JH, Jefferson JW, Kobak KA, et al. A 1-year double-blind placebo-controlled fixed dose study of sertraline in the treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder. Int Clin Psychopharmacol 1995;10(2):57-65.

19. Marks IM. Drug versus behavioral treatment of obsessive-compulsive disorder. Biolog Psychiatry 1990;28(12):1072-3.

20. Leonard HL, March J, Rickler KC, Allen AJ. Pharmacology of the selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors in children and adolescents. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1997;36(6):725-36.

21. Leonard HL, Swedo SE. Paediatric autoimmune neuropsychiatric disorders associated with streptococcal infection (PANDAS). Int J Neuropsychopharmacol 2001;4(2):191-8.

22. Perlmutter SJ, Leitman SF, Garvey MA, et al. Therapeutic plasma exchange and intravenous immunoglobulin for obsessive-compulsive disorder and tic disorders in childhood. Lancet 1999;354 (9185):1153-8.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(11)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(11)
Page Number
24-36
Page Number
24-36
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Germ warfare: Arm young patients to fight obsessive-compulsive disorder
Display Headline
Germ warfare: Arm young patients to fight obsessive-compulsive disorder
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

COPD: How to manage comorbid depression and anxiety

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:11
Display Headline
COPD: How to manage comorbid depression and anxiety

Mood disorders spell danger for patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD). Comorbid depression and anxiety often complicate or frustrate treatment of this debilitating—and ultimately fatal—respiratory disease (Box 1).

Managing COPD-related psychiatric disorders is crucial to improving patients’ quality of life. This article presents two cases to address:

  • common causes of psychiatric symptoms in patients with COPD
  • strategies for effectively treating these symptoms while avoiding adverse effects and drug-drug interactions.

CASE REPORT: COPD AND DEPRESSION

Ms. H, age 59, a pack-a-day smoker since age 19, was diagnosed with COPD 3 years ago. Since then, dyspnea has rendered her unable to work, play with her grandchildren, or walk her dog. She has become increasingly apathetic and tired and is not complying with her prescribed pulmonary rehabilitation. Her primary care physician suspects she is depressed and refers her to a psychiatrist.

Box 1

COPD: debilitating and progressive

COPD is the fourth leading cause of death in the United States after heart disease, malignant neoplasms, and cerebrovascular disease. A total of 122,009 COPD-related deaths were reported in 2000.1

Cigarette smoking causes 80 to 90% of COPD cases.2 Occupational exposure to particles of silica, coal dust, and asbestos also can play a significant role. Alpha-1-antitrypsin deficiency—a rare, genetically transmitted enzyme deficiency—accounts for 0.1% of total cases.

Two disease processes are present in most COPD cases:

  • emphysema, resulting from destruction of air spaces and their associated pulmonary capillaries (Figure)
  • chronic bronchitis, causing airway hyperreactivity and increased mucus production.

The first symptom of COPD may be a chronic, productive cough. As the disease progresses, the patient becomes more prone to pulmonary infections, increasingly dyspneic, and unable to exercise. This results in occupational disability, social withdrawal, decreased mobility, and difficulty performing activities of daily living. Initially, an increased respiratory rate keeps oxygen saturation normal. Over time, however, the disease progresses to chronic hypoxia.

End-stage COPD is characterized by chronic hypoxia and retention of carbon dioxide due to inadequate gas exchange. Death results from respiratory failure or from complications such as infections.

During the psychiatrist’s initial interview, Ms. H exhibits anhedonia, feelings of worthlessness and hopelessness, and low energy. She also reports poor sleep and appetite. Her Beck Depression Inventory score of 30 indicates severe major depression.

She is taking inhaled albuterol and ipratropium, 2 puffs each every 6 hours, and has been taking oral prednisone, 10 mg/d, for 5 years. The psychiatrist adds sertraline, 50 mg/d. Her mood, anhedonia, and subjective energy level improve across 2 months. Her Beck Depression Inventory score improves to 6, but her positive responses indicate continued poor appetite, lack of sex drive, and low energy. She often becomes breathless when she tries to eat. Her body mass index is 18, indicating that she is underweight. Caloric nutritional supplements are initiated tid to increase her weight. Her sertraline dose is continued.

Approximately 1 month later, Ms. H is able to begin a pulmonary rehabilitation program, which includes:

  • prescribed exercise to increase her endurance during physical activity
  • breathing exercises to decrease her breathlessness.

Ms. H also begins attending a support group for patients with COPD.

After 12 weeks of pulmonary rehabilitation, Ms. H is once again able to walk her dog. The psychiatrist continues sertraline, 50 mg/d, because of her high risk of depression recurrence. She continues to smoke despite repeated counseling.

Discussion. This case illustrates how progressing COPD symptoms can compromise a patient’s ability to work, socialize, and enjoy life. The resulting social isolation and loss of independence and self-esteem can lead to depression.3

Forty to 50% of patients with COPD are believed to have comorbid depression compared with 13% of total patients.4 Small sample sizes have limited many prevalence studies, however.4-6

Long-term corticosteroid therapy may also have fueled Ms. H’s depression. Prednisone is associated with dose-related side effects, including depression, anxiety, mania, irritability, and delirium.7

Ms. H’s case also illustrates how depression can derail COPD treatment and predict poorer outcomes of medical treatment in COPD patients.8 Fatigue, apathy, and hopelessness kept her from following her pulmonary rehabilitation regimen.

Treatment. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) are considered first-line treatment for comorbid depressive or anxiety disorders in patients with COPD. These agents are associated with a relatively low incidence of:

  • anticholinergic and other side effects
  • interactions with other drugs commonly used by COPD patients.

Sertraline, citalopram, and escitalopram have fewer side effects and affect the cytochrome P (CYP)-450 pathway to a lesser degree than do other SSRIs.

Venlafaxine, a serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor, is another first-line option. This agent is associated with dose-dependent increases in blood pressure, so use it with caution in hypertensive patients.

 

 

Mirtazapine, which has been shown to stimulate appetite, can be considered for patients with prominent anorexia or if dyspnea frequently interferes with eating.

Tricyclic antidepressants and monoamine oxidase inhibitors are rarely considered first-line for COPD patients but may help in some clinical instances, such as in younger or middle-aged patients with chronic pain. Dosages for chronic pain generally are much lower than therapeutic dosages for depression. For example, amitriptyline is usually given at 25 mg/d for chronic pain and at 50 to 100 mg/dfor depression.

Table 1

Interactions between selected psychotropics and drugs used by COPD patients

PsychotropicPotential interactions
AlprazolamItraconazole, fluconazole, cimetidine increase alprazolam levels
BupropionLowers seizure threshold, so use with other drugs with seizure-causing potential (eg, theophylline) requires caution
May increase adverse effects of levodopa, amantadine
BuspironeErythromycin, itraconazole increase buspirone levels
Diazepam, lorazepamTheophylline may decrease serum levels of these drugs
DivalproexMay increase prothrombin time and INR* in patients taking warfarin
FluoxetineMay increase prothrombin time and INR in patients taking warfarin
NefazodoneCould increase atorvastatin, simvastatin levels
ParoxetineMay interact with warfarin Cimetidine increases paroxetine levels Reports of increased theophylline levels
RisperidoneMetabolized by CYP-450 2D6 enzyme; potential exists for interactions, but none reported
INR: International normalized ratio, a standardized measurement of warfarin therapy effectiveness.

Tricyclics, however, may cause excessive sedation, orthostatic hypotension, confusion, constipation, and urinary retention. These effects can be debilitating in older patients.

Nefazodone is a potent inhibitor of the CYP-450 3A4 isoenzyme and may increase levels of triazolam and alprazolam. Levels of the lipid-lowering agents atorvastatin and simvastatin may increase threefold to fourfold when nefazodone is added. Use nefazodone with caution in patients taking digoxin, because nefazodone is 99% bound to serum proteins and may increase serum digoxin to a dangerous level. Nefazodone also carries a risk of hepatic failure, so hepatic enzyme levels should be monitored.9

Figure Destruction of air spaces and capillaries in emphysema


Many COPD patients have a mixture of emphysema and chronic bronchitis. Emphysema is characterized by damaged alveoli, loss of elasticity of airways (bronchioles and alveoli), alveoli compression and collapse, tearing of alveoli walls, and bullae formation. In chronic bronchitis, the bronchial walls are inflamed and thickened, with a narrowing and plugging of the bronchial airways.Table 1 lists selected psychotropics and their potential interactions with drugs commonly taken by COPD patients.

CASE REPORT: COPD AND ANXIETY

Ms. P, age 60, is hospitalized for an exacerbation of COPD, which was diagnosed 10 years ago. She is intubated and ventilated after developing pneumonia-related respiratory failure. After a 2-week hospitalization, her pulmonologist tries to wean her off the ventilator, but episodes of panic and dyspnea result in significant oxygen desaturations.

The patient is transferred to a rehabilitation facility. A psychiatrist is consulted and discovers a 10-year history of anxiety that had been managed with lorazepam, 1 mg tid, and sertraline, 50 mg/d.

On evaluation, Ms. P is sweating, tremulous, and hyperventilating. She cannot speak, mouth words, or nod because of her respiratory distress. During her hospitalization she has been receiving albuterol and ipratropium nebulized every 4 hours; intravenous methylprednisolone, weaned from 40 mg to 10 mg every 6 hours; sertraline, 50 mg/d; clonazepam, 1 mg qid; theophylline, 400 mg/d, and several intravenous antibiotics. Ciprofloxacin, 500 mg bid, was recently added for a urinary tract infection.

Table 2

Drugs commonly used to treat COPD and their potential psychiatric side effects

DrugActionPossible psychiatric side effect
AlbuterolShort-acting bronchodilatorAnxiety
SalmeterolLong-acting bronchodilatorAnxiety, especially if used more than twice daily
IpratropiumInhaled anticholinergicNone
Inhaled corticosteroid (eg, fluticasone, budesonide)Anti-inflammatoryNone
Oral corticosteroid (prednisone, methylprednisolone)Anti-inflammatoryDepression, anxiety, mania, delirium
Montelukast tablets or chewable tabletsPossibly both anti-inflammatory and bronchodilator activityNone
TheophyllineAnti-inflammatory and respiratory stimulantAnxiety, especially if blood level is >20 μg/mL

Ms. P’s mental status alternates between severe anxiety and obtundation. When her anxiety becomes acute, the attending physician prescribes intravenous lorazepam, 1 to 2 mg as needed. Her chart reveals that she has received 4 to 6 mg of lorazepam each day.

A blood test reveals a toxic theophylline level of 20 mg/mL. Acting on the psychiatrist’s suggestion, Ms. P’s physician decreases theophylline to 200 mg/d. Her anxiety improves slightly, but episodes of panic continue to block attempts to wean her from the ventilator. The psychiatrist increases sertraline to 100 mg/d and stops lorazepam. She adds gabapentin, 300 mg every 8 hours.

Within 3 days, Ms. P’s obtundation ceases and she is less tremulous and panicked. She can mouth words and answer questions by nodding. Within 1 week, her anxiety is improved. Five days later, she is weaned from the ventilator. The facility’s psychologist teaches her relaxation, visualization, and breathing exercises to counteract panic and anxiety.

Ms. P is discharged 2 weeks later, after beginning a pulmonary rehabilitation program. Her primary care physician weans her off clonazepam, and her gabapentin and sertraline dosages are continued.

 

 

Discussion. Although the estimated prevalence of anxiety among patients with COPD varies widely,10 anxiety is more prevalent in patients with severe lung disease.11

Panic attacks and anxiety in COPD have been linked to hypoxia, hypercapnia, and hypocapnia. Hyperventilation leads to a decrease in pCO2 , causing a respiratory alkalosis that leads to cerebral vasoconstriction. This ultimately results in anxiety symptoms.

Box 2

Psychiatric comorbidities and COPD: Keys to coordinating care

Communication with other care team members is crucial to psychiatric treatment of patients with COPD. To ensure proper coordination of care:

  • Medication history. Report changes in psychiatric medication to all doctors. Obtain from the primary care physician a complete list of the patient’s medications and medical problems to prevent drug-drug interactions.
  • Onset of depression, anxiety. Report warning signs of depression and anxiety to other care team members, and urge doctors to refer patients who exhibit these signs. Primary care physicians often miss these potential warning signs:
  • Suicidality. Alert other doctors to the warning signs of suicidality. Patients older than 65 and those with depression or chronic health problems are at increased risk of suicide. Many patients with COPD exhibit the following risk factors:

In patients with severe COPD, chronic hypoventilation increases pCO 2 levels. This has been shown in animals to activate a medullary chemoreceptor, which elicits a panic response by activating neurons in the locus ceruleus.

Lactic acid, formed because of hypoxia, is also linked to panic attacks. Investigators have postulated that persons with both panic disorder and COPD are hypersensitive to lactic acid and hyperventilation.12

In some patients, shortness of breath causes anticipatory anxiety that can further decrease activity and worsen deconditioning.

The crippling fear that comes with an anxiety or panic disorder can also complicate COPD therapy. Panic and anxiety often interfere with weaning from mechanical ventilation, despite treatment with high-dose benzodiazepines in some cases.13 The more frequent or protracted the use of ventilation, the greater the risk of ventilator-associated pneumonia.

COPD drugs that cause anxiety. A comprehensive review of the patient’s medications and lab readings is crucial to planning treatment. Ms. P was concomitantly taking several drugs for COPD that can cause anxiety or panic symptoms (Table 2):

  • Bronchodilators such as albuterol are agonists that can increase heart rate and cause anxiety associated with rapid heartbeat.
  • Theophylline, which may act as a bronchodilator and respiratory stimulant, can cause anxiety, especially at blood levels >20 mg/mL. In Ms. P’s case, the combination of ciprofloxacin and theophylline caused a CYP-450 interaction that increased her theophylline level. This is because ciprofloxacin and most other quinolone antibiotics are CYP 1A2 inducers, whereas theophylline is a CYP 1A2 substrate.9
  • High-dose corticosteroids (eg, methylprednisolone) also may contribute to anxiety.

Treatment. SSRIs are an accepted first-line therapy for COPD-related anxiety. Buspirone may also work in some COPD patients. Anticonvulsants such as gabapentin and divalproex are possible adjuncts to antidepressants.

Routine use of benzodiazepines is not recommended to treat anxiety in COPD for several reasons:

  • These agents can cause respiratory depression in higher doses and thus may be dangerous to patients with end-stage COPD. Reports indicate that benzodiazepines may worsen pulmonary status.14
  • Rebound anxiety may occur when the drug is cleared from the system. This may accelerate benzodiazepine use, which can lead to excessively high doses and/or addiction.

Antihistamines such as hydroxyzine are a nonaddictive alternative to benzodiazepines for anxiety control. They may be used as an adjunct to antidepressants if alcohol or drug addiction are present. These agents, however, may have sedating and anticholinergic side effects.

Beta blockers, commonly used to treat performance anxiety, may worsen pulmonary status and are contraindicated in COPD patients.

COPD and comorbidities. Many patients with COPD are taking several medications for comorbid hypertension, diabetes, coronary artery disease, or congestive heart failure. These other conditions or medications may contribute to psychiatric symptoms, diminish the effectiveness of psychiatric treatment, or cause an adverse interaction with a psychotropic.

A thorough review of the patient’s medical records is strongly recommended. Communication with other care team members is critical (Box 2).

PSYCHOSOCIAL TREATMENT

Cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) may be effective in treating COPD-related anxiety and depression. CBT involves the correction of unrealistic and harmful thought patterns (such as cat-astrophizing shortness of breath) through techniques such as guided imagery and relaxation. Breathing exercises are also used.6

Medically stable patients can be taught “interoceptive exposure” techniques by learning to induce panic symptoms in a controlled setting (such as by hyperventilating in the doctor’s office), then desensitizing themselves to the anxiety. Exposure can also be used in social settings to accustom the patient to feared stimuli.

 

 

Support groups can increase social interaction and offer a chance to discuss disease-related medical, psychological, and social issues with other COPD patients.

Pulmonary rehabilitation has been shown to decrease depression and anxiety, increase functioning, and promote independence in patients with COPD.12 Patients are educated about their disease and learn breathing techniques to reduce air hunger and exercises to optimize oxygen use.

Physical exercise figures prominently in pulmonary rehabilitation by improving oxygen consumption efficiency. This in turn improves exercise tolerance.15

COPD AND DELIRIUM

Delirium is common among older patients with COPD. Two or more causes can be at work simultaneously, such as:

  • hypoxia and hypercapnia
  • reactions to antibiotics, antivirals, and corticosteroids used to treat COPD.

Delirium can simulate depression, anxiety, mania, and psychosis because affective lability, fluctuating levels of consciousness, and impaired reality testing are features of delirium.

A COPD patient’s sudden change in mental status should prompt a careful review of medications and medical conditions and an oxygen saturation measurement. An arterial blood gas reading may also be helpful because hypercapnia can be present without hypoxia. The sudden onset of psychotic symptoms in a patient with COPD should also prompt a thorough search for causes of delirium.16

Related resources

Drug brand names

  • Albuterol • Proventil, Ventolin
  • Alprazolam • Xanax
  • Amantadine • Symmetrel
  • Atorvastatin • Lipitor
  • Budesonide • Pulmicort
  • Bupropion • Wellbutrin
  • Buspirone • BuSpar
  • Cimetidine • Tagamet
  • Ciprofloxacin • Ciloxan, Cipro
  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Clonazepam • Klonopin
  • Diazepam • Valium
  • Digoxin • Lanoxin
  • Divalproex • Depakote
  • Erythromycin • Emgel, others
  • Escitalopram • Lexapro
  • Fluconazole • Diflucan
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Fluticasone • Flovent
  • Gabapentin • Neurontin
  • Hydroxyzine • Atarax, Vistaril
  • Ipratropium • Atrovent
  • Itraconazole • Sporanox
  • Levodopa • Sinemet
  • Lorazepam • Ativan
  • Mirtazapine • Remeron
  • Montelukast • Singulair
  • Nefazodone • Serzone
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Propranolol • Inderal
  • Risperidone • Risperdal
  • Salmeterol • Serevent
  • Sertraline • Zoloft
  • Simvastatin • Zocor
  • Theophylline • Theo-dur, others
  • Triazolam • Halcion
  • Venlafaxine • Effexor
  • Warfarin • Coumadin

Disclosure

The authors report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References

1. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Deaths: Leading causes for 2000. National Vital Statistics Reports. 2002;50(6):8.-Available at: http://www.cdc.gov/nchs. Accessed October 16, 2003.

2. American Lung Association fact sheet: COPD. Available at: http://www.lungusa.org/diseases/copd_factsheet.html. Accessed Sept. 23, 2003.

3. American Lung Association: Breathless in America Available at: http://www.lungusa.org/press/lung_dis/asn_copd21601.html. Accessed Sept. 8, 2003.

4. Gift AG, McCrone SH. Depression in patients with COPD. Heart Lung 1993;22:289-97.

5. Light RW, Merrill EJ, Despars JA, et al. Prevalence of depression and anxiety in patients with COPD. Chest 1985;87:35-8.

6. Dudley DL, Glaser EM, Jorgenson BN, Logan DL. Psychosocial concomitants to rehabilitation in chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Part 2: psychosocial treatment. Chest 1980;77:544-51.

7. Wise MG, Rundell JR (eds). Textbook of consultation-liaison psychiatry: psychiatry in the medically ill. (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 2002.

8. Dahlen I, Janson C. Anxiety and depression are related to the outcome of emergency treatment in patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. 2002;122:1633-7.

9. Physicians’ Desk Reference (57th ed). Montvale, NJ: Thomson Healthcare, 2003.

10. Karajgi B, Rifkin A, Doddi S, Kolli R. The prevalence of anxiety disorders in patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Am J Psychiatry 1990;147:200-1.

11. Porzelius J, Vest M, Nochomovitz M. Respiratory function, cognitions, and panic in chronic obstructive pulmonary patients. Behav Res Ther 1992;30:75-7.

12. Smoller JW, Pollack MH. Panic anxiety, dyspnea, and respiratory disease. Theoretical and clinical considerations. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 1996;154:6-17.

13. Mendel JG, Kahn FA. Psychosocial aspects of weaning from mechanical ventilation. Psychosomatics 1980;21:465-71.

14. Man GCW, Hsu K, Sproule BJ. Effect of alprazolam on exercise and dyspnea in patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Chest 1986;90:832-6.

15. Ries AL, Kaplan RM, Limberg TM, Prewitt LM. Effects of pulmonary rehabilitation on physiologic and psychosocial outcomes in patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Ann Intern Med 1995;122:823-32.

16. Yudofsky SC, Hales RE (eds). Textbook of neuropsychiatry. (3rd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1997;447-70.

Author and Disclosure Information

Lisa Cantor, MD
Adjunct assistant professor Departments of psychiatry and family medicine University of Cincinnati College of Medicine

Roy Jacobson, MD, PhD
Assistant professor of clinical family medicine University of Cincinnati College of Medicine

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(11)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
45-54
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Lisa Cantor, MD
Adjunct assistant professor Departments of psychiatry and family medicine University of Cincinnati College of Medicine

Roy Jacobson, MD, PhD
Assistant professor of clinical family medicine University of Cincinnati College of Medicine

Author and Disclosure Information

Lisa Cantor, MD
Adjunct assistant professor Departments of psychiatry and family medicine University of Cincinnati College of Medicine

Roy Jacobson, MD, PhD
Assistant professor of clinical family medicine University of Cincinnati College of Medicine

Mood disorders spell danger for patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD). Comorbid depression and anxiety often complicate or frustrate treatment of this debilitating—and ultimately fatal—respiratory disease (Box 1).

Managing COPD-related psychiatric disorders is crucial to improving patients’ quality of life. This article presents two cases to address:

  • common causes of psychiatric symptoms in patients with COPD
  • strategies for effectively treating these symptoms while avoiding adverse effects and drug-drug interactions.

CASE REPORT: COPD AND DEPRESSION

Ms. H, age 59, a pack-a-day smoker since age 19, was diagnosed with COPD 3 years ago. Since then, dyspnea has rendered her unable to work, play with her grandchildren, or walk her dog. She has become increasingly apathetic and tired and is not complying with her prescribed pulmonary rehabilitation. Her primary care physician suspects she is depressed and refers her to a psychiatrist.

Box 1

COPD: debilitating and progressive

COPD is the fourth leading cause of death in the United States after heart disease, malignant neoplasms, and cerebrovascular disease. A total of 122,009 COPD-related deaths were reported in 2000.1

Cigarette smoking causes 80 to 90% of COPD cases.2 Occupational exposure to particles of silica, coal dust, and asbestos also can play a significant role. Alpha-1-antitrypsin deficiency—a rare, genetically transmitted enzyme deficiency—accounts for 0.1% of total cases.

Two disease processes are present in most COPD cases:

  • emphysema, resulting from destruction of air spaces and their associated pulmonary capillaries (Figure)
  • chronic bronchitis, causing airway hyperreactivity and increased mucus production.

The first symptom of COPD may be a chronic, productive cough. As the disease progresses, the patient becomes more prone to pulmonary infections, increasingly dyspneic, and unable to exercise. This results in occupational disability, social withdrawal, decreased mobility, and difficulty performing activities of daily living. Initially, an increased respiratory rate keeps oxygen saturation normal. Over time, however, the disease progresses to chronic hypoxia.

End-stage COPD is characterized by chronic hypoxia and retention of carbon dioxide due to inadequate gas exchange. Death results from respiratory failure or from complications such as infections.

During the psychiatrist’s initial interview, Ms. H exhibits anhedonia, feelings of worthlessness and hopelessness, and low energy. She also reports poor sleep and appetite. Her Beck Depression Inventory score of 30 indicates severe major depression.

She is taking inhaled albuterol and ipratropium, 2 puffs each every 6 hours, and has been taking oral prednisone, 10 mg/d, for 5 years. The psychiatrist adds sertraline, 50 mg/d. Her mood, anhedonia, and subjective energy level improve across 2 months. Her Beck Depression Inventory score improves to 6, but her positive responses indicate continued poor appetite, lack of sex drive, and low energy. She often becomes breathless when she tries to eat. Her body mass index is 18, indicating that she is underweight. Caloric nutritional supplements are initiated tid to increase her weight. Her sertraline dose is continued.

Approximately 1 month later, Ms. H is able to begin a pulmonary rehabilitation program, which includes:

  • prescribed exercise to increase her endurance during physical activity
  • breathing exercises to decrease her breathlessness.

Ms. H also begins attending a support group for patients with COPD.

After 12 weeks of pulmonary rehabilitation, Ms. H is once again able to walk her dog. The psychiatrist continues sertraline, 50 mg/d, because of her high risk of depression recurrence. She continues to smoke despite repeated counseling.

Discussion. This case illustrates how progressing COPD symptoms can compromise a patient’s ability to work, socialize, and enjoy life. The resulting social isolation and loss of independence and self-esteem can lead to depression.3

Forty to 50% of patients with COPD are believed to have comorbid depression compared with 13% of total patients.4 Small sample sizes have limited many prevalence studies, however.4-6

Long-term corticosteroid therapy may also have fueled Ms. H’s depression. Prednisone is associated with dose-related side effects, including depression, anxiety, mania, irritability, and delirium.7

Ms. H’s case also illustrates how depression can derail COPD treatment and predict poorer outcomes of medical treatment in COPD patients.8 Fatigue, apathy, and hopelessness kept her from following her pulmonary rehabilitation regimen.

Treatment. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) are considered first-line treatment for comorbid depressive or anxiety disorders in patients with COPD. These agents are associated with a relatively low incidence of:

  • anticholinergic and other side effects
  • interactions with other drugs commonly used by COPD patients.

Sertraline, citalopram, and escitalopram have fewer side effects and affect the cytochrome P (CYP)-450 pathway to a lesser degree than do other SSRIs.

Venlafaxine, a serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor, is another first-line option. This agent is associated with dose-dependent increases in blood pressure, so use it with caution in hypertensive patients.

 

 

Mirtazapine, which has been shown to stimulate appetite, can be considered for patients with prominent anorexia or if dyspnea frequently interferes with eating.

Tricyclic antidepressants and monoamine oxidase inhibitors are rarely considered first-line for COPD patients but may help in some clinical instances, such as in younger or middle-aged patients with chronic pain. Dosages for chronic pain generally are much lower than therapeutic dosages for depression. For example, amitriptyline is usually given at 25 mg/d for chronic pain and at 50 to 100 mg/dfor depression.

Table 1

Interactions between selected psychotropics and drugs used by COPD patients

PsychotropicPotential interactions
AlprazolamItraconazole, fluconazole, cimetidine increase alprazolam levels
BupropionLowers seizure threshold, so use with other drugs with seizure-causing potential (eg, theophylline) requires caution
May increase adverse effects of levodopa, amantadine
BuspironeErythromycin, itraconazole increase buspirone levels
Diazepam, lorazepamTheophylline may decrease serum levels of these drugs
DivalproexMay increase prothrombin time and INR* in patients taking warfarin
FluoxetineMay increase prothrombin time and INR in patients taking warfarin
NefazodoneCould increase atorvastatin, simvastatin levels
ParoxetineMay interact with warfarin Cimetidine increases paroxetine levels Reports of increased theophylline levels
RisperidoneMetabolized by CYP-450 2D6 enzyme; potential exists for interactions, but none reported
INR: International normalized ratio, a standardized measurement of warfarin therapy effectiveness.

Tricyclics, however, may cause excessive sedation, orthostatic hypotension, confusion, constipation, and urinary retention. These effects can be debilitating in older patients.

Nefazodone is a potent inhibitor of the CYP-450 3A4 isoenzyme and may increase levels of triazolam and alprazolam. Levels of the lipid-lowering agents atorvastatin and simvastatin may increase threefold to fourfold when nefazodone is added. Use nefazodone with caution in patients taking digoxin, because nefazodone is 99% bound to serum proteins and may increase serum digoxin to a dangerous level. Nefazodone also carries a risk of hepatic failure, so hepatic enzyme levels should be monitored.9

Figure Destruction of air spaces and capillaries in emphysema


Many COPD patients have a mixture of emphysema and chronic bronchitis. Emphysema is characterized by damaged alveoli, loss of elasticity of airways (bronchioles and alveoli), alveoli compression and collapse, tearing of alveoli walls, and bullae formation. In chronic bronchitis, the bronchial walls are inflamed and thickened, with a narrowing and plugging of the bronchial airways.Table 1 lists selected psychotropics and their potential interactions with drugs commonly taken by COPD patients.

CASE REPORT: COPD AND ANXIETY

Ms. P, age 60, is hospitalized for an exacerbation of COPD, which was diagnosed 10 years ago. She is intubated and ventilated after developing pneumonia-related respiratory failure. After a 2-week hospitalization, her pulmonologist tries to wean her off the ventilator, but episodes of panic and dyspnea result in significant oxygen desaturations.

The patient is transferred to a rehabilitation facility. A psychiatrist is consulted and discovers a 10-year history of anxiety that had been managed with lorazepam, 1 mg tid, and sertraline, 50 mg/d.

On evaluation, Ms. P is sweating, tremulous, and hyperventilating. She cannot speak, mouth words, or nod because of her respiratory distress. During her hospitalization she has been receiving albuterol and ipratropium nebulized every 4 hours; intravenous methylprednisolone, weaned from 40 mg to 10 mg every 6 hours; sertraline, 50 mg/d; clonazepam, 1 mg qid; theophylline, 400 mg/d, and several intravenous antibiotics. Ciprofloxacin, 500 mg bid, was recently added for a urinary tract infection.

Table 2

Drugs commonly used to treat COPD and their potential psychiatric side effects

DrugActionPossible psychiatric side effect
AlbuterolShort-acting bronchodilatorAnxiety
SalmeterolLong-acting bronchodilatorAnxiety, especially if used more than twice daily
IpratropiumInhaled anticholinergicNone
Inhaled corticosteroid (eg, fluticasone, budesonide)Anti-inflammatoryNone
Oral corticosteroid (prednisone, methylprednisolone)Anti-inflammatoryDepression, anxiety, mania, delirium
Montelukast tablets or chewable tabletsPossibly both anti-inflammatory and bronchodilator activityNone
TheophyllineAnti-inflammatory and respiratory stimulantAnxiety, especially if blood level is >20 μg/mL

Ms. P’s mental status alternates between severe anxiety and obtundation. When her anxiety becomes acute, the attending physician prescribes intravenous lorazepam, 1 to 2 mg as needed. Her chart reveals that she has received 4 to 6 mg of lorazepam each day.

A blood test reveals a toxic theophylline level of 20 mg/mL. Acting on the psychiatrist’s suggestion, Ms. P’s physician decreases theophylline to 200 mg/d. Her anxiety improves slightly, but episodes of panic continue to block attempts to wean her from the ventilator. The psychiatrist increases sertraline to 100 mg/d and stops lorazepam. She adds gabapentin, 300 mg every 8 hours.

Within 3 days, Ms. P’s obtundation ceases and she is less tremulous and panicked. She can mouth words and answer questions by nodding. Within 1 week, her anxiety is improved. Five days later, she is weaned from the ventilator. The facility’s psychologist teaches her relaxation, visualization, and breathing exercises to counteract panic and anxiety.

Ms. P is discharged 2 weeks later, after beginning a pulmonary rehabilitation program. Her primary care physician weans her off clonazepam, and her gabapentin and sertraline dosages are continued.

 

 

Discussion. Although the estimated prevalence of anxiety among patients with COPD varies widely,10 anxiety is more prevalent in patients with severe lung disease.11

Panic attacks and anxiety in COPD have been linked to hypoxia, hypercapnia, and hypocapnia. Hyperventilation leads to a decrease in pCO2 , causing a respiratory alkalosis that leads to cerebral vasoconstriction. This ultimately results in anxiety symptoms.

Box 2

Psychiatric comorbidities and COPD: Keys to coordinating care

Communication with other care team members is crucial to psychiatric treatment of patients with COPD. To ensure proper coordination of care:

  • Medication history. Report changes in psychiatric medication to all doctors. Obtain from the primary care physician a complete list of the patient’s medications and medical problems to prevent drug-drug interactions.
  • Onset of depression, anxiety. Report warning signs of depression and anxiety to other care team members, and urge doctors to refer patients who exhibit these signs. Primary care physicians often miss these potential warning signs:
  • Suicidality. Alert other doctors to the warning signs of suicidality. Patients older than 65 and those with depression or chronic health problems are at increased risk of suicide. Many patients with COPD exhibit the following risk factors:

In patients with severe COPD, chronic hypoventilation increases pCO 2 levels. This has been shown in animals to activate a medullary chemoreceptor, which elicits a panic response by activating neurons in the locus ceruleus.

Lactic acid, formed because of hypoxia, is also linked to panic attacks. Investigators have postulated that persons with both panic disorder and COPD are hypersensitive to lactic acid and hyperventilation.12

In some patients, shortness of breath causes anticipatory anxiety that can further decrease activity and worsen deconditioning.

The crippling fear that comes with an anxiety or panic disorder can also complicate COPD therapy. Panic and anxiety often interfere with weaning from mechanical ventilation, despite treatment with high-dose benzodiazepines in some cases.13 The more frequent or protracted the use of ventilation, the greater the risk of ventilator-associated pneumonia.

COPD drugs that cause anxiety. A comprehensive review of the patient’s medications and lab readings is crucial to planning treatment. Ms. P was concomitantly taking several drugs for COPD that can cause anxiety or panic symptoms (Table 2):

  • Bronchodilators such as albuterol are agonists that can increase heart rate and cause anxiety associated with rapid heartbeat.
  • Theophylline, which may act as a bronchodilator and respiratory stimulant, can cause anxiety, especially at blood levels >20 mg/mL. In Ms. P’s case, the combination of ciprofloxacin and theophylline caused a CYP-450 interaction that increased her theophylline level. This is because ciprofloxacin and most other quinolone antibiotics are CYP 1A2 inducers, whereas theophylline is a CYP 1A2 substrate.9
  • High-dose corticosteroids (eg, methylprednisolone) also may contribute to anxiety.

Treatment. SSRIs are an accepted first-line therapy for COPD-related anxiety. Buspirone may also work in some COPD patients. Anticonvulsants such as gabapentin and divalproex are possible adjuncts to antidepressants.

Routine use of benzodiazepines is not recommended to treat anxiety in COPD for several reasons:

  • These agents can cause respiratory depression in higher doses and thus may be dangerous to patients with end-stage COPD. Reports indicate that benzodiazepines may worsen pulmonary status.14
  • Rebound anxiety may occur when the drug is cleared from the system. This may accelerate benzodiazepine use, which can lead to excessively high doses and/or addiction.

Antihistamines such as hydroxyzine are a nonaddictive alternative to benzodiazepines for anxiety control. They may be used as an adjunct to antidepressants if alcohol or drug addiction are present. These agents, however, may have sedating and anticholinergic side effects.

Beta blockers, commonly used to treat performance anxiety, may worsen pulmonary status and are contraindicated in COPD patients.

COPD and comorbidities. Many patients with COPD are taking several medications for comorbid hypertension, diabetes, coronary artery disease, or congestive heart failure. These other conditions or medications may contribute to psychiatric symptoms, diminish the effectiveness of psychiatric treatment, or cause an adverse interaction with a psychotropic.

A thorough review of the patient’s medical records is strongly recommended. Communication with other care team members is critical (Box 2).

PSYCHOSOCIAL TREATMENT

Cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) may be effective in treating COPD-related anxiety and depression. CBT involves the correction of unrealistic and harmful thought patterns (such as cat-astrophizing shortness of breath) through techniques such as guided imagery and relaxation. Breathing exercises are also used.6

Medically stable patients can be taught “interoceptive exposure” techniques by learning to induce panic symptoms in a controlled setting (such as by hyperventilating in the doctor’s office), then desensitizing themselves to the anxiety. Exposure can also be used in social settings to accustom the patient to feared stimuli.

 

 

Support groups can increase social interaction and offer a chance to discuss disease-related medical, psychological, and social issues with other COPD patients.

Pulmonary rehabilitation has been shown to decrease depression and anxiety, increase functioning, and promote independence in patients with COPD.12 Patients are educated about their disease and learn breathing techniques to reduce air hunger and exercises to optimize oxygen use.

Physical exercise figures prominently in pulmonary rehabilitation by improving oxygen consumption efficiency. This in turn improves exercise tolerance.15

COPD AND DELIRIUM

Delirium is common among older patients with COPD. Two or more causes can be at work simultaneously, such as:

  • hypoxia and hypercapnia
  • reactions to antibiotics, antivirals, and corticosteroids used to treat COPD.

Delirium can simulate depression, anxiety, mania, and psychosis because affective lability, fluctuating levels of consciousness, and impaired reality testing are features of delirium.

A COPD patient’s sudden change in mental status should prompt a careful review of medications and medical conditions and an oxygen saturation measurement. An arterial blood gas reading may also be helpful because hypercapnia can be present without hypoxia. The sudden onset of psychotic symptoms in a patient with COPD should also prompt a thorough search for causes of delirium.16

Related resources

Drug brand names

  • Albuterol • Proventil, Ventolin
  • Alprazolam • Xanax
  • Amantadine • Symmetrel
  • Atorvastatin • Lipitor
  • Budesonide • Pulmicort
  • Bupropion • Wellbutrin
  • Buspirone • BuSpar
  • Cimetidine • Tagamet
  • Ciprofloxacin • Ciloxan, Cipro
  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Clonazepam • Klonopin
  • Diazepam • Valium
  • Digoxin • Lanoxin
  • Divalproex • Depakote
  • Erythromycin • Emgel, others
  • Escitalopram • Lexapro
  • Fluconazole • Diflucan
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Fluticasone • Flovent
  • Gabapentin • Neurontin
  • Hydroxyzine • Atarax, Vistaril
  • Ipratropium • Atrovent
  • Itraconazole • Sporanox
  • Levodopa • Sinemet
  • Lorazepam • Ativan
  • Mirtazapine • Remeron
  • Montelukast • Singulair
  • Nefazodone • Serzone
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Propranolol • Inderal
  • Risperidone • Risperdal
  • Salmeterol • Serevent
  • Sertraline • Zoloft
  • Simvastatin • Zocor
  • Theophylline • Theo-dur, others
  • Triazolam • Halcion
  • Venlafaxine • Effexor
  • Warfarin • Coumadin

Disclosure

The authors report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Mood disorders spell danger for patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD). Comorbid depression and anxiety often complicate or frustrate treatment of this debilitating—and ultimately fatal—respiratory disease (Box 1).

Managing COPD-related psychiatric disorders is crucial to improving patients’ quality of life. This article presents two cases to address:

  • common causes of psychiatric symptoms in patients with COPD
  • strategies for effectively treating these symptoms while avoiding adverse effects and drug-drug interactions.

CASE REPORT: COPD AND DEPRESSION

Ms. H, age 59, a pack-a-day smoker since age 19, was diagnosed with COPD 3 years ago. Since then, dyspnea has rendered her unable to work, play with her grandchildren, or walk her dog. She has become increasingly apathetic and tired and is not complying with her prescribed pulmonary rehabilitation. Her primary care physician suspects she is depressed and refers her to a psychiatrist.

Box 1

COPD: debilitating and progressive

COPD is the fourth leading cause of death in the United States after heart disease, malignant neoplasms, and cerebrovascular disease. A total of 122,009 COPD-related deaths were reported in 2000.1

Cigarette smoking causes 80 to 90% of COPD cases.2 Occupational exposure to particles of silica, coal dust, and asbestos also can play a significant role. Alpha-1-antitrypsin deficiency—a rare, genetically transmitted enzyme deficiency—accounts for 0.1% of total cases.

Two disease processes are present in most COPD cases:

  • emphysema, resulting from destruction of air spaces and their associated pulmonary capillaries (Figure)
  • chronic bronchitis, causing airway hyperreactivity and increased mucus production.

The first symptom of COPD may be a chronic, productive cough. As the disease progresses, the patient becomes more prone to pulmonary infections, increasingly dyspneic, and unable to exercise. This results in occupational disability, social withdrawal, decreased mobility, and difficulty performing activities of daily living. Initially, an increased respiratory rate keeps oxygen saturation normal. Over time, however, the disease progresses to chronic hypoxia.

End-stage COPD is characterized by chronic hypoxia and retention of carbon dioxide due to inadequate gas exchange. Death results from respiratory failure or from complications such as infections.

During the psychiatrist’s initial interview, Ms. H exhibits anhedonia, feelings of worthlessness and hopelessness, and low energy. She also reports poor sleep and appetite. Her Beck Depression Inventory score of 30 indicates severe major depression.

She is taking inhaled albuterol and ipratropium, 2 puffs each every 6 hours, and has been taking oral prednisone, 10 mg/d, for 5 years. The psychiatrist adds sertraline, 50 mg/d. Her mood, anhedonia, and subjective energy level improve across 2 months. Her Beck Depression Inventory score improves to 6, but her positive responses indicate continued poor appetite, lack of sex drive, and low energy. She often becomes breathless when she tries to eat. Her body mass index is 18, indicating that she is underweight. Caloric nutritional supplements are initiated tid to increase her weight. Her sertraline dose is continued.

Approximately 1 month later, Ms. H is able to begin a pulmonary rehabilitation program, which includes:

  • prescribed exercise to increase her endurance during physical activity
  • breathing exercises to decrease her breathlessness.

Ms. H also begins attending a support group for patients with COPD.

After 12 weeks of pulmonary rehabilitation, Ms. H is once again able to walk her dog. The psychiatrist continues sertraline, 50 mg/d, because of her high risk of depression recurrence. She continues to smoke despite repeated counseling.

Discussion. This case illustrates how progressing COPD symptoms can compromise a patient’s ability to work, socialize, and enjoy life. The resulting social isolation and loss of independence and self-esteem can lead to depression.3

Forty to 50% of patients with COPD are believed to have comorbid depression compared with 13% of total patients.4 Small sample sizes have limited many prevalence studies, however.4-6

Long-term corticosteroid therapy may also have fueled Ms. H’s depression. Prednisone is associated with dose-related side effects, including depression, anxiety, mania, irritability, and delirium.7

Ms. H’s case also illustrates how depression can derail COPD treatment and predict poorer outcomes of medical treatment in COPD patients.8 Fatigue, apathy, and hopelessness kept her from following her pulmonary rehabilitation regimen.

Treatment. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) are considered first-line treatment for comorbid depressive or anxiety disorders in patients with COPD. These agents are associated with a relatively low incidence of:

  • anticholinergic and other side effects
  • interactions with other drugs commonly used by COPD patients.

Sertraline, citalopram, and escitalopram have fewer side effects and affect the cytochrome P (CYP)-450 pathway to a lesser degree than do other SSRIs.

Venlafaxine, a serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor, is another first-line option. This agent is associated with dose-dependent increases in blood pressure, so use it with caution in hypertensive patients.

 

 

Mirtazapine, which has been shown to stimulate appetite, can be considered for patients with prominent anorexia or if dyspnea frequently interferes with eating.

Tricyclic antidepressants and monoamine oxidase inhibitors are rarely considered first-line for COPD patients but may help in some clinical instances, such as in younger or middle-aged patients with chronic pain. Dosages for chronic pain generally are much lower than therapeutic dosages for depression. For example, amitriptyline is usually given at 25 mg/d for chronic pain and at 50 to 100 mg/dfor depression.

Table 1

Interactions between selected psychotropics and drugs used by COPD patients

PsychotropicPotential interactions
AlprazolamItraconazole, fluconazole, cimetidine increase alprazolam levels
BupropionLowers seizure threshold, so use with other drugs with seizure-causing potential (eg, theophylline) requires caution
May increase adverse effects of levodopa, amantadine
BuspironeErythromycin, itraconazole increase buspirone levels
Diazepam, lorazepamTheophylline may decrease serum levels of these drugs
DivalproexMay increase prothrombin time and INR* in patients taking warfarin
FluoxetineMay increase prothrombin time and INR in patients taking warfarin
NefazodoneCould increase atorvastatin, simvastatin levels
ParoxetineMay interact with warfarin Cimetidine increases paroxetine levels Reports of increased theophylline levels
RisperidoneMetabolized by CYP-450 2D6 enzyme; potential exists for interactions, but none reported
INR: International normalized ratio, a standardized measurement of warfarin therapy effectiveness.

Tricyclics, however, may cause excessive sedation, orthostatic hypotension, confusion, constipation, and urinary retention. These effects can be debilitating in older patients.

Nefazodone is a potent inhibitor of the CYP-450 3A4 isoenzyme and may increase levels of triazolam and alprazolam. Levels of the lipid-lowering agents atorvastatin and simvastatin may increase threefold to fourfold when nefazodone is added. Use nefazodone with caution in patients taking digoxin, because nefazodone is 99% bound to serum proteins and may increase serum digoxin to a dangerous level. Nefazodone also carries a risk of hepatic failure, so hepatic enzyme levels should be monitored.9

Figure Destruction of air spaces and capillaries in emphysema


Many COPD patients have a mixture of emphysema and chronic bronchitis. Emphysema is characterized by damaged alveoli, loss of elasticity of airways (bronchioles and alveoli), alveoli compression and collapse, tearing of alveoli walls, and bullae formation. In chronic bronchitis, the bronchial walls are inflamed and thickened, with a narrowing and plugging of the bronchial airways.Table 1 lists selected psychotropics and their potential interactions with drugs commonly taken by COPD patients.

CASE REPORT: COPD AND ANXIETY

Ms. P, age 60, is hospitalized for an exacerbation of COPD, which was diagnosed 10 years ago. She is intubated and ventilated after developing pneumonia-related respiratory failure. After a 2-week hospitalization, her pulmonologist tries to wean her off the ventilator, but episodes of panic and dyspnea result in significant oxygen desaturations.

The patient is transferred to a rehabilitation facility. A psychiatrist is consulted and discovers a 10-year history of anxiety that had been managed with lorazepam, 1 mg tid, and sertraline, 50 mg/d.

On evaluation, Ms. P is sweating, tremulous, and hyperventilating. She cannot speak, mouth words, or nod because of her respiratory distress. During her hospitalization she has been receiving albuterol and ipratropium nebulized every 4 hours; intravenous methylprednisolone, weaned from 40 mg to 10 mg every 6 hours; sertraline, 50 mg/d; clonazepam, 1 mg qid; theophylline, 400 mg/d, and several intravenous antibiotics. Ciprofloxacin, 500 mg bid, was recently added for a urinary tract infection.

Table 2

Drugs commonly used to treat COPD and their potential psychiatric side effects

DrugActionPossible psychiatric side effect
AlbuterolShort-acting bronchodilatorAnxiety
SalmeterolLong-acting bronchodilatorAnxiety, especially if used more than twice daily
IpratropiumInhaled anticholinergicNone
Inhaled corticosteroid (eg, fluticasone, budesonide)Anti-inflammatoryNone
Oral corticosteroid (prednisone, methylprednisolone)Anti-inflammatoryDepression, anxiety, mania, delirium
Montelukast tablets or chewable tabletsPossibly both anti-inflammatory and bronchodilator activityNone
TheophyllineAnti-inflammatory and respiratory stimulantAnxiety, especially if blood level is >20 μg/mL

Ms. P’s mental status alternates between severe anxiety and obtundation. When her anxiety becomes acute, the attending physician prescribes intravenous lorazepam, 1 to 2 mg as needed. Her chart reveals that she has received 4 to 6 mg of lorazepam each day.

A blood test reveals a toxic theophylline level of 20 mg/mL. Acting on the psychiatrist’s suggestion, Ms. P’s physician decreases theophylline to 200 mg/d. Her anxiety improves slightly, but episodes of panic continue to block attempts to wean her from the ventilator. The psychiatrist increases sertraline to 100 mg/d and stops lorazepam. She adds gabapentin, 300 mg every 8 hours.

Within 3 days, Ms. P’s obtundation ceases and she is less tremulous and panicked. She can mouth words and answer questions by nodding. Within 1 week, her anxiety is improved. Five days later, she is weaned from the ventilator. The facility’s psychologist teaches her relaxation, visualization, and breathing exercises to counteract panic and anxiety.

Ms. P is discharged 2 weeks later, after beginning a pulmonary rehabilitation program. Her primary care physician weans her off clonazepam, and her gabapentin and sertraline dosages are continued.

 

 

Discussion. Although the estimated prevalence of anxiety among patients with COPD varies widely,10 anxiety is more prevalent in patients with severe lung disease.11

Panic attacks and anxiety in COPD have been linked to hypoxia, hypercapnia, and hypocapnia. Hyperventilation leads to a decrease in pCO2 , causing a respiratory alkalosis that leads to cerebral vasoconstriction. This ultimately results in anxiety symptoms.

Box 2

Psychiatric comorbidities and COPD: Keys to coordinating care

Communication with other care team members is crucial to psychiatric treatment of patients with COPD. To ensure proper coordination of care:

  • Medication history. Report changes in psychiatric medication to all doctors. Obtain from the primary care physician a complete list of the patient’s medications and medical problems to prevent drug-drug interactions.
  • Onset of depression, anxiety. Report warning signs of depression and anxiety to other care team members, and urge doctors to refer patients who exhibit these signs. Primary care physicians often miss these potential warning signs:
  • Suicidality. Alert other doctors to the warning signs of suicidality. Patients older than 65 and those with depression or chronic health problems are at increased risk of suicide. Many patients with COPD exhibit the following risk factors:

In patients with severe COPD, chronic hypoventilation increases pCO 2 levels. This has been shown in animals to activate a medullary chemoreceptor, which elicits a panic response by activating neurons in the locus ceruleus.

Lactic acid, formed because of hypoxia, is also linked to panic attacks. Investigators have postulated that persons with both panic disorder and COPD are hypersensitive to lactic acid and hyperventilation.12

In some patients, shortness of breath causes anticipatory anxiety that can further decrease activity and worsen deconditioning.

The crippling fear that comes with an anxiety or panic disorder can also complicate COPD therapy. Panic and anxiety often interfere with weaning from mechanical ventilation, despite treatment with high-dose benzodiazepines in some cases.13 The more frequent or protracted the use of ventilation, the greater the risk of ventilator-associated pneumonia.

COPD drugs that cause anxiety. A comprehensive review of the patient’s medications and lab readings is crucial to planning treatment. Ms. P was concomitantly taking several drugs for COPD that can cause anxiety or panic symptoms (Table 2):

  • Bronchodilators such as albuterol are agonists that can increase heart rate and cause anxiety associated with rapid heartbeat.
  • Theophylline, which may act as a bronchodilator and respiratory stimulant, can cause anxiety, especially at blood levels >20 mg/mL. In Ms. P’s case, the combination of ciprofloxacin and theophylline caused a CYP-450 interaction that increased her theophylline level. This is because ciprofloxacin and most other quinolone antibiotics are CYP 1A2 inducers, whereas theophylline is a CYP 1A2 substrate.9
  • High-dose corticosteroids (eg, methylprednisolone) also may contribute to anxiety.

Treatment. SSRIs are an accepted first-line therapy for COPD-related anxiety. Buspirone may also work in some COPD patients. Anticonvulsants such as gabapentin and divalproex are possible adjuncts to antidepressants.

Routine use of benzodiazepines is not recommended to treat anxiety in COPD for several reasons:

  • These agents can cause respiratory depression in higher doses and thus may be dangerous to patients with end-stage COPD. Reports indicate that benzodiazepines may worsen pulmonary status.14
  • Rebound anxiety may occur when the drug is cleared from the system. This may accelerate benzodiazepine use, which can lead to excessively high doses and/or addiction.

Antihistamines such as hydroxyzine are a nonaddictive alternative to benzodiazepines for anxiety control. They may be used as an adjunct to antidepressants if alcohol or drug addiction are present. These agents, however, may have sedating and anticholinergic side effects.

Beta blockers, commonly used to treat performance anxiety, may worsen pulmonary status and are contraindicated in COPD patients.

COPD and comorbidities. Many patients with COPD are taking several medications for comorbid hypertension, diabetes, coronary artery disease, or congestive heart failure. These other conditions or medications may contribute to psychiatric symptoms, diminish the effectiveness of psychiatric treatment, or cause an adverse interaction with a psychotropic.

A thorough review of the patient’s medical records is strongly recommended. Communication with other care team members is critical (Box 2).

PSYCHOSOCIAL TREATMENT

Cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) may be effective in treating COPD-related anxiety and depression. CBT involves the correction of unrealistic and harmful thought patterns (such as cat-astrophizing shortness of breath) through techniques such as guided imagery and relaxation. Breathing exercises are also used.6

Medically stable patients can be taught “interoceptive exposure” techniques by learning to induce panic symptoms in a controlled setting (such as by hyperventilating in the doctor’s office), then desensitizing themselves to the anxiety. Exposure can also be used in social settings to accustom the patient to feared stimuli.

 

 

Support groups can increase social interaction and offer a chance to discuss disease-related medical, psychological, and social issues with other COPD patients.

Pulmonary rehabilitation has been shown to decrease depression and anxiety, increase functioning, and promote independence in patients with COPD.12 Patients are educated about their disease and learn breathing techniques to reduce air hunger and exercises to optimize oxygen use.

Physical exercise figures prominently in pulmonary rehabilitation by improving oxygen consumption efficiency. This in turn improves exercise tolerance.15

COPD AND DELIRIUM

Delirium is common among older patients with COPD. Two or more causes can be at work simultaneously, such as:

  • hypoxia and hypercapnia
  • reactions to antibiotics, antivirals, and corticosteroids used to treat COPD.

Delirium can simulate depression, anxiety, mania, and psychosis because affective lability, fluctuating levels of consciousness, and impaired reality testing are features of delirium.

A COPD patient’s sudden change in mental status should prompt a careful review of medications and medical conditions and an oxygen saturation measurement. An arterial blood gas reading may also be helpful because hypercapnia can be present without hypoxia. The sudden onset of psychotic symptoms in a patient with COPD should also prompt a thorough search for causes of delirium.16

Related resources

Drug brand names

  • Albuterol • Proventil, Ventolin
  • Alprazolam • Xanax
  • Amantadine • Symmetrel
  • Atorvastatin • Lipitor
  • Budesonide • Pulmicort
  • Bupropion • Wellbutrin
  • Buspirone • BuSpar
  • Cimetidine • Tagamet
  • Ciprofloxacin • Ciloxan, Cipro
  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Clonazepam • Klonopin
  • Diazepam • Valium
  • Digoxin • Lanoxin
  • Divalproex • Depakote
  • Erythromycin • Emgel, others
  • Escitalopram • Lexapro
  • Fluconazole • Diflucan
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Fluticasone • Flovent
  • Gabapentin • Neurontin
  • Hydroxyzine • Atarax, Vistaril
  • Ipratropium • Atrovent
  • Itraconazole • Sporanox
  • Levodopa • Sinemet
  • Lorazepam • Ativan
  • Mirtazapine • Remeron
  • Montelukast • Singulair
  • Nefazodone • Serzone
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Propranolol • Inderal
  • Risperidone • Risperdal
  • Salmeterol • Serevent
  • Sertraline • Zoloft
  • Simvastatin • Zocor
  • Theophylline • Theo-dur, others
  • Triazolam • Halcion
  • Venlafaxine • Effexor
  • Warfarin • Coumadin

Disclosure

The authors report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References

1. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Deaths: Leading causes for 2000. National Vital Statistics Reports. 2002;50(6):8.-Available at: http://www.cdc.gov/nchs. Accessed October 16, 2003.

2. American Lung Association fact sheet: COPD. Available at: http://www.lungusa.org/diseases/copd_factsheet.html. Accessed Sept. 23, 2003.

3. American Lung Association: Breathless in America Available at: http://www.lungusa.org/press/lung_dis/asn_copd21601.html. Accessed Sept. 8, 2003.

4. Gift AG, McCrone SH. Depression in patients with COPD. Heart Lung 1993;22:289-97.

5. Light RW, Merrill EJ, Despars JA, et al. Prevalence of depression and anxiety in patients with COPD. Chest 1985;87:35-8.

6. Dudley DL, Glaser EM, Jorgenson BN, Logan DL. Psychosocial concomitants to rehabilitation in chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Part 2: psychosocial treatment. Chest 1980;77:544-51.

7. Wise MG, Rundell JR (eds). Textbook of consultation-liaison psychiatry: psychiatry in the medically ill. (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 2002.

8. Dahlen I, Janson C. Anxiety and depression are related to the outcome of emergency treatment in patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. 2002;122:1633-7.

9. Physicians’ Desk Reference (57th ed). Montvale, NJ: Thomson Healthcare, 2003.

10. Karajgi B, Rifkin A, Doddi S, Kolli R. The prevalence of anxiety disorders in patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Am J Psychiatry 1990;147:200-1.

11. Porzelius J, Vest M, Nochomovitz M. Respiratory function, cognitions, and panic in chronic obstructive pulmonary patients. Behav Res Ther 1992;30:75-7.

12. Smoller JW, Pollack MH. Panic anxiety, dyspnea, and respiratory disease. Theoretical and clinical considerations. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 1996;154:6-17.

13. Mendel JG, Kahn FA. Psychosocial aspects of weaning from mechanical ventilation. Psychosomatics 1980;21:465-71.

14. Man GCW, Hsu K, Sproule BJ. Effect of alprazolam on exercise and dyspnea in patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Chest 1986;90:832-6.

15. Ries AL, Kaplan RM, Limberg TM, Prewitt LM. Effects of pulmonary rehabilitation on physiologic and psychosocial outcomes in patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Ann Intern Med 1995;122:823-32.

16. Yudofsky SC, Hales RE (eds). Textbook of neuropsychiatry. (3rd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1997;447-70.

References

1. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Deaths: Leading causes for 2000. National Vital Statistics Reports. 2002;50(6):8.-Available at: http://www.cdc.gov/nchs. Accessed October 16, 2003.

2. American Lung Association fact sheet: COPD. Available at: http://www.lungusa.org/diseases/copd_factsheet.html. Accessed Sept. 23, 2003.

3. American Lung Association: Breathless in America Available at: http://www.lungusa.org/press/lung_dis/asn_copd21601.html. Accessed Sept. 8, 2003.

4. Gift AG, McCrone SH. Depression in patients with COPD. Heart Lung 1993;22:289-97.

5. Light RW, Merrill EJ, Despars JA, et al. Prevalence of depression and anxiety in patients with COPD. Chest 1985;87:35-8.

6. Dudley DL, Glaser EM, Jorgenson BN, Logan DL. Psychosocial concomitants to rehabilitation in chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Part 2: psychosocial treatment. Chest 1980;77:544-51.

7. Wise MG, Rundell JR (eds). Textbook of consultation-liaison psychiatry: psychiatry in the medically ill. (2nd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 2002.

8. Dahlen I, Janson C. Anxiety and depression are related to the outcome of emergency treatment in patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. 2002;122:1633-7.

9. Physicians’ Desk Reference (57th ed). Montvale, NJ: Thomson Healthcare, 2003.

10. Karajgi B, Rifkin A, Doddi S, Kolli R. The prevalence of anxiety disorders in patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Am J Psychiatry 1990;147:200-1.

11. Porzelius J, Vest M, Nochomovitz M. Respiratory function, cognitions, and panic in chronic obstructive pulmonary patients. Behav Res Ther 1992;30:75-7.

12. Smoller JW, Pollack MH. Panic anxiety, dyspnea, and respiratory disease. Theoretical and clinical considerations. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 1996;154:6-17.

13. Mendel JG, Kahn FA. Psychosocial aspects of weaning from mechanical ventilation. Psychosomatics 1980;21:465-71.

14. Man GCW, Hsu K, Sproule BJ. Effect of alprazolam on exercise and dyspnea in patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Chest 1986;90:832-6.

15. Ries AL, Kaplan RM, Limberg TM, Prewitt LM. Effects of pulmonary rehabilitation on physiologic and psychosocial outcomes in patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Ann Intern Med 1995;122:823-32.

16. Yudofsky SC, Hales RE (eds). Textbook of neuropsychiatry. (3rd ed). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1997;447-70.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(11)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(11)
Page Number
45-54
Page Number
45-54
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
COPD: How to manage comorbid depression and anxiety
Display Headline
COPD: How to manage comorbid depression and anxiety
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Tics and tourette’s disorder: Which therapies, and when to use them

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:11
Display Headline
Tics and tourette’s disorder: Which therapies, and when to use them

When managing pediatric tics and Tourette’s disorder, we do not seek to eliminate tic symptoms. Instead—based on evidence and our experience—we use a six-step approach to increase tic control, decrease our patients’ embarrassment and discomfort, and help them function more normally.

Drug therapy is not appropriate for all children and adolescents with tic disorders. Mild transient tics and Tourette’s disorder usually do not require treatment, and medications should not be given to patients whose tics do not impair their quality of life. Treatment is warranted, however, when tics interfere with peer relations, social interactions, academic performance, or activities of daily living.

Standard treatment of pediatric tic disorders is changing. Instead of using typical antipsychotics, many experienced clinicians are using other medications that are safer and more effective, particularly for children and adolescents with psychiatric comorbidities such as attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD). In these patients, it is difficult to avoid drug interactions and exacerbation of non-targeted conditions when you attempt to control the tics.

Table 1

Diagnostic criteria for tic disorders

Shared characteristics
  • Tics defined as sudden, rapid, recurrent, nonrhythmic, stereotyped motor movement or vocalization
  • Onset before age 18
  • Not caused by direct physiologic effects of a substance (such as stimulants) or general medical condition (such as Huntington’s disease or postviral encephalitis)
Transient tic disorder
  • Single or multiple motor and/or vocal tics occurring many times a day nearly every day for at least 4 weeks but no longer than 12 consecutive months
  • Criteria for Tourette’s disorder or chronic motor or vocal tic disorder have never been met
Chronic motor or vocal tic disorder
  • Single or multiple motor or vocal tics, but not both, have been present at some time during the illness
  • Tics occur many times a day nearly every day or intermittently for more than 1 year, without a tic-free period of more than 3 consecutive months
  • Criteria for Tourette’s disorder or chronic motor or vocal tic disorder have never been met
Tourette’s disorder
  • Both multiple motor and one or more vocal tics have been present at some time during the illness, although not necessarily concurrently
  • Tics occur many times a day (usually in bouts) nearly every day or intermittently for more than 1 year, without a tic-free period of more than 3 consecutive months
Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR

TICS’ FLUCTUATING COURSE

Tics and Tourette’s disorder are characterized by a fluctuating course. Tic activity tends to occur in bursts over hours to weeks, followed by relative quiescence—spontaneously varying from one extreme to the other. Tics:

  • are often preceded by mounting tension
  • occur most frequently without volition, although they can be consciously suppressed
  • are influenced by emotional state and tend to worsen during increased stress, excitement, or fatigue.

This variable natural history limits the value of uncontrolled studies, as symptom changes are not necessarily treatment-related.

DSM-IV-TR lists three types of childhood tic disorders (Table 1). Transient tics are seen in up to 10% of children, chronic tics are less common, and Tourette’s disorder has a community prevalence of 0.1 to 0.8%.1 Tic disorders usually present by age 112 and are three times more common in boys than in girls. One-half of cases remit spontaneously by late adolescence or adulthood, with important treatment implications.2

Causes. Neurophysiologic studies suggest disinhibition and dysfunction of dopamine and related serotonergic pathways in the cortico-striatal-thalamic-cortical circuit.3 Corollary neuroimaging studies have found decreased metabolism and blood flow in the basal ganglia—specifically the caudate nucleus, thalamus, globus pallidus, and putamen—and increased activity in the frontotemporal cortex—specifically the prefrontal and supplementary motor areas.4,5

Comorbidities. Tics and Tourette’s disorder rarely occur in isolation. The most common comorbidities and the frequencies with which they occur with tic disorders and Tourette’s disorder are:

  • ADHD (50% and 90%)6
  • obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD)(11% and 80%)6
  • major depressive disorder (40% and 44%).1,6

Additional comorbid problems include rage attacks, poor impulse control, and learning disorders. Many children with Tourette’s disorder display explosive rage.7

GUIDE TO WORKUP

During initial assessment, clearly delineate the onset, severity, complexity, and course of tics. Use empirically validated instruments—such as the Yale Global Tic Severity Scale8—at baseline and follow-up visits to monitor the natural history and clinical course, including treatment response. Determine predominant sources of distress and domains of impaired function.

Identify comorbid psychiatric illnesses (Box). Often, tics are not impairing9 and take on less clinical importance than the associated disorders. Prioritize target symptoms after considering the youth’s and family’s wishes. Follow a multidisciplinary approach, including behavioral, psychotherapeutic, and drug treatment as needed. Involve patients’ parents, schools, and teachers to help monitor functional impairment and treatment impact.

Use follow-up visits as needed to monitor treatment effectiveness. Follow-up frequency may decrease after tics are controlled to an acceptable level, although comorbid disorders may require continued attention.

 

 

PANDAS. Consider a diagnosis of pediatric autoimmune neuropsychiatric disorders associated with Streptococcus (PANDAS) when tics present abruptly with upper respiratory tract illness.10 In this context, throat culture and antibody titers for group A beta hemolytic streptococcal infection may be warranted. Treat aggressively with antibiotics such as penicillin V when tests are positive.

Box

Keys to managing childhood tic disorders

  • Assess for comorbid illnesses, then prioritize and treat the most troublesome symptoms
  • Aim to decrease rather than eliminate tic-related discomfort
  • Medicate only if tics cause distress and dysfunction
  • Use one agent when needed at the lowest effective dosage to minimize side effects and drug interactions
  • Involve the family and school to monitor progress
  • Reassess treatment efficacy often

6-STEP TREATMENT APPROACH

A six-step approach—based on our experience and available evidence—can guide treatment. Tics coexisting with ADHD/disruptive disorders, OCD/anxiety disorders, or major depressive disorder call for specialized strategies (Algorithm).

Step 1: Nondrug therapies. Psychoeducation, supportive therapy, and behavioral therapy are appropriate for all patients with burdensome tics. The unusual behaviors associated with tic disorders may have a far-reaching impact on a child’s functioning, self-esteem, and confidence. These effects can be moderated when children and their families understand tics’ fluctuating nature, including their:

  • increase with stress and fatigue
  • capacity for brief inhibition
  • and high rate of spontaneous remission.

Because of this fluctuating pattern, observe the patient for a few weeks before starting medical treatment, unless dysfunction is severe. Observation is especially useful for initial presentations, in which symptom peaks tend to precede quiescence. Carefully weigh the benefits and potential risks of medical treatment for each patient.

Behavioral options include habit reversal, relaxation training, and self-monitoring. One of the few studies of behavioral therapy found tic symptoms decreased 55% with habit reversal, 44% with self-monitoring, and 32% with relaxation training.11

Step 2: Adrenergic alpha-2 agonists. If medication seems appropriate for moderate to severe tics, we recommend clonidine or guanfacine (Table 2) as first-line therapy. These agents decrease the release of norepinephrine, dopamine, and gluta-mate, and norepinephrine turnover.12 They are commonly used to treat Tourette’s disorder because they are better tolerated than antipsychotics, although controlled studies supporting their use are limited and the FDA has not approved this indication.

Approximately one-fourth of Tourette’s disorder patients respond well to clonidine.6 Pulse and blood pressure need to be monitored when using these medications, which in rare cases cause hypotension, bradycardia, and cardiac conduction delay. Because of its sedating properties, clonidine is frequently given at bedtime to promote sleep. Use caution when giving clonidine with medications that have potential cardiovascular effects—such as propranolol or tricyclic antidepressants.

Guanfacine is similar to clonidine except that it binds alpha-2a receptors more selectively and has a longer half-life. As such, it is associated with lower rates of sedation and hypotension than clonidine.

Step 3: Atypical antipsychotics. If symptoms do not respond adequately to an adrenergic alpha-2 agonist, try an atypical antipsychotic. Atypicals block dopamine (D2) receptors and—as a result of serotonergic-2 blockade—are less likely to cause extrapyramidal symptoms than are older antipsychotics.

Risperidone, the most studied atypical in Tourette’s disorder, has been shown to reduce symptoms by 21 to 61%—an effect significantly greater than placebo13 and similar to that of pimozide14 and clonidine. Because it is also relatively well-tolerated, a risperidone trial is warranted before using typical antipsychotics. Tics may worsen during withdrawal while switching a patient from a typical to an atypical antipsychotic.

In one comparative, crossover study in adults with severe Tourette’s disorder, olanzapine was more effective at 5 and 10 mg/d than pimozide at 2 and 4 mg/d, respectively.15 Weight gain and abnormal glucose tolerance associated with olanzapine may be troublesome side effects. Ziprasidone has demonstrated a 35% decrease in tic symptoms in placebo-controlled studies.16 Its use has been associated with increased risk of QTc interval prolongation, requiring ECG monitoring.

Two case series have reported positive effects when quetiapine was used for tics and Tourette’s disorder.17 Like clozapine (which is ineffective for tics), quetiapine has relatively low D2 antagonist potency, suggesting its efficacy in treating tics may be limited. Unlike clozapine, however, quetiapine has few anticholinergic effects. Aripiprazole’s pharmacodynamic profile suggests similar efficacy, but its use in tic disorders has not been validated.

Algorithm 6-step treatment approach to tics and Tourette’s disorder


Further controlled trials of atypical antipsychotics in children and adolescents with tic disorders are needed. ECGs are recommended to monitor QTc intervals when using these medications.

Step 4: Typical antipsychotics. Haloperidol is the most commonly used medication for treating pediatric Tourette’s disorder13 and one of two drugs (pimozide is the other) approved by the FDA for this indication. These postsynaptic D2 antagonists are the most-studied and most-potent medications for treating tics and Tourette’s disorder. Many other typical antipsychotics such as fluphenazine, thioridazine, trifluoperazine, molindone, and thiothixene also have been used.

 

 

In controlled trials, haloperidol improved symptoms by 43 to 66%,18 which was greater than placebo and equal to the effect of fluphenazine and trifluoperazine. Haloperidol, however, demonstrated a higher rate of EPS.

Pimozide’s indication for pediatric Tourette’s disorder applies only to treatmentrefractory cases. In controlled studies, pimozide was at least as effective as haloperidol,18 equal to risperidone14 and less effective than olanzapine.15 Pimozide caused fewer side effects than haloperidol but more than atypical antipsychotics. Pimozide may cause QTc prolongation, and regular ECG monitoring is required.

Despite their efficacy, typical antipsychotics are associated with common and occasionally severe side effects that limit their long-term tolerability.6 Fear of tardive dyskinesia generally limits their use to only severe and treatmentresistant cases.

Step 5: Benzodiazepines. Although controlled trials of tic disorders have not evaluated benzodiazepines, these drugs were effective adjuncts in one case series using haloperidol.6 Anecdotal reports suggest they may reduce tics indirectly by lessening anxiety. Many experienced clinicians use clonazepam, 0.5 to 3 mg/d, or lorazepam, 0.5 to 4 mg/d, to treat Tourette’s disorder. Aside from its anxiolytic effects, clonazepam is also considered a minor mood stabilizer.

Step 6: Other options. Numerous novel medications have been studied in trials of tics and Tourette’s, although most—including the mixed D1/D2 agonist pergolide—have not been proven effective. In an uncontrolled study, the parenteral opioid antagonist naloxone decreased tics at low doses and increased them at higher doses. Botulinum toxin, nicotine, mecamylamine (a nicotine antagonist), baclofen, and flutamide have not proven efficacy in placebo-controlled trials.

Transcranial magnetic stimulation and neurosurgery have been used in patients with severe refractory tics and Tourette’s disorder but are not well-established treatments.

TICS AND COMORBIDITIES

ADHD. When it presents with tics, ADHD is frequently an independent target—or even the main target—of management. Because stimulants may exacerbate tics, nonstimulant medications such as clonidine, guanfacine, or desipramine could be tried first.19 Clonidine has been shown to ameliorate aggression, hyperactivity, and impulsivity but has sedating side effects. Atomoxetine—a nonstimulant ADHD medication—is another option for youth with comorbid tics and ADHD.

In our experience, carefully monitored stimulant trials may also be tried. A recent controlled trial showed that methylphenidate and clonidine, separately and combined, are effective for ADHD and comorbid Tourette’s disorder.20 Stimulants of potential benefit include methylphenidate and amphetamine (not just dextroamphetamine), including their long-acting formulations. Combining stimulants with antipsychotics or clonidine may also be useful.

Table 2

Recommended drugs and dosages for pediatric tics and Tourette’s disorder*

Class/drugStarting dosage (mg/d)Dosage increase intervalDosage range (mg/d)Dosing regimePotency/CYP-450 pathwayDelay to onset
Alpha2 agonists
Clonidine0.025-0.055 to 7 days0.1-0.3bid or tid (patch every 5 to 7 days)N/A2 to 8 wks
Guanfacine0.55 to 7 days0.5-4bid to tidN/A2 to 8 wks
Side effects Common: dry mouth, drowsiness, dizziness, sedation, weakness, skin rashes (patch)
Rare: hypotension, bradycardia, conduction delay, rebound symptoms
Atypical antipsychotics
Risperidone0.25-17 to 21 days0.5-6qd to bidhigh/ 2D6, 3A42 to 4 wks
Olanzapine2.5-57 to 21 days2.5-10qd to bidmedium/ 1A2, 2D62 to 4 wks
Ziprasidone207 to 21 days40-160qd to bidmedium/ 3A42 to 4 wks
Quetiapine12.5-257 to 21 days100-600qd to bidlow/ 3A42 to 4 wks
Side effects Common: weight gain (especially in youth), sedation
Rare: hepatic enzyme elevation, extrapyramidal symptoms (EPS), increased QTc interval (ziprasidone)
Typical antipsychotics
Haloperidol0.25-0.57 to 21 days2-10 mgqd to tidhigh/ 2D6, 3A42 to 4 wks
Pimozide0.57 to 21 days1-8 mgqd to tidhigh/ 1A2, 2D6, 3A42 to 4 wks
Side effects Common: EPS (acute dystonia, akathisia, parkinsonism), sedation, weight gain, dysphoria, cognitive dulling, increased plasma prolactin
Rare: neuroleptic malignant syndrome (potentially fatal: autonomic instability, hyperthermia and muscular rigidity); tardive dyskinesia; increased QTc interval (pimozide)
Tricyclic antidepressants
Desipramine255 to 7 days2.5-5 /kg/dqd to bid2D63 to 6 wks
Nortriptyline105 to 7 days0.5-3 /kg/dqd to bid2D63 to 6 wks
Imipramine255 to 7 days2.5-5 /kg/dqd to bid2C19, 2D6, 3A43 to 6 wks
Clomipramine255 to 7 days3 /kg/dqd to bid2C19, 2D6, 3A43 to 6 wks
Side effects Common: anticholinergic (dry mouth, blurred vision, constipation); antihistaminic (sedation, weight gain); and antialpha adrenergic (dizziness)
Rare: heart palpitations, seizures, hepatic enzyme elevations, increased QTc interval
* Benzodiazepines (clonazepam or lorazepam) may be useful adjuncts; see text for side effects and dosages.
Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR

To control rage attacks, a trial of mood stabilizers or atypical antipsychotics may be combined with standard tic medications.

Tricyclic antidepressants have been used to treat tics—especially in children with comorbid ADHD.21 A case series and controlled study by Singer et al of desipramine and clonidine found no significant impact on tics,22 although this trial was limited by a fixed dose design and few assessment points.

More recently, a double-blind, placebo-controlled trial found a 58% decrease in tic symptoms with desipramine (mean dosage 3.4 mg/kg/d) in patients with tics and ADHD.19 This effect was associated with small increases in heart rate and blood pressure.

 

 

Tricyclics’ potential toxicity in overdose and anticholinergic side effects require caution and may limit their use. However, they can be considered as adjuncts in treating chronic tic disorders, especially with comorbid ADHD. Serum levels and ECG monitoring every 3 to 6 months are required to rule out prolonged conduction times and tachycardia. Concurrent methylphenidate use may increase serum desipramine levels, and concurrent pimozide use may increase risk for arrhythmias.

OCD and anxiety disorders. Medically treating anxiety can help indirectly to manage tics, which are sensitive to stress.9 OCD comorbidity is especially common in youth with a family history of Tourette’s disorder.6 Screening for OCD is important, as its secretive symptoms frequently go unnoticed and its prognosis may be poorer with a concurrent tic disorder.

Standard treatment for pediatric OCD is cognitive-behavioral therapy, followed when needed by selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs), then clomipramine. These treatments are added to tic management, with attention to primary and comorbid symptoms. Anecdotal reports suggest that SSRIs occasionally exacerbate tics. Similarly, behavioral side effects are common in younger children treated with SSRIs and may aggravate ADHD symptoms.

Mood disorders. Except for tricyclics, antidepressants have been ineffective at reducing tics/Tourette’s disorder. Tricyclics, however, have not been proven effective in depressed youth, in part because of methodologic limitations in controlled trials. Even so, tricyclics may help some children with tics and major depressive disorder. SSRIs combined with usual tic treatment may also be tried, with monitoring for tic worsening.9 To control rage attacks, a trial of mood stabilizers or atypical antipsychotics may be combined with standard tic medications.

Related resources

  • Leckman JF, Cohen DJ (ed). Tourette’s syndrome. Tics, obsessions, compulsions: developmental psychopathology and clinical care. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1999.
  • Jankovic J. Tourette’s syndrome. N Engl J Med 2001;345(16):1184-92.
  • Martin A, Scahill L, Charney DS, Leckman JF (ed). Pediatric psychopharmacology: principles and practice. New York: Oxford University Press, 2003.
  • Tourette Syndrome Association. www.tsa-usa.org

Drug brand names

  • Aripiprazole • Abilify
  • Atomoxetine • Strattera
  • Desipramine • Norpramin
  • Clomipramine • Anafranil
  • Clonazepam • Klonopin
  • Clonidine • Catapres
  • Clozapine • Clozaril
  • Desipramine • Norpramin
  • Fluphenazine • Permitil, Prolixin
  • Guanfacine • Tenex
  • Haldoperidol • Haldol
  • Imipramine • Tofranil
  • Lorazepam • Ativan
  • Molindone • Moban
  • Nortriptyline • Pamelor
  • Olanzapine • Zyprexa
  • Pimozide • Orap
  • Quetiapine • Seroquel
  • Risperidone • Risperdal
  • Thioridazine • Mellaril
  • Thiothixine • Navane
  • Trifluoperazine • Stelazine
  • Ziprasidone • Geodon

Disclosure

Dr. Stewart and Loren Gianini report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Dr. Geller receives grant/research support from Eli Lilly and Co. and Forest Laboratories Inc., is a consultant to GlaxoSmithKline, and is a speaker for Eli Lilly and Co., Wyeth Pharmaceuticals, Novartis Pharmaceuticals Corp., and Shire Pharmaceuticals Group.

Dr. Spencer receives research/grant support from and is a speaker or consultant for Abbott Laboratories, Ortho-McNeil Pharmaceutical Inc., GlaxoSmithKline, Eli Lilly and Co., Novartis Pharmaceuticals Corp., Pfizer Inc., Shire Pharmaceuticals Group, and Wyeth Pharmaceuticals.

References

1. Sukhodolsky DG, Scahill L, Zhang H, et al. Disruptive behavior in children with Tourette’s syndrome: association with ADHD comorbidity, tic severity, and functional impairment. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2003;42(1):98-105.

2. Jankovic J. Tourette’s syndrome. N Engl J Med 2001;345(16):1184-92.

3. Leckman JF, Goodman WK, Anderson GM, et al. CSF biogenic amines in obsessive-compulsive disorder and Tourette’s syndrome. Neuropsychopharmacology 1995;12:73-86.

4. Braun AR, Stoetter B, Randolph C, et al. The functional neuroanatomy of Tourette’s syndrome: An FDG-PET study: I. Regional changes in cerebral glucose metabolism differentiating patients and controls. Neuropsychopharmacology 1993;9:277-91.

5. Moriarty J, Campos D, Schmitz B, et al. Brain perfusion abnormalities in Gilles de la Tourette’s syndrome. Br J Psychiatry 1995;167:249-54.

6. Leckman JF. Cohen DJ (eds). Tourette’s syndrome. Tics, obsessions, compulsions: developmental psychopathology and clinical care. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1999.

7. Budman C, Bruun R, Park K, Olson M. Rage attacks in children and adolescents with Tourette’s disorder: a pilot study. J Clin Psychiatry 1998;59(11):576-80.

8. Leckman JF, Riddle MA, Hardin MT, et al. The Yale Global Tic Severity Scale: Initial testing of a clinician-rated scale of tic severity. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1989;28(4):566-73.

9. Spencer T, Biederman J, Harding M, et al. Disentangling the overlap between Tourette’s disorder and ADHD. J Child Psychol Psychiatry 1999;39:1037-44.

10. Swedo SE, Leonard HL, Garvey M, et al. Pediatric autoimmune neuropsychiatric disorders associated with streptococcal infections: clinical description of the first 50 cases. Am J Psychiatry 1998;155:264-71.

11. Peterson AL, Azrin NH. An evaluation of behavioral treatments for Tourette syndrome. Behav Res Ther 1992;30(2):167-74.

12. Leckman JF, Hardin MT, Riddle MA, et al. Clonidine treatment of Gilles de la Tourette’s syndrome. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1991;48(4):324-8.

13. Dion Y, Annable L, Sandor P, Chouinard G. Risperidone in the treatment of Tourette syndrome: a double-blind, placebo-controlled trial. J Clin Psychopharmacology 2002;22(1):31-9.

14. Bruggeman R, van der Linden C, Buitelaar JK, et al. Risperidone versus pimozide in Tourette’s disorder: a comparative double-blind parallel-group study. J Clin Psychiatry 2001;62(1):50-6.

15. Onofrj M, Paci C, D’Andreamatteo G, Toma L. Olanzapine in severe Gilles de la Tourette syndrome: a 52-week double-blind, cross-over study vs. low-dose pimozide. J Neurol 2000;247:443-6.

16. Sallee FR, Kurlan R, Goetz, et al. Ziprasidone treatment of children and adolescents with Tourette’s syndrome: a pilot study. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2000;39(3):292-9.

17. Parraga HC, Parraga MI, Woodward RL, Fenning PA. Quetiapine treatment of children with Tourette’s syndrome: report of two cases. J Child Adolesc Psychopharmacology 2001;11(2):187-91.

18. Sallee FR, Nesbitt L, Jackson C, et al. Relative efficacy of haloperidol and pimozide in children and adolescents with Tourette’s disorder. Am J Psychiatry 1997;154(8):1057-62.

19. Spencer T, Biederman J, Coffey B, et al. A double-blind comparison of desipramine and placebo in children and adolescents with chronic tic disorder and comorbid attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2002;59(7):649-56.

20. Kurlan R. for the Tourette’s Syndrome Study Group. Treatment of ADHD in children with tics: A randomized controlled trial. Neurology 2002;58:527-36.

21. Spencer T, Biederman J, Kerman K, et al. Desipramine treatment of children with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder and tic disorder or Tourette’s syndrome. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1993;32(2):354-60.

22. Singer HS, Brown J, Quaskey S, et al. The treatment of attentiondeficit hyperactivity disorder in Tourette’s syndrome: A double-blind, placebo-controlled study with clonidine and desipramine. Pediatrics 1995;95(1):74-81.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Evelyn S. Stewart, MD, FRCPC
Research fellow, department of psychiatry Harvard University, Boston

Daniel Geller, MBBS, FRACP
Assistant professor, department of psychiatry Harvard University, Boston

Thomas Spencer, MD
Associate professor,department of psychiatry Harvard University, Boston

Loren Gianini, BA
Research assistant Pediatric psychopharmacology research program Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(10)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
45-56
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Evelyn S. Stewart, MD, FRCPC
Research fellow, department of psychiatry Harvard University, Boston

Daniel Geller, MBBS, FRACP
Assistant professor, department of psychiatry Harvard University, Boston

Thomas Spencer, MD
Associate professor,department of psychiatry Harvard University, Boston

Loren Gianini, BA
Research assistant Pediatric psychopharmacology research program Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston

Author and Disclosure Information

Evelyn S. Stewart, MD, FRCPC
Research fellow, department of psychiatry Harvard University, Boston

Daniel Geller, MBBS, FRACP
Assistant professor, department of psychiatry Harvard University, Boston

Thomas Spencer, MD
Associate professor,department of psychiatry Harvard University, Boston

Loren Gianini, BA
Research assistant Pediatric psychopharmacology research program Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston

Article PDF
Article PDF

When managing pediatric tics and Tourette’s disorder, we do not seek to eliminate tic symptoms. Instead—based on evidence and our experience—we use a six-step approach to increase tic control, decrease our patients’ embarrassment and discomfort, and help them function more normally.

Drug therapy is not appropriate for all children and adolescents with tic disorders. Mild transient tics and Tourette’s disorder usually do not require treatment, and medications should not be given to patients whose tics do not impair their quality of life. Treatment is warranted, however, when tics interfere with peer relations, social interactions, academic performance, or activities of daily living.

Standard treatment of pediatric tic disorders is changing. Instead of using typical antipsychotics, many experienced clinicians are using other medications that are safer and more effective, particularly for children and adolescents with psychiatric comorbidities such as attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD). In these patients, it is difficult to avoid drug interactions and exacerbation of non-targeted conditions when you attempt to control the tics.

Table 1

Diagnostic criteria for tic disorders

Shared characteristics
  • Tics defined as sudden, rapid, recurrent, nonrhythmic, stereotyped motor movement or vocalization
  • Onset before age 18
  • Not caused by direct physiologic effects of a substance (such as stimulants) or general medical condition (such as Huntington’s disease or postviral encephalitis)
Transient tic disorder
  • Single or multiple motor and/or vocal tics occurring many times a day nearly every day for at least 4 weeks but no longer than 12 consecutive months
  • Criteria for Tourette’s disorder or chronic motor or vocal tic disorder have never been met
Chronic motor or vocal tic disorder
  • Single or multiple motor or vocal tics, but not both, have been present at some time during the illness
  • Tics occur many times a day nearly every day or intermittently for more than 1 year, without a tic-free period of more than 3 consecutive months
  • Criteria for Tourette’s disorder or chronic motor or vocal tic disorder have never been met
Tourette’s disorder
  • Both multiple motor and one or more vocal tics have been present at some time during the illness, although not necessarily concurrently
  • Tics occur many times a day (usually in bouts) nearly every day or intermittently for more than 1 year, without a tic-free period of more than 3 consecutive months
Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR

TICS’ FLUCTUATING COURSE

Tics and Tourette’s disorder are characterized by a fluctuating course. Tic activity tends to occur in bursts over hours to weeks, followed by relative quiescence—spontaneously varying from one extreme to the other. Tics:

  • are often preceded by mounting tension
  • occur most frequently without volition, although they can be consciously suppressed
  • are influenced by emotional state and tend to worsen during increased stress, excitement, or fatigue.

This variable natural history limits the value of uncontrolled studies, as symptom changes are not necessarily treatment-related.

DSM-IV-TR lists three types of childhood tic disorders (Table 1). Transient tics are seen in up to 10% of children, chronic tics are less common, and Tourette’s disorder has a community prevalence of 0.1 to 0.8%.1 Tic disorders usually present by age 112 and are three times more common in boys than in girls. One-half of cases remit spontaneously by late adolescence or adulthood, with important treatment implications.2

Causes. Neurophysiologic studies suggest disinhibition and dysfunction of dopamine and related serotonergic pathways in the cortico-striatal-thalamic-cortical circuit.3 Corollary neuroimaging studies have found decreased metabolism and blood flow in the basal ganglia—specifically the caudate nucleus, thalamus, globus pallidus, and putamen—and increased activity in the frontotemporal cortex—specifically the prefrontal and supplementary motor areas.4,5

Comorbidities. Tics and Tourette’s disorder rarely occur in isolation. The most common comorbidities and the frequencies with which they occur with tic disorders and Tourette’s disorder are:

  • ADHD (50% and 90%)6
  • obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD)(11% and 80%)6
  • major depressive disorder (40% and 44%).1,6

Additional comorbid problems include rage attacks, poor impulse control, and learning disorders. Many children with Tourette’s disorder display explosive rage.7

GUIDE TO WORKUP

During initial assessment, clearly delineate the onset, severity, complexity, and course of tics. Use empirically validated instruments—such as the Yale Global Tic Severity Scale8—at baseline and follow-up visits to monitor the natural history and clinical course, including treatment response. Determine predominant sources of distress and domains of impaired function.

Identify comorbid psychiatric illnesses (Box). Often, tics are not impairing9 and take on less clinical importance than the associated disorders. Prioritize target symptoms after considering the youth’s and family’s wishes. Follow a multidisciplinary approach, including behavioral, psychotherapeutic, and drug treatment as needed. Involve patients’ parents, schools, and teachers to help monitor functional impairment and treatment impact.

Use follow-up visits as needed to monitor treatment effectiveness. Follow-up frequency may decrease after tics are controlled to an acceptable level, although comorbid disorders may require continued attention.

 

 

PANDAS. Consider a diagnosis of pediatric autoimmune neuropsychiatric disorders associated with Streptococcus (PANDAS) when tics present abruptly with upper respiratory tract illness.10 In this context, throat culture and antibody titers for group A beta hemolytic streptococcal infection may be warranted. Treat aggressively with antibiotics such as penicillin V when tests are positive.

Box

Keys to managing childhood tic disorders

  • Assess for comorbid illnesses, then prioritize and treat the most troublesome symptoms
  • Aim to decrease rather than eliminate tic-related discomfort
  • Medicate only if tics cause distress and dysfunction
  • Use one agent when needed at the lowest effective dosage to minimize side effects and drug interactions
  • Involve the family and school to monitor progress
  • Reassess treatment efficacy often

6-STEP TREATMENT APPROACH

A six-step approach—based on our experience and available evidence—can guide treatment. Tics coexisting with ADHD/disruptive disorders, OCD/anxiety disorders, or major depressive disorder call for specialized strategies (Algorithm).

Step 1: Nondrug therapies. Psychoeducation, supportive therapy, and behavioral therapy are appropriate for all patients with burdensome tics. The unusual behaviors associated with tic disorders may have a far-reaching impact on a child’s functioning, self-esteem, and confidence. These effects can be moderated when children and their families understand tics’ fluctuating nature, including their:

  • increase with stress and fatigue
  • capacity for brief inhibition
  • and high rate of spontaneous remission.

Because of this fluctuating pattern, observe the patient for a few weeks before starting medical treatment, unless dysfunction is severe. Observation is especially useful for initial presentations, in which symptom peaks tend to precede quiescence. Carefully weigh the benefits and potential risks of medical treatment for each patient.

Behavioral options include habit reversal, relaxation training, and self-monitoring. One of the few studies of behavioral therapy found tic symptoms decreased 55% with habit reversal, 44% with self-monitoring, and 32% with relaxation training.11

Step 2: Adrenergic alpha-2 agonists. If medication seems appropriate for moderate to severe tics, we recommend clonidine or guanfacine (Table 2) as first-line therapy. These agents decrease the release of norepinephrine, dopamine, and gluta-mate, and norepinephrine turnover.12 They are commonly used to treat Tourette’s disorder because they are better tolerated than antipsychotics, although controlled studies supporting their use are limited and the FDA has not approved this indication.

Approximately one-fourth of Tourette’s disorder patients respond well to clonidine.6 Pulse and blood pressure need to be monitored when using these medications, which in rare cases cause hypotension, bradycardia, and cardiac conduction delay. Because of its sedating properties, clonidine is frequently given at bedtime to promote sleep. Use caution when giving clonidine with medications that have potential cardiovascular effects—such as propranolol or tricyclic antidepressants.

Guanfacine is similar to clonidine except that it binds alpha-2a receptors more selectively and has a longer half-life. As such, it is associated with lower rates of sedation and hypotension than clonidine.

Step 3: Atypical antipsychotics. If symptoms do not respond adequately to an adrenergic alpha-2 agonist, try an atypical antipsychotic. Atypicals block dopamine (D2) receptors and—as a result of serotonergic-2 blockade—are less likely to cause extrapyramidal symptoms than are older antipsychotics.

Risperidone, the most studied atypical in Tourette’s disorder, has been shown to reduce symptoms by 21 to 61%—an effect significantly greater than placebo13 and similar to that of pimozide14 and clonidine. Because it is also relatively well-tolerated, a risperidone trial is warranted before using typical antipsychotics. Tics may worsen during withdrawal while switching a patient from a typical to an atypical antipsychotic.

In one comparative, crossover study in adults with severe Tourette’s disorder, olanzapine was more effective at 5 and 10 mg/d than pimozide at 2 and 4 mg/d, respectively.15 Weight gain and abnormal glucose tolerance associated with olanzapine may be troublesome side effects. Ziprasidone has demonstrated a 35% decrease in tic symptoms in placebo-controlled studies.16 Its use has been associated with increased risk of QTc interval prolongation, requiring ECG monitoring.

Two case series have reported positive effects when quetiapine was used for tics and Tourette’s disorder.17 Like clozapine (which is ineffective for tics), quetiapine has relatively low D2 antagonist potency, suggesting its efficacy in treating tics may be limited. Unlike clozapine, however, quetiapine has few anticholinergic effects. Aripiprazole’s pharmacodynamic profile suggests similar efficacy, but its use in tic disorders has not been validated.

Algorithm 6-step treatment approach to tics and Tourette’s disorder


Further controlled trials of atypical antipsychotics in children and adolescents with tic disorders are needed. ECGs are recommended to monitor QTc intervals when using these medications.

Step 4: Typical antipsychotics. Haloperidol is the most commonly used medication for treating pediatric Tourette’s disorder13 and one of two drugs (pimozide is the other) approved by the FDA for this indication. These postsynaptic D2 antagonists are the most-studied and most-potent medications for treating tics and Tourette’s disorder. Many other typical antipsychotics such as fluphenazine, thioridazine, trifluoperazine, molindone, and thiothixene also have been used.

 

 

In controlled trials, haloperidol improved symptoms by 43 to 66%,18 which was greater than placebo and equal to the effect of fluphenazine and trifluoperazine. Haloperidol, however, demonstrated a higher rate of EPS.

Pimozide’s indication for pediatric Tourette’s disorder applies only to treatmentrefractory cases. In controlled studies, pimozide was at least as effective as haloperidol,18 equal to risperidone14 and less effective than olanzapine.15 Pimozide caused fewer side effects than haloperidol but more than atypical antipsychotics. Pimozide may cause QTc prolongation, and regular ECG monitoring is required.

Despite their efficacy, typical antipsychotics are associated with common and occasionally severe side effects that limit their long-term tolerability.6 Fear of tardive dyskinesia generally limits their use to only severe and treatmentresistant cases.

Step 5: Benzodiazepines. Although controlled trials of tic disorders have not evaluated benzodiazepines, these drugs were effective adjuncts in one case series using haloperidol.6 Anecdotal reports suggest they may reduce tics indirectly by lessening anxiety. Many experienced clinicians use clonazepam, 0.5 to 3 mg/d, or lorazepam, 0.5 to 4 mg/d, to treat Tourette’s disorder. Aside from its anxiolytic effects, clonazepam is also considered a minor mood stabilizer.

Step 6: Other options. Numerous novel medications have been studied in trials of tics and Tourette’s, although most—including the mixed D1/D2 agonist pergolide—have not been proven effective. In an uncontrolled study, the parenteral opioid antagonist naloxone decreased tics at low doses and increased them at higher doses. Botulinum toxin, nicotine, mecamylamine (a nicotine antagonist), baclofen, and flutamide have not proven efficacy in placebo-controlled trials.

Transcranial magnetic stimulation and neurosurgery have been used in patients with severe refractory tics and Tourette’s disorder but are not well-established treatments.

TICS AND COMORBIDITIES

ADHD. When it presents with tics, ADHD is frequently an independent target—or even the main target—of management. Because stimulants may exacerbate tics, nonstimulant medications such as clonidine, guanfacine, or desipramine could be tried first.19 Clonidine has been shown to ameliorate aggression, hyperactivity, and impulsivity but has sedating side effects. Atomoxetine—a nonstimulant ADHD medication—is another option for youth with comorbid tics and ADHD.

In our experience, carefully monitored stimulant trials may also be tried. A recent controlled trial showed that methylphenidate and clonidine, separately and combined, are effective for ADHD and comorbid Tourette’s disorder.20 Stimulants of potential benefit include methylphenidate and amphetamine (not just dextroamphetamine), including their long-acting formulations. Combining stimulants with antipsychotics or clonidine may also be useful.

Table 2

Recommended drugs and dosages for pediatric tics and Tourette’s disorder*

Class/drugStarting dosage (mg/d)Dosage increase intervalDosage range (mg/d)Dosing regimePotency/CYP-450 pathwayDelay to onset
Alpha2 agonists
Clonidine0.025-0.055 to 7 days0.1-0.3bid or tid (patch every 5 to 7 days)N/A2 to 8 wks
Guanfacine0.55 to 7 days0.5-4bid to tidN/A2 to 8 wks
Side effects Common: dry mouth, drowsiness, dizziness, sedation, weakness, skin rashes (patch)
Rare: hypotension, bradycardia, conduction delay, rebound symptoms
Atypical antipsychotics
Risperidone0.25-17 to 21 days0.5-6qd to bidhigh/ 2D6, 3A42 to 4 wks
Olanzapine2.5-57 to 21 days2.5-10qd to bidmedium/ 1A2, 2D62 to 4 wks
Ziprasidone207 to 21 days40-160qd to bidmedium/ 3A42 to 4 wks
Quetiapine12.5-257 to 21 days100-600qd to bidlow/ 3A42 to 4 wks
Side effects Common: weight gain (especially in youth), sedation
Rare: hepatic enzyme elevation, extrapyramidal symptoms (EPS), increased QTc interval (ziprasidone)
Typical antipsychotics
Haloperidol0.25-0.57 to 21 days2-10 mgqd to tidhigh/ 2D6, 3A42 to 4 wks
Pimozide0.57 to 21 days1-8 mgqd to tidhigh/ 1A2, 2D6, 3A42 to 4 wks
Side effects Common: EPS (acute dystonia, akathisia, parkinsonism), sedation, weight gain, dysphoria, cognitive dulling, increased plasma prolactin
Rare: neuroleptic malignant syndrome (potentially fatal: autonomic instability, hyperthermia and muscular rigidity); tardive dyskinesia; increased QTc interval (pimozide)
Tricyclic antidepressants
Desipramine255 to 7 days2.5-5 /kg/dqd to bid2D63 to 6 wks
Nortriptyline105 to 7 days0.5-3 /kg/dqd to bid2D63 to 6 wks
Imipramine255 to 7 days2.5-5 /kg/dqd to bid2C19, 2D6, 3A43 to 6 wks
Clomipramine255 to 7 days3 /kg/dqd to bid2C19, 2D6, 3A43 to 6 wks
Side effects Common: anticholinergic (dry mouth, blurred vision, constipation); antihistaminic (sedation, weight gain); and antialpha adrenergic (dizziness)
Rare: heart palpitations, seizures, hepatic enzyme elevations, increased QTc interval
* Benzodiazepines (clonazepam or lorazepam) may be useful adjuncts; see text for side effects and dosages.
Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR

To control rage attacks, a trial of mood stabilizers or atypical antipsychotics may be combined with standard tic medications.

Tricyclic antidepressants have been used to treat tics—especially in children with comorbid ADHD.21 A case series and controlled study by Singer et al of desipramine and clonidine found no significant impact on tics,22 although this trial was limited by a fixed dose design and few assessment points.

More recently, a double-blind, placebo-controlled trial found a 58% decrease in tic symptoms with desipramine (mean dosage 3.4 mg/kg/d) in patients with tics and ADHD.19 This effect was associated with small increases in heart rate and blood pressure.

 

 

Tricyclics’ potential toxicity in overdose and anticholinergic side effects require caution and may limit their use. However, they can be considered as adjuncts in treating chronic tic disorders, especially with comorbid ADHD. Serum levels and ECG monitoring every 3 to 6 months are required to rule out prolonged conduction times and tachycardia. Concurrent methylphenidate use may increase serum desipramine levels, and concurrent pimozide use may increase risk for arrhythmias.

OCD and anxiety disorders. Medically treating anxiety can help indirectly to manage tics, which are sensitive to stress.9 OCD comorbidity is especially common in youth with a family history of Tourette’s disorder.6 Screening for OCD is important, as its secretive symptoms frequently go unnoticed and its prognosis may be poorer with a concurrent tic disorder.

Standard treatment for pediatric OCD is cognitive-behavioral therapy, followed when needed by selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs), then clomipramine. These treatments are added to tic management, with attention to primary and comorbid symptoms. Anecdotal reports suggest that SSRIs occasionally exacerbate tics. Similarly, behavioral side effects are common in younger children treated with SSRIs and may aggravate ADHD symptoms.

Mood disorders. Except for tricyclics, antidepressants have been ineffective at reducing tics/Tourette’s disorder. Tricyclics, however, have not been proven effective in depressed youth, in part because of methodologic limitations in controlled trials. Even so, tricyclics may help some children with tics and major depressive disorder. SSRIs combined with usual tic treatment may also be tried, with monitoring for tic worsening.9 To control rage attacks, a trial of mood stabilizers or atypical antipsychotics may be combined with standard tic medications.

Related resources

  • Leckman JF, Cohen DJ (ed). Tourette’s syndrome. Tics, obsessions, compulsions: developmental psychopathology and clinical care. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1999.
  • Jankovic J. Tourette’s syndrome. N Engl J Med 2001;345(16):1184-92.
  • Martin A, Scahill L, Charney DS, Leckman JF (ed). Pediatric psychopharmacology: principles and practice. New York: Oxford University Press, 2003.
  • Tourette Syndrome Association. www.tsa-usa.org

Drug brand names

  • Aripiprazole • Abilify
  • Atomoxetine • Strattera
  • Desipramine • Norpramin
  • Clomipramine • Anafranil
  • Clonazepam • Klonopin
  • Clonidine • Catapres
  • Clozapine • Clozaril
  • Desipramine • Norpramin
  • Fluphenazine • Permitil, Prolixin
  • Guanfacine • Tenex
  • Haldoperidol • Haldol
  • Imipramine • Tofranil
  • Lorazepam • Ativan
  • Molindone • Moban
  • Nortriptyline • Pamelor
  • Olanzapine • Zyprexa
  • Pimozide • Orap
  • Quetiapine • Seroquel
  • Risperidone • Risperdal
  • Thioridazine • Mellaril
  • Thiothixine • Navane
  • Trifluoperazine • Stelazine
  • Ziprasidone • Geodon

Disclosure

Dr. Stewart and Loren Gianini report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Dr. Geller receives grant/research support from Eli Lilly and Co. and Forest Laboratories Inc., is a consultant to GlaxoSmithKline, and is a speaker for Eli Lilly and Co., Wyeth Pharmaceuticals, Novartis Pharmaceuticals Corp., and Shire Pharmaceuticals Group.

Dr. Spencer receives research/grant support from and is a speaker or consultant for Abbott Laboratories, Ortho-McNeil Pharmaceutical Inc., GlaxoSmithKline, Eli Lilly and Co., Novartis Pharmaceuticals Corp., Pfizer Inc., Shire Pharmaceuticals Group, and Wyeth Pharmaceuticals.

When managing pediatric tics and Tourette’s disorder, we do not seek to eliminate tic symptoms. Instead—based on evidence and our experience—we use a six-step approach to increase tic control, decrease our patients’ embarrassment and discomfort, and help them function more normally.

Drug therapy is not appropriate for all children and adolescents with tic disorders. Mild transient tics and Tourette’s disorder usually do not require treatment, and medications should not be given to patients whose tics do not impair their quality of life. Treatment is warranted, however, when tics interfere with peer relations, social interactions, academic performance, or activities of daily living.

Standard treatment of pediatric tic disorders is changing. Instead of using typical antipsychotics, many experienced clinicians are using other medications that are safer and more effective, particularly for children and adolescents with psychiatric comorbidities such as attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD). In these patients, it is difficult to avoid drug interactions and exacerbation of non-targeted conditions when you attempt to control the tics.

Table 1

Diagnostic criteria for tic disorders

Shared characteristics
  • Tics defined as sudden, rapid, recurrent, nonrhythmic, stereotyped motor movement or vocalization
  • Onset before age 18
  • Not caused by direct physiologic effects of a substance (such as stimulants) or general medical condition (such as Huntington’s disease or postviral encephalitis)
Transient tic disorder
  • Single or multiple motor and/or vocal tics occurring many times a day nearly every day for at least 4 weeks but no longer than 12 consecutive months
  • Criteria for Tourette’s disorder or chronic motor or vocal tic disorder have never been met
Chronic motor or vocal tic disorder
  • Single or multiple motor or vocal tics, but not both, have been present at some time during the illness
  • Tics occur many times a day nearly every day or intermittently for more than 1 year, without a tic-free period of more than 3 consecutive months
  • Criteria for Tourette’s disorder or chronic motor or vocal tic disorder have never been met
Tourette’s disorder
  • Both multiple motor and one or more vocal tics have been present at some time during the illness, although not necessarily concurrently
  • Tics occur many times a day (usually in bouts) nearly every day or intermittently for more than 1 year, without a tic-free period of more than 3 consecutive months
Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR

TICS’ FLUCTUATING COURSE

Tics and Tourette’s disorder are characterized by a fluctuating course. Tic activity tends to occur in bursts over hours to weeks, followed by relative quiescence—spontaneously varying from one extreme to the other. Tics:

  • are often preceded by mounting tension
  • occur most frequently without volition, although they can be consciously suppressed
  • are influenced by emotional state and tend to worsen during increased stress, excitement, or fatigue.

This variable natural history limits the value of uncontrolled studies, as symptom changes are not necessarily treatment-related.

DSM-IV-TR lists three types of childhood tic disorders (Table 1). Transient tics are seen in up to 10% of children, chronic tics are less common, and Tourette’s disorder has a community prevalence of 0.1 to 0.8%.1 Tic disorders usually present by age 112 and are three times more common in boys than in girls. One-half of cases remit spontaneously by late adolescence or adulthood, with important treatment implications.2

Causes. Neurophysiologic studies suggest disinhibition and dysfunction of dopamine and related serotonergic pathways in the cortico-striatal-thalamic-cortical circuit.3 Corollary neuroimaging studies have found decreased metabolism and blood flow in the basal ganglia—specifically the caudate nucleus, thalamus, globus pallidus, and putamen—and increased activity in the frontotemporal cortex—specifically the prefrontal and supplementary motor areas.4,5

Comorbidities. Tics and Tourette’s disorder rarely occur in isolation. The most common comorbidities and the frequencies with which they occur with tic disorders and Tourette’s disorder are:

  • ADHD (50% and 90%)6
  • obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD)(11% and 80%)6
  • major depressive disorder (40% and 44%).1,6

Additional comorbid problems include rage attacks, poor impulse control, and learning disorders. Many children with Tourette’s disorder display explosive rage.7

GUIDE TO WORKUP

During initial assessment, clearly delineate the onset, severity, complexity, and course of tics. Use empirically validated instruments—such as the Yale Global Tic Severity Scale8—at baseline and follow-up visits to monitor the natural history and clinical course, including treatment response. Determine predominant sources of distress and domains of impaired function.

Identify comorbid psychiatric illnesses (Box). Often, tics are not impairing9 and take on less clinical importance than the associated disorders. Prioritize target symptoms after considering the youth’s and family’s wishes. Follow a multidisciplinary approach, including behavioral, psychotherapeutic, and drug treatment as needed. Involve patients’ parents, schools, and teachers to help monitor functional impairment and treatment impact.

Use follow-up visits as needed to monitor treatment effectiveness. Follow-up frequency may decrease after tics are controlled to an acceptable level, although comorbid disorders may require continued attention.

 

 

PANDAS. Consider a diagnosis of pediatric autoimmune neuropsychiatric disorders associated with Streptococcus (PANDAS) when tics present abruptly with upper respiratory tract illness.10 In this context, throat culture and antibody titers for group A beta hemolytic streptococcal infection may be warranted. Treat aggressively with antibiotics such as penicillin V when tests are positive.

Box

Keys to managing childhood tic disorders

  • Assess for comorbid illnesses, then prioritize and treat the most troublesome symptoms
  • Aim to decrease rather than eliminate tic-related discomfort
  • Medicate only if tics cause distress and dysfunction
  • Use one agent when needed at the lowest effective dosage to minimize side effects and drug interactions
  • Involve the family and school to monitor progress
  • Reassess treatment efficacy often

6-STEP TREATMENT APPROACH

A six-step approach—based on our experience and available evidence—can guide treatment. Tics coexisting with ADHD/disruptive disorders, OCD/anxiety disorders, or major depressive disorder call for specialized strategies (Algorithm).

Step 1: Nondrug therapies. Psychoeducation, supportive therapy, and behavioral therapy are appropriate for all patients with burdensome tics. The unusual behaviors associated with tic disorders may have a far-reaching impact on a child’s functioning, self-esteem, and confidence. These effects can be moderated when children and their families understand tics’ fluctuating nature, including their:

  • increase with stress and fatigue
  • capacity for brief inhibition
  • and high rate of spontaneous remission.

Because of this fluctuating pattern, observe the patient for a few weeks before starting medical treatment, unless dysfunction is severe. Observation is especially useful for initial presentations, in which symptom peaks tend to precede quiescence. Carefully weigh the benefits and potential risks of medical treatment for each patient.

Behavioral options include habit reversal, relaxation training, and self-monitoring. One of the few studies of behavioral therapy found tic symptoms decreased 55% with habit reversal, 44% with self-monitoring, and 32% with relaxation training.11

Step 2: Adrenergic alpha-2 agonists. If medication seems appropriate for moderate to severe tics, we recommend clonidine or guanfacine (Table 2) as first-line therapy. These agents decrease the release of norepinephrine, dopamine, and gluta-mate, and norepinephrine turnover.12 They are commonly used to treat Tourette’s disorder because they are better tolerated than antipsychotics, although controlled studies supporting their use are limited and the FDA has not approved this indication.

Approximately one-fourth of Tourette’s disorder patients respond well to clonidine.6 Pulse and blood pressure need to be monitored when using these medications, which in rare cases cause hypotension, bradycardia, and cardiac conduction delay. Because of its sedating properties, clonidine is frequently given at bedtime to promote sleep. Use caution when giving clonidine with medications that have potential cardiovascular effects—such as propranolol or tricyclic antidepressants.

Guanfacine is similar to clonidine except that it binds alpha-2a receptors more selectively and has a longer half-life. As such, it is associated with lower rates of sedation and hypotension than clonidine.

Step 3: Atypical antipsychotics. If symptoms do not respond adequately to an adrenergic alpha-2 agonist, try an atypical antipsychotic. Atypicals block dopamine (D2) receptors and—as a result of serotonergic-2 blockade—are less likely to cause extrapyramidal symptoms than are older antipsychotics.

Risperidone, the most studied atypical in Tourette’s disorder, has been shown to reduce symptoms by 21 to 61%—an effect significantly greater than placebo13 and similar to that of pimozide14 and clonidine. Because it is also relatively well-tolerated, a risperidone trial is warranted before using typical antipsychotics. Tics may worsen during withdrawal while switching a patient from a typical to an atypical antipsychotic.

In one comparative, crossover study in adults with severe Tourette’s disorder, olanzapine was more effective at 5 and 10 mg/d than pimozide at 2 and 4 mg/d, respectively.15 Weight gain and abnormal glucose tolerance associated with olanzapine may be troublesome side effects. Ziprasidone has demonstrated a 35% decrease in tic symptoms in placebo-controlled studies.16 Its use has been associated with increased risk of QTc interval prolongation, requiring ECG monitoring.

Two case series have reported positive effects when quetiapine was used for tics and Tourette’s disorder.17 Like clozapine (which is ineffective for tics), quetiapine has relatively low D2 antagonist potency, suggesting its efficacy in treating tics may be limited. Unlike clozapine, however, quetiapine has few anticholinergic effects. Aripiprazole’s pharmacodynamic profile suggests similar efficacy, but its use in tic disorders has not been validated.

Algorithm 6-step treatment approach to tics and Tourette’s disorder


Further controlled trials of atypical antipsychotics in children and adolescents with tic disorders are needed. ECGs are recommended to monitor QTc intervals when using these medications.

Step 4: Typical antipsychotics. Haloperidol is the most commonly used medication for treating pediatric Tourette’s disorder13 and one of two drugs (pimozide is the other) approved by the FDA for this indication. These postsynaptic D2 antagonists are the most-studied and most-potent medications for treating tics and Tourette’s disorder. Many other typical antipsychotics such as fluphenazine, thioridazine, trifluoperazine, molindone, and thiothixene also have been used.

 

 

In controlled trials, haloperidol improved symptoms by 43 to 66%,18 which was greater than placebo and equal to the effect of fluphenazine and trifluoperazine. Haloperidol, however, demonstrated a higher rate of EPS.

Pimozide’s indication for pediatric Tourette’s disorder applies only to treatmentrefractory cases. In controlled studies, pimozide was at least as effective as haloperidol,18 equal to risperidone14 and less effective than olanzapine.15 Pimozide caused fewer side effects than haloperidol but more than atypical antipsychotics. Pimozide may cause QTc prolongation, and regular ECG monitoring is required.

Despite their efficacy, typical antipsychotics are associated with common and occasionally severe side effects that limit their long-term tolerability.6 Fear of tardive dyskinesia generally limits their use to only severe and treatmentresistant cases.

Step 5: Benzodiazepines. Although controlled trials of tic disorders have not evaluated benzodiazepines, these drugs were effective adjuncts in one case series using haloperidol.6 Anecdotal reports suggest they may reduce tics indirectly by lessening anxiety. Many experienced clinicians use clonazepam, 0.5 to 3 mg/d, or lorazepam, 0.5 to 4 mg/d, to treat Tourette’s disorder. Aside from its anxiolytic effects, clonazepam is also considered a minor mood stabilizer.

Step 6: Other options. Numerous novel medications have been studied in trials of tics and Tourette’s, although most—including the mixed D1/D2 agonist pergolide—have not been proven effective. In an uncontrolled study, the parenteral opioid antagonist naloxone decreased tics at low doses and increased them at higher doses. Botulinum toxin, nicotine, mecamylamine (a nicotine antagonist), baclofen, and flutamide have not proven efficacy in placebo-controlled trials.

Transcranial magnetic stimulation and neurosurgery have been used in patients with severe refractory tics and Tourette’s disorder but are not well-established treatments.

TICS AND COMORBIDITIES

ADHD. When it presents with tics, ADHD is frequently an independent target—or even the main target—of management. Because stimulants may exacerbate tics, nonstimulant medications such as clonidine, guanfacine, or desipramine could be tried first.19 Clonidine has been shown to ameliorate aggression, hyperactivity, and impulsivity but has sedating side effects. Atomoxetine—a nonstimulant ADHD medication—is another option for youth with comorbid tics and ADHD.

In our experience, carefully monitored stimulant trials may also be tried. A recent controlled trial showed that methylphenidate and clonidine, separately and combined, are effective for ADHD and comorbid Tourette’s disorder.20 Stimulants of potential benefit include methylphenidate and amphetamine (not just dextroamphetamine), including their long-acting formulations. Combining stimulants with antipsychotics or clonidine may also be useful.

Table 2

Recommended drugs and dosages for pediatric tics and Tourette’s disorder*

Class/drugStarting dosage (mg/d)Dosage increase intervalDosage range (mg/d)Dosing regimePotency/CYP-450 pathwayDelay to onset
Alpha2 agonists
Clonidine0.025-0.055 to 7 days0.1-0.3bid or tid (patch every 5 to 7 days)N/A2 to 8 wks
Guanfacine0.55 to 7 days0.5-4bid to tidN/A2 to 8 wks
Side effects Common: dry mouth, drowsiness, dizziness, sedation, weakness, skin rashes (patch)
Rare: hypotension, bradycardia, conduction delay, rebound symptoms
Atypical antipsychotics
Risperidone0.25-17 to 21 days0.5-6qd to bidhigh/ 2D6, 3A42 to 4 wks
Olanzapine2.5-57 to 21 days2.5-10qd to bidmedium/ 1A2, 2D62 to 4 wks
Ziprasidone207 to 21 days40-160qd to bidmedium/ 3A42 to 4 wks
Quetiapine12.5-257 to 21 days100-600qd to bidlow/ 3A42 to 4 wks
Side effects Common: weight gain (especially in youth), sedation
Rare: hepatic enzyme elevation, extrapyramidal symptoms (EPS), increased QTc interval (ziprasidone)
Typical antipsychotics
Haloperidol0.25-0.57 to 21 days2-10 mgqd to tidhigh/ 2D6, 3A42 to 4 wks
Pimozide0.57 to 21 days1-8 mgqd to tidhigh/ 1A2, 2D6, 3A42 to 4 wks
Side effects Common: EPS (acute dystonia, akathisia, parkinsonism), sedation, weight gain, dysphoria, cognitive dulling, increased plasma prolactin
Rare: neuroleptic malignant syndrome (potentially fatal: autonomic instability, hyperthermia and muscular rigidity); tardive dyskinesia; increased QTc interval (pimozide)
Tricyclic antidepressants
Desipramine255 to 7 days2.5-5 /kg/dqd to bid2D63 to 6 wks
Nortriptyline105 to 7 days0.5-3 /kg/dqd to bid2D63 to 6 wks
Imipramine255 to 7 days2.5-5 /kg/dqd to bid2C19, 2D6, 3A43 to 6 wks
Clomipramine255 to 7 days3 /kg/dqd to bid2C19, 2D6, 3A43 to 6 wks
Side effects Common: anticholinergic (dry mouth, blurred vision, constipation); antihistaminic (sedation, weight gain); and antialpha adrenergic (dizziness)
Rare: heart palpitations, seizures, hepatic enzyme elevations, increased QTc interval
* Benzodiazepines (clonazepam or lorazepam) may be useful adjuncts; see text for side effects and dosages.
Source: Adapted from DSM-IV-TR

To control rage attacks, a trial of mood stabilizers or atypical antipsychotics may be combined with standard tic medications.

Tricyclic antidepressants have been used to treat tics—especially in children with comorbid ADHD.21 A case series and controlled study by Singer et al of desipramine and clonidine found no significant impact on tics,22 although this trial was limited by a fixed dose design and few assessment points.

More recently, a double-blind, placebo-controlled trial found a 58% decrease in tic symptoms with desipramine (mean dosage 3.4 mg/kg/d) in patients with tics and ADHD.19 This effect was associated with small increases in heart rate and blood pressure.

 

 

Tricyclics’ potential toxicity in overdose and anticholinergic side effects require caution and may limit their use. However, they can be considered as adjuncts in treating chronic tic disorders, especially with comorbid ADHD. Serum levels and ECG monitoring every 3 to 6 months are required to rule out prolonged conduction times and tachycardia. Concurrent methylphenidate use may increase serum desipramine levels, and concurrent pimozide use may increase risk for arrhythmias.

OCD and anxiety disorders. Medically treating anxiety can help indirectly to manage tics, which are sensitive to stress.9 OCD comorbidity is especially common in youth with a family history of Tourette’s disorder.6 Screening for OCD is important, as its secretive symptoms frequently go unnoticed and its prognosis may be poorer with a concurrent tic disorder.

Standard treatment for pediatric OCD is cognitive-behavioral therapy, followed when needed by selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs), then clomipramine. These treatments are added to tic management, with attention to primary and comorbid symptoms. Anecdotal reports suggest that SSRIs occasionally exacerbate tics. Similarly, behavioral side effects are common in younger children treated with SSRIs and may aggravate ADHD symptoms.

Mood disorders. Except for tricyclics, antidepressants have been ineffective at reducing tics/Tourette’s disorder. Tricyclics, however, have not been proven effective in depressed youth, in part because of methodologic limitations in controlled trials. Even so, tricyclics may help some children with tics and major depressive disorder. SSRIs combined with usual tic treatment may also be tried, with monitoring for tic worsening.9 To control rage attacks, a trial of mood stabilizers or atypical antipsychotics may be combined with standard tic medications.

Related resources

  • Leckman JF, Cohen DJ (ed). Tourette’s syndrome. Tics, obsessions, compulsions: developmental psychopathology and clinical care. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1999.
  • Jankovic J. Tourette’s syndrome. N Engl J Med 2001;345(16):1184-92.
  • Martin A, Scahill L, Charney DS, Leckman JF (ed). Pediatric psychopharmacology: principles and practice. New York: Oxford University Press, 2003.
  • Tourette Syndrome Association. www.tsa-usa.org

Drug brand names

  • Aripiprazole • Abilify
  • Atomoxetine • Strattera
  • Desipramine • Norpramin
  • Clomipramine • Anafranil
  • Clonazepam • Klonopin
  • Clonidine • Catapres
  • Clozapine • Clozaril
  • Desipramine • Norpramin
  • Fluphenazine • Permitil, Prolixin
  • Guanfacine • Tenex
  • Haldoperidol • Haldol
  • Imipramine • Tofranil
  • Lorazepam • Ativan
  • Molindone • Moban
  • Nortriptyline • Pamelor
  • Olanzapine • Zyprexa
  • Pimozide • Orap
  • Quetiapine • Seroquel
  • Risperidone • Risperdal
  • Thioridazine • Mellaril
  • Thiothixine • Navane
  • Trifluoperazine • Stelazine
  • Ziprasidone • Geodon

Disclosure

Dr. Stewart and Loren Gianini report no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Dr. Geller receives grant/research support from Eli Lilly and Co. and Forest Laboratories Inc., is a consultant to GlaxoSmithKline, and is a speaker for Eli Lilly and Co., Wyeth Pharmaceuticals, Novartis Pharmaceuticals Corp., and Shire Pharmaceuticals Group.

Dr. Spencer receives research/grant support from and is a speaker or consultant for Abbott Laboratories, Ortho-McNeil Pharmaceutical Inc., GlaxoSmithKline, Eli Lilly and Co., Novartis Pharmaceuticals Corp., Pfizer Inc., Shire Pharmaceuticals Group, and Wyeth Pharmaceuticals.

References

1. Sukhodolsky DG, Scahill L, Zhang H, et al. Disruptive behavior in children with Tourette’s syndrome: association with ADHD comorbidity, tic severity, and functional impairment. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2003;42(1):98-105.

2. Jankovic J. Tourette’s syndrome. N Engl J Med 2001;345(16):1184-92.

3. Leckman JF, Goodman WK, Anderson GM, et al. CSF biogenic amines in obsessive-compulsive disorder and Tourette’s syndrome. Neuropsychopharmacology 1995;12:73-86.

4. Braun AR, Stoetter B, Randolph C, et al. The functional neuroanatomy of Tourette’s syndrome: An FDG-PET study: I. Regional changes in cerebral glucose metabolism differentiating patients and controls. Neuropsychopharmacology 1993;9:277-91.

5. Moriarty J, Campos D, Schmitz B, et al. Brain perfusion abnormalities in Gilles de la Tourette’s syndrome. Br J Psychiatry 1995;167:249-54.

6. Leckman JF. Cohen DJ (eds). Tourette’s syndrome. Tics, obsessions, compulsions: developmental psychopathology and clinical care. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1999.

7. Budman C, Bruun R, Park K, Olson M. Rage attacks in children and adolescents with Tourette’s disorder: a pilot study. J Clin Psychiatry 1998;59(11):576-80.

8. Leckman JF, Riddle MA, Hardin MT, et al. The Yale Global Tic Severity Scale: Initial testing of a clinician-rated scale of tic severity. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1989;28(4):566-73.

9. Spencer T, Biederman J, Harding M, et al. Disentangling the overlap between Tourette’s disorder and ADHD. J Child Psychol Psychiatry 1999;39:1037-44.

10. Swedo SE, Leonard HL, Garvey M, et al. Pediatric autoimmune neuropsychiatric disorders associated with streptococcal infections: clinical description of the first 50 cases. Am J Psychiatry 1998;155:264-71.

11. Peterson AL, Azrin NH. An evaluation of behavioral treatments for Tourette syndrome. Behav Res Ther 1992;30(2):167-74.

12. Leckman JF, Hardin MT, Riddle MA, et al. Clonidine treatment of Gilles de la Tourette’s syndrome. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1991;48(4):324-8.

13. Dion Y, Annable L, Sandor P, Chouinard G. Risperidone in the treatment of Tourette syndrome: a double-blind, placebo-controlled trial. J Clin Psychopharmacology 2002;22(1):31-9.

14. Bruggeman R, van der Linden C, Buitelaar JK, et al. Risperidone versus pimozide in Tourette’s disorder: a comparative double-blind parallel-group study. J Clin Psychiatry 2001;62(1):50-6.

15. Onofrj M, Paci C, D’Andreamatteo G, Toma L. Olanzapine in severe Gilles de la Tourette syndrome: a 52-week double-blind, cross-over study vs. low-dose pimozide. J Neurol 2000;247:443-6.

16. Sallee FR, Kurlan R, Goetz, et al. Ziprasidone treatment of children and adolescents with Tourette’s syndrome: a pilot study. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2000;39(3):292-9.

17. Parraga HC, Parraga MI, Woodward RL, Fenning PA. Quetiapine treatment of children with Tourette’s syndrome: report of two cases. J Child Adolesc Psychopharmacology 2001;11(2):187-91.

18. Sallee FR, Nesbitt L, Jackson C, et al. Relative efficacy of haloperidol and pimozide in children and adolescents with Tourette’s disorder. Am J Psychiatry 1997;154(8):1057-62.

19. Spencer T, Biederman J, Coffey B, et al. A double-blind comparison of desipramine and placebo in children and adolescents with chronic tic disorder and comorbid attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2002;59(7):649-56.

20. Kurlan R. for the Tourette’s Syndrome Study Group. Treatment of ADHD in children with tics: A randomized controlled trial. Neurology 2002;58:527-36.

21. Spencer T, Biederman J, Kerman K, et al. Desipramine treatment of children with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder and tic disorder or Tourette’s syndrome. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1993;32(2):354-60.

22. Singer HS, Brown J, Quaskey S, et al. The treatment of attentiondeficit hyperactivity disorder in Tourette’s syndrome: A double-blind, placebo-controlled study with clonidine and desipramine. Pediatrics 1995;95(1):74-81.

References

1. Sukhodolsky DG, Scahill L, Zhang H, et al. Disruptive behavior in children with Tourette’s syndrome: association with ADHD comorbidity, tic severity, and functional impairment. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2003;42(1):98-105.

2. Jankovic J. Tourette’s syndrome. N Engl J Med 2001;345(16):1184-92.

3. Leckman JF, Goodman WK, Anderson GM, et al. CSF biogenic amines in obsessive-compulsive disorder and Tourette’s syndrome. Neuropsychopharmacology 1995;12:73-86.

4. Braun AR, Stoetter B, Randolph C, et al. The functional neuroanatomy of Tourette’s syndrome: An FDG-PET study: I. Regional changes in cerebral glucose metabolism differentiating patients and controls. Neuropsychopharmacology 1993;9:277-91.

5. Moriarty J, Campos D, Schmitz B, et al. Brain perfusion abnormalities in Gilles de la Tourette’s syndrome. Br J Psychiatry 1995;167:249-54.

6. Leckman JF. Cohen DJ (eds). Tourette’s syndrome. Tics, obsessions, compulsions: developmental psychopathology and clinical care. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1999.

7. Budman C, Bruun R, Park K, Olson M. Rage attacks in children and adolescents with Tourette’s disorder: a pilot study. J Clin Psychiatry 1998;59(11):576-80.

8. Leckman JF, Riddle MA, Hardin MT, et al. The Yale Global Tic Severity Scale: Initial testing of a clinician-rated scale of tic severity. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1989;28(4):566-73.

9. Spencer T, Biederman J, Harding M, et al. Disentangling the overlap between Tourette’s disorder and ADHD. J Child Psychol Psychiatry 1999;39:1037-44.

10. Swedo SE, Leonard HL, Garvey M, et al. Pediatric autoimmune neuropsychiatric disorders associated with streptococcal infections: clinical description of the first 50 cases. Am J Psychiatry 1998;155:264-71.

11. Peterson AL, Azrin NH. An evaluation of behavioral treatments for Tourette syndrome. Behav Res Ther 1992;30(2):167-74.

12. Leckman JF, Hardin MT, Riddle MA, et al. Clonidine treatment of Gilles de la Tourette’s syndrome. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1991;48(4):324-8.

13. Dion Y, Annable L, Sandor P, Chouinard G. Risperidone in the treatment of Tourette syndrome: a double-blind, placebo-controlled trial. J Clin Psychopharmacology 2002;22(1):31-9.

14. Bruggeman R, van der Linden C, Buitelaar JK, et al. Risperidone versus pimozide in Tourette’s disorder: a comparative double-blind parallel-group study. J Clin Psychiatry 2001;62(1):50-6.

15. Onofrj M, Paci C, D’Andreamatteo G, Toma L. Olanzapine in severe Gilles de la Tourette syndrome: a 52-week double-blind, cross-over study vs. low-dose pimozide. J Neurol 2000;247:443-6.

16. Sallee FR, Kurlan R, Goetz, et al. Ziprasidone treatment of children and adolescents with Tourette’s syndrome: a pilot study. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2000;39(3):292-9.

17. Parraga HC, Parraga MI, Woodward RL, Fenning PA. Quetiapine treatment of children with Tourette’s syndrome: report of two cases. J Child Adolesc Psychopharmacology 2001;11(2):187-91.

18. Sallee FR, Nesbitt L, Jackson C, et al. Relative efficacy of haloperidol and pimozide in children and adolescents with Tourette’s disorder. Am J Psychiatry 1997;154(8):1057-62.

19. Spencer T, Biederman J, Coffey B, et al. A double-blind comparison of desipramine and placebo in children and adolescents with chronic tic disorder and comorbid attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2002;59(7):649-56.

20. Kurlan R. for the Tourette’s Syndrome Study Group. Treatment of ADHD in children with tics: A randomized controlled trial. Neurology 2002;58:527-36.

21. Spencer T, Biederman J, Kerman K, et al. Desipramine treatment of children with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder and tic disorder or Tourette’s syndrome. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 1993;32(2):354-60.

22. Singer HS, Brown J, Quaskey S, et al. The treatment of attentiondeficit hyperactivity disorder in Tourette’s syndrome: A double-blind, placebo-controlled study with clonidine and desipramine. Pediatrics 1995;95(1):74-81.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(10)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(10)
Page Number
45-56
Page Number
45-56
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Tics and tourette’s disorder: Which therapies, and when to use them
Display Headline
Tics and tourette’s disorder: Which therapies, and when to use them
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

Minding menopause: Psychotropics vs. estrogen? What you need to know now

Changed
Tue, 12/11/2018 - 15:11
Display Headline
Minding menopause: Psychotropics vs. estrogen? What you need to know now

Psychiatrists are suddenly viewed as experts in treating menopause-related mood problems because of our expertise with using psychotropics. Practically overnight, the Women’s Health Initiative studies1,2 have made women and their doctors think twice about using estrogen. Instead, many are turning to psychiatric medications that have been shown to improve both mood and hot flashes—without estrogen’s potential risks.

Chances are good that after an Ob/Gyn has tried one or two psychotropics without success or with too many side effects, he or she will ask a psychiatrist to consult for certain patients. How well-prepared are you to assume this role?

If your recall of female reproductive physiology from medical school is incomplete, read on about one approach to a perimenopausal patient with depressed mood. This review can help you:

  • discuss menopause knowledgeably when other physicians refer their patients to you
  • provide effective, up-to-date treatments for menopause-related mood and sexual problems, using psychotropics or hormones, alone or in combination.

Irritable, with no interest in sex

Anne, age 51, has been referred to you for complaints of depressed mood and low libido. She says she has become irritable and snaps easily at her two children and her husband. She has no interest in sex, no urge to masturbate, and has had no sexual intercourse for 6 months.

Table 1

Why mood problems may occur during menopause

HypothesisExplanation
PsychodynamicOnset of menopause is a critical life event and a readjustment of self-concept
SociologicMood changes are caused by changing life circumstances at menopause (‘empty nest,’ aging parents, health changes)
DominoDepressed mood is caused by hot flashes due to declining estrogen levels, which cause chronic sleep deprivation with subsequent irritability and memory and mood changes
BiochemicalDecreasing estrogen leads to neurochemical changes in the brain (serotonin, dopamine, cholinergic, GABA, norepinephrine)

Anne also complains of fatigue, dry hair and skin, warm flushes, and painful joints. She has no personal or family history of depression. She is not suicidal but states that she really doesn’t want to live anymore if “this is it.”

HOT FLASHES: A SPARK FOR DEPRESSION

Women who experience their first depression after age 50 do not fit the usual DSM-IV diagnostic criteria for depression. The Massachusetts Women’s Health Study3 found that 52% of women who experience depressed mood in the perimenopause have never had a depression before. This study also found a correlation between a longer perimenopause (>27 months) and increased risk of depressed mood. At the same time, women who have had a prior depression are 4 to 9 times more likely to experience depressive symptoms during perimenopause than those who have never had a depression before.4

The increased mood symptoms may be related to psychodynamic, sociologic, or biochemical factors, or they may result from a domino effect triggered by declining estrogen levels (Table 1). Women who experience vasomotor symptoms such as hot flashes are at 4.6 times greater risk for depression than those who are hot flash-free.5

Hot flashes begin on average at age 51, which is also the average age when natural menopause begins. During menopause, most women (82%) experience hot flashes (suddenly feeling hot and sweating during the day), warm flushes (a sensation of warmth or heat spreading over the skin), and night sweats (Table 2). All women who undergo surgical menopause experience hot flashes.

Hot flashes are moderate to severe for 40% of women who experience them and persist for 5 to 15 years. By definition, moderate to severe hot flashes occur 6 to 10 or more times daily, last 6 to 10 minutes each, and are often preceded by anxiety, palpitations, irritability, nervousness, or panic.

A marriage under stress

Anne says that her husband is angry about the lack of sexual intercourse, and she feels the stress in their marriage. She also is worrying about her children leaving for college and about her mother’s ill health.

She scores 20 on the Beck Depression Inventory, which indicates that she has mild to moderate depression. Her menstrual periods remain regular, but her cycle has shortened from 29 to 24 days. She reports experiencing some hot flashes that wake her at night and says she hasn’t had a good night’s sleep in months.

Laboratory tests show FSH of 25 mIU/mL and inhibin B <45 pg/mL. Her estradiol is 80 pg/mL, which is not yet in the menopausal range of 10 to 20 pg/mL. Her thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH) is normal. Her endocrinologic and reproductive diagnosis is perimenopause.

Table 2

Symptoms of menopause related to decreased estrogen

BrainIrritability, mood swings, depressed mood, forgetfulness, low sex interest, sleep problems, decreased well-being
BodyHot flashes, vaginal dryness, painful intercourse, fatigue, joint pain, pain with orgasm, bladder dysfunction
 

 

TREATING HOT FLASHES IMPROVES MOOD

Until July 2002, estrogen was standard treatment for controlling hot flashes in patients such as Anne. Then the Women’s Health Initiative trial reported that estrogen’s health risks—heart attack, stroke, breast cancer, and blood clots—exceeded potential benefits during 5 years of therapy. As a result, fewer women want to take estrogen,6 and many Ob/Gyns are advising patients to get through menopause without hormones if they can.

For mild hot flashes—one to three per day—patients may only need vitamin E, 800 mg/d, and deep relaxation breathing to “rev down” the sympathetic nervous system when a hot flash occurs.

For moderate to severe hot flashes—four to 10 or more per day—estrogen replacement is the most effective therapy. Estradiol, 1 mg/d, reduces hot flashes by approximately 80 to 90%.7 Many small studies have shown that patients’ mood often improves as estrogen reduces their hot flashes.8 The recent Women’s Health Initiative Quality-of-Life study, however, reported that estrogen plus progestin did not improve mood in women ages 50 to 54 with moderate-to-severe vasomotor symptoms, even though hot flashes were reduced and sleep may have improved.9

New drugs of choice. Because of estrogen’s effectiveness in controlling hot flashes, some women and their doctors may choose to use it briefly (18 to 24 months). For others, psychotropics are becoming the drugs of choice for mood disorders with moderate to severe hot flashes.

The serotonin and norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor (SNRI) venlafaxine, 75 or 150 mg/d, has been shown to reduce hot flashes by 60 to 70%.10 A new trial is investigating whether duloxetine—an SNRI awaiting FDA approval—also reduces hot flashes. Other useful agents that have been shown to reduce hot flashes by 50% or more include:

  • selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) paroxetine CR, 12.5 mg/d to 25 mg/d,11 citalopram, 20 to 60 mg/d,12 and fluoxetine, 20 mg/d13
  • gabapentin, 900 mg/d.14

For hot flashes and moderate to major depression, try an SNRI or SSRI first (see Algorithm), but consider the possible effects on sexual function. All SNRIs and SSRIs have sexual side effects, including anorgasmia and loss of libido in women and men. Among the psychotropics that improve hot flashes and mood, gabapentin is the only one that does not interfere with sexual function.

Mood improves, but still no libido

You and Ann decide on a trial of the SNRI venlafaxine, 75 mg/d, to treat her hot flashes and depressed mood. Four weeks later, her hot flashes are reduced by 50% in frequency and her mood has improved (Beck Depression Inventory score is now 10). She is feeling much better and wishes to continue taking the antidepressant.

She and her husband attempted intercourse once during the past month, although she wasn’t very interested. She did not achieve orgasm, despite adequate vaginal lubrication, and she did not enjoy the experience. “I still have no libido—zero, or even less,” she says.

TREATING LOW INTEREST IN SEX

Being angry with one’s partner is the number-one reason for decreased sexual desire in all studies. Therefore, consider couples therapy for any woman complaining of loss of interest in sex. In addition, eliminate—if possible—any medications she may be taking that have known sexual side effects, such as SSRIs or beta blockers.

If the patient complains of slow or no arousal, vaginal estrogen and/or sildenafil, 25 to 50 mg 1 hour before intercourse, may be beneficial.15 Other agents the FDA is reviewing for erectile dysfunction—such as tadalafil and vardenafil—may also help arousal problems in women.

Understanding how hormones affect female sexual desire also may help you decide what advice to give Anne and how you and her Ob/Gyn coordinate her care. For example, you might treat her sexual complaints and relationship problems while the Ob/Gyn manages symptoms of the vagina, uterus, and breast.

HOW TESTOSTERONE AFFECTS SEXUAL DESIRE

Testosterone is the hormone of sexual desire in men and women. Other female androgens include androstenedione, androstenediol, 5 α-dihydrotestosterone (DHT), dihydroepiandrosterone (DHEA), and its sulfate (DHEA-S). Premenopausal women produce these androgens in the ovaries (25%), adrenal glands (25%), and peripheral tissues (50%).

Average daily serum testosterone concentrations decline in women between ages 20 and 50. Lower levels are also seen with estrogen replacement therapy or oral contraceptives, lactation, anorexia nervosa, and conditions that reduce ovarian function. Women who undergo total hysterectomy with bilateral oophorectomy experience a sudden 50% loss of testosterone and an 80% decline in estradiol.16

Regularly menstruating women in their 40s and early 50s can have very low testosterone levels—at least 50% lower in the first 5 to 7 days of their cycles—than they had when they were in their 30s.17 The percentage of women reporting low libido increases with age until menopause, from 30% at age 30 to about 50% at age 50. Then the rate declines to 27% in women age 50 to 59.18 After natural menopause, luteinizing hormone (LH) continues to stimulate the ovarian hilar cells and interstitial cells to produce androgens, which is why many women at age 50 have adequate testosterone levels to sustain sexual desire.

 

 

Oral estrogen replacement therapy reduces bioavailable testosterone by 42% on average, which can induce androgen deficiency in a menopausal woman.19 The increased estrogen inhibits pituitary LH and decreases stimulation of the androgen-producing cells in the ovary.20

Female androgen deficiency. A number of papers have been published on female androgen deficiency syndrome (FADS).21 Its diagnosis requires symptoms of thinning pubic and axillary hair, decreased body odor, lethargy, low mood, diminished well-being, and declining libido and orgasm, despite adequate estrogen but low levels of testosterone and DHEA.

TREATING TESTOSTERONE DEFICIENCY

Benefits of replacement therapy. Replacing testosterone in women with FADS can improve mood, well-being, motivation, cognition, sexual function related to libido, orgasm, sexual fantasies, desire to masturbate, and nipple and clitoral sensitivity.22 Muscle and bone stimulation and decreased hot flashes are also reported.23 Women with androgen deficiency symptoms and low testosterone at menopause should at least be considered for physiologic testosterone replacement.

Risks of replacement therapy. Androgen replacement therapy does carry some risks, which need to be discussed with the patient. Testosterone may lower levels of beneficial HDL cholesterol, so get the cardiologist’s clearance before you give testosterone to a woman with heart disease or an HDL cholesterol level <45 mg/dL.

Algorithm Managing mood and libido problems during perimenopause



A meta-analysis of eight clinical trials found no changes in liver function in menopausal women taking 1.25 to 2.5 mg/d of methyl testosterone. Liver toxicity has been reported in men using 10-fold higher testosterone dosages.24

At the normal level of testosterone, darkening and thickening of facial hair are rare in light-skinned, light-haired women but can occur in dark-skinned, dark-haired women. Increased irritability, excess energy, argumentativeness, and aggressive behavior have been noted if testosterone levels exceed the physiologic range.

Controlled, randomized studies are needed to assess the effects of long-term use (more than 24 months) of testosterone replacement in women.

Challenges in measuring testosterone levels. Serum free testosterone is the most reliable indicator of a woman’s androgen status, but accurately measuring testosterone levels is tricky:

  • Only 2% of circulating testosterone is unbound and biologically active; the rest is bound to sex hormone-binding globulin (SHBG) or albumin.
  • In ovulating women, serum testosterone levels are higher in the morning than later in the day and vary greatly within the menstrual cycle.
  • Levels of androgens and estrogen are highest during the middle one-third of the cycle—on days 10 to 16, counting the first day of menstrual bleeding as day 1.25
  • Oral contraceptives also decrease androgen production by the ovary and can result in low libido in some women.26

Tests developed to measure testosterone levels in men are not sensitive enough to accurately measure women’s naturally lower serum concentrations, let alone the even lower levels characteristic of female androgen or testosterone deficiency. New measurements and standardization of normal reference ranges have been developed for women complaining of low libido.27

Tests for androgen deficiency include total testosterone, free testosterone, DHEA, and DHEAS. Measuring SHBG will help you determine the free, biologically active testosterone level and calculate the Free Androgen Index (FAI) for women (Table 3).28

Table 3

Free androgen index (FAI) values in women, by age

Replacing a woman’s bioactive testosterone to the normal free androgen index range for her age may improve low libido.
How to calculate FAI
Total testosterone in nmol/L (total testosterone in ng/ml X 0.0347 X 100), divided by sex hormone-binding globulin (SHBG) in nmol/L.
AgeNormal range
20 to 293.72 to 4.96
30 to 392.04 to 2.96
40 to 491.98 to 2.94
50 to 59+1.78 to 2.86
Source: Guay et al, reference 28.

A candidate for testosterone therapy?

Now that Anne’s mood, sleep, and hot flashes have improved with venlafaxine, she wants help with her lack of sexual interest. You measure her testosterone and SHBG levels and find that her free androgen index is very low at 0.51 (normal range, 1.78 to 2.86).

In collaboration with her Ob/Gyn, you and Anne decide to start her on testosterone replacement therapy. You prescribe Androgel, starting at 1/7th of a 2.5-mg foil packet (0.35 mg/d of testosterone), and instruct her to rate her sexual energy daily, using a Sexual Energy Scale.

TESTOSTERONE CHOICES FOR WOMEN

Replacing a woman’s bioactive testosterone level to the normal free androgen index range for her age group may improve low libido. Some low-dose testosterone replacement options include:

  • methyl testosterone sublingual pills, 0.5 mg/d, made by a compounding pharmacy or reduced dosages of oral pills made for men. If you prescribe methyl testosterone, routine lab tests will not accurately measure serum testosterone levels—unless you order the very expensive test that is specific for methyl testosterone.
  • 2% vaginal cream, applied topically to increase clitoral and genital sensitivity. It may increase blood levels moderately through absorption
  • Androgel, a topical testosterone approved for men. As in Anne’s case, start with 0.35 mg/d or one-seventh of the 2.5 mg packet (ask the pharmacist to place this amount in a syringe). Instruct the patient to apply the gel to hairless skin, such as inside the forearm. Effects last about 24 hours, and you can measure serum levels accurately after 14 days. Vaginal throbbing—a normal response—may occur within 30 minutes of testosterone application.
 

 

The FDA is considering other testosterone preparations—including a testosterone patch for women and a gel in female-sized doses.

Using the Sexual Energy Scale. To monitor for a therapeutic response, ask the patient to use the Sexual Energy Scale (Figure 1).29,30 Instruct her to define her “10” as the time in life when she had the most fulfilling sexual life, was the most easily aroused, had the most sexual pleasure, and the best orgasms. Her “1” would be when she felt the worst sexually and had the least desire.

Giving supplemental estrogen. If you prescribe estrogen plus testosterone (Estratest), start with Estratest HS, which contains 0.625 mg esterified estrogens and 1.25 mg of methyl testosterone. Add a progestin if the patient is postmenopausal and has not had a hysterectomy, to protect the uterus from endometrial hyperplasia.

Women with vaginal dryness also need supplemental estrogen, which can be applied vaginally (such as Premarin cream or Estrace cream). A vaginal lubricant is not sufficient to avoid age-related vaginal atrophy, which may make intercourse difficult or impossible.

Figure 1 How to use the Sexual Energy Scale to monitor response to therapy


Libido improves modestly

Ann returns in 4 weeks with gradually improving sex drive (Sexual Energy Score is now 5). She had sexual intercourse twice in the past month and didn’t “dread” it, but also did not enjoy it or reach orgasm. You have told her that venlafaxine may slow or prevent orgasm, but she wants to keep taking it. She reports that her marital relationship is improving.

You order repeat testosterone and SHBG blood levels and find her free androgen index has improved to 1.10, which is still low. You increase the Androgel dosage to 1/5th of a 2.5 mg packet (0.5 mg/day) and continue to monitor Anne’s Sexual Energy Scale ratings at monthly follow-up visits. She has set a Sexual Energy Scale rating of 7 to 8 as her target. Anne says she appreciates your help with—as she puts it—“this embarrassing problem.”

PHYSIOLOGY 101 How endocrine changes affect mood and libido during menopause

Louann Brizendine, MD

Medicine’s understanding of menopause’s physiologic and psychological consequences is changing, just as the “baby-boom” generation is navigating this passage called the change of life. Many midlife women are unaware that the menopause transition does not begin around age 50 but spans 30 years—from ages 35 to 65. Natural menopause begins 15 years before and ends 15 years after menstruation ceases—as the brain and tissues adjust to first fluctuating then decreased estrogen levels. It occurs in three phases—early menopause, perimenopause, and late menopause—that reflect a progression of hormone changes.

EARLY MENOPAUSE: OVULATION ACCELERATES

At approximately age 35, the ovaries start producing lower levels of inhibin—a glycoprotein that inhibits pituitary production of follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH) (Figure 2). Less inhibin means less negative feedback to the pituitary and an increase in pituitary FSH production. More FSH means more activin—an ovarian glycoprotein that stimulates ripening of eggs—and so ovulation begins to accelerate at approximately age 36. Activin stimulates more and more eggs in the ovary to develop faster and faster.

By age 37, the ovarian egg reserve starts to decline, and—because FSH has increased—the follicle is driven to produce greater amounts of estrogen. Estrogen serum levels in fertile women average 100 pg/mL. During perimenopause, estrogen levels sometimes soar to 300, 400, or even 500 pg/mL, then may crash down to 50 to 80 pg/mL. These wild fluctuations are thought to trigger headaches, sleep disturbance, mood swings, and sexual complaints in some women.

Hysterectomy and mood symptoms. Women in their early 40s are exposed to high levels of estrogen in some menstrual cycles and low levels in others. Excess estrogen thickens the endometrium—causing heavier bleeding—and stimulates fibroid growth, which is the leading reason for hysterectomies.

One in four American women undergoes surgical menopause. The average age of the 700,000 U.S. women who undergo hysterectomy each year is 40 to 44. Women who have had a hysterectomy and have mood symptoms and sexual adjustment problems are likely to see psychiatrists earlier than women who undergo a more gradual natural menopause.

PERIMENOPAUSE: HOT FLASHES, DRY VAGINA

At ages 45 to 55, most women (90%) who have not had a hysterectomy start to cycle irregularly, tending at first toward shorter cycles and then skipping periods. Some periods are heavier and some lighter than usual. The remaining 10% of women continue to cycle regularly until their menstrual periods stop abruptly.

Many women notice temperature dysregulation during perimenopause. When they exercise, their cool-down times may double. Menopausal symptoms such as hot flashes occur when estrogen levels drop below the point that some researchers call a woman’s “estrogen set point.”

 

 

Screening for estrogen decline. When you see a patient in your office, you can often determine whether her affective symptoms—irritability, mood swings, depressed mood, and forgetfulness—might be related to estrogen decline by asking two screening questions:

  • Are you having any warm flushes or hot flashes?
  • Do you have vaginal dryness?

Figure 2 Normal female reproductive cycle: The rhythm of the hypothalamic-pituitary-ovarian axis


LATE MENOPAUSE: ESTROGEN LOW, MOOD UP

During late menopause, approximately age 55 and older, women commonly complain of vaginal dryness, hot flashes, night sweats, sleep problems, and fatigue. Sexual interest may decrease, and a decline in sexual activity can become a problem for some couples. Asking “How is your sex life?” often will open a discussion of the couple’s sexual and emotional relationship.

Other physiologic changes caused by estrogen and androgen deficiency include thinning body hair—including pubic, auxiliary, and leg hair—decreased body odor, thinning skin, wrinkling skin, and decreasing bone density.

Table 4

Three phases of menopause: A 30-year process

Early Ages 35 to 45Middle (perimenopause) Ages 46 to 55Late Ages 56 to 65+
Physiologic changes
Ovary starts producing less inhibin 15 years before menses stopIrregular menstrual cycles, with shorter cycles, skipping periods for 90% of womenDepletion of eggs and follicle
Decreased inhibin increases FSH and stimulates follicle to produce more estrogenSome periods heavier, some lighter than usual 
Increased estrogen thickens endometrium and leads to heavier menstrual bleeding and increased risk of fibroids  
Increased FSH produces more activin, which makes eggs develop faster and accelerates egg depletion  
Lab values
Menses: NormalCycle shorter (24-26 days)None for >12 months
FSH day 3: 10-25 mIU/mL20-30 mIU/mL50-90 mIU/mL
Estradiol day 3: 40-200 pg/mL40-200 pg/mL10-20 pg/mL
Inhibin B day 3: Varies<45 pg/mL0
Symptoms
Headaches, sleep disturbances, mood swings, urinary problems, sexual complaintsWarm flushes, hot flashes, night sweats in 82% of women (moderate to severe in 40%)Vaginal dryness, hot flashes, night sweats, sleep problems, fatigue, sexual interest changes, thinning body hair (pubic, legs, axillary), decreased body odor, thinning skin, wrinkling skin, decreasing bone density, BUT mood starts to stabilize
FSH: follicle-stimulating hormone

Urinary symptoms. Bladder problems and urinary symptoms are persistent symptoms of menopause for 75% of women. Although we psychiatrists don’t review the urinary system, it is important to remember that embarrassment because of urinary incontinence during sex may have a lot to do with a woman’s “loss of interest” in sexual intercourse.

Despite sometimes-difficult physiologic changes, the good news for many women is that mood symptoms start to stabilize after perimenopause (Table 4). Women whose moods are very responsive to hormonal fluctuations—such as those with severe premenstrual syndrome or premenstrual dysphoric disorder—sometimes get much better after menopause.

Related resources

Drug brand names

  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Gabapentin • Neurontin
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Sildenafil • Viagra
  • Venlafaxine • Effexor

Disclosure

Dr. Brizendine reports no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References

1. Burger H. Hormone replacement therapy in the post-Women’s Health Initiative era. Climacteric 2003;6(suppl 1):11-36.

2. Grodstein F, Clarkson TB, Manson JE. Understanding the divergent data on postmenopausal hormone replacement therapy. N Engl J Med 2003;348:645-50.

3. Joffe H, Hall JE, Soares CN, et al. Vasomotor symptoms are associated with depression in perimenopausal women seeking primary care. Menopause 2002;9(6):392-8.

4. Soares CN, Almeida OP, Joffe H, Cohen LS. Efficacy of estradiol for the treatment of depressive disorders in perimenopausal women: a double-blind, randomized, placebo-controlled trial. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2001;58(6):529-34.

5. Pearlstein T, Rosen K, Stone AB. Mood disorders and menopause. Endocrinol Metab Clin North Am 1997;26(2):279-94.

6. Seppa N. Hormone therapy falls out of favor. Science News 2002;162:61.-

7. Nieman LK. Management of surgically hypogonadal patients unable to take sex hormone replacement therapy. Endocrinol Metab Clin North Am 2003;32(2):325-36.

8. Joffe H, Cohen LS. Estrogen, serotonin, and mood disturbance: where is the therapeutic bridge? Biol Psychiatry 1998;44(9):798-811.

9. Hays J, Ockene JK, Brunner RL, et al. Women’s Health Initiative Investigators. Effects of estrogen plus progestin on health-related quality of life. N Engl J Med 2003;348(19):1839-54.

10. Barton D, La VB, Loprinzi C, et al. Venlafaxine for the control of hot flashes: results of a longitudinal continuation study. Oncol Nurs Forum 2002;29(1):33-40.

11. Stearns V, Beebe KL, Iyengar M, Dube E. Paroxetine controlled release in the treatment of menopausal hot flashes: a randomized controlled trial. JAMA 2003;289(21):2827-34.

12. Soares CN, Poitras JR, Prouty J, et al. Efficacy of citalopram as a monotherapy or as an adjunctive treatment to estrogen therapy for perimenopausal and postmenopausal women with depression and vasomotor symptoms. J Clin Psychiatry 2003;64(4):473-9.

13. Loprinzi CL, Sloan JA, Perez EA, et al. Phase III evaluation of fluoxetine for treatment of hot flashes. J Clin Oncol 2002;20(6):1578-83.

14. Guttuso T, Jr, Kurlan R, McDermott MP, Kieburtz K. Gabapentin’s effects on hot flashes in postmenopausal women: a randomized controlled trial. Obstet Gynecol 2003;101(2):337-45.

15. Caruso S, Intelisano G, Lupo L, Agnello C. Premenopausal women affected by sexual arousal disorder treated with sildenafil: a double-blind, cross-over, placebo-controlled study. BJOG 2001;108(6):623-8.

16. Floter A, Nathorst-Boos J, Carlstrom K, et al. Addition of testosterone to estrogen replacement therapy in oophorectomized women: effects on sexuality and well-being. Climacteric 2002;5(4):357-65.

17. Davison SL, Davis SR. Androgens in women. J Steroid Biochem Mol Biol 2003;85(2-5):363-6.

18. Laumann EO, Paik A, Rosen RC. Sexual dysfunction in the United States: prevalence and predictors. JAMA 1999;281:537-44.

19. Lobo RA, Rosen RC, Yang HM, et al. Comparative effects of oral esterified estrogens with and without methyltestosterone on endocrine profiles and dimensions of sexual function in postmenopausal women with hypoactive sexual desire. Fertil Steril 2003;79(6):1341-52.

20. Casson PR, Elkind-Hirsch KE, Buster JE, et al. Effect of postmenopausal estrogen replacement on circulating androgens. Obstet Gynecol 1997;90(6):995-8.

21. Bachmann G, Bancroft J, Braunstein G, et al. Female androgen insufficiency: the Princeton consensus statement on definition, classification, and assessment. Fertil Steril 2002;77(4):660-5.

22. Davis SR, Burger HG. The role of androgen therapy. Best Pract Res Clin Endocrinol Metab 2003;17(1):165-75.

23. Guay A, Davis SR. Testosterone insufficiency in women: fact or fiction? World J Urol 2002;20(2):106-10.

24. Gitlin N, Korner P, Yang HM. Liver function in postmenopausal women on estrogen-androgen hormone replacement therapy: a meta-analysis of eight clinical trials. Menopause 1999;6(3):216-24.

25. Warnock JK, Biggs CF. Reproductive life events and sexual functioning in women: case reports. CNS Spectrums 2003;8(March):3.-

26. Graham CA, Ramos R, Bancroft J, et al. The effects of steroidal contraceptives on the well-being and sexuality of women: a double-blind, placebo-controlled, two-centre study of combined and progestogen-only methods. Contraception 1995;52(6):363-9.

27. Guay AT. Screening for androgen deficiency in women: methodological and interpretive issues. Fertil Steril 2002;77(suppl 4):S83-8.

28. Guay AT, Jacobson J. Decreased free testosterone and dehydroepiandrosterone-sulfate (DHEA-S) levels in women with decreased libido. J Sex Marital Ther 2002;28(suppl 1):129-42.

29. Warnock JK, Bundren JC, Morris DW. Female hypoactive sexual desire disorder due to androgen deficiency: clinical and psychometric issues. Psychopharmacol Bull 1997;33(4):761-5.

30. Warnock JK, Clayton AH, Yates WR, Bundren JC. Sexual Energy Scale (SES): a simple valid screening tool for measuring of sexual dysfunction (poster presentation). Waikoloa, HI: North American Society for Psychosocial Obstetrics and Gynecology, 2001.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Louann Brizendine, MD
Clinical professor of psychiatry Director, Women’s Mood and Hormone Clinic Langley Porter Psychiatric Institute University of California, San Francisco

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(10)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
12-31
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Louann Brizendine, MD
Clinical professor of psychiatry Director, Women’s Mood and Hormone Clinic Langley Porter Psychiatric Institute University of California, San Francisco

Author and Disclosure Information

Louann Brizendine, MD
Clinical professor of psychiatry Director, Women’s Mood and Hormone Clinic Langley Porter Psychiatric Institute University of California, San Francisco

Article PDF
Article PDF

Psychiatrists are suddenly viewed as experts in treating menopause-related mood problems because of our expertise with using psychotropics. Practically overnight, the Women’s Health Initiative studies1,2 have made women and their doctors think twice about using estrogen. Instead, many are turning to psychiatric medications that have been shown to improve both mood and hot flashes—without estrogen’s potential risks.

Chances are good that after an Ob/Gyn has tried one or two psychotropics without success or with too many side effects, he or she will ask a psychiatrist to consult for certain patients. How well-prepared are you to assume this role?

If your recall of female reproductive physiology from medical school is incomplete, read on about one approach to a perimenopausal patient with depressed mood. This review can help you:

  • discuss menopause knowledgeably when other physicians refer their patients to you
  • provide effective, up-to-date treatments for menopause-related mood and sexual problems, using psychotropics or hormones, alone or in combination.

Irritable, with no interest in sex

Anne, age 51, has been referred to you for complaints of depressed mood and low libido. She says she has become irritable and snaps easily at her two children and her husband. She has no interest in sex, no urge to masturbate, and has had no sexual intercourse for 6 months.

Table 1

Why mood problems may occur during menopause

HypothesisExplanation
PsychodynamicOnset of menopause is a critical life event and a readjustment of self-concept
SociologicMood changes are caused by changing life circumstances at menopause (‘empty nest,’ aging parents, health changes)
DominoDepressed mood is caused by hot flashes due to declining estrogen levels, which cause chronic sleep deprivation with subsequent irritability and memory and mood changes
BiochemicalDecreasing estrogen leads to neurochemical changes in the brain (serotonin, dopamine, cholinergic, GABA, norepinephrine)

Anne also complains of fatigue, dry hair and skin, warm flushes, and painful joints. She has no personal or family history of depression. She is not suicidal but states that she really doesn’t want to live anymore if “this is it.”

HOT FLASHES: A SPARK FOR DEPRESSION

Women who experience their first depression after age 50 do not fit the usual DSM-IV diagnostic criteria for depression. The Massachusetts Women’s Health Study3 found that 52% of women who experience depressed mood in the perimenopause have never had a depression before. This study also found a correlation between a longer perimenopause (>27 months) and increased risk of depressed mood. At the same time, women who have had a prior depression are 4 to 9 times more likely to experience depressive symptoms during perimenopause than those who have never had a depression before.4

The increased mood symptoms may be related to psychodynamic, sociologic, or biochemical factors, or they may result from a domino effect triggered by declining estrogen levels (Table 1). Women who experience vasomotor symptoms such as hot flashes are at 4.6 times greater risk for depression than those who are hot flash-free.5

Hot flashes begin on average at age 51, which is also the average age when natural menopause begins. During menopause, most women (82%) experience hot flashes (suddenly feeling hot and sweating during the day), warm flushes (a sensation of warmth or heat spreading over the skin), and night sweats (Table 2). All women who undergo surgical menopause experience hot flashes.

Hot flashes are moderate to severe for 40% of women who experience them and persist for 5 to 15 years. By definition, moderate to severe hot flashes occur 6 to 10 or more times daily, last 6 to 10 minutes each, and are often preceded by anxiety, palpitations, irritability, nervousness, or panic.

A marriage under stress

Anne says that her husband is angry about the lack of sexual intercourse, and she feels the stress in their marriage. She also is worrying about her children leaving for college and about her mother’s ill health.

She scores 20 on the Beck Depression Inventory, which indicates that she has mild to moderate depression. Her menstrual periods remain regular, but her cycle has shortened from 29 to 24 days. She reports experiencing some hot flashes that wake her at night and says she hasn’t had a good night’s sleep in months.

Laboratory tests show FSH of 25 mIU/mL and inhibin B <45 pg/mL. Her estradiol is 80 pg/mL, which is not yet in the menopausal range of 10 to 20 pg/mL. Her thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH) is normal. Her endocrinologic and reproductive diagnosis is perimenopause.

Table 2

Symptoms of menopause related to decreased estrogen

BrainIrritability, mood swings, depressed mood, forgetfulness, low sex interest, sleep problems, decreased well-being
BodyHot flashes, vaginal dryness, painful intercourse, fatigue, joint pain, pain with orgasm, bladder dysfunction
 

 

TREATING HOT FLASHES IMPROVES MOOD

Until July 2002, estrogen was standard treatment for controlling hot flashes in patients such as Anne. Then the Women’s Health Initiative trial reported that estrogen’s health risks—heart attack, stroke, breast cancer, and blood clots—exceeded potential benefits during 5 years of therapy. As a result, fewer women want to take estrogen,6 and many Ob/Gyns are advising patients to get through menopause without hormones if they can.

For mild hot flashes—one to three per day—patients may only need vitamin E, 800 mg/d, and deep relaxation breathing to “rev down” the sympathetic nervous system when a hot flash occurs.

For moderate to severe hot flashes—four to 10 or more per day—estrogen replacement is the most effective therapy. Estradiol, 1 mg/d, reduces hot flashes by approximately 80 to 90%.7 Many small studies have shown that patients’ mood often improves as estrogen reduces their hot flashes.8 The recent Women’s Health Initiative Quality-of-Life study, however, reported that estrogen plus progestin did not improve mood in women ages 50 to 54 with moderate-to-severe vasomotor symptoms, even though hot flashes were reduced and sleep may have improved.9

New drugs of choice. Because of estrogen’s effectiveness in controlling hot flashes, some women and their doctors may choose to use it briefly (18 to 24 months). For others, psychotropics are becoming the drugs of choice for mood disorders with moderate to severe hot flashes.

The serotonin and norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor (SNRI) venlafaxine, 75 or 150 mg/d, has been shown to reduce hot flashes by 60 to 70%.10 A new trial is investigating whether duloxetine—an SNRI awaiting FDA approval—also reduces hot flashes. Other useful agents that have been shown to reduce hot flashes by 50% or more include:

  • selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) paroxetine CR, 12.5 mg/d to 25 mg/d,11 citalopram, 20 to 60 mg/d,12 and fluoxetine, 20 mg/d13
  • gabapentin, 900 mg/d.14

For hot flashes and moderate to major depression, try an SNRI or SSRI first (see Algorithm), but consider the possible effects on sexual function. All SNRIs and SSRIs have sexual side effects, including anorgasmia and loss of libido in women and men. Among the psychotropics that improve hot flashes and mood, gabapentin is the only one that does not interfere with sexual function.

Mood improves, but still no libido

You and Ann decide on a trial of the SNRI venlafaxine, 75 mg/d, to treat her hot flashes and depressed mood. Four weeks later, her hot flashes are reduced by 50% in frequency and her mood has improved (Beck Depression Inventory score is now 10). She is feeling much better and wishes to continue taking the antidepressant.

She and her husband attempted intercourse once during the past month, although she wasn’t very interested. She did not achieve orgasm, despite adequate vaginal lubrication, and she did not enjoy the experience. “I still have no libido—zero, or even less,” she says.

TREATING LOW INTEREST IN SEX

Being angry with one’s partner is the number-one reason for decreased sexual desire in all studies. Therefore, consider couples therapy for any woman complaining of loss of interest in sex. In addition, eliminate—if possible—any medications she may be taking that have known sexual side effects, such as SSRIs or beta blockers.

If the patient complains of slow or no arousal, vaginal estrogen and/or sildenafil, 25 to 50 mg 1 hour before intercourse, may be beneficial.15 Other agents the FDA is reviewing for erectile dysfunction—such as tadalafil and vardenafil—may also help arousal problems in women.

Understanding how hormones affect female sexual desire also may help you decide what advice to give Anne and how you and her Ob/Gyn coordinate her care. For example, you might treat her sexual complaints and relationship problems while the Ob/Gyn manages symptoms of the vagina, uterus, and breast.

HOW TESTOSTERONE AFFECTS SEXUAL DESIRE

Testosterone is the hormone of sexual desire in men and women. Other female androgens include androstenedione, androstenediol, 5 α-dihydrotestosterone (DHT), dihydroepiandrosterone (DHEA), and its sulfate (DHEA-S). Premenopausal women produce these androgens in the ovaries (25%), adrenal glands (25%), and peripheral tissues (50%).

Average daily serum testosterone concentrations decline in women between ages 20 and 50. Lower levels are also seen with estrogen replacement therapy or oral contraceptives, lactation, anorexia nervosa, and conditions that reduce ovarian function. Women who undergo total hysterectomy with bilateral oophorectomy experience a sudden 50% loss of testosterone and an 80% decline in estradiol.16

Regularly menstruating women in their 40s and early 50s can have very low testosterone levels—at least 50% lower in the first 5 to 7 days of their cycles—than they had when they were in their 30s.17 The percentage of women reporting low libido increases with age until menopause, from 30% at age 30 to about 50% at age 50. Then the rate declines to 27% in women age 50 to 59.18 After natural menopause, luteinizing hormone (LH) continues to stimulate the ovarian hilar cells and interstitial cells to produce androgens, which is why many women at age 50 have adequate testosterone levels to sustain sexual desire.

 

 

Oral estrogen replacement therapy reduces bioavailable testosterone by 42% on average, which can induce androgen deficiency in a menopausal woman.19 The increased estrogen inhibits pituitary LH and decreases stimulation of the androgen-producing cells in the ovary.20

Female androgen deficiency. A number of papers have been published on female androgen deficiency syndrome (FADS).21 Its diagnosis requires symptoms of thinning pubic and axillary hair, decreased body odor, lethargy, low mood, diminished well-being, and declining libido and orgasm, despite adequate estrogen but low levels of testosterone and DHEA.

TREATING TESTOSTERONE DEFICIENCY

Benefits of replacement therapy. Replacing testosterone in women with FADS can improve mood, well-being, motivation, cognition, sexual function related to libido, orgasm, sexual fantasies, desire to masturbate, and nipple and clitoral sensitivity.22 Muscle and bone stimulation and decreased hot flashes are also reported.23 Women with androgen deficiency symptoms and low testosterone at menopause should at least be considered for physiologic testosterone replacement.

Risks of replacement therapy. Androgen replacement therapy does carry some risks, which need to be discussed with the patient. Testosterone may lower levels of beneficial HDL cholesterol, so get the cardiologist’s clearance before you give testosterone to a woman with heart disease or an HDL cholesterol level <45 mg/dL.

Algorithm Managing mood and libido problems during perimenopause



A meta-analysis of eight clinical trials found no changes in liver function in menopausal women taking 1.25 to 2.5 mg/d of methyl testosterone. Liver toxicity has been reported in men using 10-fold higher testosterone dosages.24

At the normal level of testosterone, darkening and thickening of facial hair are rare in light-skinned, light-haired women but can occur in dark-skinned, dark-haired women. Increased irritability, excess energy, argumentativeness, and aggressive behavior have been noted if testosterone levels exceed the physiologic range.

Controlled, randomized studies are needed to assess the effects of long-term use (more than 24 months) of testosterone replacement in women.

Challenges in measuring testosterone levels. Serum free testosterone is the most reliable indicator of a woman’s androgen status, but accurately measuring testosterone levels is tricky:

  • Only 2% of circulating testosterone is unbound and biologically active; the rest is bound to sex hormone-binding globulin (SHBG) or albumin.
  • In ovulating women, serum testosterone levels are higher in the morning than later in the day and vary greatly within the menstrual cycle.
  • Levels of androgens and estrogen are highest during the middle one-third of the cycle—on days 10 to 16, counting the first day of menstrual bleeding as day 1.25
  • Oral contraceptives also decrease androgen production by the ovary and can result in low libido in some women.26

Tests developed to measure testosterone levels in men are not sensitive enough to accurately measure women’s naturally lower serum concentrations, let alone the even lower levels characteristic of female androgen or testosterone deficiency. New measurements and standardization of normal reference ranges have been developed for women complaining of low libido.27

Tests for androgen deficiency include total testosterone, free testosterone, DHEA, and DHEAS. Measuring SHBG will help you determine the free, biologically active testosterone level and calculate the Free Androgen Index (FAI) for women (Table 3).28

Table 3

Free androgen index (FAI) values in women, by age

Replacing a woman’s bioactive testosterone to the normal free androgen index range for her age may improve low libido.
How to calculate FAI
Total testosterone in nmol/L (total testosterone in ng/ml X 0.0347 X 100), divided by sex hormone-binding globulin (SHBG) in nmol/L.
AgeNormal range
20 to 293.72 to 4.96
30 to 392.04 to 2.96
40 to 491.98 to 2.94
50 to 59+1.78 to 2.86
Source: Guay et al, reference 28.

A candidate for testosterone therapy?

Now that Anne’s mood, sleep, and hot flashes have improved with venlafaxine, she wants help with her lack of sexual interest. You measure her testosterone and SHBG levels and find that her free androgen index is very low at 0.51 (normal range, 1.78 to 2.86).

In collaboration with her Ob/Gyn, you and Anne decide to start her on testosterone replacement therapy. You prescribe Androgel, starting at 1/7th of a 2.5-mg foil packet (0.35 mg/d of testosterone), and instruct her to rate her sexual energy daily, using a Sexual Energy Scale.

TESTOSTERONE CHOICES FOR WOMEN

Replacing a woman’s bioactive testosterone level to the normal free androgen index range for her age group may improve low libido. Some low-dose testosterone replacement options include:

  • methyl testosterone sublingual pills, 0.5 mg/d, made by a compounding pharmacy or reduced dosages of oral pills made for men. If you prescribe methyl testosterone, routine lab tests will not accurately measure serum testosterone levels—unless you order the very expensive test that is specific for methyl testosterone.
  • 2% vaginal cream, applied topically to increase clitoral and genital sensitivity. It may increase blood levels moderately through absorption
  • Androgel, a topical testosterone approved for men. As in Anne’s case, start with 0.35 mg/d or one-seventh of the 2.5 mg packet (ask the pharmacist to place this amount in a syringe). Instruct the patient to apply the gel to hairless skin, such as inside the forearm. Effects last about 24 hours, and you can measure serum levels accurately after 14 days. Vaginal throbbing—a normal response—may occur within 30 minutes of testosterone application.
 

 

The FDA is considering other testosterone preparations—including a testosterone patch for women and a gel in female-sized doses.

Using the Sexual Energy Scale. To monitor for a therapeutic response, ask the patient to use the Sexual Energy Scale (Figure 1).29,30 Instruct her to define her “10” as the time in life when she had the most fulfilling sexual life, was the most easily aroused, had the most sexual pleasure, and the best orgasms. Her “1” would be when she felt the worst sexually and had the least desire.

Giving supplemental estrogen. If you prescribe estrogen plus testosterone (Estratest), start with Estratest HS, which contains 0.625 mg esterified estrogens and 1.25 mg of methyl testosterone. Add a progestin if the patient is postmenopausal and has not had a hysterectomy, to protect the uterus from endometrial hyperplasia.

Women with vaginal dryness also need supplemental estrogen, which can be applied vaginally (such as Premarin cream or Estrace cream). A vaginal lubricant is not sufficient to avoid age-related vaginal atrophy, which may make intercourse difficult or impossible.

Figure 1 How to use the Sexual Energy Scale to monitor response to therapy


Libido improves modestly

Ann returns in 4 weeks with gradually improving sex drive (Sexual Energy Score is now 5). She had sexual intercourse twice in the past month and didn’t “dread” it, but also did not enjoy it or reach orgasm. You have told her that venlafaxine may slow or prevent orgasm, but she wants to keep taking it. She reports that her marital relationship is improving.

You order repeat testosterone and SHBG blood levels and find her free androgen index has improved to 1.10, which is still low. You increase the Androgel dosage to 1/5th of a 2.5 mg packet (0.5 mg/day) and continue to monitor Anne’s Sexual Energy Scale ratings at monthly follow-up visits. She has set a Sexual Energy Scale rating of 7 to 8 as her target. Anne says she appreciates your help with—as she puts it—“this embarrassing problem.”

PHYSIOLOGY 101 How endocrine changes affect mood and libido during menopause

Louann Brizendine, MD

Medicine’s understanding of menopause’s physiologic and psychological consequences is changing, just as the “baby-boom” generation is navigating this passage called the change of life. Many midlife women are unaware that the menopause transition does not begin around age 50 but spans 30 years—from ages 35 to 65. Natural menopause begins 15 years before and ends 15 years after menstruation ceases—as the brain and tissues adjust to first fluctuating then decreased estrogen levels. It occurs in three phases—early menopause, perimenopause, and late menopause—that reflect a progression of hormone changes.

EARLY MENOPAUSE: OVULATION ACCELERATES

At approximately age 35, the ovaries start producing lower levels of inhibin—a glycoprotein that inhibits pituitary production of follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH) (Figure 2). Less inhibin means less negative feedback to the pituitary and an increase in pituitary FSH production. More FSH means more activin—an ovarian glycoprotein that stimulates ripening of eggs—and so ovulation begins to accelerate at approximately age 36. Activin stimulates more and more eggs in the ovary to develop faster and faster.

By age 37, the ovarian egg reserve starts to decline, and—because FSH has increased—the follicle is driven to produce greater amounts of estrogen. Estrogen serum levels in fertile women average 100 pg/mL. During perimenopause, estrogen levels sometimes soar to 300, 400, or even 500 pg/mL, then may crash down to 50 to 80 pg/mL. These wild fluctuations are thought to trigger headaches, sleep disturbance, mood swings, and sexual complaints in some women.

Hysterectomy and mood symptoms. Women in their early 40s are exposed to high levels of estrogen in some menstrual cycles and low levels in others. Excess estrogen thickens the endometrium—causing heavier bleeding—and stimulates fibroid growth, which is the leading reason for hysterectomies.

One in four American women undergoes surgical menopause. The average age of the 700,000 U.S. women who undergo hysterectomy each year is 40 to 44. Women who have had a hysterectomy and have mood symptoms and sexual adjustment problems are likely to see psychiatrists earlier than women who undergo a more gradual natural menopause.

PERIMENOPAUSE: HOT FLASHES, DRY VAGINA

At ages 45 to 55, most women (90%) who have not had a hysterectomy start to cycle irregularly, tending at first toward shorter cycles and then skipping periods. Some periods are heavier and some lighter than usual. The remaining 10% of women continue to cycle regularly until their menstrual periods stop abruptly.

Many women notice temperature dysregulation during perimenopause. When they exercise, their cool-down times may double. Menopausal symptoms such as hot flashes occur when estrogen levels drop below the point that some researchers call a woman’s “estrogen set point.”

 

 

Screening for estrogen decline. When you see a patient in your office, you can often determine whether her affective symptoms—irritability, mood swings, depressed mood, and forgetfulness—might be related to estrogen decline by asking two screening questions:

  • Are you having any warm flushes or hot flashes?
  • Do you have vaginal dryness?

Figure 2 Normal female reproductive cycle: The rhythm of the hypothalamic-pituitary-ovarian axis


LATE MENOPAUSE: ESTROGEN LOW, MOOD UP

During late menopause, approximately age 55 and older, women commonly complain of vaginal dryness, hot flashes, night sweats, sleep problems, and fatigue. Sexual interest may decrease, and a decline in sexual activity can become a problem for some couples. Asking “How is your sex life?” often will open a discussion of the couple’s sexual and emotional relationship.

Other physiologic changes caused by estrogen and androgen deficiency include thinning body hair—including pubic, auxiliary, and leg hair—decreased body odor, thinning skin, wrinkling skin, and decreasing bone density.

Table 4

Three phases of menopause: A 30-year process

Early Ages 35 to 45Middle (perimenopause) Ages 46 to 55Late Ages 56 to 65+
Physiologic changes
Ovary starts producing less inhibin 15 years before menses stopIrregular menstrual cycles, with shorter cycles, skipping periods for 90% of womenDepletion of eggs and follicle
Decreased inhibin increases FSH and stimulates follicle to produce more estrogenSome periods heavier, some lighter than usual 
Increased estrogen thickens endometrium and leads to heavier menstrual bleeding and increased risk of fibroids  
Increased FSH produces more activin, which makes eggs develop faster and accelerates egg depletion  
Lab values
Menses: NormalCycle shorter (24-26 days)None for >12 months
FSH day 3: 10-25 mIU/mL20-30 mIU/mL50-90 mIU/mL
Estradiol day 3: 40-200 pg/mL40-200 pg/mL10-20 pg/mL
Inhibin B day 3: Varies<45 pg/mL0
Symptoms
Headaches, sleep disturbances, mood swings, urinary problems, sexual complaintsWarm flushes, hot flashes, night sweats in 82% of women (moderate to severe in 40%)Vaginal dryness, hot flashes, night sweats, sleep problems, fatigue, sexual interest changes, thinning body hair (pubic, legs, axillary), decreased body odor, thinning skin, wrinkling skin, decreasing bone density, BUT mood starts to stabilize
FSH: follicle-stimulating hormone

Urinary symptoms. Bladder problems and urinary symptoms are persistent symptoms of menopause for 75% of women. Although we psychiatrists don’t review the urinary system, it is important to remember that embarrassment because of urinary incontinence during sex may have a lot to do with a woman’s “loss of interest” in sexual intercourse.

Despite sometimes-difficult physiologic changes, the good news for many women is that mood symptoms start to stabilize after perimenopause (Table 4). Women whose moods are very responsive to hormonal fluctuations—such as those with severe premenstrual syndrome or premenstrual dysphoric disorder—sometimes get much better after menopause.

Related resources

Drug brand names

  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Gabapentin • Neurontin
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Sildenafil • Viagra
  • Venlafaxine • Effexor

Disclosure

Dr. Brizendine reports no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

Psychiatrists are suddenly viewed as experts in treating menopause-related mood problems because of our expertise with using psychotropics. Practically overnight, the Women’s Health Initiative studies1,2 have made women and their doctors think twice about using estrogen. Instead, many are turning to psychiatric medications that have been shown to improve both mood and hot flashes—without estrogen’s potential risks.

Chances are good that after an Ob/Gyn has tried one or two psychotropics without success or with too many side effects, he or she will ask a psychiatrist to consult for certain patients. How well-prepared are you to assume this role?

If your recall of female reproductive physiology from medical school is incomplete, read on about one approach to a perimenopausal patient with depressed mood. This review can help you:

  • discuss menopause knowledgeably when other physicians refer their patients to you
  • provide effective, up-to-date treatments for menopause-related mood and sexual problems, using psychotropics or hormones, alone or in combination.

Irritable, with no interest in sex

Anne, age 51, has been referred to you for complaints of depressed mood and low libido. She says she has become irritable and snaps easily at her two children and her husband. She has no interest in sex, no urge to masturbate, and has had no sexual intercourse for 6 months.

Table 1

Why mood problems may occur during menopause

HypothesisExplanation
PsychodynamicOnset of menopause is a critical life event and a readjustment of self-concept
SociologicMood changes are caused by changing life circumstances at menopause (‘empty nest,’ aging parents, health changes)
DominoDepressed mood is caused by hot flashes due to declining estrogen levels, which cause chronic sleep deprivation with subsequent irritability and memory and mood changes
BiochemicalDecreasing estrogen leads to neurochemical changes in the brain (serotonin, dopamine, cholinergic, GABA, norepinephrine)

Anne also complains of fatigue, dry hair and skin, warm flushes, and painful joints. She has no personal or family history of depression. She is not suicidal but states that she really doesn’t want to live anymore if “this is it.”

HOT FLASHES: A SPARK FOR DEPRESSION

Women who experience their first depression after age 50 do not fit the usual DSM-IV diagnostic criteria for depression. The Massachusetts Women’s Health Study3 found that 52% of women who experience depressed mood in the perimenopause have never had a depression before. This study also found a correlation between a longer perimenopause (>27 months) and increased risk of depressed mood. At the same time, women who have had a prior depression are 4 to 9 times more likely to experience depressive symptoms during perimenopause than those who have never had a depression before.4

The increased mood symptoms may be related to psychodynamic, sociologic, or biochemical factors, or they may result from a domino effect triggered by declining estrogen levels (Table 1). Women who experience vasomotor symptoms such as hot flashes are at 4.6 times greater risk for depression than those who are hot flash-free.5

Hot flashes begin on average at age 51, which is also the average age when natural menopause begins. During menopause, most women (82%) experience hot flashes (suddenly feeling hot and sweating during the day), warm flushes (a sensation of warmth or heat spreading over the skin), and night sweats (Table 2). All women who undergo surgical menopause experience hot flashes.

Hot flashes are moderate to severe for 40% of women who experience them and persist for 5 to 15 years. By definition, moderate to severe hot flashes occur 6 to 10 or more times daily, last 6 to 10 minutes each, and are often preceded by anxiety, palpitations, irritability, nervousness, or panic.

A marriage under stress

Anne says that her husband is angry about the lack of sexual intercourse, and she feels the stress in their marriage. She also is worrying about her children leaving for college and about her mother’s ill health.

She scores 20 on the Beck Depression Inventory, which indicates that she has mild to moderate depression. Her menstrual periods remain regular, but her cycle has shortened from 29 to 24 days. She reports experiencing some hot flashes that wake her at night and says she hasn’t had a good night’s sleep in months.

Laboratory tests show FSH of 25 mIU/mL and inhibin B <45 pg/mL. Her estradiol is 80 pg/mL, which is not yet in the menopausal range of 10 to 20 pg/mL. Her thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH) is normal. Her endocrinologic and reproductive diagnosis is perimenopause.

Table 2

Symptoms of menopause related to decreased estrogen

BrainIrritability, mood swings, depressed mood, forgetfulness, low sex interest, sleep problems, decreased well-being
BodyHot flashes, vaginal dryness, painful intercourse, fatigue, joint pain, pain with orgasm, bladder dysfunction
 

 

TREATING HOT FLASHES IMPROVES MOOD

Until July 2002, estrogen was standard treatment for controlling hot flashes in patients such as Anne. Then the Women’s Health Initiative trial reported that estrogen’s health risks—heart attack, stroke, breast cancer, and blood clots—exceeded potential benefits during 5 years of therapy. As a result, fewer women want to take estrogen,6 and many Ob/Gyns are advising patients to get through menopause without hormones if they can.

For mild hot flashes—one to three per day—patients may only need vitamin E, 800 mg/d, and deep relaxation breathing to “rev down” the sympathetic nervous system when a hot flash occurs.

For moderate to severe hot flashes—four to 10 or more per day—estrogen replacement is the most effective therapy. Estradiol, 1 mg/d, reduces hot flashes by approximately 80 to 90%.7 Many small studies have shown that patients’ mood often improves as estrogen reduces their hot flashes.8 The recent Women’s Health Initiative Quality-of-Life study, however, reported that estrogen plus progestin did not improve mood in women ages 50 to 54 with moderate-to-severe vasomotor symptoms, even though hot flashes were reduced and sleep may have improved.9

New drugs of choice. Because of estrogen’s effectiveness in controlling hot flashes, some women and their doctors may choose to use it briefly (18 to 24 months). For others, psychotropics are becoming the drugs of choice for mood disorders with moderate to severe hot flashes.

The serotonin and norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor (SNRI) venlafaxine, 75 or 150 mg/d, has been shown to reduce hot flashes by 60 to 70%.10 A new trial is investigating whether duloxetine—an SNRI awaiting FDA approval—also reduces hot flashes. Other useful agents that have been shown to reduce hot flashes by 50% or more include:

  • selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) paroxetine CR, 12.5 mg/d to 25 mg/d,11 citalopram, 20 to 60 mg/d,12 and fluoxetine, 20 mg/d13
  • gabapentin, 900 mg/d.14

For hot flashes and moderate to major depression, try an SNRI or SSRI first (see Algorithm), but consider the possible effects on sexual function. All SNRIs and SSRIs have sexual side effects, including anorgasmia and loss of libido in women and men. Among the psychotropics that improve hot flashes and mood, gabapentin is the only one that does not interfere with sexual function.

Mood improves, but still no libido

You and Ann decide on a trial of the SNRI venlafaxine, 75 mg/d, to treat her hot flashes and depressed mood. Four weeks later, her hot flashes are reduced by 50% in frequency and her mood has improved (Beck Depression Inventory score is now 10). She is feeling much better and wishes to continue taking the antidepressant.

She and her husband attempted intercourse once during the past month, although she wasn’t very interested. She did not achieve orgasm, despite adequate vaginal lubrication, and she did not enjoy the experience. “I still have no libido—zero, or even less,” she says.

TREATING LOW INTEREST IN SEX

Being angry with one’s partner is the number-one reason for decreased sexual desire in all studies. Therefore, consider couples therapy for any woman complaining of loss of interest in sex. In addition, eliminate—if possible—any medications she may be taking that have known sexual side effects, such as SSRIs or beta blockers.

If the patient complains of slow or no arousal, vaginal estrogen and/or sildenafil, 25 to 50 mg 1 hour before intercourse, may be beneficial.15 Other agents the FDA is reviewing for erectile dysfunction—such as tadalafil and vardenafil—may also help arousal problems in women.

Understanding how hormones affect female sexual desire also may help you decide what advice to give Anne and how you and her Ob/Gyn coordinate her care. For example, you might treat her sexual complaints and relationship problems while the Ob/Gyn manages symptoms of the vagina, uterus, and breast.

HOW TESTOSTERONE AFFECTS SEXUAL DESIRE

Testosterone is the hormone of sexual desire in men and women. Other female androgens include androstenedione, androstenediol, 5 α-dihydrotestosterone (DHT), dihydroepiandrosterone (DHEA), and its sulfate (DHEA-S). Premenopausal women produce these androgens in the ovaries (25%), adrenal glands (25%), and peripheral tissues (50%).

Average daily serum testosterone concentrations decline in women between ages 20 and 50. Lower levels are also seen with estrogen replacement therapy or oral contraceptives, lactation, anorexia nervosa, and conditions that reduce ovarian function. Women who undergo total hysterectomy with bilateral oophorectomy experience a sudden 50% loss of testosterone and an 80% decline in estradiol.16

Regularly menstruating women in their 40s and early 50s can have very low testosterone levels—at least 50% lower in the first 5 to 7 days of their cycles—than they had when they were in their 30s.17 The percentage of women reporting low libido increases with age until menopause, from 30% at age 30 to about 50% at age 50. Then the rate declines to 27% in women age 50 to 59.18 After natural menopause, luteinizing hormone (LH) continues to stimulate the ovarian hilar cells and interstitial cells to produce androgens, which is why many women at age 50 have adequate testosterone levels to sustain sexual desire.

 

 

Oral estrogen replacement therapy reduces bioavailable testosterone by 42% on average, which can induce androgen deficiency in a menopausal woman.19 The increased estrogen inhibits pituitary LH and decreases stimulation of the androgen-producing cells in the ovary.20

Female androgen deficiency. A number of papers have been published on female androgen deficiency syndrome (FADS).21 Its diagnosis requires symptoms of thinning pubic and axillary hair, decreased body odor, lethargy, low mood, diminished well-being, and declining libido and orgasm, despite adequate estrogen but low levels of testosterone and DHEA.

TREATING TESTOSTERONE DEFICIENCY

Benefits of replacement therapy. Replacing testosterone in women with FADS can improve mood, well-being, motivation, cognition, sexual function related to libido, orgasm, sexual fantasies, desire to masturbate, and nipple and clitoral sensitivity.22 Muscle and bone stimulation and decreased hot flashes are also reported.23 Women with androgen deficiency symptoms and low testosterone at menopause should at least be considered for physiologic testosterone replacement.

Risks of replacement therapy. Androgen replacement therapy does carry some risks, which need to be discussed with the patient. Testosterone may lower levels of beneficial HDL cholesterol, so get the cardiologist’s clearance before you give testosterone to a woman with heart disease or an HDL cholesterol level <45 mg/dL.

Algorithm Managing mood and libido problems during perimenopause



A meta-analysis of eight clinical trials found no changes in liver function in menopausal women taking 1.25 to 2.5 mg/d of methyl testosterone. Liver toxicity has been reported in men using 10-fold higher testosterone dosages.24

At the normal level of testosterone, darkening and thickening of facial hair are rare in light-skinned, light-haired women but can occur in dark-skinned, dark-haired women. Increased irritability, excess energy, argumentativeness, and aggressive behavior have been noted if testosterone levels exceed the physiologic range.

Controlled, randomized studies are needed to assess the effects of long-term use (more than 24 months) of testosterone replacement in women.

Challenges in measuring testosterone levels. Serum free testosterone is the most reliable indicator of a woman’s androgen status, but accurately measuring testosterone levels is tricky:

  • Only 2% of circulating testosterone is unbound and biologically active; the rest is bound to sex hormone-binding globulin (SHBG) or albumin.
  • In ovulating women, serum testosterone levels are higher in the morning than later in the day and vary greatly within the menstrual cycle.
  • Levels of androgens and estrogen are highest during the middle one-third of the cycle—on days 10 to 16, counting the first day of menstrual bleeding as day 1.25
  • Oral contraceptives also decrease androgen production by the ovary and can result in low libido in some women.26

Tests developed to measure testosterone levels in men are not sensitive enough to accurately measure women’s naturally lower serum concentrations, let alone the even lower levels characteristic of female androgen or testosterone deficiency. New measurements and standardization of normal reference ranges have been developed for women complaining of low libido.27

Tests for androgen deficiency include total testosterone, free testosterone, DHEA, and DHEAS. Measuring SHBG will help you determine the free, biologically active testosterone level and calculate the Free Androgen Index (FAI) for women (Table 3).28

Table 3

Free androgen index (FAI) values in women, by age

Replacing a woman’s bioactive testosterone to the normal free androgen index range for her age may improve low libido.
How to calculate FAI
Total testosterone in nmol/L (total testosterone in ng/ml X 0.0347 X 100), divided by sex hormone-binding globulin (SHBG) in nmol/L.
AgeNormal range
20 to 293.72 to 4.96
30 to 392.04 to 2.96
40 to 491.98 to 2.94
50 to 59+1.78 to 2.86
Source: Guay et al, reference 28.

A candidate for testosterone therapy?

Now that Anne’s mood, sleep, and hot flashes have improved with venlafaxine, she wants help with her lack of sexual interest. You measure her testosterone and SHBG levels and find that her free androgen index is very low at 0.51 (normal range, 1.78 to 2.86).

In collaboration with her Ob/Gyn, you and Anne decide to start her on testosterone replacement therapy. You prescribe Androgel, starting at 1/7th of a 2.5-mg foil packet (0.35 mg/d of testosterone), and instruct her to rate her sexual energy daily, using a Sexual Energy Scale.

TESTOSTERONE CHOICES FOR WOMEN

Replacing a woman’s bioactive testosterone level to the normal free androgen index range for her age group may improve low libido. Some low-dose testosterone replacement options include:

  • methyl testosterone sublingual pills, 0.5 mg/d, made by a compounding pharmacy or reduced dosages of oral pills made for men. If you prescribe methyl testosterone, routine lab tests will not accurately measure serum testosterone levels—unless you order the very expensive test that is specific for methyl testosterone.
  • 2% vaginal cream, applied topically to increase clitoral and genital sensitivity. It may increase blood levels moderately through absorption
  • Androgel, a topical testosterone approved for men. As in Anne’s case, start with 0.35 mg/d or one-seventh of the 2.5 mg packet (ask the pharmacist to place this amount in a syringe). Instruct the patient to apply the gel to hairless skin, such as inside the forearm. Effects last about 24 hours, and you can measure serum levels accurately after 14 days. Vaginal throbbing—a normal response—may occur within 30 minutes of testosterone application.
 

 

The FDA is considering other testosterone preparations—including a testosterone patch for women and a gel in female-sized doses.

Using the Sexual Energy Scale. To monitor for a therapeutic response, ask the patient to use the Sexual Energy Scale (Figure 1).29,30 Instruct her to define her “10” as the time in life when she had the most fulfilling sexual life, was the most easily aroused, had the most sexual pleasure, and the best orgasms. Her “1” would be when she felt the worst sexually and had the least desire.

Giving supplemental estrogen. If you prescribe estrogen plus testosterone (Estratest), start with Estratest HS, which contains 0.625 mg esterified estrogens and 1.25 mg of methyl testosterone. Add a progestin if the patient is postmenopausal and has not had a hysterectomy, to protect the uterus from endometrial hyperplasia.

Women with vaginal dryness also need supplemental estrogen, which can be applied vaginally (such as Premarin cream or Estrace cream). A vaginal lubricant is not sufficient to avoid age-related vaginal atrophy, which may make intercourse difficult or impossible.

Figure 1 How to use the Sexual Energy Scale to monitor response to therapy


Libido improves modestly

Ann returns in 4 weeks with gradually improving sex drive (Sexual Energy Score is now 5). She had sexual intercourse twice in the past month and didn’t “dread” it, but also did not enjoy it or reach orgasm. You have told her that venlafaxine may slow or prevent orgasm, but she wants to keep taking it. She reports that her marital relationship is improving.

You order repeat testosterone and SHBG blood levels and find her free androgen index has improved to 1.10, which is still low. You increase the Androgel dosage to 1/5th of a 2.5 mg packet (0.5 mg/day) and continue to monitor Anne’s Sexual Energy Scale ratings at monthly follow-up visits. She has set a Sexual Energy Scale rating of 7 to 8 as her target. Anne says she appreciates your help with—as she puts it—“this embarrassing problem.”

PHYSIOLOGY 101 How endocrine changes affect mood and libido during menopause

Louann Brizendine, MD

Medicine’s understanding of menopause’s physiologic and psychological consequences is changing, just as the “baby-boom” generation is navigating this passage called the change of life. Many midlife women are unaware that the menopause transition does not begin around age 50 but spans 30 years—from ages 35 to 65. Natural menopause begins 15 years before and ends 15 years after menstruation ceases—as the brain and tissues adjust to first fluctuating then decreased estrogen levels. It occurs in three phases—early menopause, perimenopause, and late menopause—that reflect a progression of hormone changes.

EARLY MENOPAUSE: OVULATION ACCELERATES

At approximately age 35, the ovaries start producing lower levels of inhibin—a glycoprotein that inhibits pituitary production of follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH) (Figure 2). Less inhibin means less negative feedback to the pituitary and an increase in pituitary FSH production. More FSH means more activin—an ovarian glycoprotein that stimulates ripening of eggs—and so ovulation begins to accelerate at approximately age 36. Activin stimulates more and more eggs in the ovary to develop faster and faster.

By age 37, the ovarian egg reserve starts to decline, and—because FSH has increased—the follicle is driven to produce greater amounts of estrogen. Estrogen serum levels in fertile women average 100 pg/mL. During perimenopause, estrogen levels sometimes soar to 300, 400, or even 500 pg/mL, then may crash down to 50 to 80 pg/mL. These wild fluctuations are thought to trigger headaches, sleep disturbance, mood swings, and sexual complaints in some women.

Hysterectomy and mood symptoms. Women in their early 40s are exposed to high levels of estrogen in some menstrual cycles and low levels in others. Excess estrogen thickens the endometrium—causing heavier bleeding—and stimulates fibroid growth, which is the leading reason for hysterectomies.

One in four American women undergoes surgical menopause. The average age of the 700,000 U.S. women who undergo hysterectomy each year is 40 to 44. Women who have had a hysterectomy and have mood symptoms and sexual adjustment problems are likely to see psychiatrists earlier than women who undergo a more gradual natural menopause.

PERIMENOPAUSE: HOT FLASHES, DRY VAGINA

At ages 45 to 55, most women (90%) who have not had a hysterectomy start to cycle irregularly, tending at first toward shorter cycles and then skipping periods. Some periods are heavier and some lighter than usual. The remaining 10% of women continue to cycle regularly until their menstrual periods stop abruptly.

Many women notice temperature dysregulation during perimenopause. When they exercise, their cool-down times may double. Menopausal symptoms such as hot flashes occur when estrogen levels drop below the point that some researchers call a woman’s “estrogen set point.”

 

 

Screening for estrogen decline. When you see a patient in your office, you can often determine whether her affective symptoms—irritability, mood swings, depressed mood, and forgetfulness—might be related to estrogen decline by asking two screening questions:

  • Are you having any warm flushes or hot flashes?
  • Do you have vaginal dryness?

Figure 2 Normal female reproductive cycle: The rhythm of the hypothalamic-pituitary-ovarian axis


LATE MENOPAUSE: ESTROGEN LOW, MOOD UP

During late menopause, approximately age 55 and older, women commonly complain of vaginal dryness, hot flashes, night sweats, sleep problems, and fatigue. Sexual interest may decrease, and a decline in sexual activity can become a problem for some couples. Asking “How is your sex life?” often will open a discussion of the couple’s sexual and emotional relationship.

Other physiologic changes caused by estrogen and androgen deficiency include thinning body hair—including pubic, auxiliary, and leg hair—decreased body odor, thinning skin, wrinkling skin, and decreasing bone density.

Table 4

Three phases of menopause: A 30-year process

Early Ages 35 to 45Middle (perimenopause) Ages 46 to 55Late Ages 56 to 65+
Physiologic changes
Ovary starts producing less inhibin 15 years before menses stopIrregular menstrual cycles, with shorter cycles, skipping periods for 90% of womenDepletion of eggs and follicle
Decreased inhibin increases FSH and stimulates follicle to produce more estrogenSome periods heavier, some lighter than usual 
Increased estrogen thickens endometrium and leads to heavier menstrual bleeding and increased risk of fibroids  
Increased FSH produces more activin, which makes eggs develop faster and accelerates egg depletion  
Lab values
Menses: NormalCycle shorter (24-26 days)None for >12 months
FSH day 3: 10-25 mIU/mL20-30 mIU/mL50-90 mIU/mL
Estradiol day 3: 40-200 pg/mL40-200 pg/mL10-20 pg/mL
Inhibin B day 3: Varies<45 pg/mL0
Symptoms
Headaches, sleep disturbances, mood swings, urinary problems, sexual complaintsWarm flushes, hot flashes, night sweats in 82% of women (moderate to severe in 40%)Vaginal dryness, hot flashes, night sweats, sleep problems, fatigue, sexual interest changes, thinning body hair (pubic, legs, axillary), decreased body odor, thinning skin, wrinkling skin, decreasing bone density, BUT mood starts to stabilize
FSH: follicle-stimulating hormone

Urinary symptoms. Bladder problems and urinary symptoms are persistent symptoms of menopause for 75% of women. Although we psychiatrists don’t review the urinary system, it is important to remember that embarrassment because of urinary incontinence during sex may have a lot to do with a woman’s “loss of interest” in sexual intercourse.

Despite sometimes-difficult physiologic changes, the good news for many women is that mood symptoms start to stabilize after perimenopause (Table 4). Women whose moods are very responsive to hormonal fluctuations—such as those with severe premenstrual syndrome or premenstrual dysphoric disorder—sometimes get much better after menopause.

Related resources

Drug brand names

  • Citalopram • Celexa
  • Fluoxetine • Prozac
  • Gabapentin • Neurontin
  • Paroxetine • Paxil
  • Sildenafil • Viagra
  • Venlafaxine • Effexor

Disclosure

Dr. Brizendine reports no financial relationship with any company whose products are mentioned in this article or with manufacturers of competing products.

References

1. Burger H. Hormone replacement therapy in the post-Women’s Health Initiative era. Climacteric 2003;6(suppl 1):11-36.

2. Grodstein F, Clarkson TB, Manson JE. Understanding the divergent data on postmenopausal hormone replacement therapy. N Engl J Med 2003;348:645-50.

3. Joffe H, Hall JE, Soares CN, et al. Vasomotor symptoms are associated with depression in perimenopausal women seeking primary care. Menopause 2002;9(6):392-8.

4. Soares CN, Almeida OP, Joffe H, Cohen LS. Efficacy of estradiol for the treatment of depressive disorders in perimenopausal women: a double-blind, randomized, placebo-controlled trial. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2001;58(6):529-34.

5. Pearlstein T, Rosen K, Stone AB. Mood disorders and menopause. Endocrinol Metab Clin North Am 1997;26(2):279-94.

6. Seppa N. Hormone therapy falls out of favor. Science News 2002;162:61.-

7. Nieman LK. Management of surgically hypogonadal patients unable to take sex hormone replacement therapy. Endocrinol Metab Clin North Am 2003;32(2):325-36.

8. Joffe H, Cohen LS. Estrogen, serotonin, and mood disturbance: where is the therapeutic bridge? Biol Psychiatry 1998;44(9):798-811.

9. Hays J, Ockene JK, Brunner RL, et al. Women’s Health Initiative Investigators. Effects of estrogen plus progestin on health-related quality of life. N Engl J Med 2003;348(19):1839-54.

10. Barton D, La VB, Loprinzi C, et al. Venlafaxine for the control of hot flashes: results of a longitudinal continuation study. Oncol Nurs Forum 2002;29(1):33-40.

11. Stearns V, Beebe KL, Iyengar M, Dube E. Paroxetine controlled release in the treatment of menopausal hot flashes: a randomized controlled trial. JAMA 2003;289(21):2827-34.

12. Soares CN, Poitras JR, Prouty J, et al. Efficacy of citalopram as a monotherapy or as an adjunctive treatment to estrogen therapy for perimenopausal and postmenopausal women with depression and vasomotor symptoms. J Clin Psychiatry 2003;64(4):473-9.

13. Loprinzi CL, Sloan JA, Perez EA, et al. Phase III evaluation of fluoxetine for treatment of hot flashes. J Clin Oncol 2002;20(6):1578-83.

14. Guttuso T, Jr, Kurlan R, McDermott MP, Kieburtz K. Gabapentin’s effects on hot flashes in postmenopausal women: a randomized controlled trial. Obstet Gynecol 2003;101(2):337-45.

15. Caruso S, Intelisano G, Lupo L, Agnello C. Premenopausal women affected by sexual arousal disorder treated with sildenafil: a double-blind, cross-over, placebo-controlled study. BJOG 2001;108(6):623-8.

16. Floter A, Nathorst-Boos J, Carlstrom K, et al. Addition of testosterone to estrogen replacement therapy in oophorectomized women: effects on sexuality and well-being. Climacteric 2002;5(4):357-65.

17. Davison SL, Davis SR. Androgens in women. J Steroid Biochem Mol Biol 2003;85(2-5):363-6.

18. Laumann EO, Paik A, Rosen RC. Sexual dysfunction in the United States: prevalence and predictors. JAMA 1999;281:537-44.

19. Lobo RA, Rosen RC, Yang HM, et al. Comparative effects of oral esterified estrogens with and without methyltestosterone on endocrine profiles and dimensions of sexual function in postmenopausal women with hypoactive sexual desire. Fertil Steril 2003;79(6):1341-52.

20. Casson PR, Elkind-Hirsch KE, Buster JE, et al. Effect of postmenopausal estrogen replacement on circulating androgens. Obstet Gynecol 1997;90(6):995-8.

21. Bachmann G, Bancroft J, Braunstein G, et al. Female androgen insufficiency: the Princeton consensus statement on definition, classification, and assessment. Fertil Steril 2002;77(4):660-5.

22. Davis SR, Burger HG. The role of androgen therapy. Best Pract Res Clin Endocrinol Metab 2003;17(1):165-75.

23. Guay A, Davis SR. Testosterone insufficiency in women: fact or fiction? World J Urol 2002;20(2):106-10.

24. Gitlin N, Korner P, Yang HM. Liver function in postmenopausal women on estrogen-androgen hormone replacement therapy: a meta-analysis of eight clinical trials. Menopause 1999;6(3):216-24.

25. Warnock JK, Biggs CF. Reproductive life events and sexual functioning in women: case reports. CNS Spectrums 2003;8(March):3.-

26. Graham CA, Ramos R, Bancroft J, et al. The effects of steroidal contraceptives on the well-being and sexuality of women: a double-blind, placebo-controlled, two-centre study of combined and progestogen-only methods. Contraception 1995;52(6):363-9.

27. Guay AT. Screening for androgen deficiency in women: methodological and interpretive issues. Fertil Steril 2002;77(suppl 4):S83-8.

28. Guay AT, Jacobson J. Decreased free testosterone and dehydroepiandrosterone-sulfate (DHEA-S) levels in women with decreased libido. J Sex Marital Ther 2002;28(suppl 1):129-42.

29. Warnock JK, Bundren JC, Morris DW. Female hypoactive sexual desire disorder due to androgen deficiency: clinical and psychometric issues. Psychopharmacol Bull 1997;33(4):761-5.

30. Warnock JK, Clayton AH, Yates WR, Bundren JC. Sexual Energy Scale (SES): a simple valid screening tool for measuring of sexual dysfunction (poster presentation). Waikoloa, HI: North American Society for Psychosocial Obstetrics and Gynecology, 2001.

References

1. Burger H. Hormone replacement therapy in the post-Women’s Health Initiative era. Climacteric 2003;6(suppl 1):11-36.

2. Grodstein F, Clarkson TB, Manson JE. Understanding the divergent data on postmenopausal hormone replacement therapy. N Engl J Med 2003;348:645-50.

3. Joffe H, Hall JE, Soares CN, et al. Vasomotor symptoms are associated with depression in perimenopausal women seeking primary care. Menopause 2002;9(6):392-8.

4. Soares CN, Almeida OP, Joffe H, Cohen LS. Efficacy of estradiol for the treatment of depressive disorders in perimenopausal women: a double-blind, randomized, placebo-controlled trial. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2001;58(6):529-34.

5. Pearlstein T, Rosen K, Stone AB. Mood disorders and menopause. Endocrinol Metab Clin North Am 1997;26(2):279-94.

6. Seppa N. Hormone therapy falls out of favor. Science News 2002;162:61.-

7. Nieman LK. Management of surgically hypogonadal patients unable to take sex hormone replacement therapy. Endocrinol Metab Clin North Am 2003;32(2):325-36.

8. Joffe H, Cohen LS. Estrogen, serotonin, and mood disturbance: where is the therapeutic bridge? Biol Psychiatry 1998;44(9):798-811.

9. Hays J, Ockene JK, Brunner RL, et al. Women’s Health Initiative Investigators. Effects of estrogen plus progestin on health-related quality of life. N Engl J Med 2003;348(19):1839-54.

10. Barton D, La VB, Loprinzi C, et al. Venlafaxine for the control of hot flashes: results of a longitudinal continuation study. Oncol Nurs Forum 2002;29(1):33-40.

11. Stearns V, Beebe KL, Iyengar M, Dube E. Paroxetine controlled release in the treatment of menopausal hot flashes: a randomized controlled trial. JAMA 2003;289(21):2827-34.

12. Soares CN, Poitras JR, Prouty J, et al. Efficacy of citalopram as a monotherapy or as an adjunctive treatment to estrogen therapy for perimenopausal and postmenopausal women with depression and vasomotor symptoms. J Clin Psychiatry 2003;64(4):473-9.

13. Loprinzi CL, Sloan JA, Perez EA, et al. Phase III evaluation of fluoxetine for treatment of hot flashes. J Clin Oncol 2002;20(6):1578-83.

14. Guttuso T, Jr, Kurlan R, McDermott MP, Kieburtz K. Gabapentin’s effects on hot flashes in postmenopausal women: a randomized controlled trial. Obstet Gynecol 2003;101(2):337-45.

15. Caruso S, Intelisano G, Lupo L, Agnello C. Premenopausal women affected by sexual arousal disorder treated with sildenafil: a double-blind, cross-over, placebo-controlled study. BJOG 2001;108(6):623-8.

16. Floter A, Nathorst-Boos J, Carlstrom K, et al. Addition of testosterone to estrogen replacement therapy in oophorectomized women: effects on sexuality and well-being. Climacteric 2002;5(4):357-65.

17. Davison SL, Davis SR. Androgens in women. J Steroid Biochem Mol Biol 2003;85(2-5):363-6.

18. Laumann EO, Paik A, Rosen RC. Sexual dysfunction in the United States: prevalence and predictors. JAMA 1999;281:537-44.

19. Lobo RA, Rosen RC, Yang HM, et al. Comparative effects of oral esterified estrogens with and without methyltestosterone on endocrine profiles and dimensions of sexual function in postmenopausal women with hypoactive sexual desire. Fertil Steril 2003;79(6):1341-52.

20. Casson PR, Elkind-Hirsch KE, Buster JE, et al. Effect of postmenopausal estrogen replacement on circulating androgens. Obstet Gynecol 1997;90(6):995-8.

21. Bachmann G, Bancroft J, Braunstein G, et al. Female androgen insufficiency: the Princeton consensus statement on definition, classification, and assessment. Fertil Steril 2002;77(4):660-5.

22. Davis SR, Burger HG. The role of androgen therapy. Best Pract Res Clin Endocrinol Metab 2003;17(1):165-75.

23. Guay A, Davis SR. Testosterone insufficiency in women: fact or fiction? World J Urol 2002;20(2):106-10.

24. Gitlin N, Korner P, Yang HM. Liver function in postmenopausal women on estrogen-androgen hormone replacement therapy: a meta-analysis of eight clinical trials. Menopause 1999;6(3):216-24.

25. Warnock JK, Biggs CF. Reproductive life events and sexual functioning in women: case reports. CNS Spectrums 2003;8(March):3.-

26. Graham CA, Ramos R, Bancroft J, et al. The effects of steroidal contraceptives on the well-being and sexuality of women: a double-blind, placebo-controlled, two-centre study of combined and progestogen-only methods. Contraception 1995;52(6):363-9.

27. Guay AT. Screening for androgen deficiency in women: methodological and interpretive issues. Fertil Steril 2002;77(suppl 4):S83-8.

28. Guay AT, Jacobson J. Decreased free testosterone and dehydroepiandrosterone-sulfate (DHEA-S) levels in women with decreased libido. J Sex Marital Ther 2002;28(suppl 1):129-42.

29. Warnock JK, Bundren JC, Morris DW. Female hypoactive sexual desire disorder due to androgen deficiency: clinical and psychometric issues. Psychopharmacol Bull 1997;33(4):761-5.

30. Warnock JK, Clayton AH, Yates WR, Bundren JC. Sexual Energy Scale (SES): a simple valid screening tool for measuring of sexual dysfunction (poster presentation). Waikoloa, HI: North American Society for Psychosocial Obstetrics and Gynecology, 2001.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(10)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 02(10)
Page Number
12-31
Page Number
12-31
Publications
Publications
Topics
Display Headline
Minding menopause: Psychotropics vs. estrogen? What you need to know now
Display Headline
Minding menopause: Psychotropics vs. estrogen? What you need to know now
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media